Mar

Enhancing complex communications skills in foundation doctors through simulation

Authors
Leila Jamal, Yathooshan Ramesh, Adam Monsell & Shivanthi Sathanandan
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2021;14(1):a004
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Background: The benefit of simulation among junior doctors is well established. Simulation programmes focussing on communication skills in medical settings have tended to focus on specific procedural aims (e.g. capacity assessments or breaking bad news). However, simulation opportunities allowing doctors to focus on meeting the needs of mental health patients in a medical setting has not been a focus of research. This is important, as people with mental health diagnoses are likely to be encountered in medical settings and junior doctors have been shown to lack confidence in approaching and managing this patient group.

Method: All foundation year doctors rotating through North and East London over a 12-month period were invited to attend a simulation programme involving six patients with mental health diagnoses presenting to a medical setting. Data regarding their confidence in four domains were collected before and after the simulation, using a 5-point Likert scale. Qualitative data were also obtained and validated.

Results: 121 foundation year doctors took part in the programme between May 2019 and April 2020 (N=121). Results showed a consistent increase in confidence (0.83 to 1.27 points) across all domains measured following participation in the simulation session. Increases were consistent across different sites and at different times during the programme delivery. Qualitative data were supportive of the simulation’s benefit.

Conclusions: Simulation provides a useful mechanism to build junior doctors’ confidence in approaching, assessing and managing patients with mental health diagnoses in medical settings. It could be further integrated into regional teaching programmes in foundation schools.

Abbreviations: 
F1 - Foundation Year 1 doctor; F2 - Foundation Year 2 doctor.
Keywords: 
Psychiatry, Simulated Patient, Communication Skills, Medical Education.

INTRODUCTION

There is considerable evidence for the benefit of simulation among foundation year doctors.1 Simulation training delivered during the 2 years has tended to focus on the management of the acutely unwell patient, procedures and practical aspects of delivering medical care, such as DNAR discussions, breaking bad news and capacity assessments.2-5 However, to date, there has been less focus on the benefits of developing more complex communication skills that may assist foundation year doctors in dealing with patients with mental health diagnoses or needs. These skills may include performing risk assessments, managing the agitated patient and forming initial management plans for patients in medical settings with mental health problems. This is important, as people with mental health needs have a higher burden of physical morbidity and are hence likely to be encountered in acute care settings.6

Since Health Education England’s Broadening the Foundation Programme report in 2014, there has been a surge in the number of foundation trainees working in psychiatry.7 The development of complex communication skills was an expected natural outcome of these rotations.8 However, this has not always happened – foundation trainees on a psychiatry rotation have stated that they are often recognised only for their medical skills, and that assessment and management was predominantly senior-led.9

Taking this into account, we set out to develop a simulation-based complex communication skills programme available for all F1s and F2s based in the North Central and East London Foundation School. Our focus was on the development of the transferable skills in communication and management that would be useful for dealing with patients with mental health diagnoses in a medical setting.

METHOD

Following a pilot study in 2018, funding was secured for 2019 from Health Education England to run half-day simulation sessions to foundation trainees in complex communication skills and the management of common mental health presentations to primary and secondary care settings.

Half-day sessions took place in hospitals in North and East London hospitals. A total of 121 foundation year doctors took part in the sessions; a breakdown of this can be seen in Table 1. All sessions took place between May 2019 and March 2020.

Table 1: Participants by Site and Year

Year Region Site Cohort Number of trainees

2019

North London

Whittington FY1 & FY2 9
Royal Free FY1 & FY2 11
Barnet FY1 & FY2 8

East London

Homerton FY2 16
Homerton FY1 14
Royal London FY1 & FY2 3

2020

North London Whittington FY1 & FY2 19

East London

Homerton FY1 & FY2 33
Whipp’s Cross FY1 & FY2 8

Facilitators

Each simulation group had one facilitator who offered feedback to participants. Facilitators were consultants, higher trainees and core trainees from the North and East London deaneries.

Session organisers

A session organiser was present at every session. They delivered the introductory briefing for participating doctors, provided a briefing for the actors, time-kept and held a feedback session at the end.

Venues

Four half-day sessions were run in North London, and five half-day sessions were run in East London. Three sessions were cancelled due to too few doctors registering to participate, and a further session was cancelled due to COVID-19.

Scenarios

Participants were presented with six scenarios in each session (Box 1), covering presentations in a range of settings: acute general hospitals, accident and emergency, general outpatient clinics and general practice. The sessions required skills in history taking and management when interviewing patients with complex communication needs.

Box 1 Scenarios

1. Attempting to de-escalate an elated patient with manic symptoms and explain the need for a physical medical examination

2. Conducting a risk assessment and liaising with the psychiatric team regarding a patient who has attempted suicide and taken a paracetamol overdose

3. Assessing a patient with drug-seeking behaviour requesting a benzodiazepine prescription

4. Conducting a capacity assessment in a depressed patient who is refusing carers following a recent myocardial infarction

5. Managing an agitated patient with antisocial personality disorder who is experiencing chest pain

6. Assessment of a patient with a likely eating disorder and formulating a preliminary management plan

Timing

Each session lasted 3 hours. Scenarios were 20 minutes each, with 10 minutes for participants to complete the set task, and 10 minutes for feedback from the facilitator, actor, and other participating doctors.

Data collection

Quantitative data

Foundation doctors were asked to complete pre- and post-session anonymous feedback forms, to ascertain their level of confidence in four domains (see Box 2): Participants were asked to rate their confidence level on a Likert scale from 1 (strongly disagree) to 5 (strongly agree) for each of these components.

Box 2 Quantitative data statements

“I feel confident in assessing patients with mental health diagnoses”

“I feel confident in making initial management plans for patients with mental health diagnoses”

“I feel confident in performing initial risk assessments in a medical setting”

“I feel confident in dealing with agitated patients in a medical setting”

Post-session feedback forms also included three questions, asking if anything could have been done differently about the day, if anything was done well, and a white space for any other comments.

Qualitative data

Qualitative data was recorded in the form of the written feedback documented post session and cross-checked by three members of the organising team.

Moderations to 2020 model

Minor changes to the format of the programme were made in August 2019, following presentation of interim findings to Health Education England. These were based on feedback generated from doctors and facilitators and are shown in Table 2. The logistics of the set-up on the day, scenarios, methods of feedback collection and analysis of data remained the same as in 2019.

Table 2: Moderations to 2020 Model

Feedback from 2019 Sessions Updates made to 2020 Sessions
Title for the sessions ‘Psychiatry Communication Skills’ may have discouraged foundation trainees who were not interested in a career in psychiatry Title changed to ‘Complex Communication Skills’
The sign-up process for foundation trainees required simplification Foundation trainees were able to book onto the session via a centralised system, which also enabled their attendance to be tracked
Difficulties with room availability Medical education managers contacted early in the academic year, with centralising to larger, well-equipped sites, improving room availability
Some trainees were less incentivised to attend with sessions held late in the academic year Sessions held earlier in the academic year
Low trainee/facilitator numbers, limiting the ability to run scenarios simultaneously Sessions centralised with the aim to run 2 sessions in North London & 2 sessions in East London
Clarity of brief needed on capacity assessment scenario Slight amendments to scenario made with

input from old age psychiatry consultant,

including more details on occupational

therapy assessment in the doctors’ and

actors’ brief

RESULTS

Quantitative data

Results showed a consistent increase in confidence across all domains following participation in the simulation session. Increases ranged from 0.83 (“I feel confident in performing initial risk assessments in a medical setting”) to 1.27 points (“I feel confident in dealing with agitated patients in a medical setting”).

Figure 1: Trainee confidence pre- and post-session by domain

There were consistent increases in overall confidence ratings at every site, ranging from 1.03 to 1.25. Similar increases in overall confidence were observed in North London (1.04) and East London (1.06).

Figure 2: Trainee confidence pre- and post-session by region

There was a 94% (n=114) completion rate of pre-session feedback forms, and a 91% completion rate (n=110) of post-session feedback forms.

Qualitative data

No changes were made to the themes following cross-checking for validity.

Thematic analysis of the free text in the post-session questionnaires generated the following themes, as below.

Quality of the stations

Trainees consistently reported positive experiences regarding the quality of the scenarios (48), actors (43), feedback (30) and facilitators (20). In particular, there was a good breadth of scenarios, they were realisticand pitched at an appropriate level. Feedback was constructive and individualised.

“enjoyed how challenging and how true to life the scenarios were”

“right level of difficulty. Took me out of my comfort zone!”

“really good to have an agitated patient as it was a very challenging scenario”

“quite clever to have capacity assessment in somebody with capacity because it’s harder in some ways!”

Five trainees would have liked to have had more scenarios, and three suggested that it would have been useful for the facilitator to have demonstrated a ‘model’ example of a scenario at the end of the session.

Environment/logistics of the circuit

General comments included that the circuits were well organised, and that there was a comfortable atmosphere for giving and receiving feedback. Eight trainees commented that the group size was too big (all were attendees at the Homerton session in 2020, which was the largest session run with 33 trainees in attendance).

Preparation of candidates for the circuit

Ten trainees (seven in 2019; three in 2020) said they would have liked clearer briefings or objectives for the scenarios – two trainees specified that this was in relation to the capacity assessment station.

DISCUSSION

Our results suggest that simulation training involving actors with mental health diagnoses can help foundation year doctors build confidence in their approach to such patients in a medical setting.

The greatest increase occurred in participants’ confidence in dealing with an agitated patient. It is likely that participants felt the most anxious about this prior to and during the session. Thus, they were able to gain a more immediate sense of progress in this domain by being able to practice this in a ‘safe space’ and after being able to see a visible de-escalation of the patient during the station. Participants also valued receiving supportive feedback from the actor, facilitator and their peers.

Participants also demonstrated large increases in confidence with respect to formulating initial management plans. This was the domain trainees were second least confident in prior to the session. It is likely that some trainees would be anxious about whether they have enough clinical knowledge when formulating an initial management plan for mental health patients. The chance to practice this in a controlled setting, with pertinent feedback, appears to have bolstered confidence.

Results were consistent between sites, suggesting that the content of the course, the experience of being in the roleplay itself, and the chance to receive feedback from experienced clinicians were of the most importance to participants, and local variations in delivery did not impact on participants’ experience to a great extent. The wide participation among foundation trainees in North and East London (121 trainees across two regions of London, over nine simulation sessions) suggests that there is a demand for such sessions and there might be an unmet need across other deaneries.

Qualitative data analysis showed positive feedback relating to the quality of the actors, the facilitators and the scenarios themselves. This likely contributed to the trainees reporting that the simulation was realistic and pitched at the right level, hence they were able to find benefit from them.

Limitations

There was a large difference in the number of participants enrolled in each session (three in the smallest, 33 in the largest). This will have given rise to a difference in experience between these participants, with the smallest group being able to partake in all six scenarios, and the largest group only being able to partake in one. This may have meant that those undertaking all six scenarios may have been exhausted by their experience, whereas those undertaking one may have felt that they did not get enough opportunity to practise. Confidence scores between these two groups were relatively similar, but it is unclear whether there would have been a difference if they were of similar size.

Linking of pre- and post-session feedback questionnaires to the respective trainees would have also enabled testing for statistical significance. A paired t-test could have been used to assess the increase in confidence observed by our simulation sessions in each domain.

This study tracked changes in confidence among foundation year doctors following a simulation session, but it did not assess the impact on their actual practice. This would be important to ascertain, to see if the session has allowed foundation year doctors to build on their experience of assessing and managing mental health patients in a medical setting. As a result, a cohort of participants has been selected for future contact regarding this to determine the potential impact on their clinical work.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
LEILA JAMAL, MBBS MRCPsych, Camden and Islington NHS Foundation Trust, London, UK. YATHOOSHAN RAMESH, MBBS MRCPsych, Barnet, Enfield & Haringey Mental Health NHS Trust, London, UK. ADAM MONSELL, MBBS MRCPsych, Camden and Islington NHS Foundation Trust, London, UK. SHIVANTHI SATHANANDAN, MBBS MRCPsych, Camden and Islington NHS Foundation Trust, London, UK.
Corresponding Author Details: 
YATHOOSHAN RAMESH, Barnet, Enfield & Haringey Mental Health NHS Trust, Chase Farm Hospital, 127 The Ridgeway, Enfield, EN2 8JL, UK.
Corresponding Author Email: 
y.ramesh@nhs.net
References
References: 
  1. Patel P, Sockalingam I. Acute care simulation training for foundation doctors: the perceived impact on practice in the workplace. Acute Medicine. 2013;12(3):151-158.
  2. Dave S. Simulation in psychiatric teaching. Advances in Psychiatric Treatment. 2012;18(4): 292-298.
  3. Haire E, Woods S, Wiggins N. Improving communication and documentation of end of life conversations, a simulation based project. BMJ Supportive & Palliative Care 2020;10:A17.
  4. Clayton J, Butow P, Waters A, et al. Evaluation of a novel individualised communication-skills training intervention to improve doctors' confidence and skills in end-of-life communication. Palliative Medicine. 2013;27(3):236-243.
  5. Tobler K, Grant E, Marczinski C. Evaluation of the impact of a simulation-enhanced breaking bad news workshop in pediatrics. Simulation in Healthcare. 2014;9(4):213-219.
  6. Firth J, Siddiqi N, Koyanagi A, et al. The Lancet Psychiatry Commission: a blueprint for protecting physical health in people with mental illness. Lancet Psychiatry. 2019;6(8):675-712.
  7. Perry J, Ryland H, Thoms L, Boyle A. Psychiatry in the Foundation Programme: An overview for supervisors. BJPsych Advances. 2017;23(2):123-130.
  8. Boyle A, Perry J. A guide to Psychiatry in the Foundation programme for supervisors. RCPsych. 2015
  9. Beattie S, Crampton PES, Schwarzlose C, et al. Junior doctor psychiatry placements in hospital and community settings: a phenomenological study. BMJ Open. 2017;7e017584

Predictors of in-hospital mortality in Covid-19: a study across two peripheral District General Hospitals in UK

Authors
Nil Kamal Samanta, Samik Kumar Bandyopadhyay, Dodiy Herman, Biman Chakraborty, Adrian Marsh, Subramanian Kumaran, Lauren Burnard, Gunalan Gnanaseelan , Saoirse Gibson, Benita Florence & Saibal Ganguly
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2021;14(1):a003
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Aim - The mortality from Coronavirus Disease 2019 (COVID-19) has remained a significant medical challenge. Internationally, patient demographics and pre-existing co-morbidities are significant determinants of mortality from COVID-19. The mortality-risk in a local population is difficult to determine. The objective of our study is to examine the risk posed by epidemiological and demographic variables, and co-morbidities in our local population.

Method - A retrospective, observational study was conducted on confirmed COVID-19 patients, identified from the local microbiology database. A search of the electronic patient records was performed to collect demographic details and co-morbidities. Chi-square test and logistic regression analysis of the demographic variables and co-morbidities were utilised to calculate the predictive-risk for in-hospital mortality of adult COVID-19 patients.

Results - Final analysis included 263 samples. Univariate logistic regression analysis was performed using age as an independent categorical predictor with two cohorts – those <60 and those ≥60 years old. Age (χ2 =17.12, p<0.001) was found to be an independent predictor of mortality – this was independent of sex (χ2 =1.784, p<0.182).

Charlson Comorbidity Index (CCI) score was found to be a significant predictor of adverse outcome. The odds of death for patients with CCI scores 0-4 was less than half (44.8%) of those with CCI scores ≥5 (p=0.005).  Patients with no pre-existing medical conditions had a lower mortality-risk (OR=0.181, p=0.022) than those with known medical conditions. Pre-existing renal disease predicted a poor outcome (OR=1.996, p=0.027). The odds of death for the patients coming from their own-home was only 26% of the odds for those from a long-term care-home. Long-term care facility, advanced age (OR=1.058, p <0.001), and long-term oral steroid (OR=3.412, p=0.016) use were all associated with a poor prognosis.

Conclusion - People aged ≥60 years, residence in a long-term care-home, pre-existing renal diseases, a high CCI score and long-term oral steroids use were associated with an increased mortality-risk.

Abbreviations: 
CCI: Charlson Comorbidity Index; CI: Confidence Interval; CKD: Chronic Kidney Disease; CPR: Cardio-pulmonary resuscitation; OR: Odds Ratio; PRH: Princes Royal Hospital; RAAS: Renin angiotensin aldosterone system; RSH: Royal Shrewsbury Hospital; SaTH: Shrewsbury and Telford Hospitals NHS Trust.
Keywords: 
Co-morbidities, Covid-19, Immunomodulator, Mortality.

INTRODUCTION

The most recent outbreak of severe acute respiratory syndrome (SARS) has been caused by coronavirus-2 (SARS-CoV-2) – a new single-strand, positive-sense-RNA beta-coronavirus first reported in 2019 in Wuhan, China. The virus has spread to nearly all countries across the world.1-4

SARS-CoV-2 infection, also known as Coronavirus Disease 2019 (COVID-19), replicates mainly in the upper and lower respiratory tract. The transmission of COVID-19 from symptomatic and asymptomatic patients is usually through respiratory droplets, generated by coughing and sneezing or through contact with contaminated surfaces.4,5 The disease has an incubation period of approximately 5.2 days.6

Most infections are mild and uncomplicated.4 After one week of the onset of disease, 5-10% of patients tend to develop pneumonia, needing hospitalisation.4,6 Some of these patients develop further complications, often leading to death.4,6 The overall case fatality rate is 1.4%, with a noticeably higher rate after the sixth decade of life.4

People aged ≥ 60 years, especially with underlying medical conditions – such as cardiovascular disease, hypertension, diabetes mellitus (DM), chronic respiratory disease, cancer, immunodeficiency, obesity – and those of male-sex, have an increased risk of dying.4,7-12 Risk of severe adverse outcome is also associated with an increased number of associated co-morbidities.10

The impact of active cancer, endocrine disorders, autoimmune inflammatory rheumatic diseases etc. on COVID-19 outcomes has been investigated widely.13-18 Divergent views have emerged regarding the role of renin angiotensin aldosterone system (RAAS) inhibitors, steroids, and immunomodulators in COVID-19 mortality.

 

The objective of our study was to evaluate the risk posed by epidemiological and demographic variables in our local population. We also sought to analyse the impact of co-morbidities on in-hospital mortality in confirmed COVID-19 patients.

METHODS

Study design:

We conducted a retrospective analysis of demographics characteristics (age and sex) and medical co-morbidities – hypertension, chronic heart failure, ischaemic heart disease, DM, thyroid disorders, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), chronic kidney disease (CKD) (eGFR < 60 mL/min/1.73 m2), chronic liver disease, active malignancy, immunosuppression, post-transplant status, chronic inflammatory arthritis and other rheumatic disorders – in all patients with confirmed COVID-19, who were admitted in two peripheral district general hospitals under a single National Health Service (NHS) trust serving primarily the rural population of western England.

Inclusion and Exclusion Criteria:

To determine COVID-19 status, nose and throat-swab specimens were obtained for real-time reverse transcription polymerase chain reactions (rt-PCR) in all adult (≥18 years) patients, attending one of the two district general hospitals (Royal Shrewsbury Hospital, Shrewsbury; and Princess Royal Hospital, Telford) under Shrewsbury & Telford Hospitals NHS Trust (SaTH) in the period from 1st March to 15th May 2020.

Patients who tested positive (either by N gene and ORF1ab gene positive / ORF1ab gene positive or N gene positive) and required subsequent in-hospital management were included in the study. Patients who were discharged after initial senior review (usually by a consultant physician), or brought in as a cardiac-respiratory arrest, were excluded. Re-admissions to the hospital beyond 48 hours following hospital discharge due to COVID-19 were excluded from the study. Patients diagnosed solely on radiological or clinical findings without a positive rt-PCR test were not included in our study.

We analysed the data based on the index-admission (including failed-discharge: re-admission within 48 hours following hospital discharge). No follow-up data was collected post-hospital discharge of these patients.

Data collection & analysis:

A list of all confirmed COVID-19 patients over a 76-day period was identified from the trust microbiology database. A search of the electronic patient records was completed by four members of our team. Supplementary data was gleaned from existing hospital paper records. Patient demographics, presenting symptoms, associated co-morbidities, medications, admission and discharge dates, intensive therapy unit (ITU) admissions, renal profile, referral source and outcomes were recorded in the specifically designed electronic datasheet.

Study Outcome:

The impact of epidemiological and demographic characteristics, and pre-existing medical conditions on the mortality of confirmed COVID-19 patients requiring in-hospital treatment was analysed.

RESULTS

A total of 303 confirmed COVID-19 (rt-PCR positive) samples were collected over a 76-day period. Five patients had been tested twice, and this was accounted for. Thirty-five patients were excluded from the study: twenty-four of them discharged after initial senior review without requiring in-hospital treatment, seven brought in with cardio-pulmonary resuscitation (CPR) in progress, three had inadequate data, and one was <18 years old. Of the 263 patients admitted, 70 (26.6%) died in hospital (Figure-1).

Figure-1: Flowchart of sampling and analysis

We stratified the mortality rates among the admitted patients by age (Table-1). A chi-square test of independence revealed that the mortality rate was significantly related to an advanced age (χ2 =27.078, p<0.001). The age and sex distributions of admissions and mortality are shown in Figure-2 (a, b, c).

Table-1: Medical admissions and mortality stratified by age

Age Admission N(m/f) Admission

(%)

Death

N(m/f)

Mortality

(%)

Chi-square

2)

P-value
18 – 20 Years 0 0% 0 0% 27.078 <0.001
21 – 30 Years 9(2/7) 3.4% 0 0%    
31 – 40 Years 9(6/3) 3.4% 0 0%    
41 – 50 Years 26(17/9) 9.9% 3(2/1) 11.5%    
51 – 60 Years 36(21/15) 13.7% 4(3/1) 11.1%    
61 – 70 Years 43(26/17) 16.3% 11(7/4) 25.6%    
71 – 80 Years 56(35/21) 21.3% 15(11/4) 26.8%    
81 and Above 84(52/32) 31.9% 37(24/13) 44.0%    
Total 263(159/104) 100.0% 70(47/23) 26.6%    

N: number of patients, m: male, f: female.

Figure-2 (a,b,c): Age, Sex, Admission and Mortality pyramids


We considered two age cohorts - below 60 and ≥60 years of age and other relevant demographic parameters (sex and residence in own-home/care-home) to analyse the impact on mortality rates (Table-2). Of the admitted patients, 159 (60.5%) were male, and 104 (39.5%) were female. The mortality rate was strongly associated with advanced age ≥60 years (χ2 =17.120, p<0.001) but independent of sex distribution (χ2 =1.784, p=0.182). However, it was also affected by the care facility (χ2 =18.146, p<0.001) with a higher mortality rate among the group of patients with residence in a long-term care-home.

Table-2: Admission and Mortality stratified by demographic variables

Variables Admission (N) Admission (%) Death (N) Mortality (%) Chi-square

2)

P-value
Age         17.120 <0.001
<60 years 77 29.3% 7 9.1%    
≥60 years 186 70.7% 63 33.9%    
Sex         1.784 0.182
Female 104 39.5% 23 22.1%    
Male 159 60.5% 47 29.6%    
Care facility         18.146 <0.001
Own-home 211 80.2% 44 20.9%    
Care-home 52 19.8% 26 50.0%    

N: Number of patients; Care-home: Long-term care in residential or nursing home.

To identify the strength of the associations, we conducted a univariate logistic regression analysis with mortality as the dependent variable and the demography and presence/absence of the co-morbidities as the independent variable (Table-3). We found that age as a continuous predictor had an odds ratio of 1.058 (p<0.001), which translated to increased odds of dying by 5.8% for every year of advanced age. Using age as a categorical predictor with the other two categories, the odds of death for patients aged below 60 years was found to be 0.195 times the odds of death for the patients aged 60 years or above.

Table-3: Univariate logistic regression analysis of the demographic variables and co-morbidities

   

Admission (N)

Admission (%)

Died (N)

Mortality (%)

Odds Ratio

95% C.I

 

Variables

Categories

Lower

Upper

P-value

Overall   263 100% 70 26.6%        
Age           1.058 1.035 1.082 <0.001
Age (Cat) <60 years 77 29.3% 7 9.1% 0.195 0.085 0.450 <0.001
  ≥60 Years 186 70.7% 63 33.9%        
CCI           1.255 1.114 1.414 <0.001
CCI (Cat) 0 – 4 158 60.1% 32 20.3% 0.448 0.257 0.781 0.005
  ≥5 105 39.9% 38 36.2%        
Sex Female 104 39.5% 23 22.1% 0.677 0.381 1.202 0.183
  Male 159 60.5% 47 29.6%        
Care Facility Own-Home 211 80.2% 44 20.9% 0.263 0.139 0.498 <0.001
  Care-Home 52 19.8% 26 50.0%        
eGFR           0.961 0.950 0.973 <0.001
Active malignancy Known 17 6.5% 1 5.9% 0.160 0.021 1.232 0.079
Cardiovascular* disease Known 125 47.5% 39 31.2% 1.565 0.903 2.714 0.111
Respiratory§ disease Known 55 20.9% 16 29.1% 1.170 0.605 2.262 0.641
DM & endocrine disorders$ Known 67 25.5% 21 31.3% 1.370 0.745 2.518 0.312
Renal disease£ Known 61 23.2% 23 37.7% 1.996 1.082 3.681 0.027
Rheumatic disorders§§ Known 10 3.8% 4 40.0% 1.889 0.517 6.903 0.336
Liver & hepato-biliary diseases± Known 8 3.0% 1 12.5% 0.385 0.047 3.187 0.376
Thyroid disorders Known 16 6.1% 4 25.0% 0.914 0.285 2.934 0.880
Long-term oral Steroids€€ Known 17 6.5% 9 52.9% 3.412 1.261 9.232 0.016
Immunomodulators$$ Known 9 3.4% 4 44.4% 2.279 0.594 8.741 0.230
No medical condition Known 29 11.0% 2 6.9% 0.181 0.042 0.782 0.022

*Cardiovascular: Hypertension, chronic heart failure, ischaemic heart disease, chronic arrhythmias; §Respiratory: Asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, interstitial lung disease, asbestosis; $DM & Endocrine: Diabetes Mellitus (DM), thyroid disorders, Addison's; £Renal: Chronic Kidney Disease (eGFR < 60 mL/min/1.73 m2), on dialysis, chronic nephritis, renal transplant; §§Rheumatic: Rheumatoid arthritis, inflammatory Polyarthritis, chronic vasculitis Syndrome, connective tissue disorders; ±Liver & hepato-biliary: Fatty liver, non-alcoholic steatohepatitis, liver transplant; Thyroid: Hypothyroidism, hyperthyroidism, post-thyroidectomy; €€Long-term oral steroids: Prednisolone, hydrocortisone, dexamethasone; $$Immunomodulators: Methotrexate, tacrolimus, sirolimus, mycophenolate, dapsone, sulfasalazine and azathioprine.

Based on the Charlson Comorbidity Index (CCI) score, the severity of co-morbidities was categorised into four cohorts: mild/no co-morbidity (CCI:0), moderate (CCI:1-2), severe (CCI:3-4), and very severe (CCI≥5) [Table-4(4a)].

Table-4: Impact of CCI score and specific medical-conditions on admission and mortality
4a) Admission and mortality stratified by CCI score based cohorts

CCI score Admission

(N)

Mortality

(N)

Mortality

(%)

OR (95% C.I) p-value
Overall 263 70 26.6    
0 31 1 3.2 - -
1-2 59 8 13.8 4.706 (0.56 – 39.49) 0.154
3-4 68 23 33.8 15.33 (1.97 – 119.67) 0.009
≥5 105 38 36.2 17.015 (2.23 – 129.78) 0.006

4b) Admission and mortality stratified by specific medical-conditions

Medical-conditions Admissions

(N)

Mortality

(N)

Mortality

(%)

OR (95% C.I.) p-value
DM 54 18 33.3 1.510 (0.791 – 2.883) 0.212
Thyroid Disorders 16 4 25.0% 0.914 (0.285 – 2.934) 0.880

Overall Hypertensives

75

16

21.3

0.707 (0.374 – 1.338) 0.287

ACEi/ARB* antihypertensives

51

11

21.6

0.760 (0.365 – 1.586) 0.465

Non ACEi/ARB§ antihypertensives

24

5

20.8

0.704 (0.253 – 1.964) 0.503

Long-term oral steroids

17

9

52.9

4.053 (1.091 – 15.063) 0.037

Immunomodulators

9

3

33.3

5.101 (0.659 – 39.460) 0.119

N: Number of patients; DM: Diabetes Mellitus; *RAAS-inhibitors; §Non RAAS-inhibitors.

The impact of CCI score-based cohorts on mortality are shown in Figure-3 (a-f). CCI value also predicted significant association with odds ratio 1.255 (p<0.001). If the CCI score was utilised as a categorical predictor with the other two parameters (age and place of primary care), it remained a significant predictor with the odds of death for the patients with CCI-scores between 0-4 turning out to be 44.8% (p=0.005) of the odds of death for the patients with CCI scores ≥5 (Table-3).

Figure-3(a - f): Pie-chart representing impact of CCI score-based cohorts on mortality


a) Overall admitted patients: discharge and mortality; b) CCI score 0: discharge and mortality; c) CCI score 1-2: discharge and mortality; d) CCI score 3-4: discharge and mortality; e) CCI score ≤4: discharge and mortality; f) CCI score ≥5: discharge and mortality.

Interestingly, the eGFR at presentation turned out to be a significant predictor of mortality (OR=0.961, p<0.001). Of the co-morbidities, pre-existing renal disease was found to be an important predictor of mortality with OR=1.996 (p=0.027). Long-term oral steroids were another significant predictor of mortality, with the odds of death for the patients with long-term oral steroids use being 341.2% (p=0.016) of the odds of death for the patients without such medication. Patients with no background medical conditions (OR=0.181, p=0.022) fared better, with significantly lower odds of death compared to patients with at least one known medical condition (Table-3).

We also analysed the mortality of our patients with specific medical condition-based cohorts [Table-4(4b)]. A high mortality of 52.9% [OR (95%CI): 4.053(1.091–15.063), p=0.037] was observed in patients who were on long-term oral steroids. A 33.3% [OR (95%CI):1.510(0.791–2.883), p=0.212] mortality rate was observed among in-patients with known diabetes on pharmacotherapy.

Many of the demographic variables and the co-morbidities were inter-related – the odds of death for a patient coming from their own-home was only 26% (OR=0.263, p<0.001) of the odds for those residing in a long-term care-home (Table-3). To offset the possibility of any confounding effect, we utilised multiple logistic regression analysis with all the important variables taken together (Table-5). Taking consideration of confounding effects, only age, care facility, presence of active malignancy and long-term oral steroids were found to be significant predictors of mortality. Interestingly, the presence of active malignancy was found to have a lower risk of death – this is possibly due to a bias on account of a relatively small number of patients in that subset of our study. Age was the most significant predictor of mortality, followed by a primary area of the care facility and the presence of active malignancy.

Table-5: Multiple logistic regression analysis of the demographic variables and co-morbidities

 

Odds Ratio

95% Confidence Interval

 

Variables

Lower

Upper

P-value

Age 1.049 1.013 1.086 .007
Sex (Female) .588 .296 1.165 .128
Care facility (own-home) .411 .195 .866 .019
CCI score 1.051 .826 1.337 .685
Active malignancy .078 .008 .725 .025
Cardiovascular disease .987 .491 1.984 .971
Respiratory disease 1.162 .517 2.612 .716
DM & endocrine disorders 1.370 .608 3.085 .448
Renal disease .901 .419 1.937 .789
Rheumatic disorders .927 .128 6.719 .941
Liver & hepato-biliary diseases .364 .030 4.357 .425
Thyroid disorders .827 .186 3.676 .803
Long-term oral steroids 4.053 1.091 15.063 .037
Immunomodulators 5.101 .659 39.460 .119
No medical condition .685 .128 3.670 .658

DM: Diabetes Mellitus

DISCUSSION

COVID-19 has taken 800,000 lives world-wide as reported by the World Health Organisation (WHO) on August 30, 2020. A recent systematic review and meta-analysis have reported the association of COVID-19 with a severe disease course in about 23% of infected patients and has a mortality of about 6%.19 The mortality rate varies in different geographical areas. In-hospital mortality was significantly higher in the United States of America (USA) (22.23%) and Europe (22.9%) compared to Asia (12.65%) – (p<0.0001).20 However, there was no significant difference when compared to each other (p=0.49).20 Our study showed a 26.6% in-hospital mortality.

The mean age of the patients in our study was 68.74 years (SD:16.89) – 60.5% of them were male and 39.5% female. 70.7% of these patients were aged ≥60 years. Univariate analysis showed that the mortality rate was significantly age-dependent (OR=1.058, p<0.001) – mortality (33.9%) was higher in patients aged ≥60 years, rising sharply ≥80 years to 44.0% (χ2 =27.078, p<0.001). Our results were consistent with other studies.21

Among the demographic characteristics, mortality-risk was independent of sex distribution (χ2 =1.784, p=0.182) in our study. This is in contrast to a meta-analysis, which reported the association between male-sex and COVID-19 mortality (OR =1.81; 95%CI:1.25–2.62).22 Multicentric studies in the United Kingdom (UK) would be warranted to see the trend in the local population.

Long-term care-home residents suffered 50.0% mortality (χ2 =18.146, p<0.001). The London School of Economics report on May 14, 2020, estimated that the COVID-19 related deaths of care-home residents contributed to 54% of all excess deaths in England and Wales. Our study findings indicate long-term care-homes as hot-spots requiring shielding and protective measures against COVID-19 – a conclusion corroborating other studies.23

We aimed to define the predictive-role of co-morbidities on COVID-19 mortality, an aspect that has been probed earlier as well.7-12 The CCI score remains a reliable method to measure co-morbidity.24 For admission to intensive care, NICE recommended CCI-score ≥ 5 requires critical care advice to help in treatment decision regarding the essential benefit of organ support for seriously unwell COVID-19 patients. We examined the predictive mortality-risk of CCI scores among the admitted patients.

The mortality rate in cohorts with CCI ≤4 and CCI scores ≥5 were 20.3% and 36.2% respectively. The odds of death for CCI ≤4 cohort was less than half (44.8%) compared with CCI scores ≥5 cohort. Based on this finding, we strongly recommend CCI scoring as a clinical risk-stratification tool in COVID-19.

We examined the impact of organ specific co-morbidities on in-hospital mortality in our study as well. Patients with no background medical conditions showed a low mortality rate 6.9% [OR (95%CI): 0.181(0.042–0.782), p=0.022] and had better outcomes with significantly lower odds of death, compared to patients with at least one medical condition on univariate logistic regression analysis (Table-3). The mortality rate was 3.2% in CCI-0 cohort [Table 4(4a)].

The impact of COVID-19 on patients with CKD, glomerulo-nephropathies, on dialysis dependent patients and post renal transplant patients remains unclear. Patients with SARS-CoV-2 infection were frequently found to have renal dysfunction – the latter was associated with greater complications and in-hospital mortality.25 A mortality rate of 3.6%, was reported in patients attending an outpatient haemodialysis centre.26 Another study has concluded 3.07-fold (95%CI:1.43–6.61)mortality among renal failure patients.27 We found, the pre-existing renal disease to be a cause of significant concern with 37.7% mortality [OR(95%CI): 1.996(1.082 – 3.681), p=0.027] with the eGFR at presentation being a significant predictor (OR=0.961, p <0.001) (Table-3).

The use of steroids in COVID-19 continues to be explored.The RECOVERY trial in UK, after evaluation at 28 days, concluded that dexamethasone reduced deaths by one-third in ventilated patients [age-adjusted rate ratio (RR) 0.65; 95% CI: 0.48–0.88; p=0.0003], and by one-fifth in other patients receiving supplemental oxygen with or without non-invasive ventilation (RR 0.80; 95%CI: 0.67 to 0.96; p=0.0021), although no benefit was observed in mild or moderate cases not requiring oxygen support (17.0% vs.13.2%; RR 1.22; 95% CI, 0.93e1.61; p¼0.14). In contrast, a systematic review concluded that the results from retrospective studies are heterogeneous, and it was difficult to assign a definite protective role of corticosteroids in this setting.28 We found long-term oral steroids use to be a significant predictor of mortality – 52.9% [OR(95%CI): 3.412(1.261–9.23), p=0.016] – this was 341.2% of the odds of death for the patients without any long-term oral steroids use (Table-3). The sample size of this cohort was relatively small with 9 deaths out of 17 patients. However, based on our results, it may be safe to suggest that further population-based studies would be required to determine the impact of long-term oral corticosteroid use in COVID-19.

A major proportion of endocrine disorders are of autoimmune aetiology. The impact of thyroid disorders on COVID-19 is yet to be studied widely.15,16 We found no increased risk of mortality [OR (95%CI): 0.914 (0.285–2.934), p=0.880] in patients with thyroid disorders. However, 33.33% [OR(95%CI): 1.510(0.791–2.883), p=0.212] mortality was seen among the diabetic patients on pharmacotherapy in our study [Table-4(4b)].

Pre-existing hypertension is an accepted risk factor for COVID-19 mortality.26,27 However, the role RAAS-inhibitors and upregulation of ACE-2 receptors in COVID-19 mortality call for targeted clinical research for further clarification.29 A meta-analysis of four studies showed that patients treated with RAAS-inhibitors had a lower risk of mortality [RR: 0.65(95%CI:0.45–0.94), P=0.20].30 We did not observe any significant mortality-risk difference between RAAS-inhibitors treatment group [OR(95%CI): 0.760(0.365–1.586), p=0.465] and non RAAS-inhibitor treatment groups [OR(95%CI): 0.704(0.253–1.964), p=0.503] [Table-4(4b)]. We recommend the continuation of RAAS-inhibitors during COVID-19 unless there exist other compelling medical reasons for their discontinuation.

A prospective study in the UK concluded that the mortality from COVID-19 in cancer patients appeared to be driven principally by age, gender, and co-morbidities.13 The study could not identify evidence suggesting cancer patients on cytotoxic chemotherapy, or other anticancer treatment, were at an increased risk of mortality from COVID-19 compared to the general population.13 We also did not detect any increased risk of mortality in patients with active malignancy [OR(95%CI): 0.078(0.008–0.725), p=0.025)] (Table-5).

The impact of various non-specific immunomodulators in COVID-19 outcome remains inconclusive.14 Our study did not reveal any significant predictive mortality-risk with the use of long-term immunomodulators (methotrexate, tacrolimus, sirolimus, mycophenolate, dapsone, sulfasalazine and azathioprine) on multiple logistic regression analysis. We reached the same conclusion with patients suffering from chronic rheumatic disorders on similar analysis (Table-5).

Our study had some unique characteristics. We analysed all the eligible samples over a consecutive 76-day period at the initial peak of the pandemic. The study was conducted across two district general hospitals, allowing an insight into two differently located rural populations. We conducted univariate and multiple logistic regression analysis of the demographic variables and co-morbidities to examine the predictive-risk of contributing factors in COVID-19 mortality. The association between CCI scores and in-hospital mortality was also analysed in detail. We included demographic characteristics such as age, sex and residence in a long-term care-home while factoring in the associations.

Our study was not without limitations, though. We were unable to study the predictive-risk of obesity, socioeconomic status and ethnicity due to inadequate data. The “White British” group consisted of 80.61% of admitted patients, and no ethnicity was documented in 17.11% of our patients (Table-6, Figure-4).

Table-6: Medical admissions and mortality stratified by ethnicity

Ethnicity Admission

(N)

Admission

(%)

Died

(N)

Mortality

(%)

White British 212 80.61 63 29.71
Asian 4 1.52 1 25.0
African 2 0.76 0 0.00
Not documented 45 17.11 6 13.33

N: Number of patients

Figure-4: Bar charts showing Admission and Mortality stratified by Ethnicity

We relied solely on electronic database and hospital records to conduct the study retrospectively. The few subsets of patients such as those on prescribed long-term oral steroids, immunomodulators, thyroid disorders, chronic liver disease, and active malignancy had relatively small sample sizes with possible introduction of bias. We did not categorise diabetic patients into insulin dependent/non-insulin dependent or well/poorly glycaemic control cohorts. We did not aim to split the respiratory group into well or poorly controlled asthma or COPD subsets. Patients on a long-term steroid inhalation treatment were not included in the steroid cohort – a more extensive population-based study may be better suited for such an analysis.

CONCLUSIONS

Patients aged ≥ 60 years, residence in a long-term care-home, pre-existing renal disease, multiple co-morbidities (especially those with CCI ≥ 5), and patients on long-term oral steroids need to be considered as having a high risk of dying from COVID-19, along with other established risk factors such as hypertension, diabetes and chronic respiratory disease. RAAS-inhibitors need not be discontinued due to COVID-19. Further studies are necessary to establish links between long-term oral steroids use, chronic rheumatic disease, non-specific immunomodulators and COVID-19 mortality.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Acknowledgement: 
Miss Lyndsey Green: Senior BMS, Microbiology, SaTH. Mrs Annette Meredith: ED/AMU Medical Secretary, SaTH. Dr N Zia: Consultant, Emergency medicine, Dudley Group of Hospitals NHS Foundation Trust, Dudley, UK. Dr I Thund: Consultant, Emergency medicine, Dudley Group of Hospitals NHS Foundation Trust, Dudley, UK. Dr S Das: Consultant, Emergency medicine, Stockport NHS Foundation Trust, Stockport, UK. Special thanks to Dr Mohyman El Habishi, Trainee, Anaesthetics, Dudley Group of Hospitals NHS Foundation Trust, Dudley, UK for his contribution of proof-reading, graphics and tables.
Competing Interests: 
The authors declare that they have no conflict of interest
Details of Authors: 
NIL KAMAL SAMANTA, MBBS, MRCP, MRCEM, FRCEM, Consultant, Emergency Medicine, Dudley Group of Hospitals NHS Foundation Trust, Dudley, DY1 2HQ, UK. SAMIK KUMAR BANDYOPADHYAY, MBBS, MS, MRCS, FNB(MAS), Speciality Trainee 5, General Surgery, Salford Royal Hospital, Stott Lane, Salford, M6 8HD, UK. DODIY HERMAN, MBChB, FRCEM, Consultant, Emergency Medicine, Shrewsbury and Telford Hospitals NHS Trust, Mytton Oak Road, Shrewsbury, SY3 8XQ. BIMAN CHAKRABORTY, PhD (statistics), School of Mathematics, University of Birmingham, Birmingham B15 2TT, UK. ADRIAN MARSH, MBChB, BSc Med Sci (Hons), FRCEM, Consultant, Emergency Medicine, Shrewsbury and Telford Hospitals NHS Trust, Mytton Oak Road, Shrewsbury, SY3 8XQ. SUBRAMANIAN KUMARAN, MBBS, D Ortho, FECS, FRCEM, Consultant, Emergency Medicine, Shrewsbury and Telford Hospitals NHS Trust, Mytton Oak Road, Shrewsbury, SY3 8XQ. LAUREN BURNARD, MBBS, Speciality Trainee, Acute Common Care Stem, Shrewsbury and Telford Hospitals NHS Trust, Mytton Oak Road, Shrewsbury, SY3 8XQ. GUNALAN GNANASEELAN, MBBS, Foundation Year 2,Shrewsbury and Telford Hospitals NHS Trust, Mytton Oak Road, Shrewsbury, SY3 8XQ. SAOIRSE GIBSON, MBBS, Foundation Year 1, Shrewsbury and Telford Hospitals NHS Trust, Mytton Oak Road, Shrewsbury, SY3 8XQ. BENITA FLORENCE, MBBS, MRCEM, Specialty Doctors and Associate Specialists, Shrewsbury and Telford Hospitals NHS Trust, Mytton Oak Road, Shrewsbury, SY3 8XQ. SAIBAL GANGULY, MBBS, FRCA, FFICM, EDIC, Consultant Anaesthetics and Intensivist, The Royal Wolverhampton NHS Trust, Wolverhampton Road, WV10 0QP, UK.
Corresponding Author Details: 
Dr Nil Kamal Samanta, Consultant, Emergency Medicine, Dudley Group of Hospitals NHS Foundation Trust, Dudley, DY1 2HQ, UK.
Corresponding Author Email: 
Nilkamal.samanta@nhs.net
References
References: 
  1. World Health Organization. Coronavirus disease 2019 (COVID-19): situation report-37. February 25, 2020. Accessed February 26, 2020. https://www.who.int/docs/default-source/coronaviruse/situation-reports/20200226-sitrep-37-covid-19.pdf?sfvrsn=6126c0a4_2
  2. Wu, C., X. Chen, Y. Cai, et al. Risk Factors Associated with Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome and Death in Patients with Coronavirus Disease 2019 Pneumonia in Wuhan, JAMA Intern Med. 2020;180(7):934-943. 
  3. Xu X, Chen P, Wang J, et al. Evolution of the novel coronavirus from the ongoing Wuhan outbreak and modeling of its spike protein for the risk of human transmission. Sci China Life Sci. 2020;63:457-60.
  4. Salzberger B., Buder F., Hitzenbichler F., et al. Epidemiologie von SARS-CoV-2-Infektion und COVID-19 Epidemiology of SARS-CoV-2 infection and COVID-19. Der Internist. 2020;61:782-788.
  5. PHE Guidance: Transmission characteristics and principles of infection prevention and control. Updated June 18, 2020.
  6. Junejo Y, Ozaslan M, Safdar M, et al. Novel SARS-CoV-2/COVID-19: Origin, pathogenesis, genes and genetic variations, immune responses and phylogenetic analysis. Gene reports. 2020;20:100752. DOI 10.1016/j.genrep.2020.100752 
  7. Srivastava K. Association between COVID-19 and cardiovascular disease. IJC Heart and Vasculature. 2020;29:100583. DOI 10.1016/j.ijcha.2020.100583
  8. Hafiane A. SARS-CoV-2 and the cardiovascular system. Clinica Chimica Acta. 2020;510:311-316. 
  9. Escalera-Antezana JP, Lizon-Ferrufino NF, Maldonado-Alanoca A, et al. Risk factors for mortality in patients with Coronavirus Disease 2019 (COVID-19) in Bolivia: An analysis of the first 107 confirmed cases. Le infezioni in medicina. 2020;28 (2):238-242.
  10. Chanyuan Ye, Shanyan Zhang, Xiaoli Zhang , et al. Impact of co-morbidities on patients with COVID‐19: A large retrospective study in Zhejiang, China. J Med Virol. 2020;1-9. https://doi.org/10.1002/jmv.26183
  11. Li, Xintao, Guan, Bo, Su, Tong, et al. Impact of cardiovascular disease and cardiac injury on in-hospital mortality in patients with COVID-19: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Heart 2020;0:1-6. 
  12. Pranata R; Huang I; Lim MA, et al.  Impact of Cerebrovascular and Cardiovascular Diseases on Mortality and Severity of COVID-19 - Systematic Review, Meta-analysis, and Meta-regression. J. Stroke Cerebrovasc. Dis. 2020;29(8):104949 DOI 10.1016/j.jstrokecerebrovasdis.2020.104949 
  13. Lee LYW, Cazier JB, Starkey T, Turnbull CD, et al. COVID-19 mortality in patients with cancer on chemotherapy or other anticancer treatments: a prospective cohort study. Lancet. 2020;395(10241):1919-1926.
  14. Rizk JG, Kalantar-Zadeh K, Mehra MR, et al.  Pharmaco-Immunomodulatory Therapy in COVID-19. Drugs. 2020; DOI 10.1007/s40265-020-01367-z
  15. Boelaert K, Visser WE, Taylor PN, et al.  ENDOCRINOLOGY IN THE TIME OF COVID-19: Management of hyperthyroidism and hypothyroidism. Eur. J. Endocrinol 2020;183 (1):G33-G39. 
  16. Dworakowska D, Grossman AB.  Thyroid disease in the time of COVID-19. Endocrine. 2020;68 (3):471-474.
  17. Freites Nuñez D.D., Leon L, Mucientes A, et al.  Risk factors for hospital admissions related to COVID-19 in patients with autoimmune inflammatory rheumatic diseases. Ann Rheum Dis. 2020;0:1-7. 
  18. Santos CS, Morales CM, Álvarez ED, et al.  Determinants of COVID-19 disease severity in patients with underlying rheumatic disease. Clin. Rheumatol. 2020;39:2789-2796. 
  19. Li J; Huang DQ; Zou B; Yang H; Hui WZ et al.  Epidemiology of COVID-19: A Systematic Review and Meta-analysis of Clinical Characteristics, Risk factors and Outcomes. J Med Virol. 2020;1-10.
  20. Goel. Sunny, Jain. Tarun, Hooda. Amit, et al.  Clinical Characteristics and In-Hospital Mortality for COVID-19 Across The Globe. Cardiol Ther. 2020; DOI 10.1007/s40119-020-00189-0
  21. Mahase E.  Covid-19: Death rate is 0.66% and increases with age, study estimates. BMJ. 2020;369:m1327. DOI 10.1136/bmj.m1327
  22. Ortolan A, Lorenzin M, Felicetti M, et al.  Does gender influence clinical expression and disease outcomes in COVID-19? A systematic review and meta-analysis. IJID. 2020;99:496-504. 
  23. Kemenesi. Gábor, Kornya. László, Tóth, Gábor Endre, et al. Nursing homes and the elderly regarding the COVID-19 pandemic: situation report from Hungary. GeroScience. 2020;42:1-7.
  24. De Groot V, Beckerman H, Lankhorst G.J, et al. How to measure comorbidity: A critical review of available methods. JCE. 2003;56(3):221-229. 
  25. Uribarri Aitor, Núñez-Gil Iván J, Aparisi Alvaro, et al. Impact of renal function on admission in COVID-19 patients: an analysis of the international HOPE COVID-19 (Health Outcome Predictive Evaluation for COVID 19) Registry. J. Nephrol. 2020;33 (4):737-745.
  26. Farouk SS, Fiaccadori E, Cravedi P, et al.  COVID-19 and the kidney: what we think we know so far and what we don't. J. Nephrol. 2020; DOI 10.1007/s40620-020-00789-y.
  27. Kim Dong Wook, Byeon Kyeong Hyang, Kim Jaiyong, et al.  The Correlation of Co-morbidities on the Mortality in Patients with COVID-19: an Observational Study Based on the Korean National Health Insurance Big Data. J Korean Med Sci. 2020;35(26):e243. 
  28. Singh AK, Majumdar S, Singh R; Misra A.   Role of corticosteroid in the management of COVID-19: A systemic review and a Clinician's perspective. Diabetes Metab Synd. 2020;14 (5):971-978. 
  29. Hanff TC, Harhay MO, Cohen JB, et al. Is There an Association Between COVID-19 Mortality and the Renin-Angiotensin System? A Call for Epidemiologic Investigations. Clinical infectious diseases. Clin Infect Dis. 2020; 71(15): 870-874.
  30. Gao C, Cai Y, Zhang K, et al. Association of hypertension and antihypertensive treatment with COVID-19 mortality: a retrospective observational study. Eur. Heart J. 2020;41(22):2058-2066.

Upgrading of Hospital Discharge Summary Software to Optimise COVID-19 Documentation and Safeguard Infection Prevention in the Community

Authors
Jack Donati-Bourne, Ning Lo, Wail Mohamed, Zain Kasmani, Masilamani Selvan & Jonathan O'Dair
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2021;14(1):a002
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Aims: Early review of 50 discharge summaries at Royal Shrewsbury Hospital (SATH) in April 2020 revealed only 27% documented the patient’s in-hospital COVID-19 test result and 2% outlined any recommended self-isolation advice following hospital discharge.

This had potential adverse implications for community infection control as well as medico-legal sequalae for the Trust were the discharged patient to spread COVID-19 to other cohabitants.

The urology team worked with SATH IT to amend the existing discharge summary software, to add two tabs to make COVID-19 test result and self-isolation documentation mandatory for successful sign-off.

The aim of this quality improvement project was to evaluate the impact of updating the discharge summary software on documentation accuracy related to COVID-19 on discharge paperwork. 

Method: Following the implementation of the modified software, 50 consecutive discharge summaries for patients admitted under the urology team starting 1st October 2020 were retrospectively reviewed for documentation of COVID-19 result and self-isolation advice.

Results: 90% of discharge summaries included COVID-19 test result and 100% included self-isolation advice for the patient, or alternatively confirmed that no self-isolation was required.

Conclusions: This simple modification of an existing IT system greatly improved compliance with COVID-19 discharge summary documentation.

We propose all hospitals consider adopting similar measures in the interest of infection prevention, public safety and potential medico-legal sequalae.

Abbreviations: 
COVID-19 - Coronavirus disease 19; IT - Information technology; GMC - General Medical Council.
Keywords: 
discharge summary, COVID-19, IT

Introduction

The first documented case of COVID-19 in the UK was reported on 29 January 2020 followed by a rapid surge of infections leading to a UK national lockdown announced on 23 March 20201.

The COVID-19 pandemic has since required NHS hospitals to constantly adapt their protocols, workforce and logistics to keep pace with the evolving spread of the virus.

The variable clinical presentation of COVID-19 may result in those requiring admission being redirected under the care of different specialties within the hospital2. Furthermore the presence of asymptomatic carriers admitted with unrelated pathologies or cases of nosocomial cross-infections implies that COVID-19 related clinical noting and discharge summary documentation is likely to affect doctors across all hospital departments.

An initial review of 50 consecutive urology discharge summaries in Royal Shrewsbury Hospital in April 2020, revealed that only 27% included the patient’s in-hospital COVID-19 swab result (positive or negative) and only 2% documented any recommended patient self-isolation advice to be adhered to after discharge into the community.

Accurate COVID-19 related documentation is paramount to ensure the patient, their family and their GP / care setting where applicable are all aware of their COVID-19 status and any recommended self-isolation, to safeguard infection prevention in the community. Furthermore, there could be potential medicolegal sequalae for the Trust were a patient recently discharged from hospital to spread COVID-19 to their family and / or vulnerable adult cohabitants due to lack of clear self-isolation guidance.

An urgent collaboration between the urology team and the Trust IT department was undertaken to upgrade the Trust’s existing eScript discharge summary software.

Two new tabs were integrated:

1. COVID-19 test result [Figure 1] and date [Figure 2]: Positive / Negative / Not tested

2. Self-isolation advice [Figure 3]: No / Yes (please specify as free text)

Completion was made mandatory prior to being able to sign-off the document for printing and successful upload on the electronic records.

Figure 1

Figure 2

Collaboration with the infection prevention team (IPT) was undertaken to create a flow-chart style document accessible by hyperlink [Figure 3] to help discharging clinicians correctly determine and document patient self-isolation instructions following discharge from hospital, depending on individual circumstances. [Appendix 1]

Figure 3

The aim of this quality improvement project was to evaluate the impact of the dynamic upgrade made to the eScript discharge summary software in clinician compliance with COVID-19 related documentation.

Materials and Methods

The upgraded eScript discharge summary software was rolled out across the Shrewsbury and Telford NHS Trust (SATH) in the week beginning 28th September 2020.

All clinicians were informed regarding the upcoming software change by means of a Trust-wide email from the SATH Medical Director, with instructions provided on how to complete the new tabs.

The first 50 consecutive completed discharge summaries of patients admitted electively or as emergency under the urology team starting from 1st October 2020 were retrospectively reviewed by NL, EF, ZK by means of electronic records.

Note was taken of correct documentation of:

· any COVID-19 test outcome (positive or negative result)

· any recommended patient self-isolation advice after discharge from hospital

The findings were compared and contrasted with the results of the initial study in April 2020.

Results

49 / 50 (98%) patients had a COVID-19 test at any time during their admission – 1 patient did not have a COVID-19 test at any time in their admission.

3 patients were discharged prior to their COVID-19 result becoming available, 1 patient was discharged without a written discharge summary and 1 patient was incorrectly labelled as having been “not tested.”

46 patients’ results therefore became available in time before discharge and 44 (90% of all those tested) were documented on their discharge summary. All COVID-19 tests were negative. [Table 1]

All patients had either documented self-isolation advice or “none required” specified on their discharge summary following discharge from hospital. [Table 1]

The most common primary reasons for admission were urinary tract infection / sepsis (18%), catheter-related complications (14%) and urinary retention (12%).

Incidental note was made of two patient deaths within 28 days of admission.

Table 1

  Initial Review Review after software update
Number of patients 50 50
Patients tested for COVID-19 33 (66%) 49 (98%)
Patients testing positive 1 (3.3%) 0 (0%)
COVID-19 result on discharge summary 9 (27%) 44 (90%)
Self-isolation advice on discharge summary 1 (2.0%) 50 (100%)

Discussion

The results revealed that the upgraded eScript software resulted in a notable improvement in COVID-19 related documentation on discharge summaries.

In the initial study 33 / 50 (66%) had a COVID-19 test at any time during their admission – only 27% of these however had the result included on their discharge summary, compared to 90% compliance following the eScript software upgrade.

Following the finding of 3 patients’ (6%) COVID-19 result not becoming available prior to discharge, SATH IT was consulted and an extra option on the eScript COVID-19 result dropdown menu was added to include “awaiting result” to mitigate for this particular circumstance. [Figure 1]

Only 1 patient (2%) in the initial study had any self-isolation advice documented on their discharge summary – this figure soared to 100% following the eScript software upgrade. [Table 2]

The figures have to be interpreted in light of the change in COVID-19 testing availability, which only became widespread in mid-May 2020 and thus after the completion of the initial study3. This is likely to account for the lower proportion of in-patient COVID-19 tests being performed in the initial study (66%) vs. second study (98%).

Arguably a negative COVID-19 result such as those commonly encountered on the urology ward are less likely to be documented on a discharge summary compared to a positive test, particularly if admitted with unrelated pathologies (e.g. urinary retention) or asymptomatic carriers. By nonetheless documenting this pertinent negative, one ensures the patient is aware of their reassuring result and any community-based clinician such as district nurse or GP can be cognisant of this information if called to assess the patient soon after hospital discharge.

The findings of the study are directly relevant to all doctors working in acute NHS Trusts, as clear and accurate documentation is a key principle in the GMC’s “Good Medical Practice” document to which all registered practising doctors must abide to4. A discharge letter is a key component of the documentation of a patient’s journey and therefore must be completed accurately in line with GMC guidance. The updated software system safeguards the accuracy and clarity of the Trust’s discharge summaries in relation to COVID-19 results and self-isolation advice.

Self-isolation is a key principle of outbreak control for any infectious disease, and is a particularly important strategy in managing widespread vast numbers of cases such as in the COVID-19 pandemic in a libertarian society where strict quarantine is not routinely enforced5. The adherence with self-isolation has been notoriously poor in the UK – it is estimated that only 25% of symptomatic patients with proven COVID-19 complied fully with the government advice of not leaving the home during their isolation period6. It is therefore of paramount importance that patients being discharged from hospital in the COVID-19 pandemic era are given clear instructions on how to self-isolate and the recommended duration of this is documented.

Doctors preparing discharge summaries and their patients must be aware that COVID-19 may still be relevant to them even if the primary reason for admission was unrelated and their test on admission was negative – for example they may have been exposed to another in-patient or staff member later found to be positive for the virus. The discharging clinician should check for any such event and disclose this on the discharge summary where applicable.

From a medicolegal perspective, hospitals trusts may find themselves in a vulnerable position if COVID-19 positive or potentially exposed patients are discharged without any documented self-isolation advice. This in particular follows the controversy highlighted in the earlier months of the pandemic of thousands of elderly patients being discharged from hospital to care homes in the UK without a COVID-19 test7. Indeed, since then a judge has allowed legal action from a bereaved daughter to be brought against the Department for Health and Social Care, NHS England and Public Health England for failure to adequately protect vulnerable residents in an Oxfordshire care home8. Safeguarding the clear documentation of recommended patient self-isolation instructions on discharge summaries is likely to confer additional protection to a Trust facing any such legal challenge.

Writing a high-quality discharge summary is a difficult skill to teach and indeed they are often completed by the most junior members of the medical team9. The Trust’s IT software can therefore play a vital role in helping doctors ensure that COVID-19 result and self-isolation instructions are documented for all hospital discharges, by means of mandatory tabs for completion prior to sign off.

To our knowledge, although other Trusts have since similarly amended their discharge summary software in light of the COVID-19 pandemic, this is the only study in the literature which directly attests the degree of improvement in documentation as a result of such a software change. We urge that all Trusts in the UK consider amending their discharge summary software in line with the changes characterised in this study.

Conclusions

The updated eScript discharge summary software has greatly improved compliance within the Trust with COVID-19 test result and self-isolation advice documentation on discharge summaries.

This is a simple and highly effective modification whose benefits can have ramifications across the healthcare system.

By accurately documenting COVID-19 test results and any advised self-isolation for the patient after hospital discharge, one safeguards IPC in the community and protects the Trust from potential relevant medico-legal sequalae.

Appendix 1

Scenario 1: COVID-19 positive patient

Scenario 2: COVID-19 negative patient

Scenario 3: No COVID-19 test performed as rubbish and make someone else

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Acknowledgement: 
The authors wish to thank Dr Arne Rose, Mr Mark Cheetham, Pete McGinness, Ashley May, Joe Thelwell, Angela Lewis and Kelly Pardy for the completion of this project.
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
JACK DONATI-BOURNE, FRCS(Urol), Royal Shrewsbury Hospital, Mytton Oak Rd, Shrewsbury SY3 8XQ, UK. NING LO, MBChB, Royal Shrewsbury Hospital, Mytton Oak Rd, Shrewsbury SY3 8XQ, UK EAMONN FOLEY, MBChB, Royal Wolverhampton Hospital, Wolverhampton Road, Wolverhampton, WV10 0QP, UK. ZAIN KASMANI, MBChB, Worcestershire Acute Hospitals NHS Trust, Woodrow Drive, B98 7UB, Redditch, UK. MASILAMANI SELVAN, FRCS(Urol), Royal Shrewsbury Hospital, Mytton Oak Rd, Shrewsbury SY3 8XQ, UK. JONATHAN O'DAIR, FRCS(Urol), Royal Shrewsbury Hospital, Mytton Oak Rd, Shrewsbury SY3 8XQ, UK.
Corresponding Author Details: 
JACK DONATI-BOURNE, Urology Department, Royal Shrewsbury Hospital, Mytton Oak Rd, Shrewsbury SY3 8XQ, UK.
Corresponding Author Email: 
jack.donati-bourne@nhs.net
References
References: 
  1. Lillie PJ, Samson A, Li A, et al. Novel coronavirus disease (Covid-19): the first two patients in the UK with person to person transmission. J Infection 2020, 80(5), 578-606.
  2. Martín-Sánchez FJ, Del Toro E, Cardassay E, et al. (2020) Clinical presentation and outcome across age categories among patients with COVID-19 admitted to a Spanish Emergency Department. Eur geriatr med 2020, 11(5), pp.829-841.
  3. Surkova E, Nikolayevskyy V, Drobniewski F. False-positive COVID-19 results: hidden problems and costs.  Lancet Resp Med 2020, 8(12), pp.1167-1168.
  4. General Medical Council, “Good Medical Practice” [2013]. Available at: https://www.gmc-uk.org/ethical-guidance/ethical-guidance-for-doctors/good-medical-practice
  5. Salathé M, Althaus CL, Neher R, et al. COVID-19 epidemic in Switzerland: on the importance of testing, contact tracing and isolation. Swiss med weekly 2020, 150(11-12), 1-3
  6. Rubin GJ, Smith LE, Melendez-Torres GJ, et al. Improving adherence to ‘test, trace and isolate’. J Royal Soc Med 2020, 113(9), pp.335-338.
  7. BBC (British Broadcasting Corporation) (2020) Coronavirus: sending untested patients to care homes “reckless” – MPs. [Cited 30 December 2020] Available at: https://www.bbc.co.uk/news/uk-politics-53574265
  8. BBC (British Broadcasting Corporation) (2020) Covid: Judge allows legal challenge into care home deaths. [Cited 30 December 2020] Available at: https://www.bbc.co.uk/news/uk-england-devon-55007355
  9. Myers JS, Jaipaul CK, Kogan JR, et al. Are discharge summaries teachable? The effects of a discharge summary curriculum on the quality of discharge summaries in an internal medicine residency program. Acad Med 2006, 81(10), pp.S5-S8

Conundrums of the Association Between Creativity and Psychopathology

Authors
James Paul Pandarakalam
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2019;12(3):a022
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Background: Creativity has been historically linked with psychopathology. Creativity is a complex phenomenon and is a more emergent quality of living systems. Numerous scientific papers devalued creativity as being a psychopathological phenomenon. The present trend in psychiatry of medicalising all unusual behaviour is counter-productive to fostering creativity among children. Consequently, creative children are at risk for being both mislabelled and misdiagnosed.  Psychiatry is using a ‘brain disease model’ to understand creativity.

Aim: To evaluate the different psychological and psychopathological views as well as some of the future directions, and to suggest new lines of research.

Method: Selective survey of the literature including previous reviews to collect different interpretations which also help to form a framework to study creative process. Psychological, psychopathological and biological views separately analyzed.

Results: Psychopathology is only a mediator and not the producer, and creativity can be cathartic. The association between genius and mental illness is a social belief and partly this confusion has a journalistic origin. It is always the healthy part of the mind that generates outstanding creative works, whilst creativity of the highest order is more a product of laborious intellectual work.The scientific literature does not substantiate the reported high incidence of mental Illness among the creative people that exceeds chance expectation. Inspiratory part of creativity remains an enigma.

Conclusions: Let alone that we do not know the true aetiology of schizophrenia and bipolar disorder, but we do not have even an approximate model of the brain-mind-consciousness complex. So, it would be prudent to suspend our psychopathology linked views of creativity until we know more about psychiatric conditions that may have phenomenological similarities with creative minds. Creativity continues as a permanent mystery.

Keywords: 
creativity, psychopathology, substance abuse,inspiration, biological correlates

Introduction

The creative process is an enigma; there are conflicting opinions about creativity and creative people. Research studies on creativity have produced contradictory results. The long-standing belief that creativity results from a strange clairvoyant state is still occasionally associated with psychiatric disorders. 1 Although a decline in creativity with aging indicates that it is biologically based, a relationship between creativity and psychopathology is overstated in both print and media. Reductionism tends to misconstrue creativity as a product of psychopathology. Nonetheless, whilst psychopathology can facilitate creativity, it does not produce creativity. The inspirational characteristics of creativity remain shrouded in mystery.

Methodological issues that include both a definition and an evaluation of creativity impede the research into creativity. These challenges make the correlations between the studies problematic, and they deliver opposing outcomes. Although there is no confirmed relationship between psychopathology and creative accomplishment, the search for such a relationship hinders our understanding of human potential and the deeper levels of consciousness. Early detection of creative talents in children might enable providing them with special guidance, thereby averting potential psychiatric problems.

The superficial reductionism of 20th century biological psychiatry compressed all mental phenomena, including creativity, into compact neurobiological compartments, and the only way to achieve this was to medicalise it. Any assumed correlations between creativity and mental disorders will be clarified only when we gain a greater understanding of the creative process. In cases where creativity and mental illness indeed coexist, a psychiatric understanding of creativity may provide insights into patient functioning and assist in defining both normalcy and psychopathology.

Whilst human beings have existed on this planet for millions of years, the technological advancements of the last few centuries transpired without any perceptible changes in the development of the human brain. Historically, our ancestors were drawing two-dimensional pictures until just a few centuries ago. No one has hitherto been able to explain this sudden burst of creativity. An expanded model of brain-mind-consciousness that can appreciate the wonder of creativity is needed.

Defining Creativity

Researchers have long been interested in a potential connection between creativity and mental illness. The major challenge here is to define creativity and establish measurable indicators. Creativity has been described as the process of bringing something new into existence. It involves the capacity to take unrelated structures and combine them harmoniously in different ways for new purposes. The creative mind is alert to unexpected connections. An individual with a rich reservoir of knowledge is regarded as intelligent, whereas an individual who uses that knowledge in an original and constructive way is considered creative. 2 The creative process is not fully understood; some even feel that a precise definition is unattainable.3 Nonetheless, creativity can be described as the process of bringing something new into being where the outcome is larger than the input received by the creative mind. 4,5 Creative individuals are sensitive to gaps in human knowledge and these voids act as catalysts in their search for solutions. This is the highest form of human adaptation; whether to a greater or a lesser degree, it may exist in all people.

The creative process can be likened to a four-stage computer process. 6 If information processing and storage is the primary process, the second stage is the incubation or pondering phase, during which ideas germinate at a subconscious level. The third phase involves illumination, or flashes of insight, and the fourth is the period of elaboration during which the new idea is developed and tested. These stages can be additionally likened to the biological rhythm of conception, gestation, birth and infancy. This pattern is not strict. As a rule, the process of illumination is gradual with countless small bursts of insight, such as with Charles Darwin’s elaborations on his theory of evolution.

Dream processes shed some light on creativity. As with poetry, dreams are replete with visual and highly idiosyncratic metaphors. Dreams are the art of the unconscious; whilst dreaming, we tap into a creative source. The dreaming psyche has seemingly unlimited creative potential. An anecdote about Kekule, the chemist, recounts that he conceived the benzene ring after a dream in which he saw a serpent biting its tail.

The Creative Personality

Creative people must be assessed on an individual basis. Not all persons of superior intelligence are creative, and not all creative people have superior intelligence. Although creative potential is dependent on intelligence, actual creative achievement is independent of intelligence (e.g. one does not have to be tall to be a successful basketball player). Highly intelligent people are prone to self-criticism, which has an inhibiting effect on the development of creativity. A combination of high intelligence and special aptitudes appears to promote creativity. Unconventionality, egocentrism, flexibility, tolerance for ambiguity and a preference for complexity are among the attributes of creative individuals. 7 Psychological testing has shown that creative individuals are frequently more emotionally troubled than are non-creative individuals; however, they also have more ego strength for dealing with problems. Their personal qualities include imagination, persistence, perseverance, dedication and stamina. Creative children tend to be egotistic and gullible. This egotism provides them with the confidence to believe that they are capable of unique achievements, whilst momentary gullibility enables them to break through scepticism and into creativity.

McClelland illuminated a controversial notion when he described the creative individual as one who is characterised by competition, either with an external standard of excellence or with his or her own internal aspirations. 8 Driving absorption, the ability to ignore failure and adversity and tremendous curiosity are noted as a predictive set of personality traits.9Although creative individuals are difficult to live with, whether their creativity flourishes or not frequently depends on the support that they receive from others. 10 Among the characteristics of creative people, Tarlaci (2014) included openness to experimentation and change, rebelliousness, individuality, sensitivity, playfulness, self-assertiveness, curiosity and simplicity. 11

Although there is a compulsion for order, symbolisation and communication are at the core of creativity. Intelligence, domain-specific knowledge/expertise, motivation and adaptive traits such as openness, broad interests and self-confidence are closely associated with creativity (Feist 1999). 12 Despite the fact that these characteristics of creative people are obviously independent of psychopathology, they point towards better mental health. Research on creativity in neuroscience has revealed that creativity is associated with ‘ordinary’ rather than psychopathological brain processes.13

Psychopathology

Since the time of Plato, philosophers have debated a conceivable connection between creativity and psychopathology. He proposed a logical paradox when he stated that a poet does not know what he is going to write, and yet he cannot produce a poem if he has no picture of what he describes. As a Greek philosopher, Plato was a reincarnationist. He obviously solved his own riddle by attributing hidden creative knowledge to remembrances of a previous life and to springing from ‘Divine madness’. Aristotle noted the predisposition of great artists and poets to melancholia, but he perceived creativity as a rational process. Shakespeare repeated the older perspective through one of his characters who states, ‘the lunatic, the lover, and the poet are of imagination, all compact’. During the 20th century, systematic investigations into this relationship were unable to either support or refute this association. Cesare Lombroso failed to clarify this confusion in his book, Genius and Mental Illness. Nonetheless, his influence led to speculation that genius is an ‘ancestral gift’ transmitted in families in the same manner as mental disorders.

Recent empirical research has shown that creative individuals have a higher tendency towards psychopathology than those in non-creative professions. This propensity is expressed in personality traits, behaviours and experiences similar to those identified in clinically ill patients (Jamison 1989). The evidence has not clarified whether the psychopathology linked to creativity relates more closely to features of schizophrenia or affective disorders. Countless novelists and dramatists have family histories of psychiatric disorders. Severe personality deviations have been observed among visual artists and writers and possibly among thinkers and scholars as well. Jamison noticed mood disorders among writers and artists. 14

Bipolar disorder may be more frequent among creative individuals than in the normal population. One study reported a higher incidence of depression and bipolar disorder among creative people, and especially among writers.15Another study noted a higher incidence of depression and alcoholism among writers and artists. Following recent epidemiological studies with large samples, Kyaga et al. (2013) argued in favour of an association between professional authors and psychiatric disorders. 16 They illuminated familial associations between the creative professions and schizophrenia, bipolar disorder, anorexia nervosa and possibly autism. 16They noted that this association was more evident in cases of self-employed artists and less so in scientific creativity, where the subjects had passed through several professional screening procedures.

In another epidemiological study, Parnas et al. (2019) found that the relatives of academics have a significantly increased risk of suffering from schizophrenia or bipolar disorder. 17 In another study, they suggested that ‘creativity and an increased risk for mental disorders seem to be linked by a shared vulnerability that is not manifested by clinical mental disorders in the academics.’ 18 The literature has made significant connections between bipolar disorder and creative accomplishment, with much of the thinking inspired by biographical accounts of poets and musicians who presented with signs of bipolar disorder. 19 Studies by Burkhardt et al. (2018) suggest that, in persons at-risk for bipolar disorder, their mood swings are strongly associated with creativity, but whilst there is evidence of increased creativity, there is no evidence of higher creative achievement. 20

Observations of the bipolar mood domain identify a high prevalence of changes in intuition, empathy, appreciation of danger and predictive capacity. However, these changes do not necessarily include supra-sensory changes in the primary senses of smell, taste, vision, touch or hearing. Parker et al. (2018) suggested that clinicians should be aware of non-psychotic, supra-sensory phenomena in patients with bipolar disorder and that the identification of such features could explain the increased creativity evident in those with a bipolar condition. 21

After examining the life of Charles Dickens, Longworth and Carlson (2018) maintained that there was very little historical evidence for the suggestion that he experienced bipolar disorder. 22 However, they did suggest that he displayed characteristic bipolar symptoms. They also maintained that his childhood was an outstanding example of personal resilience and that his own story was just as fascinating, if not even more intriguing, than any of those that he had created. Their investigations concluded that Dickens’ story confirmed the connection between writers, creativity and mood disorders. Retrospective psychiatric assessment of historical figures and the slotting of these celebrities into biological compartments may be risky. Biographical studies of creative people are criticised for having possible recall, interviewer, selection and cultural sampling bias. 23

The suicide rate is high among artists, and this has been linked to manic depression. Adverse financial circumstances and disappointments due to the rejection of their artistic productions are sufficient to explain this apparently high rate. In contrast, musicians have a low suicide rate, very likely reflecting the healing effect of music. In addition to alcohol, opium has been a historical favourite addictive drug of writers, of which Charles Dickens is an example; opium addiction was partially responsible for his death. 24 Ludwig’s study on 1000 outstanding individuals found an upsurge in alcohol abuse in artists, especially writers. 25 Post (1994) found a similar result among prose writers and playwrights. 26 Although Ernest Hemingway, the Nobel Prize winner for literature, may be a good example of this phenomenon, he committed suicide later in his life. Creative individuals may be notorious for their alcohol and drug misuse; however, it is not clear whether drug induced psychopathology promotes their creative expression. Whilst it is possible that the disinhibiting influence of mild psychopathology and the judicious use of alcohol or drugs could facilitate creativity, this phenomenon has potentially contributed to the confusion in which psychopathology is described as the ‘producer’ of creativity.

Absence of Psychopathology

Alongside these studies, other reports glorify the mental health of geniuses and eminent individuals. The Stanford 35-year follow-up study of over 1000 geniuses, the MacKinnon study of creativity in architects and Havelock Ellis’s psycho-biographical study of eminent men all emphasised the absence of psychopathology among these creative individuals. 27

In an investigation on the prevalence of psychopathology, in a sample of 291 famous men, Post (1994) noted that they all excelled by virtue of their abilities, originality, drive, perseverance, industry and meticulousness. 26Even though most of them had unusual personality characteristics and minor neurotic abnormalities, all of the subjects in this study were emotionally warm, with a gift for friendship and sociability. Post additionally noted that, among creative individuals, scientists show the fewest psychological abnormalities. Functional psychoses are less frequent than epidemiology would suggest. Depressive conditions, alcoholism and possible psychosexual problems are more prevalent than expected in some professional categories, particularly among writers. Hare (1987) noted that banning stimulant drugs in sports did not lower the achievements significantly, and that the same should be true of creativity. Poetic vision has been equated with psychedelic experiences. 28 Creative activity has been observed to be at its highest level in patients who are moderately ill, and at its lowest level in groups identified as severely ill. 29

Although there is no significant difference in the incidence of psychotic illness among males and females, there is less creativity among the latter. If the hypothetical connection between creativity and psychopathology were valid, the incidence of creativity should be proportional to gender. Historically, unfavourable social pressures and opposing cultural factors have represented major explanations for the lower incidence of creativity among women. This disparity points towards the fact that creativity has to be nurtured and is not automatically generated by psychopathology. Despite an equal incidence of mental illness in men and women, there have been few female geniuses in any culture; this challenge the probability of a clear connection between psychopathology and creativity. The same argument may be used against a pure biological view of creativity; both men and women have the same biological make up, yet fewer geniuses have been identified among female population.

Psychodynamic Perspectives

Psychoanalysts have postulated dynamic psychopathologies for the creative process. Analysts incline towards seeing artists as neurotics and their productions as sublimations of sexuality and regression in the service of the ego. 30 They consider the motives for creative activity as impulses that compensate for dissatisfaction and as defences against depression. Some perspectives differ from traditional psychoanalytical ideas, emphasise the crucial role of synthetic ego operations and draw distinctions between psychopathology and creativity. 31Analysts suggest that novel ideas exist in the subterranean regions of the mind. Whilst the conscious mind has no access to these hidden areas in the normal state, it is easier for a disturbed mind to tap information from the unconscious or preconscious. 32 Sims suggests that the psychotic and the creative states are subjectively indistinguishable and that delusions arrive in the minds of the mad in the same manner that ideas drop into the minds of the creative.33In contrast,Slater and Meyer report only minor psychiatric disorders among creative people. 34Although it would appear that psychopathology does not preclude creative activity, it may release it. In general, the creative person enjoys conflict free intimacy with the preconscious and is a model of psychological health. 35

Orderly Mind

The neurobiological model of schizophrenia suggests that a deficit in the systems involved in information-processing could contribute to its symptomatology. 36It has been hypothesised that such a deficit could favour the creative association between information units.37Psychopathology linked creativity has even been associated with abstract disciplines such as mathematics. If these views were accepted, creativity and schizophrenia would be separated only by a ’neurological difference’. Andreasen challenged the hypothesis of a connection between creativity and schizophrenia.38He argued that the bizarre nature of schizophrenic experiences is far from original, and that the cognitive impairment of such patients inhibits their creativity.

The creative intelligent person experiences an attention surplus, whereas a schizophrenic patient suffers from an attention deficit. As a case in point, a creative child may figure out in two seconds what the teacher is going to say, after which he may be looking around, waiting for the teacher to finish and appearing as if he is not paying attention. In contrast, because of a failure in the normal filtering of stimuli, schizophrenics tend to make unusual associations that result from over-inclusive thinking in which countless disconnected elements are included in their reasoning. 39 Although higher cognitive individuals also demonstrate ‘pseudo over-inclusive thinking’, this is due to their capacity to conceive and utilise two or more contradictory concepts simultaneously.40

Bleuler (1950) described intellectual ambivalence as both characteristic of schizophrenia and as superficially similar to the janusian process of oppositional thinking that involves conceiving of two or more opposites simultaneously. 41 The Kent-Rosanoff word association test has been used to assess this process. 42 In contrast to the creative thinker who is fully aware of logical contradictions, the schizophrenic patient is unconscious of the contradictory nature of his or her utterances. For example, when Albert Einstein derived his theory of relativity, derived from the fact that a man falling from the roof of a house was both in motion and at rest, he was fully aware of the contradictory nature of his thinking. 43 Another example is Frank Lloyd Wright’s revolutionary design of Falling water, in which nature and interior space coexist. The janusian process was initially identified in highly creative writers, visual artists and scientists. The fluency of association observed among creative individuals can be mistaken for over-inclusive thinking. 44Since their brains process increased sensory input effectively without cognitive overload, creative individuals derive an advantage from their higher levels of associative thinking.

Contrary to popular belief, in their cognitive and conceptual style, creative writers resemble those suffering from the manic phase of affective disorders, rather than schizophrenics. However, whereas the over-inclusiveness of maniacs is based on bizarre associations, that of writers is due to an imaginative recognition of original associations. Whilst writers are capable of controlled flights of fancy, manic imaginations are bizarre and based on personalised reason. The racing thoughts of a creative intellect are productive, whereas those of the manic are destructive. Albert Einstein claimed that he discarded a new idea every two minutes.

Creative thinking is polythetic and should not be confused with flight of ideas. Schuldberg (1990) investigated the overlap between schizotypal and hypomanic traits and suggested that affective symptoms may be more important than primary process thinking in determining creativity within the general population. 45 The fluctuation of thoughts experienced by higher cognitive ability individuals can be mistaken for mood swings. Fink et al. (2014) challenged the connection between creativity and psychopathology and proposed that the domains of artistic and scientific creativity should be analysed separately. 46

Although the creative potential of autistic people has been recognised, they differ from over perceptive children in many respects. One fundamental difference is that the creative potentials of the latter are polythetic, whereas such potentials of the of autistic individuals are generally monothetic. A key diagnostic criterion for autism—restricted and repetitive behaviours and interests—combined with a small number of research studies, suggest that generating original ideas or artefacts may be challenging for autistic individuals. 47Nonetheless, a minority within this population has exceptional artistic gifts, and a wider group embraces activities typically associated with creative expression, including visual art, music, poetry and theatre.

A three-level multilevel meta-analytic approach investigated the relationship between creativity and schizophrenia. The analyses of Acar et al. (2018), with 200 effect sizes gathered from 42 studies, detected a mean effect size of r =−0.324, 95%CI [−0.42, −0.23]. 48When the analyses focused on the moderators, they found that the relationship between schizophrenia and creativity was moderated by the type and content of the creativity measure, the severity of the schizophrenia and the patient status. The negative mean effect size was firmer with semantic-category or verbal-letter fluency tasks than the divergent thinking or associational measures. They submitted that when these findings are analysed along with previous meta-analyses on the association between creativity, psychoticism and schizotypy, creativity and psychopathology appear to have an inverted-U relationship. Whilst a mild expression of schizophrenia symptoms may support creativity, a full demonstration of the symptoms challenges it.

Schizophrenia and schizotypy have frequently been associated with above average creativity; nonetheless, empirical studies on the relationship between schizophrenia spectrum disorders and enhanced creativity have generated inconsistent results. 49 Even though some mental processes may appear to be similar in creative and psychotic thinking, the current literature challenges this conclusion. 50,51,52Psychopathology does not play a role in the genesis of higher order creativity; nonetheless, the psychological defence mechanism of overcompensation goes some distance towards explaining the high achievements of mentally or physically disabled individuals. 53

The Myth of Drug Induced Creativity

The belief that brain alone is the source of creativity led to the idea that altering brain chemistry could make people more creative. The truth may be that the gentle psychopathology created in the brain might serve as a facilitator of creativity rather than a producer of creativity. The psychopathology generated by the psychedelic drugs might help to open Aldous Huxley’s ‘doors of perception.’ Huxley (1954) proposed “Doors of Perception” to illustrate the enlightenment induced by LSD etc.54 Interestingly, such a proposal is close to Zizzi and Pregnolato’s depiction of ‘very fast switches from the quantum logic of the unconscious to the classical logic of consciousness’ (Zizzi & Pregnolato,2012). 55Those who glorify such drug induced creativity are unaware that long term substance misuse can only kill creativity as the ‘switches’ become permanently damaged and lead to psychopathological states.

When one’s sense of self is suspended and space-time sense dissolves, psychedelic experiences occur, and such experiences should not be confused for true mystical experiences. Psychedelic experiences are pseudo-mystical experiences. True mystical perceptions and cognitions relate to what is essentially ineffable, pertaining to the nature of existence rather than being limited to familiar objects that are intrinsic to everyday experience. The hallucinating drug user or alcoholic is functioning at the level of impaired consciousness, while the mystic is operating at a higher level of consciousness. Mystics have full awareness of their altered state of consciousness and they are also in a position to switch back to their ordinary mode of perception, unlike a hallucinating patient. It may be true that psychedelic experience has created an interest in artistic activity and the raw materials obtained in such experience may be useful in eventual artistic creation, but the psychedelic experience as such is not a creative experience because motor functioning is impaired during psychedelic experience and information flow to the hands and fingers are affected. 56 The natural state of a relaxed, happy, and well-adjusted person is more creative rather than the perplexed psychedelic state. There may be ‘psychedelic artists,’ but not psychedelic scientists indicating the difference in the creative process of scientific generativity and artistic.

Drug induced creativity is a conundrum that need serious clarification as many young people are trapped in such faulty perceptions. Cannabis is the most widely used illegal substance globally. Schafer et al (2011) suggested that cannabis produces psychotomimetic symptoms, which in turn might lead to connecting seemingly unrelated concepts.57Such divergent thinking is considered primary to creative thinking. They argue that a drug induced altered state of mind may indeed lead to breaking free from ordinary thinking and associations, thereby, increasing the likelihood of generating novel ideas or associations. But the harmful effects of cannabis use have been extensively evaluated.58,59,60,61,62,63Cannabis abuse is quite unlikely to generate any sustainable creativity-‘the creative Big Bang’ would soon end up as a big crunch.

If creativity is a neurological phenomenon, creative people should have additional neural pathways, but psychedelic drugs have not been proven to create such new neural pathways. Speculations about specific brain regions promoting creativity is of great scientific interest. Creativity involve an architect and a set of engineers. According to Amit Goswami, quantum unconscious domain is the architect and the real source of creativity if brain does the engineering works. 64 Psychoactive substances do not act directly on the quantum consciousness but may help to open the gates to the hidden dimensions of consciousness. When quantum views of creativity are given due significance, the neurologically based psychedelic promotional views of creativity crumble. If not having creative abilities is deemed as a ‘brain deficit,’ use of illegal drugs to promote creativity can be compared to using medications to treat ADHD. But only if we use the ‘brain disease model’ of psychiatry, the argument of ‘brain deficit model’ will hold water. It may be even true that psychedelic drugs may have a quick and transient destressing effect and that could promote a creative mental state, but the production of any direct creativity through the use of such drugs is questionable.

Problematic Childhood

Some children of superior intelligence attempt to mask their creativity by being over-talkative and overactive. Such children run the risk of being misdiagnosed as ADHD. Creative children frequently have a unique sense of humour that their peer group cannot appreciate. Creative children are every so often resented by peers because of crazy or unusual ideas and their forcefulness and passion in presenting them or for pushing their ideas on others. Their divergent thinking is not helpful in school examinations, which require convergent thinking, and this could explain the poor academic achievement of several geniuses. The divergent thought processes of creative children must be differentiated from inattention and underachievement. For example, a highly intelligent child might fathom out what the teacher is going to say next and become inattentive. Although creativity is associated with divergent thinking, this alone does not correlate well with creative achievement.65 Creative children overflow with ideas and play with new ideas and concepts. They are not motivated or even concerned about high grades and need individualized attention lest they might fall on the wayside. There is nothing more frustrating than being a creative intelligent and become underachieved.

Creative children demonstrate certain unusual traits such as daydreaming, wanting to work alone, sharing bizarre thoughts and conflicting opinions. These qualities will not please the traditional teachers and bring them in conflict with them and their lack of conformity to the classroom structure can be even confused with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. Highly critical parents kill creativity; unfortunately, countless creative individuals have chaotic childhoods leading to psychological problems in their adult lives. Mismatching due to variation in I.Q could lead to mismatching with parents and siblings. Mother and father may be of average intelligence, but the child can be above average intelligence, and could cause mismatching leading to behavioural problems.

There is a special group of children around the world who have high intelligence and intuition, healing abilities, and a strong spirituality and they are grouped as Indigo people in appropriate cultures. It can be stated that Indigo is people with high sensitivity level, unique creativity, high intuition ability, healer, and people with their own charisma for those around. 66According to the proponents of these new ideas, these children are often mislabelled as having behaviour disorders. Little is known from scientific research about the Indigo phenomenon. Indigenous populations are familiar with Indigo-like children. The purpose of studying these children when they are adults is to better understand these children when they are older and advance behaviour health sciences by increasing awareness of the Indigo phenomenon and learning about their lived experiences. There has been hardly any serious scientific study on the Indigo phenomenon.

A phenomenological study looked at the lived experiences of 10 adult Indigos. The study explored the lived experiences of 10 adult Indigos on the island of Oahu, Hawai'i (> or = 18+ years old-7 females, 3 males; mean age = 52.4 + SD). 67 Through in-depth semi-structured personal interviews, the experiences of these adults were analysed and interpreted to identify the common experiences faced during childhood, what worked for their assimilation into society, and recommendations for parents, educators, and health professionals on how to work with Indigos. Bioenergy field photographs of each participant were also taken. Statements related to the phenomenon were placed into themes, coded, and categorized as the investigators reached a consensus of common themes. Seven primary themes and nine secondary themes emerged from the findings.

The primary themes were: grandmother/mother had a similar gift; guided by a higher power to heal self and others; felt 'different' or misunderstood; did not openly share their unique abilities; having challenges with partner relationships; history of abuse/violence or frequently disciplined; and use of intuition at work and/or school. Secondary themes included: Using Hawaiian and cultural healing methods; everyone has a degree of intuition and the use of intuition to know when to see a doctor or not; various unique abilities from body and multiple careers; mental health institutions, and financial struggle. Self-reports on participants' life purpose, their unique abilities, and being misunderstood were also collected. It was concluded that Indigos felt mislabelled or misunderstood throughout their lives despite their belief that their life purpose was to help humankind.

Academic psychologists are sceptical about Indigo phenomenon and argue that the phenomenon is a cover up to normalise the odd behaviour of children who could otherwise be included under the category of attention deficit disorder, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, autistic spectrum disorders and learning disabilities. Health experts are concerned that labelling a disruptive child an "indigo" may delay proper diagnosis and treatment that could help the child or investigate the parenting style that may be causing the behaviour.

Inspiration and Perspiration

Creativity is regarded as the product of inspiration or creative imagination combined with meticulous, disciplined effort. The Edisonian perception of invention as 1% inspiration and 99% perspiration is explained by the hypothesis of interactive creativity; it assumes that the inspirational aspect has a paranormal component. In his thesis on interactive creativity, Laszlo supported his hypothesis with observations on cultural creativity. 68These observations included the collective advance of entire populations through the typical creative activity of their members and by documented incidents in modern science in which different investigators developed scientific insights simultaneously, without any known contact. 68 Early cultures developed similar 7tools; calculus was discovered simultaneously by Newton and Leibni and biological evolution was described independently by Darwin and Wallace. Similarly, Graham Bell and Elisha Grey both applied to patent the telephone on the same day. The Rubic’s cube was conceived simultaneously and designed both by Rubic and a Japanese inventor. Nylon was discovered in both New York and London, hence, the name NyLon.

Jung’s research into the phenomenon of creative synchronicity helped him to formulate his concept of the collective unconscious. Psychological disturbances may represent the consequences of creative endeavour and Jung (1973) considered them the price to be paid for persistent exploration of the unknown.69 Polayni (1994) suggested that scientific discovery is informed by the imagination and integrated by intuition, and vice versa.70 This statement is close to the Edisonian perception of creativity: If imagination is a property of the brain, intuition occurs in the unconscious realm. Whilst Laszlo’s views are not definitive, they indeed supplement our existing knowledge about creativity. The inspirational aspect can be better explained by an expanded model of brain-mind-consciousness, and Xavier suggests a para-psychodynamic.71

Biological Perspectives

Particularly gifted individuals have determined the evolution of civilisation. Karlsson (1984) commented regarding creative individuals: ‘Without their genes, men might still live in caves’. 72Nonetheless, countless gifted individuals have a very ordinary family background, with no ancestral history of creativity. For example, Newton came from an undistinguished family. Genetics researchers look for the biological roots of creativity, with some believing that the mind is reducible to chemistry. Whilst intelligence may be a trait that can be cloned, creativity may not be attached, and it may prove even more complex than genetic manipulation. Kelly et al. (2007) suggested that creative inspiration is akin to mysticism. 35

Responses to both dopamine inhibiting drugs and to the psychoses triggered by the drugs that increase dopamine activity underlie the dopamine hypothesis of psychosis. However, dopamine over-activity in psychosis should not be confused with dopamine fluctuations in creative individuals. Dopamine diminishes with aging, which may explain the decreasing powers of creativity after the age of twenty.73

The relationship between age and outstanding achievement has captured the attention of researchers into creativity.Whilst Lehman maintained the perspective that creative achievement has a curvilinear single-peak function for age, other researchers have described two separate age-peaks. 74Outstanding contributions among mathematicians after the age of fifty are exceptions. The age-related observations support a biological basis for creativity.

Future Directions

Study of creativity is an important area of research where consciousness studies and psychopathology meet each other. Cognitive scientists have pondered over the link between psychopathology and creativity for a long time without making any firm conclusions and appear to be barking at the wrong trees. The very process of creativity ought to be explored before any progress in this area of research could be achieved and the current reductionist model of mind stands as a hindrance. The following suggestions may be helpful for future researchers.

1. Establish the psychopathology of psychotic disorders

2. Creativity linked genetic studies are warranted, biological correlates of creativity need further elucidation.

3. Expand the current model of brain-mind-consciousness complex so as to explain the inspirational element of creativity.

4. More longitudinal, international and multicultural studies recommended.

5. Given the affinity of psychosis-proneness to the artistic creativity domain,

studies should be focussing artistic creativity and scientific creativity separately.

Clinical Implications

The study of creativity has clinical implications: A) Psychiatric understanding of creativity provides a better picture of patient functioning that could assist in clarifying the definitions of both normalcy and psychopathology. B) Early detection of creative talents in children might help to give special guidance for such children and thereby prevent potential psychiatric problems. C) When they coexist, differentiating creativity and mental illness is useful: The former might require nurturing and the latter warrant clinical intervention.

Discussion

Whilst it is true that investigators have observed a high incidence of psychiatric symptomatology of an affective nature among creative writers and artists, it is debatable whether this relationship is causal, an effect or a contributory factor. The increased psychopathological states observed in artistic creative individuals suggest that art and science reflect two different arenas of creativity. The mechanism of generation of novel ideas may be identical in art and scientific creativity, but they are evaluated differently by the two groups resulting in different types of products. Creativity and mental illness can coexist, and the creative impulse has a therapeutic effect on the psychiatric condition. Creativity can be therapeutic for those who are already suffering from mental illness; creative art therapies applied in clinical and psychiatric settings report positive health-related outcomes. 75 Even in rare cases of psychopathology induced creativity, the individual will require highly developed intellectual protective factors. It is the disciplined portion of the mind that enables outstanding creative achievements. Creativity of the highest order is a product of laborious intellectual effort. When they coexist, psychopathology is a mediator, not the producer of creativity, and the creativity may be cathartic.

There is no scientific consensus regarding the association between psychopathology and creative achievement. The literature does not substantiate the high reported incidence of mental illness among creative people. It is possible that predispositions to mental illness and creativity tend to co-occur because they reflect an underlying personality and cognitive style predisposed to both creativity and mood disorder. The high reported incidence of mental illness potentially signifies an ‘occupational hazard’ and creativity stands independent of psychopathology. The normal creative person can swing back to reality from a transient ‘creative psychical shift’ (e.g. such as a diver who searches for diamonds in the deep sea and then returns to the shore). The sensitivity and intensity that facilitate creative expression may additionally make highly creative people more susceptible to depression.

Early investigations of geniuses were retrospective. Formal meta-analyses were not considered justifiable. All forms of creativity were mixed in the studies, without distinguishing the different domains of creativity. Most of the studies were confined to English speaking people, whilst creativity is a global phenomenon. A multiplicity of literature does not mean that the ideas expressed are established scientific truth. This is true of creativity, which may be as mysterious as creation itself. The prevailing model of the mind may be inadequate for a full appreciation of the creative process. It would be easier for a ‘camel to pass through the eye of a needle’ than to explain creativity from a reductionist perspective. The inspirational component of creativity continues to be an enigma. It is my contention that creativity is essentially an inner, psychic phenomenon. We do not have even an approximate model of the brain-mind-consciousness complex, let alone know the true aetiology of schizophrenia and bipolar disorder. Therefore, it would be prudent to suspend our psychopathology allied perspectives of creativity until we develop a deeper understanding of consciousness.The association between creativity and psychopathology has soared to the level of cultural myth and this is evident in many films in which mentally ill persons are portrayed as extraordinarily creative. 76

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Acknowledgement: 
None
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
JAMES PAUL PANDARAKALAM, Consultant Psychiatrist, North West Boroughs Healthcare NHS Foundation Trtsust, Hollis park Hospital, Warrington, UK.
Corresponding Author Details: 
JAMES PAUL PANDARAKALAM, Consultant Psychiatrist, North West Boroughs Healthcare NHS Foundation Trust. Hollins Park Hospital & AFG hospitals, Hollins Lane, Warrington WA2 8WA, U.K.
Corresponding Author Email: 
jpandarak@hotmail.co.uk
References
References: 
  1. Corliss RW. A search for Anomalies. Journal of   Scientific Exploration 2002; 16:453
  2. Mussen PH, Conger JJ, Kagan J. Child Development and Personality (5th edn). pp. 262- 264.New York: Harper& Row,1979.
  3. Abra J. Changes in creativity with age: data explanation, and for further predictions. International journal of aging and human development 1989; 28:105-126
  4. Koestler A.  The Three Domains of Creativity. In: Dutton D., Krausz M. (eds) The Concept of Creativity in Science and Art. Martinus Nijhoff Philosophy Library, vol 6. Springer, Dordrecht,1981.
  5. Bronowski J. The creative process is scientific in scientific genius and creativity. Readings from Scientific America, New York, W.H. Freeman and Co.p3-8,1987.
  6. Ludwig AM. Reflections on creativity and madness. American Journal of Psychotherapy 1989; 43:4-14.7.
  7. Jauk E, Benedek M and Neubauer AC. The road to creative achievement: a latent variable www.frontiersin.org October 2014;5 (3): 1211.
  8. McClelland D, Atkinson J, Clark R., et al. The Achievement Motive. New York: Appleton-
  9. Ciskszentmihalyi M and Csiksezentmihaly IS. Family influences on the development of giftedness. In The origins and Development of High Ability (Ciba Foundation Symposium (eds G.R.Bock & K.Akrill)1993 ; pp.187-206 Chichester: Wiley
  10. Gardner H. Creating Minds. New York: Basic Books, 2011.
  11. Tarlaci S. Neuroquantology, Quantum physics in the Brain. New York: Nova Science Publishers, 2014.
  12. Feist, G J.  A meta-analysis of personality in scientific and artistic creativity. Pers. Soc. Psychol 1998; Rev.2, 290–309. doi: 10.1207/s15327957pspr0204
  13. Fink A, and Benedek, M. EEG alpha power and creative ideation. Neurosci. Biobehav 2014; Rev. 44, 111–123. doi: 10.1016/j.neubiorev.2012.12.002
  14. Gitlin MJ, Swendsen J, Heller TL, Hammen C. Relapse and     impairment in   bipolar disorder. Am J Psychiatry1995; 152:1635-40.
  15. Richards R and Kinney DK. Mood swings and creativity. Research Journal 1990; 3 (3): 202-217.DOI: 10.1080/10400419009534353
  16. Kyaga S, Landén M, Boman M, Hultman CM, Långström N,andLichtenstein, P. Mental illness, suicide and creativity: 40-year prospective total population study. J. Psychiatr 2013; Res. 47, 83–90. doi: 10.1016/j.jpsychires.2013.09.010 
  17. Kyaga S., Lichtenstein, P., Boman, M., Hultman, C., Långström, N., and Landén, M.  Creativity and mental disorder: family study of 300,000 people with severe mental disorder. Br. J. Psychiatry 2011; 199, 373–379. doi: 10.1192/bjp.bp.110.085316 Merten
  18. Parnas J, Sandsten KE, Vestergaard CH, Nordgaard J. Schizophrenia and bipolar illness in the relatives of university scientists: An epidemiological report on the creativity-psychopathology relationship. Frontiers in Psychiatry 2019; 10:175.
  19. Johnson SL, Murray G, Fredrickson B, Youngstrom E A, Hinshaw S, Bass J M, Deckersbach T, Schooler J,Salloum I. Creativity and bipolar disorder: Touched by fire or burning with questions? Clinical Psychology Review; 2012; vol. 32 (no. 1); p. 1-12
  20. Burkhardt E, Pfennig A,Breitling G, Pfeiffer S, Sauer C, Bechdolf A, Correll CU,Bauer M, Leopold  K. Creativity in persons at-risk for bipolar disorder—a pilot study.  Early Intervention in Psychiatry; Oct 2018
  21. Parker G, Paterson A, Romano M, Granville S. Supra-sensory phenomena in those with a bipolar disorder. Australasian Psychiatry; Aug 2018; vol. 26 (no. 4); p. 384-387
  22. Longworth G, Carson J. Recovery heroes from the past: Charles Dickens (1859:2003): "it was the best of times it was the worst of times".  Mental Health & Social Inclusion; Apr 2018; vol. 22 (no. 2); p. 78-8.
  23. Jaswant ST, Hans G. A narrative review of creativity and mood disorders. Indian Journal of Psychiatry; 2019; vol. 61 (no. 9)
  24. Reddy IR, Ukrani J, Indla V, Ukrani V. Creativity and psychopathology: Two sides of the same coin?  Indian Journal of Psychiatry 2018; Volume 60, Issue 2, April-June.
  25. Ludwig AM. The Price of Greatness: Resolving the Creativity and Madness Controversy. New York, USA: Guilford Press; 1995.  
  26. Post F.  Creativity and Psychopathology. British Journal of Psychiatry 1994; 165; 22-34.
  27. MacKinnon DW. The nature and nurture of creative talent. American psychology 1962; 17:484-495. 
  28. Hare E. Creativity and mental illness. British Med   Journal 1987; 295, pp 1587-89.
  29. Ghadirian AM, Gregoire P, Kosmidis H. Creativity and the Evolution of Psychopathology, Creativity research journal 2001;13(2) 145-148.
  30. Freud S. Leonardo da Vinci and a memory of his childhood, in Complete Psychological works, New York, Hogarth Press, vol 11, pp63-137,1957.
  31. Klein R: Creativity and Psychopathology. Journal of Humanistic Psychology 1971; 11(1):40-52
  32. Kubie L. Neurotic Distortions of the Creative Process. University   of Kansas Press, Lawrence,1958
  33. Sims A.  Symptoms in the mind. London: Bailliere, Tindall, 1988.
  34. Slater E, Mayer A& Robert S. Contribution to   pathography of   musicians.
  35. Kelly EF, Kelly E W, Crabtree A, Gauld A, Grosso M & Greyson B. The Irreducible Mind: Toward a psychology for the 21st Century. New York: Rowman & Littlefield Publishers,2007.
  36. Combalt BA & Kellp JG. Impaired attention, genetic, and the psychophysiology of schizophrenia. Schizophrenia Bulletin 1994; 20:31-46.
  37. Hansefus N.& Magaro P. Creativity and schizophrenia in equality of empirical constructs. British Journal of Psychiatry 1976; 129:346-349.
  38. Andreasen NC, Canter A. The creative writer: Psychiatric symptoms and family history. Compr Psychiatry 1974; 15:123-131
  39. Braff DL and Greyer MA. Sensorimotor gating in schizophrenia. Arch.Gen. Psychiatry 1990; 47,181-188.
  40. Rothenberg A. The process of Janusian thinking in creativity. Arch.Gen. Psychiatry 1971; 24:195-205.
  41. Bleuler E. Dementia Praecox or the group of schizophrenias, Zinkin J(Trans); New York: International University Press,1950.
  42. Schwartz S. Language and cognition in Schizophrenia; Hillside, NL Lawrence Erlbaum,1978
  43. Rothenberg A. Einstein’s creative thinking and the general theory of relativity: A documented report, American Journal of Psychiatry 1979;136:38-43
  44. Gathercole CE. A note on some tests of over inclusive thinking, British Journal of Medical Psychology 1965; 38:59-62.
  45. Schuldberg D. Schizotypal and hypomanic traits, creativity, and psychological health. Creative research journal 1990; 3(3):557-56
  46. Fink A, Benedek M, Unterrainer Human-F, Papousek I, Weiss M. Creativity and psychopathology: are there similar mental processes involved in creativity and in psychosis-proneness?  Front. Psychol 2014; 5:1211. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2014.01211
  47. lona R. Autism, Creativity and Aesthetics, Qualitative Research in Psychology, DOI: 10.1080/14780887.2018.1442763 
  48. Acar S, Chen X, Cayirdag N. Schizophrenia and creativity: A meta-analytic review Schizophrenia Research 2018; 195: 23-31.
  49. Wang L, Xu X, Wang Q, Healey G, Su L, Pang W. Are individuals with schizophrenia or schizotypy more creative? Evidence from multiple tests of creative potential. Creativity Research Journal; Apr 2017; vol. 29 (no. 2); p. 145-156
  50. Dietrich A.  The myth conception of the mad genius. Front. Psychol 2014; 5:79. doi: .3389/fpsyg.2014.00079
  51. Simonton DK. More method in the mad genius controversy: a historiometric study of 204 historic creators. Psychol. Aesthet. Crea. Arts 2014; 8, 53–61. doi: 10.1037/a0035367
  52. Schlesinger J. Creative myth conceptions: a closer look at the evidence for the “mad genius” hypothesis. Psychol. Aesthet. Crea. Arts 2009; 3, 62–72. doi: 10.1037/a0013975  
  53. Pandarakalam JP. Psychopathology of creativity: an analysis. Irish Psychiatrist. 2005;6(3):117-121.
  54. Huxley A. The Doors of Perception: The Heaven and Hell. New York:Vintage Publication, 1954.
  55. Zizzi P, Pregnolato M. Quantum Logic of the Unconscious and Schizophrenia. Neuroquantology 2012; 10(3): 566-574.
  56. Krippner S. Psychedelic Drugs and Creativity. Journal of Psychoactive Drugs.1985;17 (4): 235-245.
  57. Schafer, G., Feilding, A., Morgan, C.J. A., Agathangelou, M., Freeman, T., & Curran, H. V.   Investigating the interaction between schizotypy, divergent thinking and cannabis use.  Consciousness and Cognition, 21, 292-298. doi10.1016/j.concog.2011.11.009
  58. Cohen K, Weinstein AM. Synthetic and non-synthetic cannabinoid drugs and their adverse effects - a review from public health prospective. Frontiers in Public Health 2018; 6: 162. doi: 10.3389/fpubh.2018.00162. 
  59. Di Forti M, Quattrone D, Freeman T, Tripoli G, Gayer-Anderson C, Quigley H, et al. The contribution of cannabis use to variation in the incidence of psychotic disorder across Europe (EU-GEI): A multicentre case-control study. The Lancet Psychiatry 2019; 6 (5): 427–36. doi: 10.1016/S2215-0366 (19) 30048-3. 
  60. Myles H, Myles N, Large M. Cannabis use in first episode psychosis: Meta-analysis of prevalence, and the time course of initiation and continued use. Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry 2016; 50 (3): 208–19. doi: 10.1177/0004867415599846. 
  61. Gage SH, Hickman M, Zammit S. Association between cannabis and psychosis: Epidemiologic evidence. Biological Psychiatry 2016; 79 (7): 549–56. doi: 10.1016/j.biopsych.2015.08.001. 
  62. Hasan A, von Keller R, Friemel CM, Hall W, Schneider M, Koethe D, et al. Cannabis use and psychosis: A review of reviews. European Archives of Psychiatry and Clinical Neuroscience 2019. [Epub ahead of print] doi: 10.1007/s00406-019-01068-z. 
  63. Foster BC, Abramovici H, Harris CS. Cannabis and cannabinoids: Kinetics and interactions. The American Journal of Medicine 2019; 132 (11): 1266–70. doi: 10.1016/j.amjmed.2019.05.017. 
  64. Goswami A. Quantum Creativity. London: Hay House, 2014. 
  65. Gardner H. Creativity: an interdisciplinary perspective. Creativity research journal1988 ;1. 8-26.
  66. Rosenshein J.B. Parenting the highly sensitive child: A guide for parents and caregivers of ADHD, Indigo and highly sensitive children. Bloomington: Balboa Prerss,2013.
  67. Bagnol L, Alexander J, Ewing H, Chu D. Indigos in Hawai'i: a phenomenological study of the experience of growing up with spiritual intelligence. Pacific Health Dialog; Mar 2011; vol. 17 (no. 1); p. 83-98.
  68. Ervin L. “The Genius Hypothesis”:  Exploratory concepts for a   scientific understanding of unusual creativity. The Journal of Scientific Exploration 1994; l8, No. 2: 257-267.
  69. Jung C A. Synchronicity, an acasual connecting principle. Collective Works.  Vol.viii,   Princeton, N.J., Princeton Press, 1973.
  70. Polayni M. The Creative Image. Ibid p91-108 Post Felix.  Creativity and Psychopathology. British Journal of    Psychiatry 1994; 165; 22-34.  
  71. Play fair LG. Medium of the Century. London: Roundtable Publishing Co. 2010.  
  72. Karlsson J: Creative intelligence in relatives of mental patients. Heriditas1984; 100: 83-86
  73. Wang Y, Chan GLY, Holden JE, Dobko T, Mak E, Schulzer M, Huser JM, Snow BJ, Ruth TJ. Age dependent decline of Dopamine D1 receptors in human brain. Science 1998; 30:56-61
  74. Lehman HC. Age and achievement. NJ: Princeton University Press,1953.
  75. Abt HA. At what ages do outstanding American astronomers publish their most cited papers? Publication of the astronomical Society of   the Pacific1983; 95,113-116
  76. Degmeþiü Dunja. Schizophrenia and Creativity. Psychiatria Danubina, 2018; Vol. 30, Suppl. 4, pp S224-227.

Solitary Basal Ganglia Tuberculous Abscess in an Immunocompetent Individual

Authors
Raja Shariff REF & Sapuan S
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2019;12(3):a021
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Background: Tuberculosis (TB) involving the central nervous system (CNS) account for 2 to 5% of all TB cases. Treatment should be guided by histological evidence, which unfortunately can be difficult to obtain in those with CNS dissemination. We present a rare case of solitary basal ganglia tuberculous abscess, with no evidence of pulmonary TB.
Case report: An immunocompetent 53-year old man presented with a history of fever, vomiting and altered mental behaviour. Initial computed tomography (CT) of the brain revealed a rim-enhanced, hypodense lesion in the left basal ganglia region. Cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) analysis was initially suggestive of bacterial infection, but due to worsening symptoms and subsequent imaging showing a non-resolving mass with worsening perilesional oedema, hydrocephalus, acute ventriculitis and basal cisterns involvement, the possibility of a tuberculous abscess (TBA) was entertained. Unfortunately, a biopsy was deemed too risky. A decision was made to start anti-tuberculous therapy (ATT) with Dexamethasone empirically, alongside performing a ventriculo-peritoneal shunting in view of the hydrocephalus. Following that and ATT, the patient improved clinically.
Discussion: Solitary TBA in the basal ganglia are extremely uncommon, even in endemic countries. TBA has been seen in both the immunocompromised, or otherwise. As histological evidence is often difficult to obtain, there are evidence to support presumptive ATT for diagnostic and therapeutic purposes, which was adopted in our case.
Conclusion: This case highlights the complexity of the decision to initiate empirical treatment of tuberculous abscess; when a direct biopsy of the lesion to further aid diagnosis is not possible.

Abbreviations: 
Anti-Tuberculous Therapy (ATT), Cerebrospinal Fluid (CSF), Computed Tomography (CT), Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI), Central Nervous System (CNS), Mycobacterium Tuberculosis (MTB), Tuberculous Abscess (TBA), Ziehl-Neelsen (ZN), Nucleic Acid Amplification Test (NAAT)
Keywords: 
Tuberculous Abscess, Exra-Pulmonary Tuberculosis, Brain Abscess, Case Report

Background

Tuberculosis (TB) involving the central nervous system (CNS) account for 2 to 5% of all TB cases1. Commonly it manifests in three ways – meningo-encephalitis, tuberculomas or abscesses2. Treatment should be guided by histological evidence, which unfortunately can be difficult to obtained in those with CNS dissemination. We present a rare case of solitary basal ganglia tuberculous abscess, which provided a diagnostic dilemma and led to complex management planning.

Case Report

A 53-year old man, with no known medical illness, presented with a 5-day history of fever, vomiting and altered mental behaviour. His vital signs were stable, on arrival aside from being pyrexial at 38°C. There was, however, neck stiffness noted on clinical examination as well as evidence of increased tone on the right upper and lower limbs, with an upgoing right-sided plantar response. Power was preserved in all limbs.

An initial contrast-enhanced computed tomography (CT) imaging of the brain revealed a hypodense lesion measuring 1.6 cm x 2.1 cm x 1.8 cm in the left basal ganglia region, with rim enhancement, complicated by cerebral oedema causing mass effect and mild hydrocephalus (Figure 1). A lumbar puncture was performed, and cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) analysis suggested the possibility of bacterial infiltration (Table 1). Initial, Ziehl-Neelsen (ZN) staining, mycobacterium tuberculosis (MTB) cultures and Gene Xpert nucleic acid amplification test (NAAT) from CSF were negative and a HIV antibody serology was negative as well. A transthoracic echocardiogram and CT imaging of the thorax and neck were both performed, failing to identify a possible source of spread. Furthermore, there was no evidence of focal lung infection or collection, and no evidence of lymphadenopathy of note.

The patient was initially treated for 2 weeks with intravenous antibiotics, using intravenous Ceftriaxone 2g BD and Metronidazole 500mg TDS. Intravenous Dexamethasone was also commenced in view of the cerebral oedema. Unfortunately, the patient showed no clinical improvement, prompting repeat CT and Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) which revealed an unchanged left basal ganglia enhancing lesion, with worsening obstructive hydrocephalus, perilesional oedema causing midline shift. The lesion was in contact with the lateral wall of the left lateral ventricle, with evidence of acute ventriculitis and involvement of the basal cisterns (Figure 2). A right-sided ventriculo-peritoneal shunt was inserted in view of the worsening hydrocephalus and persistent symptoms of headache and vomiting. Subsequently, stereotactic drainage and biopsy of the lesion was discussed but could not be performed in view of its deep location. A decision was thus made to initiate anti-tuberculosis therapy (ATT) empirically and to cease antibiotics. Subsequently, the patient’s clinical state improved with ongoing ATT and active inpatient rehabilitation, alongside improvement in the lesion, via radiological evidence (Figure 3).

Table 1: Cerebrospinal Fluid (CSF) test and other investigations performed during admission.

Test for Cerebrospinal Fluid (CSF) Results Other Test Results
Micro-Total Protein 3.8 g/dL Lumbar Puncture Opening Pressure 19 cm H20
Glucose 1.65 mmol/L Lumbar Puncture Closing Pressure 16 cm H20
Culture & Sensitivity Negative Random Capillary Glucose 7.3 mmol/l
India Ink Negative    
Ziehl-Neelsen Stain Negative HIV Antibody Negative
MTB Culture Negative Echocardiogram No vegetation or mass
MTB NAAT (GeneXpert) Negative    
Cell Count & Cytology No atypical cells. Mixed of pleomorphs and lymphocytes seen    

Figure 1: CT imaging of the brain on (a) axial and (b) saggital view, illustrating a well-circumscribed, rim-enhanced lesion in the left basal ganglia region, suspicious of an abscess

Figure 2: T2-sequence of MRI brain on axial view (a) pre- and (b) post-procedure involving ventriculo-peritoneal shunting, illustrating a well-circumscribed hyperdense basal ganglia lesion, with peri-lesional oedema, as well as evidence of hydrocephalus.

Figure 3: Non-contrasted CT brain on axial view, illustrating less apparent left basal ganglia lesion, with hypodensities in areas of previous oedema, as well as an in-situ ventriculo-peritoneal shunt.

Discussion

Basal ganglia abscesses are very rare, incidence varying between 0.9 to 4% of total brain abscesses3. These are often disseminated lesions from sources such as congenital heart disease infections, intrathoracic and abdominal sepsis, dental caries, otitis media or sinusitis3-4. Solitary tuberculosis lesions, which includes tuberculous abscesses (TBA), in the basal ganglia are additionally more uncommon, even in endemic countries, as they normally have a predilection for the cerebellum and brainstem5. TBA has been seen in both the immunocompromised, or otherwise, where clinical presentation differs only slightly6-9.

Similar to other brain abscesses, stereotactic aspiration remains the gold standard diagnostic tool but there is a risk of rupture into ventricles or the subarachnoid space (leading to ependymitis or meningitis), worsening neurological deficits and more importantly the possible need for repeated procedures in as many as 70% of patients9.

Although experts advocate the combination of both surgical and chemotherapeutic therapy in managing TBA, the former was limited by the location of the lesion, whereas the latter was due to lack of histological evidence. Furthermore, the lack of risk factors, negative yield from cultures, NAAT and ZN stain, and inability to biopsy made the decision-making complex in our patient. Fortunately, there are evidence to support presumptive ATT for diagnostic and therapeutic purposes, which was adopted in our case5. This, however, requires cerebrospinal fluid examination, lung CT imaging and brain MRI that can provide circumferential evidence for diagnosis and to monitor treatment progress, all of which were performed in our gentleman5. In fact, CT imaging of the thorax is considered mandatory in cases suspicious of asymptomatic and subclinical extra-neurological tuberculosis, although yield remains poor (detecting abnormalities in only 38 to 56%)10.

Conclusion

Although CNS involvement in extra-pulmonary tuberculosis is not uncommon, TBA in the basal ganglia region remains a unique entity which poses a challenge in terms of diagnosis, as histological evidence is often difficult to obtain. As adopted in the case highlight, empirical therapy using ATT remains a valid option, especially in areas limited by resources and appropriate skills to perform intracranial biopsies, which is a common occurrence in endemic areas globally.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Acknowledgement: 
The authors would like to acknowledge Universiti Teknologi MARA and the Clinical Research Centre (Hospital Sungai Buloh) for supporting the submission of the following case report.
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
RAJA SHARIFF REF (MRCP), Universiti Teknologi MARA (UITM) Sungai Buloh, Malaysia. SAPUAN S (MMED), Hospital Sungai Buloh, Malaysia.
Corresponding Author Details: 
RAJA SHARIFF REF, Universiti Teknologi Mara Sungai Buloh, Jalan Hospital, 47000, Sungai Buloh, Selangor, Malaysia.
Corresponding Author Email: 
rajaezman@gmail.com
References
References: 
  1. Goldstein W, Maimon N & Avendan˜o M. Central nervous system tuberculous abscess. Eur J Intern Med 2007; 18(6): 504-506.
  2. Corti M, Palmero D & Trione N, et al. Cerebral abscess associated with multi drug resistant tuberculosis and immune reconstitution. Int J Tuberc Lung Dis 2006; 10(12): 1417.
  3. Bhatia R, Tandon P & Mishra AK. Inflammatory lesion of the basal ganglia and thalamus: Review of twenty-one cases. Neurosurgery 1986; 19: 983-988.
  4. Lutz TW, Landott H, Wasner M, et al. Diagnosis and management of abscess in the basal ganglia and thalamus: a survey. J Neurosurg 1984; 44: 226-232.
  5. Psimaras D, Bonnet C, Heinzmann A, Cardenas G, et al. Solitary tuberculous brain lesions: 24 new cases and a review of the literature. Revue neurologique 2014; 1-10.
  6. Farrar DJ, Flanigan TP, Gordon NM, Gold RL & Rich JD. Tuberculous brain abscess in a patient with HIV infection: case report and review. Am J Med 1997; 102(3): 297-301.
  7. Schoeman JF, Morkel A, Seifart HI, et al. Massive posterior fossa tuberculous abscess developing in a young child treated for military tuberculosis. Possible role of very rapid acetylation of isoniazid. Pediatr Neurosurg 1998; 29(2): 64-68.
  8. Whiteman M, Espinoza L, Post MJ, Bell MD & Falcone S. Central nervous system tuberculosis in HIV-infected patients: clinical and radiographic findings. Am J Neuroradiol 1995; 16(4): 1319-1327.
  9. Cardenas G, Soto-Hernandez JL, Orozco RV, et al. Tuberculous Brain Abscesses in Immunocompetent Patients: Management and Outcome. Neurosurgery 2010; 67: 1081–1087
  10. Yaramis A, Bukte Y, Katar S & Ozbek MN. Chest computerized tomography scan findings in 74 children with tuberculous meningitis in southeastern Turkey. Turk J Pediatr 2007; 49(4): 365–9

Ketamine and Propofol Combination Used in Deep Sedation Reduces Opioid Use and Adverse Outcomes in Pediatric Esophagogastroduodenoscopy in Ages 2-18 Years

Authors
David C Mari & Abhik K Biswas
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2019;12(3):a020
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Background: EGD procedures can elicit significant pain and cause complications in children. Therefore it is essential to use sedation agent(s) that reduce pain and are safe.
Aims: Primary aim is to determine the differences in adverse cardiopulmonary events, vital sign parameters, objective pain, and adjunct fentanyl use during EGD procedures between propofol and ketofol (ketamine-propofol mixture) sedation agents. Secondary aim is to determine the differences in site performance metrics between the two agents.
Methods: Retrospective analysis of 90 patients undergoing deep sedation for same-day EGD procedures at a military academic medical centre. Patients were analysed separately via age groups of 2-11 years and 12-18 years. Forty-one patients underwent sedation via propofol, and 49 patients underwent sedation via 1:5 ratio of ketamine to propofol as main agents. Main agents were administered via intravenous loading dose based on 1 mg/kg of propofol followed by a 200-250 mcg/kg/minute infusion. One mcg/kg fentanyl bolus was given when a sedationist perceived patient pain.
Results: Ketofol reduced fentanyl use by ~1 mcg/kg compared to propofol in all age groups (p<0.008). Ketofol compared to propofol had less apnoea requiring intervention (3.7% versus 53.8%, p<0.001, ages 2-11 years; and 0% versus 33.3%, p=0.005, ages 12-18 years), and less hypotensive events (3.7% versus 15.4%, p=0.192, ages 2-11 years; and 0% versus 13.3%, p=0.144, ages 12-18 years). There was no difference in LOS between main sedation agents (p>0.008).
Conclusions: Ketofol is effective at reducing opioid demand and adverse cardiopulmonary events during EGD procedures compared to propofol in ages 2-18 years.

Abbreviations: 
Esophogastroduodenoscopy (EGD), length of stay (LOS), mean arterial blood pressure (MAP), heart rate (HR), respiratory rate (RR), and Children’s Hospital of Eastern Ontario Pain Scale (CHEOPS).
Keywords: 
Ketofol, Propofol, Fentanyl, Esophagogastroduodenoscopy, and Deep Sedation.

Introduction:

Aesophagogastroduodenoscopy (EGD), is a common same-day procedure used for both diagnostic and therapeutic purposes during which a small flexible fibreoptic tubular camera is introduced through the mouth and advanced through the pharynx into the oaesophagus, stomach, and duodenum. EGD procedures are performed under deep sedation, since they can elicit significant pain, discomfort, and anxiety. When pain is not controlled properly, this can lead to an increase use of adjunctive medications such as opioids. This can extend the length of stay and increase adverse outcomes.1 In a prospective, randomised, double-blinded study, Bedirli et al. found that use of opioid medications such as fentanyl are associated with increased adverse outcomes.2

Since procedural sedation-related complications (such as hypoxia, hypotension, desaturation, and emergent airway intervention) remain one of the biggest challenges in EGD procedures, it is important to select the correct medications to reduce these complications.3 Currently, propofol is the most common and popular main procedural sedation agent used for EGD procedures.4,5

Propofol is the preferred main intravenous agent in EGD procedures due to its amnestic, sedative, and hypotonic properties.6 It has also been favoured due to its ultra-rapid response and duration of effects, usually taking 30-60 seconds for onset of action and lasting up to 4-8 minutes.7 However, propofol has been associated with significant adverse effects that include dose-related hypotension, bradycardia, laryngospasms, and apnoea.8,9 Propofol does not have analgesic properties and will usually be combined with opioids for pain control.10

Ketamine is classified as a dissociative anaesthetic and is known to provide analgesia and amnesia. Important to note, it causes less respiratory or cardiovascular depression when used alone for children greater than 4 months of age.11 However, ketamine alone can cause such side effects of laryngospasm, increase secretions, and vomiting.12,13

The mixture of propofol and ketamine in one syringe (coined ketofol) has been shown to be effective in sedation for various procedures, such as spinal anaesthesia,14 along with orthopaedic15 and cardiovascular procedures16 in adults and children. Use of this combination has been favoured in brief but painful emergency room procedures due to the opposing haemodynamic and respiratory effects of both sedative medications.17 The negative cardiac effects produced by propofol can be attenuated with the use of ketamine, resulting in an increase in mean arterial pressures and cardiac indices.18,19 The complementary effect of both mediations has enabled the use of lower doses for each medication, thus lowering the toxicity and side effects.20,21 Although there are studies comparing activities of ketofol sedations,22-25 there has not been a study published on ketofol compared to propofol use in children during EGD procedures.

The primary goal of this study was to determine if there were differences in the outcomes of adverse cardiac and pulmonary events, vital sign parameters including objective pain, and administration of adjunct pain medication (for which fentanyl was used in this study) during EGD procedures between propofol and ketofol groups. A secondary goal was to determine if there was a difference in site performance metrics for EGD procedures (sedation time, stop of sedation to discharge time, and length of stay) between propofol and ketofol groups.

Methods:

This study protocol was approved by the Naval Medical Center Portsmouth Institutional Review Board in compliance with all applicable federal regulations governing the protection of human subjects. Research data was derived from an approved IRB protocol: number NMCP.2018.0021. Written informed consent was not required by the Naval Medical Center Portsmouth IRB, as this data concerned historical dae-identified patients.

Study Design

This was a single centre, retrospective study of a cohort of children (ranging from 2 to 18 years). Data was collected from March 2011 to September 2013 at Naval Medical Center Portsmouth’s Paediatric Sedation Centre. EGD and sedation protocol was not changed during this time period. EGD procedures were performed by the same paediatric gastroenterologists throughout this time period. Sedation was performed by the same paediatric intensivists throughout this time period. All patients used in this study were involved in a same day EGD procedure. Forty-one patients underwent deep sedation via propofol as main sedation agent from March 2011 to May 2012. Forty-nine patients underwent deep sedation via propofol and ketamine combination as main sedation agent from May 2012 to September 2013. Each main sedation agent was given in a similar fashion as an initial intravenous loading dose based on 1 mg/kg propofol followed by an intravenous infusion of 200-250 mcg/kg/minute that was started less than 10 minutes prior to start of the procedure and stopped at the end of the procedure. Ketofol solution used was a 1:5 ratio of ketamine to propofol (40 mg:200 mg). One mcg/kg of fentanyl was given when the sedationist during the EGD perceived the patient experiencing pain. Exclusion criteria included: patients less than 2 years and greater than 18 years, those less than 10 kg, and patients receiving adjunct medications other than fentanyl, ondansetron, or lidocaine.

Data Collection

Fourteen patients were excluded due to weight less than or equal to 10 kg. In addition, 12 patients were excluded due to age less than 2 years or greater than 18 years. Past medical history, ASA class, procedure indications, age, weight, sex, pain scores, vital signs (mean arterial blood pressure [MAP], heart rate [HR], and respiratory rate [RR]), unplanned events (hypoxia defined as SPO2 less than 85% at any time point, and hypotension defined as mean arterial blood pressure with greater than 20% decrease from baseline blood pressure), emergent airway intervention (defined as apnoea needing bag mask ventilation or CPAP use), and unplanned intubation. Vitals and pain scores were obtained from initial presentation in the sedation suite, start of procedure, every 5 minutes during the procedure to stop of sedation, and at time of discharge. Midway procedure vitals used for statistical analysis were obtained by selecting vitals that were at the half-way point of the patient’s EGD procedure. The Children’s Hospital of Eastern Ontario Pain Scale (CHEOPS) was performed every 5 minutes during the EGD procedure by an independent United States Navy Corpsman and used to evaluate patient’s pain prior, during, at stop of sedation, and after procedure for this study.26

Statistics

All statistics performed in this study were calculated using SPSS Statistics programme (IBM Corp. Released 2017. IBM SPSS Statistics for Windows, Version 25.0. Armonk, NY: IBM Corp.). Mann-Whitney U nonparametric test between independent groups was performed to compare age, weight, total EGD procedure time, total time of sedation during EGD procedure, time from stop of sedation to discharge, total length of stay, and total fentanyl use (in mcg/kg) between the two main groups in this study (propofol and ketofol group). The significance level was set to 0.008 after a Bonferroni was corrected, in order to address the probability of making one or more false discoveries when performing multiple hypotheses tests. A repeated measures ANOVA was run to determine the effect of treatments over time for HR, MAP, and RR. Mauchly's test of sphericity was performed for both age groups. The Fisher Exact test was performed to compare propofol to ketofol in unplanned hypotensive events and unplanned apnoea requiring bag valve mask or CPAP. Pearson Correlation statistics were performed to study possible correlations between propofol or fentanyl and sedation time or length of stay. Statistical significance for Pearson Correlation statistics was considered when two-tailed p<0.001.

Results:

Table 1. Demographic divided into 2 age groups. EE= eosinophilic esophagitis. * indicates statistically significant difference.

 

Sedation Risk Age Groups

2-11 years old

12-18 years old

Propofol

n=26

%

Ketofol

n=27

%

Propofol

n=15

%

Ketofol

n=22

%

General

Demographics

Male

11

42.3%

16

59.3%

6

40%

10

45.5%

Female

15

57.7%

11

40.7%

9

60%

12

54.5%

Mean Age (years old)

6

 

7

 

15

 

16

 

Mean Weight (kg)

21.6

 

23.7

 

57.7

 

57.4

 

ASA I, II

26

100%

25

92.6%

15

100%

22

100%

ASA III

0

0%

2

7.4%

0

 

0

 

EGD Indications

EE

4

15.4%

4

14.8%

2

13.3%

0

0%

GERD

11

42.3%

9

33.3%

2

13.3%

5

22.7%

Dysphagia or Feeding Intolerance

0

0%

3

11.1%

4

26.6%

4

18.1%

Foreign Body Ingestion

1

3.8%

2

7.4%

0

0%

0

0%

Failure to Thrive

3

11.5%

1

3.7%

0

0%

0

0%

Abdominal Pain

7

26.9%

9

33.3%

6

40%

11

50%

Recurrent Emesis

3

11.5%

1

3.7%

1

6.6%

1

4.5%

Gastritis

0

0%

0

0%

1

6.6%

3

13.6%

Other

2

7.7%

0

0%

2

13.3%

4

18.1%

Unplanned Events

Hypotension (blood pressure >20% decrease from baseline)

4

15.4%

1

3.7%

2

13.3%

0

0%

Apnea requiring bag valve mask or CPAP

14

53.8%*

1

3.7%*

5

33.3%*

0

0%*

Intubations

0

0%

0

0%

1

6.6%

0

0%

Figure 1. Propofol amount total per weight (mg/kg). Bars represent standard error of the mean. There was no significant difference between the propofol and ketofol in all age groups.

Figure 2. Fentanyl amount total per weight (mcg/kg). Bars represent standard error of the mean. In all age groups, there was a significant difference between propofol and ketofol. *p<.008.

Figure 3. Vital signs. Mean arterial pressures for ages A) 2-11 years and B) 12-18 years. Main sedative agents’ MAPs were statistically different for ages 2-11 years (p =0.004), but not for ages 12-18 years (p =0.224) for all time periods. Heart rate for ages C) 2-11 years and D) 12-18 years. For Heart Rate, there was a statistically significant interaction between treatment and time for both age group using the Greenhouse-Geisser correction, p =0.002, p =0.014. Main sedative agents’ HRs showed to be statistically different for both age groups, p <0.001 and p =0.004.

Figure 4. Duration of time. A) total sedation time, B) stop of sedation to discharge, and C) total length of stay. In all age groups, there was no significant difference between propofol and ketofol. Bars represent standard error of the mean. *p<0.008.

Figure 5. Pearson Correlation. Propofol versus total sedation time for ages A) 2-11 years (p<0.01*), and B) 12-18 years (p<0.01*). Propofol versus length of stay for ages C) 2-11 years (p<0.01*), and D) 12-18 years (p<0.01*). * Correlation is significant at the 0.01 level (2-tailed).

Figure 6. Pearson Correlation. Fentanyl versus total sedation time for ages A) 2-11 years (p=0.506), and B) 12-18 years (p=0.961). Fentanyl versus length of stay for ages C) 2-11 years (p=0.378), and D) 12-18 years (p=0.352). No significant correlation was not seen for all age groups.

Ninety patients were retrospectively analysed in this study. Baseline demographics were similar between the groups, except for gender proportions (Table 1). Similar amounts of propofol per weight were used in each group (Figure 1). Ketofol significantly reduced fentanyl use in all age groups by ≥.99 mcg/kg compared to propofol alone (p<0.008 for all age groups, Figure 2). In the 2-11 year old age group, the propofol group required a mean fentanyl dose of 1.96 mcg/kg ± 1.24 mcg/kg and the ketofol group required a mean fentanyl dose of 0.44 mcg/kg ± 0.49 mcg/kg; thus ketofol required about 1.52 mcg/kg less fentanyl during EGD procedures. In the 12-18 year old group, the propofol group required a mean fentanyl dose of 1.38 mcg/kg ± 1.05 mcg/kg and the ketofol group required a mean fentanyl dose of 0.39 mcg/kg ± 0.59 mcg/kg; thus ketofol required about 1 mcg/kg less fentanyl during EGD procedures.

Vital signs (HR, RR, and MAP) and CHEOPS pain scores were obtained and analysed for baseline vitals, at the procedure midpoint, at stop of sedation, and at time of discharge. CHEOPS pain scores’ mean was 6 throughout all time periods for both groups, thus there was no statistically significant difference.

A repeated measures ANOVA was run to determine the effect of treatments over time for RR. There was sphericity for the interaction term, as assessed by Mauchly's test of sphericity in both age groups (p =0.070, p =0.762). For RR, there was not a statistically significant interaction between treatment and time for both age groups, p =0.163, p =0.804. The treatments were not found to be statistically different for either age group, p =0.736 and p =0.224.

A repeated measures ANOVA was run to determine the effect of treatments over time for HR. As assessed by Mauchly's test of sphericity, no sphericity was found in either age group (p <0.05). For HR, using the Greenhouse-Geisser correction, a statistically significant interaction was found between treatment and time for both age group, p =0.002, p =0.014. The treatments were found to be statistically different for both age groups, p <0.001 and p =0.004. A repeated measures ANOVA was run to determine the effect of treatments over time for MAP. Sphericity was found in both age groups for the interaction term, as assessed by Mauchly's test of sphericity (p =0.209, p =0.269). For MAP, there was not a statistically significant interaction between treatment and time for either age group, p =0.261, p =0.591. The treatments were statistically different for the 2-11 year old group (p=0.004), but not statistically different for the 12-18 year old group (p=0.224). (Figure 3 A-D)

Unplanned events were analysed for clinically significant hypoxia, hypotension, emergent airway intervention, and unplanned intubations. Ketofol compared to propofol had fewer hypotensive events in the 2-11 year old age group (3.7% versus 15.4%, p=0.192) and in the 12-18 year old age group (0% versus 13.3%, p=0.144). Ketofol compared to propofol had statistically significant fewer apnoea events requiring bag valve mask or CPAP intervention for the 2-11 year old group (3.7% versus 53.8%, p<0.001) and for the 12-18 year old group (0% versus 33.3%, p=0.005). There were no significant hypoxia events. There was one unplanned intubation in the propofol group of a healthy ASA I twelve year old female who had a 20 mL emesis episode after a loading dose of propofol was given on induction. (Table 1)

With propofol leading to significantly more fentanyl usage, more hypotension and emergent airway intervention during EGD procedures, we performed analysis to see if there was an effect on sedation time, time from stop of sedation to discharge, and length of stay (LOS). In all age groups, there was no statistical difference between propofol and ketofol for sedation time (p=0.115 for ages 2-11 years, p=0.124 for ages 12-18 years), time from stop of sedation to discharge (p=0.033 for ages 2-11 years, p=0.511 for ages 12-18 years), and LOS (p=0.026 for ages 2-11 years, p=0.109 for ages 12-18 years) (Figure 4). Based on Pearson correlation test, it was established that propofol was positively correlated with sedation time and LOS (+0.753 for sedation time and +0.611 correlation for length of stay with <0.001 significance) (Figure 5). There was no significant correlation between fentanyl and sedation time or LOS (Figure 6).

Discussion:

This was a retrospective study looking at 90 paediatric patients, ages 2-18 years, undergoing EGD procedures with either propofol or ketofol as the main sedative medication. Patients in this study had similar weights, ages, ASA scores, and EGD indications; however there baseline demographics were not similar with regards to gender proportion (Table 1). Based on the large prospective database on sedation use for procedures outside the operating room obtained by the Paediatric Sedation Research Consortium,27 we separated our patient population into two age risk groups to allow our results to be generalisable. To our knowledge, this study is the first to show that ketofol, when compared to propofol, significantly reduces fentanyl use (≥.99 mcg/kg, Figure 2) and cardiopulmonary adverse outcomes (Table 1) in paediatric EGD procedures.

EGD procedures are known to be invasive and painful. To decrease the pain appreciated by a patient, various adjuncts are often utilised. In our study, we used fentanyl for adjunct pain control. In both main sedation medication groups (propofol and ketofol), there was no statistical significance seen in objective pain based on CHEOPS scores with a mean score of 6 in all age groups (p>0.05). However, the amount of adjunct needed to maintain adequate pain control between both groups statistically and clinically differed (Figure 2). In all age groups, the propofol group compared to the ketofol group required almost 1 mcg/kg more of fentanyl, which leads to the potential for the patient to experience higher incidence of side effects, such as respiratory depression and hypoxia.28-30

The mechanism that lead to this significant difference in opioid demand between ketofol and propofol is most likely due to ketamine’s ability to stimulate opioid sigma receptors,31 thus leading to opioid sparing effects. It is unclear if propofol and ketamine interaction heightens this opioid sparing effect, because ketamine alone has not been shown to lead to opioid sparing effects in children.32

In a review of our population’s vital signs, there was a significantly higher MAP in the ketofol group compared to the propofol group for ages 2 to 18 years (Figure 3 A-B). In addition, the ketofol group had statistically higher HR compared to the propofol group for ages 2 to 18 years (Figure 3 C-D). It is our thought that this increase in MAP and HR in the ketofol group mediated by ketamine is a protective factor against major hypotensive changes (31). It is this effect that minimised unplanned hypotensive events in our ketofol group compared to the propofol group by 11.7% in ages 2-11 years and 13.3% in ages 12-18 years (Table 1).

One of the more noticeable differences in our main sedative medication groups was the unplanned apnoea events requiring CPAP or bag mask ventilation intervention. In our 2 to 11 year age group, propofol had 50.1% more apnoea events needing intervention compared to ketofol. In our 12 to 18 year old group, propofol had 33.3% more apnoea events needing respiratory intervention compared to ketofol. This was found to be statistically significant. It is unclear if this is also clinically significant since no emergent airway intubation was needed for these events. However, there was 1 emergent airway intubation in the 12-18 year old propofol group. Based on the review of the medical records, it appears that these apnoea events needing respiratory intervention were mostly associated after the initial loading dose of either propofol or ketofol prior to or at the start of the infusion. Thus, bring into question if not starting with a loading dose bolus would decrease adverse effects.

Despite the propofol group requiring more respiratory intervention, increased fentanyl use, and less haemodynamic stability seen, there was no statistical differences in total sedation time and LOS between the two main sedation medication groups (Figure 4). Yet when we ran correlation statistics, there was a positive correlation to increased propofol dosages, total sedation time, and LOS in ages 2 to 18 years (Figure 5); therefore, if our procedures were longer, there could be a statistically and possibly clinically significant increase in total sedation time and LOS for the propofol only group. Thus, we can infer that propofol compared to ketofol is not the main sedation medication of choice for longer similarly painful procedures in children ages 2 to 18 years, such as EGD procedure followed by a colonoscopy.

A limitation of our study is that it is retrospective. With that, we were not able to blind our sedationists to the main sedation medication that was chosen and could not control the interventions that were performed. Yet, based on strict exclusion criteria, we were able to control the interventions used in our analysis. Also, in our study we did not analyse patients under the age of 2 years. Reviewing the data, we had seven patients, and thus this patient population size was not powered to perform the proper statistical analysis. Another limitation to consider is the time difference in procedure protocols. However, since this study included over 2 years of data, procedure protocols were the same. Additionally, the EGD indications were similar between ketofol and propofol (Table 1). Another consideration of this study is generalisability. This study was conducted at a single centre, but the way we analysed our results makes it easier to perform large scale prospective studies to further investigate our findings. Last limitation is directly correlating fentanyl dose with a significant adverse event. Due to the short length of the EGD procedure, constant sedation medication infusion, and fentanyl dose, it is difficult to directly say that a particular fentanyl dose alone leads to an adverse event. Therefore we can only speculate based on correlation.

Conclusions:

Our study found that ketofol significantly reduced fentanyl use in all age groups by ≥0.99 mcg/kg and cardiopulmonary adverse events compared to propofol alone. In addition, an increase in the amount of propofol was positively correlated to increasing LOS and total sedation time for a child undergoing an EGD procedure. This suggests that increasing amounts of propofol leads to greater LOS. To conclude, our study indicates that ketofol can be a safer alternative to propofol use alone for deep sedation in EGD procedures for children ages 2 to 18 years.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Acknowledgement: 
We like to thank all Paediatric Intensivists and Paediatric Gastroenterologists involved in patient care. We would also like to thank Andrea McGlynn with her help and guidance with statistics used in this study. Authors in this manuscript have no conflicts of interest to disclose. This study was completed with no external or internal funding. We are military service members and employees of the U.S. Government. This work was prepared as part of our official duties. Title 17 U.S.C. 105 provides that “Copyright protection under this title is not available for any work of the United States Government.” Title 17 U.S.C. 101 defines a United States Government work as a work prepared by a military service member or employee of the United States Government as part of that person’s official duties. The views expressed in this manuscript reflect the results of research conducted by the authors and do not necessarily reflect the official policy or position of the Department of the Navy, Department of Defence, or the United States Government.
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
DAVID C. MARI, D.O., Capt USAF;Division of Pediatric Medicine, Naval Medical Center Portsmouth, 620 John Paul Jones Circle, Portsmouth, VA 23708. ABHIK K. BISWAS, M.D., CAPT (ret) USN; Division of Pediatric Critical Care Medicine, Naval Medical Center Portsmouth, 620 John Paul Jones Circle, Portsmouth, VA 23708.
Corresponding Author Details: 
DAVID C. MARI, Division of Pediatric Medicine, Naval Medical Center Portsmouth 620 John Paul Jones Circle, Portsmouth, VA 23708.
Corresponding Author Email: 
david.c.mari@gmail.com
References
References: 
  1. Samer Ammar M, Pfefferkorn MD, Croffie JM, et al. Complications after outpatient upper GI endoscopy in children: 30-day follow-up. Am J Gastroenterol. 2003; 98: pp. 1508-1511.
  2. Bedirli N, Egritas O, Cosarcan K, et al. A comparison of fentanyl with tramadol during propofol-based deep sedation for pediatric upper endoscopy. Paediatr Anaesth. 2012 Feb; 22(2): 150-155.
  3. Orel R, Brecelj J, Dias JA, et al. Review on sedation for gastrointestinal tract endoscopy in children by non-anesthesiologists. World J Gastrointest Endosc. 2015 Jul 25; 7(9): 895-911.
  4. Mustafaeva MN, Mizikov VM, and Kochneva ZV. Drug sedation during digestive tract endoscopy: current trends. Anesteziol Reanimatol 2009; 4: 32-38.
  5. Kochlar GS, Gill A, and Vargo JJ. On the Horizon: The Future of Procedural Sedation. Gastrointestinal Endoscopy Clin N Am. 2016; 26: 577-592.
  6. Watcha MF, Simeon RM, White PF, et al. Effect of propofol on the incidence of postoperative vomiting after strabismus surgery in pediatric outpatients. Anesthesiology, 1991, pp 2049.
  7. McCollum JS, Milligan RK, and Dundee JW. The antiemetic action of propofol. Anaesthesia. 1988; 43: 239-240.
  8. Hig Jr CC, McLeskey CH, Nahrwold ML, et al. Hemodynamic effects of propofol: data from over 25,000 patients. Anesth Analg, 1993, pp S21-S29.
  9. Claeys MA, Gepts E, and Camu F. Haemodynamic changes during anaesthesia induced and maintained with propofol. Br J Anaesth, 1988, pp 3-9.
  10. Varddi A, Salem Y, and Padeh S. Is propofol safe for procedural sedation in children? A prospective evaluation of propofol versus ketamine in pediatric critical care. Crit Care Med, 2002, pp 1231-1236.
  11. 11.   Grunwell JR, Travers C, McCracken CE, et al. Procedural Sedation Outside of the Operating Room Using Ketamine in 22,645 Children: A Report From the Pediatric Sedation Research Consortium. Pediatr Crit Care Med. 2016 Dec; 17(12): 1109-1116.
  12. 12.   Kurdi MS, Theerth KA, and Deva RS. Ketamine: Current applications in anesthesia, pain, and critical care. Anesth Essays Res. 2014 Sep-Dec; 8(3):283-290.
  13. Green SM, Roback MG, and Krauss B. Laryngospasm during emergency department ketamine sedation: A case-control study. Pediatr Emerg Care. 2010;26:798–802.
  14. Frizelle HP, Duranteau J, Samii K. A comparison of propofol with a propofol-ketamine combination for sedation during spinal anesthesia. Anesth Analg, 1997, pp 1318-1322.
  15. Weatherall A and Venclovas R. Experience with a propofol-ketamine mixture for sedation during pediatric orthopedic surgery. Paediatr Anaesth 2010; 20: 1009-1016.
  16. Mourad M, El-Hamamsy M, Anwar M, et al. Low dose ketamine reduces sedative doses of propofol during ambulatory trans-oesophageal echocardiography. Egyptian Journal of Anaesthesia, 2004, pp 41-46.
  17. Mortero RF, Clark LD, Tolan MM, et al. The effects of small-dose ketamine on propofol sedation: respiration, postoperative mood, perception, cognition, and pain. Anesth Analg, 2001, pp 1465-1469.
  18. Willman EV and Andolfatto G. Prospective evaluation of “ketofol”(ketamine/propofol combination) for procedural sedation and analgesia in the emergency department. Ann Emerg Med 2007; 49: 23-30.
  19. 19.   Kochs E, Scharein E, Mollenberg O, et al. Analgesic efficacy of low dose ketamine. Somatosensory-evoked responses in relation to subjective pain ratings. Anesthesiology 1996; 85: 304–314.
  20. Badrinath S, Avramov MN, Shadrick M, et al. The use of a ketamine-propofol combination during monitored anesthesia care. Anesth Analg 2000; 90: 858-862.
  21. Loh G and Dalen D. Low-dose ketamine in addition to propofol for procedural sedation and analgesia in the emergency department. Ann Pharmacother 2007; 41:485-492.
  22. Andolfatto G, Abu-Laban RB, Zed PJ, et al. Ketamine-propofol combination (ketofol) versus propofol alone for emergency department procedural sedation and analgesia: a randomized double-blind trial. Ann Emerg Med 2012; 59: 504-512.
  23. Sakai T, Singh H, Mi WD, et al. The effect of ketamine on clinical endpoints of hypnosis and EEG variables during propofol infusion. Acta Anaesthesiol Scand 1999; 43: 212–216.
  24. Hui TW, Short TG, Hong W, et al.Additive interactions between propofol and ketamine when used for anesthesia induction in female patients. Anesthesiology 1995; 82: 641–648.
  25. Badrinath S, Avramov MN, Shadrick M, et al.Use of ketamine–propofol admixture during monitored anesthesia care. Anesthesiology 1997; 87: A10.
  26. McGrath PJ, Johnson G, Goodman JT, et al. CHEOPS: a behavioral scale for rating postoperative pain in children. In: H.L. Fields, R. Dubner and F. Cervero (Eds.), Advances in Pain Research and Therapy, Raven Press, New York, 1985, pp 395-402.
  27. Cravero JP, Blike GT, Beach M, et al. Incidence and nature of adverse events during pediatric sedation/anesthesia for procedures outside the operating room: report from the Pediatric Sedation Research Consortium. Pediatrics. 2006 Sep; 118(3): 1087-1096.
  28. Godambe SA, Elliot V, Matheny D, et al. Comparison of propofol/fentanyl versus ketamine/midazolam for brief orthopedic procedural sedation in a paediatric emergency department. Pediatrics 2003; 112: 116–123.
  29. Skokan EG, Pribble C, Bassett KE, et al. Use of propofol sedation in a paediatric emergency department: a prospective study. Clin Pediatr 2001; 40: 663–671.
  30. Aydin Erden, I. Gulsun Pamuk, A. Akinci, et al. Comparison of propofol‐fentanyl with propofol‐fentanyl‐ketamine combination in pediatric patients undergoing interventional radiology procedures. Pediatric Anesthesia 2009; 19: 500-506.
  31. Kim SH, Kim SI, Ok SY, et al. Opioid sparing effect of low dose ketamine in patients with intravenous patient-controlled analgesia using fentanyl after lumbar spinal fusion surgery. Korean J Anesthesiol. 2013 Jun; 64(6):524-528.
  32. Michelet D, Hilly J, Skhiri A, et al. Opioid-Sparing Effect of Ketamine in Children: A Meta-Analysis and Trial Sequential Analysis of Published Studies. Paediatr Drugs. 2016 Dec; 18(6):421-433.

BJMP March 2019 Volume 12 Issue 1

Research Articles

Caregiver burden in the families of the patients suffering from bipolar affective disorder
Abdul Majid Gania, Harmanjeet Kaur, Sandeep Grover, AW Khan, Ajaz Suhaff, Kushal Baidya & Poonam Damathia
Full Text  PDF
The health anxiety in medical students , a comparative study from Taif University : Medical student’s syndrome revisited.
Samiyah Siraj Althagafi, Maram Hassan AlSufyani, Ola Ahmed Shawky, Omayma Kamel Afifi, Naif Alomairi & Ibrahim Masoodi.
Full Text  PDF

Hamman’s syndrome in a parturient: a case report

Authors
Rajashree Chavan
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2019;12(1):a007
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Hamman’s syndrome is a potentially life threatening clinical condition characterised by peripartum subcutaneous emphysema and pneumomediastinum. This obstetric complication typically occurs in late pregnancy and labour and is frequently observed in young healthy primiparous women. I report a case postpartum pneumothorax and pneumomediastinum associated with spontaneous subcutaneous emphysema in primiparae. She presented to us in normal labour followed by Instrumental delivery under epidural anaesthesia. 10 hours post-delivery; she developed extensive subcutaneous emphysema, pneumothorax & pneumomediastinum with significant symptoms. She was successfully managed & discharged home after 24 hours of presentation of Hamman’s syndrome. Hamman’s syndrome is a rare obstetric complication which may present with/ without pneumothorax. Incidence is estimated at 1 in 100,000 deliveries. Approximately 200 such cases have been reported in literature worldwide. To my knowledge, this is one of the very few cases of Hamman’s syndrome with pneumothorax.

Keywords: 
spontaneous pneumomediastinum, subcutaneous emphysema, pregnancy, labour

Case Report:

A 33 year-old ASA1, primigravida, presented to our delivery suite with spontaneous onset of labour at 38 weeks of gestation. Epidural analgesia was commenced to alleviate her labour pains. Subsequently, she underwent an assisted vaginal delivery of a live male baby (weighing 4660 gms) using Keiland’s outlet forceps after 90 min second stage of labour. 10 hours postpartum, she complained of dyspnoea & severe central substernal chest pain. She was noted to have an unusual swelling of face and neck with oxygen saturations of 90 % on room air. Ascultation of chest revealed normal bronchovesicular breath sounds, normal heart sounds with absence of added sounds. Arterial blood gases showed an O2 tension of 11 kpa, CO2 tension of 5 kpa and pH of 7.34. The diagnosis of subcutaneous emphysema, pneumomediastinum and small left apical pneumothorax (Hamman’s syndrome) was confirmed on chest X-ray (CXR 1). We ruled out differential diagnosis of pulmonary embolism, Tension pneumothorax, angina pectoris, pericarditis, dissection of aortic aneurysm, mediastinitis, cardiac tamponade, chest infection & oesophageal tear. She was managed conservatively by close monitoring for complications, administration of supplemental oxygen and use of simple analgesics. She demonstrated a complete uneventful recovery over the next 24 hours with normalising of chest signs (CXR 2).


CXR 1: shows pneumomediastinum, extensive surgical emphysema & a left apical pneumothorax.


CXR 2: shows small pneumomediastinum, the surgical emphysema & pneumothorax resolved.

Discussion:

Hamman’s syndrome is named after Louis Hamman (1847-1946), the physician who first described it in 1945. The first reference to this condition was in 1618, when Louise Bourgeois, midwife to the Queen of France, wrote, “I saw that she tried to stop crying out and I implored her not to stop for the fear that her neck might swell”3.

Hamman’s syndrome usually occurs in the 2ndstage of labour & is associated with prolonged and protracted labour and larger than usual babies 4. However, the clinical presentation is often delayed to the postpartum phase as was clearly seen in our case. The condition seems to be provoked by any valsalva manoeuver such as vigorous coughing/vomiting/sneezing, forced physical activity & enormous efforts during spontaneous vaginal delivery. Its occurrence is usually related to the expulsive phase of labour when ‘pushing down’ actively raised the intraalveolar pressure. This may subsequently increase the intrathoracic pressure up to 50 mm of Hg or higher1. Rupture of marginal alveoli with air entering along the perivascular sheath into the mediastinum is the most likely mechanism, in our case. It is probable that, the air tracts through the fascial planes into subcutaneous and retroperitoneal tissues. Other reported mechanisms of Hamman’s syndrome include oesophageal rupture during childbirth, or pneumomediastinum related to asthmatic bronchospasm5 or chest infection, or dissection of pneumoperitoneum, secondary to epidural catheter placement or caesarean section1.

Palpable crepitus on face & neck is suggestive of subcutaneous emphysema & appearance of this emphysema in labour is the hallmark of pneumomediastinum. Other features of pneumomediastinum include substernal chest pain, dyspnoea, voice change, cough, sore throat and tachycardia1. Hamman’s sign, a fine auscultatory crepitation synchronous with the heartbeat, heard along the left sternal border; is sometimes observed in this condition2.

Chest X-ray and CT thorax are the diagnostic tests. Majority of the patients with Hamman’s syndrome have pneumomediastinum & subcutaneous emphysema without any pneumothorax and this requires supportive management with strict monitoring. Our patient demonstrated a small pneumothorax, which was managed conservatively. A surgical intervention in the form of subcutaneous air drainage may occasionally be indicated in severe cases.

Overall most cases have a benign, self-limiting course when the aggravating factors are no longer present. Published data indicates that subsequent pregnancies pose no additional risk of recurrence5.

Conclusion:

Since Hamman’s syndrome is a potentially dangerous complication of normal childbirth. We propose that every obstetric anaesthetist and obstetrician should be aware of this syndrome.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
RAJASHREE CHAVAN, M.B.B.S D.A M.D Anaesthesiology F.R.C.A, Consultant Anaesthetist Basildon & Thurrock University Hospital NHS Foundation Trust, United Kingdom.
Corresponding Author Details: 
RAJASHREE CHAVAN, Consultant Anaesthetist, Basildon & Thurrock University Hospital NHS Foundation Trust, Nethermayne, Basildon, Essex, SS16 5NL, United Kingdom.
Corresponding Author Email: 
vidula77@doctors.net.uk
References
References: 
  1. Spontaneous pneumomediastinum in 3rd trimester of pregnancy-Discussion. Ann ThoracicCardiovascular Surg 2006
  2. Intrapartum pneumomediastinum associated with subcut emphysema. Canadian Medical Association Journal 1998
  3. Subcutaneous emphysema in labour. Anaesthesia 1993; 48:139-140
  4. Pleural disease in pregnancy. Clinical Chest Medicine 1992; 13:667-78
  5. Mediastinal & subcutaneous emphysema in pregnant patient with asthma. BJOA 1980; 87:440-3

BJMP March 2018 Volume 11 Issue 1

BJMP March 2018 Volume 11 Issue 1

Full Issue Booklet   PDF

Review Articles

Case Reports/Series
Adult Onset Still's Disease: A Case Report
Yasmeen Ajaz, Ravinder Bhatt, Rabah Elbahnasawy, Asif khan, Ali Ganai & Sameem Matto.
Full Text  PDF

Clinical Practice

Ovarian masses in pregnancy: a single centre retrospective study
Tanja Eichenberger-Gautschi, Alison Smith & Ahmad Sayasneh
Full Text  PDF

Education and Training

Training student doctors to become educators
Aimee Charnell, Laura Stephenson & Michael Scales
Full Text  PDF
Viewpoint

Letters to the Editor

Miscellaneous

Resuscitation
Jennifer Wolkin
Full Text  PDF

Ovarian masses in pregnancy: a single centre retrospective study

Authors
Tanja Eichenberger-Gautschi, Alison Smith & Ahmad Sayasneh
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2018;11(1):a1109
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Objectives: Ultrasound is proposed as being the first-choice modality to evaluate ovarian masses in pregnancy. The majority of cases are managed expectantly, unless suspicious features of malignancy or any complications, such as ovarian torsion, occur. The aim of this study was to evaluate the outcome of ovarian masses in pregnancy at a tertiary University Hospital in central London.

Methods: In a retrospective cohort study in a tertiary referral centre in central London between 12/01/2014 and 14/11/2016 we have analysed the characteristics, size and subsequent management of cases of adnexal masses in early pregnancy. We included pregnant women who underwent a transvaginal ultrasound scan before 15 weeks of gestation and were found to have an adnexal mass. Exclusion criteria were women with corpus luteum or women who had recent induction of ovulation as part of their assisted conception.

Results: 41 women were included in the study. Six cases were excluded. The mean diameter of ovarian cysts was 47.7mm (95%CI: 39.9-55.4). In 37/41 women, Ultrasound alone was performed to reach diagnosis with no other imaging or biomarker diagnostic modality. The most common diagnosis was mature teratoma in 20/41 women. One borderline tumour was found. 33/41 women (80.5%) did not require any surgical intervention. 8/41 women (19.5%) underwent surgical intervention in pregnancy. There was a significant difference in the mean diameter of ovarian cysts in the expectant management group (41.2mm; 95%CI: 34.7-47.7) and the mean diameter of cysts in the surgically managed group (74.5mm; 95%CI: 49.2-99.8).

Conclusions: Invasive cancer in pregnancy is rare. The results show a significant relation between the size of adnexal mass and the probability of surgery.

Introduction

With the increasing use of ultrasound as a standard examination in the first trimester, more incidental adnexal masses are detected. The reported incidence of adnexal masses in pregnancy varies, depending on the criteria used to define the mass. A literature review by Goh W. et al., found that 1% of all pregnancies are diagnosed with an adnexal mass 1. A more recent article has suggested adnexal masses are diagnosed in 5% of all pregnancies 2. Simple and functional cysts are very common, and they usually resolve after the first trimester 3. Mature teratomas are by far the most common persistent adnexal masses found in pregnancy 8. It has been estimated that up to 5% of adnexal masses in pregnancy are malignant 4.

Ovarian cysts are typically asymptomatic, but they can cause pain due to pressure on adjacent organs, rupture, bleeding or torsion. The latter case is a significant health condition which mainly requires emergency surgical intervention. During pregnancy, surgical management of ovarian cyst complications is more difficult and more challenging. This is mainly because of other differential diagnosis causing similar symptoms related to pregnancy such as ectopic pregnancy and miscarriage. In case of surgical intervention, the second trimester of pregnancy is supposed to be the safest window for surgery as the risk for drug-induced teratogenicity is smaller than in the first trimester, most functional cysts have disappeared by then and it is technically less difficult than operating during the third trimester 13.

Antenatally, ultrasound is considered to be the best first-line imaging to evaluate adnexal masses 5. Ovarian mass characterization into benign, malignant or borderline can be challenging in pregnancy. This is mainly due to the effect of high levels of gestational hormones which can cause decidualisation of the cystic or solid parts of the ovaries. Benign masses can mimic malignant masses due to this pregnancy related phenomena 12. One of the largest data in literature on ovarian mass characterization is published by the International Ovarian Tumor Analysis group (IOTA). All IOTA studies excluded pregnant women when they developed and validated the rules and models to characterize ovarian masses 14-17. This limits our knowledge and ability to use these models in pregnant women. It is known that tumour markers may be raised in pregnancy and should therefore not routinely been done 7. An alternative diagnostic tool is Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) which is considered to be safe in pregnancy and can be helpful if the ultrasound imaging is inconclusive in evaluating whether a mass is benign or malignant 6; 10. The American College of Gynecology and Obstetrics recommends that pregnant patients should be reviewed on a case-to-case basis and stated that there are no known biological effects of MRI on fetuses. However, Gadolinium, which help in characterizing ovarian masses, should be avoided when examining a pregnant patient 11.

The aim of this retrospective study was to look into characteristics, size and subsequent management of cases of adnexal masses in early pregnancy.

Methods

This was a retrospective study of data collected between 12/01/2014 and 14/11/2016 in the Early Pregnancy and Gynaecology Unit (EPAGU) of a tertiary referral centre (Guy’s and St Thomas’ NHS Trust, GSTT) in central London. The Ultrasound reporting system (Astraia Software Gmbh, Version 1.24.10, Munich, Germany, 2016) was searched for data. Cases included were consecutive. The study was approved as a service evaluation audit by the Clinical Governance team at Guy’s and St Thomas’ NHS Trust. The study included women who were diagnosed with an adnexal mass while having a transvaginal ultrasound scan TVS at or before 15 weeks of gestation. Pregnancy was confirmed by a positive pregnancy test and an intrauterine gestation on transvaginal ultrasound scan. Women who had the first gestational TVS after 15 weeks of gestation, pregnancies of unknown location, ectopic or trophoblastic pregnancies and patients who had ovarian stimulation treatment were all excluded.

Repeat ultrasound scan reports were retrieved from the Astraia system. Further procedures, tests and imaging results were retrieved using the Electronic Patient Reporting system at GSTT (EPR application, iSOFT Group plc., USA, 2004), PACS (GE Medical Systems, Wisconsin, USA, 2006), Badgernet (Clevermed, Client version 2.9.1.0, Edinburgh, UK). We have used the subjective impression of the examiner as the index test. If surgery was performed the final outcome to identify benignity or malignancy was considered to be the histological diagnosis if any removed tissue. Cytology was used for a reference test in two cases when ovarian cysts were aspirated only. Borderline tumours were classified as malignant for statistical analysis. Tumours were classified using the criteria recommended by the World Health Organisation (WHO) 9; 10. All ultrasound scan images were available and reviewed by author TEG to confirm the US finding. For statistical analysis, the SPSS software package was used (version 24 for Windows, Chicago, IL, USA). A two tailed student’s t test was used to compare means in ovarian masses diameters and a p value of less than 0.05 was considered statistically significant.

Results

7150 patients underwent transvaginal scans for early pregnancy in that period. In total 48 cases of women with adnexal masses in pregnancy and completed data were analysed. Seven women have been excluded; one woman being postpartum at the time of the finding of a large endometrioma, five pregnancies due to assisted conception and one woman was found to have a corpus luteum cyst (Figure 1).

Figure 1: Study flow chart.

41 women with 46 ovarian cysts could be included in the study. Two women had bilateral ovarian cysts, one had two ipsilateral cysts and one woman had three ipsilateral cysts. The mean age at the time of detection of the ovarian mass was 30 (95%CI:28-32) (Fig.2).

Figure 2: Age distribution in the study group.

The mean gestation at the time of first ultrasound was 7.4 weeks (95%CI:6.6-8.3). The mean diameter of ovarian cysts measured 47.7mm (95%CI:39.9-55.4). In 36 women ultrasound alone was performed to reach diagnosis, one woman had an extra MRI scan, two women had tumour markers on top of the TVUS and in two women an MRI scan and tumour markers were performed after the TVUS. The ovarian cyst(s) was on the right ovary in 16/41 women, on the left in 22/41, bilateral in 2/41 and in one case the side of the cyst was not reported. The most common ultrasound subjective impression was mature teratoma (22/46 cysts), followed by simple cysts (12/46 cysts), haemorrhagic cysts (6/46 cysts), endometriomas (5/46 cysts) and one possible mucinous Borderline tumour. The latter was confirmed later on histology as the stage FIGO 1A intestinal type mucinous Borderline tumour (Fig.3).

Figure 3: Distribution of origin of cysts by histology.

In total 8/41 women (19.5%) underwent surgical intervention; of these eight cases six underwent major surgery under GA and two had a cyst aspiration under local anaesthesia. Seven out of these eight masses were classified as benign on USS and were subsequently confirmed to be benign by histology or cytology. In only one case a complex adnexal mass was found on USS examination at 9 weeks of gestation and the MRI scan reported possible malignancy. Tumour markers in this 23-year-old woman were normal and a laparotomy was performed at 17 weeks of gestation to remove the mass. Histology showed the mass to be a mucinous borderline tumour, FIGO stage IA. In another patient, an oophorectomy had to be performed at the time of the Caesarean section at term for fetal distress as the ovary was found to be necrotic. In this patient an ultrasound at 10 weeks of pregnancy had demonstrated a 6cm diameter haemorrhagic cyst, which had presumably torted during the pregnancy without any symptoms to prompt the patient to refer herself. Histology in this case had shown an infarcted cyst with fibrosis and calcification. In four of the major surgery cases performed under GA uncomplicated laparoscopies were performed to remove the adnexal mass; in one case a laparoscopic salpingoophorectomy was performed as an emergency for a suspected ovarian torsion at 16/40 weeks. In three cases a laparoscopic procedure for cystectomy was performed electively for ongoing pain. In the first case a cyst was diagnosed in early pregnancy subsequently there was a miscarriage and the cyst was removed 4 months after the diagnosis. In the second case a cyst was found in early pregnancy the woman had a termination at 11 weeks of pregnancy and a cystectomy 5 months later. In the third case a laparoscopic cystectomy was performed 8 weeks after the diagnosis, however the woman suffered a miscarriage at 12 weeks of gestation. Histology confirmed dermoid cysts in all four of these cases. The two cyst aspirations performed under local anaesthesia and ultrasound guidance were both symptomatic for torsion, one at nine weeks and one at ten weeks of pregnancy. In both patients the procedure has been successful. 33/41 (80.5%) with no indication for surgical intervention. There was a significant difference in the mean diameter of ovarian cysts in the expectant management group (41.2mm; 95%CI:34.7-47.7) compared with the mean diameter of cysts in the surgically managed group (74.5mm; 95%CI: 49.2-99.8) (Fig.4).

Figure 4: Mean diameter of the ovarian cysts.

In 33/41 patients no surgical intervention was needed during pregnancy. 13/33 patients had no follow up of their ovarian cyst arranged and no further mentioning of the cysts on routine growth and anomaly scans during pregnancy was found. In 20/33 patients at least one routine follow-up scan was performed 1-2 weeks after the diagnosis and in 12 of these 20 patients a second follow-up had taken place at least 1 month after the diagnosis. In one of the 20 patients with recorded follow-up’s an MRI scan had been arranged 2 months after the initial USS finding of a dermoid cyst.

Discussion

The results of our study confirm findings from previous studies: The vast majority of ovarian masses in pregnancy are benign and invasive cancer in pregnancy is rare; The results show a significant relation between size of adnexal mass and probability for surgery; Ultrasound examination of adnexal masses has been proven to be accurate and safe in pregnancy; Managing ovarian cysts in pregnancy can be challenging. Goh et al. have reported similar outcomes, namely that ovarian torsion is still reported as a rare event in pregnancy and that the management of most adnexal masses in pregnancy can be conservatively managed if asymptomatic and if there are no ultrasound findings suspicious for malignancy 8. If a surgical intervention is needed for persistent masses with complications such as torsion Goh et al. have found that laparoscopy during 1st and 2nd trimester can be safely performed 1. In our cohort two out of six women underwent successful major surgery during the 2nd trimester of pregnancy. One had an emergency laparoscopy for a torsion at 16 weeks of pregnancy and the other had a laparotomy at 17 weeks of pregnancy for a mucinous borderline tumour.

However, to our knowledge currently no evident guidelines exist on how to manage and follow-up ovarian masses during pregnancy. The characteristics and presentation of ovarian mass complications in pregnancy can be mimicked by similar symptoms related to pregnancy, such as ectopic pregnancy. In one of our cases a woman with a known ovarian cyst was found to have a necrotic ovary at the time of Caesarean section, despite no signs of torsion at any time during pregnancy. This only highlights how challenging and difficult the assessment of ovarian masses during pregnancy can be. Additional diagnostic examinations such as tumour markers in suspicious ovarian masses have been found difficult to interpret in pregnancy. However, there has been literature suggesting that if a mass is strongly suspicious for malignancy, it is likely that CA-125 will be severely elevated (1000-10 000) 7.

The strength of this study is that the data has been collected using the expertise and facilities of a tertiary referral centre in London (GSTT). The limitations of this study include retrospective data collection, small numbers of cases and loss of follow-up. Although, our study shows the benign nature of most ovarian masses in pregnancy and the ability of ultrasound to safely characterize ovarian masses, a prospective study is required to validate our results. As it is difficult to interpret ovarian cancer tumour markers in pregnancy 7, other models, such as the IOTA Simple Rules14,16 or the ADNEX model17 may play a role for further characterisation of ovarian masses. A prospective trial is required to validate these models in pregnancy.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
TANIA EICHENBERGER-GAUTSCHI Dr Med, Specialist Registrar in Obstetrics and Gynaecology, Guy's and St Thomas' NHS Foundation Trust, London UK. ALISON SMITH MSc, DMU Tutor Sonographer, Guy's and St Thomas' NHS Foundation Trust, London, UK. AHMAD SAYASNEH MBChB MD(Res) MRCOG, Consultant Gynaecological Oncology Surgeon, Honorary Senior Clinical Lecturer, Guy's and St Thomas' NHS Foundation Trust, London UK.
Corresponding Author Details: 
Dr Tania Eichenberger-Gautschi Dr Med, Specialist Registrar in Obstetrics and Gynaecology, Guy's and St Thomas' NHS Foundation Trust, London UK email: eichenberger.tt@gmail.com
Corresponding Author Email: 
eichenberger.tt@gmail.com
References
References: 
  1. Goh W., Bohrer J., Zalud I. Management oft the adnexal mass in pregnancy. Curr Opin Obstet Gynecol 2014; 26:49-53.
  2. Mukhopadhyay A, Shinde A, Naik R. Ovarian cysts and cancer in pregnancy. Best Pract Res Clin Obstet Gynaecol 2016; 33:58-72.
  3. Giuntoli R, Vang R, Bristow R. Evaluation and management of adnexal masses during pregnancy. Clin Obstet Gynecol 2006; 49:492-505
  4. Smith L, Dalrymple J, Leiserowitz G, et al. Obstetrical deliveries associated with maternal malignancy in California, 1992 through 1997. Am J Obstet Gynecol 2001; 184 :1504-1512.
  5. Yakasai I, Bappa L. Diagnosis and management of adnexal masses in pregnancy. J Surg Tech Case Rep 2012 ; 4 :79-85.
  6. Adusumilli S, Hussain H, Caoili E, et al. MRI of sonographically indeterminate adnexal masses. AJR Am J Roentgenol 2006; 187:732-740.
  7. Spitzer M, Kaushal N, Benjamin F. Maternal CA-125 levels in pregnancy and the puerperium. J Reprod Med 1998; 43:387-392.
  8. Goh W, Rincon M, Bohrer J, et al. Persistent ovarian masses and pregnancy outcomes. J Matern Fetal Neonatal Med 2013 ; 26 :1090-1093.
  9. Tavassoli FA, Devilee P International Agency for Research on Cancer (2003) Pathology and Genetics of Tumours of the Breast and Female Genital Organs. International Agency for Research on Cancer: Lyon.Tavassoli FA, Devilee P. Pathology and genetics of tumours of the breast and female genital organs.
  10. Ray JG et al. Association Between MRI Exposure During Pregnancy and Fetal and Childhood Outcomes. JAMA. 2016;316(9):952-961
  11. Guidelines for diagnostic imaging during pregnancy and lactation. Committee Opinion No. 723. American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists. Obstet Gynecol 2017;130:e210–6.
  12. Sayasneh A, Naji O, Adallah Y et al. Changes seen in the ultrasound features of a presumed decidualised ovarian endometrioma mimicking malignancy. J Obstet Gynaecol. 2012 Nov;32(8):807-11.
  13. Cavaco-Gomes J, Jorge Moreira C, Rocha A et al. Investigation and Management of Adnexal Masses in Pregnancy. Scientifica (Cairo). 2016;2016:3012802.
  14. Sayasneh A, Kaijser J, Preisler J et al. A multicenter prospective external validation of the diagnostic performance of IOTA simple descriptors and rules to characterize ovarian masses. Gynecol Oncol. 2013 Jul;130(1):140-6.
  15. Timmerman D, Testa AC, Bourne T et al. Logistic regression model to distinguish between the benign and malignant adnexal mass before surgery: a multicenter study by the International Ovarian Tumor Analysis Group. J Clin Oncol. 2005 Dec 1;23(34):8794-801.
  16. Timmerman D, Ameye L, Fischerova D et al. Simple ultrasound rules to distinguish between benign and malignant adnexal masses before surgery: prospective validation by IOTA group. BMJ. 2010 Dec 14;341:c6839.
  17. Sayasneh A, Ferrara L. De Cock B et al. Evaluating the risk of ovarian cancer before surgery using the ADNEX model: a multicentre external validation study. Br J Cancer 2016; 115, 542-548.

Prevention and management of accidental carotid artery cannulation; Novel use of a double male Luer lock connector

Authors
Asif Mahmood, Dumisani Ncomanzi, Asquad Sultan & Sandeep Sharma
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2018;11(1):a1108
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Internal jugular central line insertion is a common procedure performed in anaesthesia and intensive care.  Often performed by junior staff.  We performed a survey in our anaesthetic and intensive care department to review the methods used to confirm central venous cannulation before dilatation and also how they would manage accidental carotid artery cannulation including follow up.  Our survey highlighted a lack of venous transduction before dilatation despite accepted benefits of doing so.  This survey also revealed the management of accidental carotid artery cannulation was mostly unknown or unsafe.  This survey highlighted the need educate departments regarding the management of accidental carotid artery cannulation.  We also describe a method of central venous transduction before dilation via the arterial line transducer without the need to ‘break’ the arterial line transducer.

Abbreviations: 
CT - computed tomography; CVP - central venous pressure
Keywords: 
Central venous pressure wave forms; Ultrasonography; Carotid cannulation, Central line

We would like to draw the attention of your readers to the outcome of a survey undertaken in Kettering General Hospital.  We wanted to determine what methods clinicians use to confirm central line cannula/needle position before dilatation and what their removal plan would be for an accidental insertion of a central line (>7 Fr) into the carotid artery.          

We performed a paper survey of 52 doctors in anaesthesia/intensive care at Kettering General Hospital.  We achieved a 100% return rate. We asked the doctors to answer questions based on their practise over the previous year period.  The majority of people surveyed were consultants (47%).  The results of the survey revealed doctors mostly utilised ultrasound confirmation of guidewire before dilatation (89%) but only 19% utilised pressure transduction.  A large proportion of doctors surveyed either did not know how to manage carotid artery cannulation with a >7 Fr central line (35%) or would ‘pull and press’ (40%).  Only 5% of the doctors who would ‘pull and press’ would arrange computed tomography (CT) angiogram follow up.

We highlighted a lack of clarity, which may be widespread.  It is advisable to seek a vascular surgeon or interventional radiology input to facilitate line removal due to the excessive complications related to the ‘pull and press’ technique (47% complication rate).1 Complications include pseudoaneurysm formation, airway compromising haematomas, arteriovenous fistula, stroke and death.1 If such lines are removed by the ‘pull and press’ technique it is recommended to arrange CT angiogram even if the patient is asymptomatic due to the possibility of pseudoaneurysm or arteriovenous fistula formation.1

We correctly utilised ultrasound confirmation of guidewire position before dilatation.  However ultrasound alone has not eliminated accidental arterial dilatation. This still occurs despite ultrasound usage especially in cases involving inexperienced clinicians and the guidewire going through the vein and into the artery.2 The combined use of ultrasound and transduction may further reduce the incidence of carotid cannulation.3 This may prove invaluable in centres without vascular or interventional radiology support.

Our centre has reduced its usage of central venous pressure (CVP) monitoring.  This may reflect our lack of transduction prior to dilatation for central line insertion.  Hence we devised a novel use of the double male Luer lock connector.  This connector allows the female connector end of an infusion line to connect to the female connector of the blood aspirating port of an arterial transducer.  This will then allow transduction of a central line cannula, before dilatation, via the arterial transducer by turning the 3-way tap (Figure 1). This removes the need to set up a separate transducer and also prevents the need to disconnect connections in the arterial line to allow CVP confirmation, as this was considered an infection risk.

Figure 1: Double male Luer lock connector attached to the blood aspirating port of an arterial transducer, with a fluid line connecting this to the central venous cannula

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
ASIF MAHMOOD MBCHB,FRCA, Kettering General Hospital, Department of Anaesthesia, Kettering, UK. DUMISANI NCOMANZI MBCHB, FRCA, Kettering General Hospital, Department of Anaesthesia, Kettering, UK. ASQUAD SULTAN MBBS, FFARCSI, DESRA, Kettering General Hospital, Department of Anaesthesia, Kettering, UK. SANDEEP SHARMA BSC, MBBS, FRCA, Kettering General Hospital, Department of Anaesthesia, Kettering, UK.
Corresponding Author Details: 
ASIF MAHMOOD, Kettering General Hospital, Department of Anaesthesia, Kettering, UK.
Corresponding Author Email: 
asifmahmood@doctors.net.uk
References
References: 
  1. Guilbert MC, Elkouri S, Bracco D, et al: Arterial trauma during central venous catheter insertion: Case series, review and proposed algorithm. J Vasc Surg 2008; 48: 918-925
  2. Blaivas M: Video analysis of accidental arterial cannulation with dynamic ultrasound guidance for central venous access. J Ultrasound Med 2009; 28: 1239-1244
  3. Bowdle A. Vascular complications of central venous catheter placement: Evidence-based methods for prevention and treatment. J Cardiothorac Vasc Anesth 2014; 28: 358–68.

Adult Onset Still's Disease: A Case Report

Authors
Yasmeen Ajaz, Ravinder Bhatt, Rabah Elbahnasawy, Asif khan, Ali Ganai & Sameem Matto.
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2018;11(1):a1107
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Adult Onset Still’s disease (AOSD) is an inflammatory disorder characterized by quotidian (daily) fevers, arthritis, and an evanescent rash. It is a rare inflammatory disorder of unknown etiology. Due to lack of definitive diagnostic test, the diagnosis of AOSD can only be made after exclusion of other causes. We report a 46 year old male Indian patient who was admitted in our hospital with intermittent high grade fever, rash and polyarthritis for one month. History, examination and laboratory investigations fulfilled the Yamaguchi criteria for AOSD. The patient was treated with steroids and nonsteriodal anti-inflammatory drugs to which he responded and is completely free of symptoms. The authors here present a case of adult onset Still’s disease, and highlights the utility of high serum ferritin in identifying this febrile exanthema.

Abbreviations: 
AOSD -Adult Onset Still’s disease; AFB -Acid fast bacilli; CMV - Cytomegalovirus; EBV- Epistein bar virus; HIV -Human immunodeficiency virus; LDH- lactate dehydrogenase; WBC: White blood cell; ANA: Antinuclear antibody; RF: Rheumatoid factor; PMN: Polymorphonuclea; TNF -Tumor necrosis factoralpha .
Keywords: 
Adult onset Stills disease, skin rash, fever, polyarthritis.

INTRODUCTION

Adult Still’s disease (AOSD) is an inflammatory disorder of unknown etiology characterized by quotidian (daily) fevers, arthritis, and an evanescent rash and multi-organ involvement [1].First described in children by George Still in 1896, subsequently in 1971 Bywaters described 14 patients with similar presentation [2]. The clinical course of adult Still’s disease (AOSD) can be divided into three main patterns: monophasic (or monocyclic), intermittent, and chronic. Patients with monophasic AOSD have a disease course that typically lasts only weeks to months, completely resolving within less than a year in most patients [3]. Systemic features, including fever, rash, serositis, and hepatosplenomegaly, predominate in this group. The patient we diagnosed as AOSD, with monophasic course, went into remission after proper treatment and is symptom free even after stopping the treatment.

CASE REPORT

46 year old Indian male, non-smoker, married, nondiabetic, normotensive admitted at department of internal medicine in our hospital with history of high grade fever, polyarthritis, and skin rash for the last 4 weeks. The fever was high grade, with maximum temperature reaching 39.2°C. The patient also complained of joint pains involving the knee, ankle, wrist and proximal interphalangeal joints. There was no history of oral ulcers, morning stiffness, ocular symptoms, or contact with infected persons. In the hospital, during the febrile period, he developed macular rash mainly on chest and back [Figure 1]. On examination, the patient was sick looking, febrile-39.2°C. Chest on auscultation was normal, cardiovascular examination was unremarkable. Examination of abdomen revealed mild spleenomegaly. Neurological examination was unremarkable. Investigations revealed hemoglobin 12.7g/dl, erythrocyte sedimentation rate (ESR) 120 mm in 1st hour. Total leukocyte count-12.7 x10 9/L. Liver function showed elevated liver enzymes with Aspartate transaminase-125U/L, Alaninie aminotransferase 60 U/L, low albumin 2.3gms/dl. He was worked on lines of pyrexia of unknown origin and his blood, urine and sputum culture showed no growth. Procalcitonin level was less than 0.5ng/ml. Sputum for AFB was negative for three samples; qunatiferon gold test for tuberculosis was negative. IgM CMV, EBV, HIV, hepatitis B and C were negative malarial parasite, Widal and Brucella serology was negative. CT-chest and abdomen were normal, except for mild spleenomegaly. Echocardiogram was normal. ANA, rheumatoid factor was negative. Lactate dehydrogenase (LDH) 978 U/L, His CRP showed a progressive increase from 82mg/L to 284 mg/L, which decreased after starting steroids. His ferritin levels were 40, 000 (normal range 21.8 -274.6 ng/ml), which were reconfirmed by second sample and he had normal transferrin saturation. On the basis of his history, clinical examination and review of his laboratory investigations, diagnosis of AOSD was made. We started him on prednisolone 60 mgs daily along with Diclofenac potassium 50 mg twice daily, to which he responded and become afebrile. He was discharged with a tapering dose of steroids 5mgs weekly. He is doing well and is completely symptom free.

Figure 1: Skin Rash on the back

DISCUSSION

First described in children by George Still in 1896, “Still’s disease” has become the eponymous term for systemic juvenile idiopathic arthritis [4]. In 1971, the term “adult Still’s disease” was used to describe a series of adult patients who had features similar to the children with systemic juvenile idiopathic arthritis and did not fulfill criteria for classic rheumatoid arthritis.

The etiology of adult Still’s disease (ASD) is unknown; both genetic factors and a variety of infectious triggers have been suggested as important, but there has been no proof of an infectious etiology, and the evidence supporting a role for genetic factors has been mixed. It is uncertain whether all patients with AOSD share the same etiopathogenic factors. Proposed pathogens have included numerous viruses; suspected bacterial pathogens include Yersinia enterocolitica and Mycoplasma pneumoniae [5]. As an example of studies of the immunogenetics of ASD, in a series of 62 French patients, human leukocyte antigen (HLA)-B17, -B18, -B35, and -DR2 were associated with AOSD. However, other studies have not confirmed these findings [6].

Adult Still’s disease is very uncommon. Prevalence of AOSD is estimated to be 1.5 cases per 100, 000-1, 000, 000 people, with an equal distribution between the sexes [6]. There is a bimodal age distribution, with one peak between the ages of 15 and 25 and the second between the ages of 36 and 46. The diagnosis of AOSD is possible only by recognizing the striking constellations of clinical and laboratory abnormalities. It is also to be to remember that AOSD is a diagnosis of exclusion. AOSD has been associated with markedly elevated serum ferritin concentrations in as much as 70 percent of patients. Serum ferritin values above 3000 ng/mL in a patient with compatible symptoms should lead to suspicion of AOSD in the absence of a bacterial or viral infection. Abnormally high serum ferritin values were reported in some case reports and it was suggested that high ferritin levels may be a diagnostic marker of Still's disease [7]. Our patient showed almost all features as laid down in Yamaguchi criteria[Table 1] for the diagnosis of AOSD [8] along with a markedly high ferritin levels.

Table 1 : Diagnostic criteria for AOSD (Yamaguchi)8

Major criteria Minor criteria
Fever > 39ºC, > 1 week Sore throat
Arthralgia/ arthritis > 2 weeks or splenomegaly Lymphadenopathy
Typical rash Abnormal LFT
WBC > 10, 000 with > 80% PMNs and RF Negative ANA

Exclusions: Infections, malignancy, rheumatological diseases. Five criteria with at least two major criteria. ASOD: Adult onset still’s disease. WBC: White blood cell, ANA: Antinuclear antibody, RF: Rheumatoid factor, PMN: Polymorphonuclea

Non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs), such as aspirin, ibuprofen or naproxen, help to reduce inflammation [9]. Patients with high-fever spikes, severe joint glucocorticoids, such as prednisone (0.5- 1mg/kg/day)Methotrexate has been used successfully in a small series of people to treat adult Still's disease [10]. Some patients are refractory to these conventional therapies. Tumor necrosis factoralpha (TNF) blockers include infliximab, adalimumab, etanercept, anti-interleukin-1, antiinterleukin-6 agents, and most recently anti CD20-expressing B-cell antibodies are also effective in some cases. Other experimental drugs, including cyclosporine and anakinra, have also been successful in small groups of people [9]. Interleukin 6 inhibitors like tocilzumab showed a good result in patients with AOSD resistant to other immunosuppressive agents such as methotrexate, TNF inhibitors and anakinara [11]. Even with treatment, it's difficult to predict the course of adult Still's disease. Some people might only experience a single episode, while for others adult Still's disease may develop occasional flair up or a chronic condition. About one-third of people with the disorder may fall into each of the above groups.

CONCLUSION

A diagnosis of AOSD should be kept in mind in case of pyrexia of unknown origin particularly in a patient who presents with high-grade intermittent fever, polyarthritis and skin rash of more than two weeks duration. However, the patient should be extensively evaluated to rule out other differentials of AOSD like acute or chronic infections, autoimmune disorders, vasculitis and malignant disorders. Serum ferritin values can be powerful adjuncts in making the diagnosis of AOSD [12], where they are usually higher than other inflammatory diseases. Indeed, extreme elevation of serum ferritin up to 75, 500ng/ mL has been reported in AOSD[12]. Several investigators agree that ferritin levels above l, 000 ng/mL are suggestive of AOSD while levels greater than 4, 000ng/mL are very specific for this diagnosis when accompanied by a compatible clinical picture.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
YASMEEN AJAZ, MD, FACE, Belhoul Speciality Hospital, Internal Medicine , Dubai, United Arab Emirates. RAVINDER BHATT , MD, Belhoul Speciality Hospital, Internal Medicine , Dubai, United Arab Emirates. ASIF KHAN, MRCP, Aster Medical Center, Sharjah, United Arab Emirates. ALI GANAI, MD, Mediclinic Welcare Hospital, Dubai, United Arab Emirates RABAH ELBAHNASAWY, MD, Belhoul Speciality Hospital, Internal Medicine , Dubai, United Arab Emirates. SAMEEM MATTO, MD, FACE, Canadian Specialist Hospital, Dubai, United Arab Emirates.
Corresponding Author Details: 
YASMEEN AJAZ, MD, FACE, Head Dept Of Internal Medicine, Belhoul Speciality Hospital, Internal Medicine , Dubai, United Arab Emirates.
Corresponding Author Email: 
ajazyasmin@yahoo.co.in
References
References: 
  1. Efthimiou P, Paik PK, Bielory L, Diagnosis and management of adult onset still’s disease. Ann Rheum Dis 2006; 65:564- 2. 
  2. Owlia MB, Mehrpoor G. Adult-onset still’s disease: A review. Indian J Med Science 2009; 63:207-21.
  3. Pouchot, J, Sampalis, JS, Beaudet, F, et al. Adult onset Still's disease: Manifestations, disease course and outcome in 62 patients. Medicine (Baltimore) 1991; 70:118.
  4. On a Form of Chronic Joint Disease in Children. Still GF Med Chir Trans. 1897; 80:47-60.9. 
  5. Adult-onset Still's disease: an unusual presentation of rubella infection.Huang SH, DeCoteau WE Can Med Assoc J. 1980; 122(11):1275. 
  6. Adult onset Still's disease and viral infections.Wouters JM, van der Veen J, van de Putte LB, de Rooij DJ Ann Rheum Dis. 1988; 47(9):764
  7.  Pelkonen P, Swanliung K, Siimes M A. Ferritinemia as an indicator of systemic disease activity in children with systemic juvenile rheumatoid arthritis. Acta Paediatr Scand 1986; 75: 64-8). 
  8. Ebrahim RA, Oraibi AKA, Mahdi N, Zaber K, Fareed E: Adult Onset Still's Disease (AOSD) - A Case Report; Bahrain Medical Bulletin, September 2002; 24(3): 1-6. 6.
  9. Franchini S, Dagna L, Salvo F Aiello P, Baldissera E, Sabbadini Efficacy of traditional and biologic agents in different clinical phenotypes of adult-onset still’s disease MG Arthritis Rheum. 2010;62 (8):2530. 
  10. Nakahara H, Mima T, Hoshino NY, Matsushita M, Hashimoto J, Nishimoto N; A case report of a patient with refractory adult-onset Still's disease who was successfully treated with tocilizumab over 6 years. Japan College of Rheumatology 2008.
  11. Ortiz-Sanjuán F, Blanco R, Calvo-Rio V, Narvaez J , Efficacy of tocilizumab in conventional treatment-refractory adult-onset Still's disease: multicenter retrospective open-label study of thirty-four patients. Arthritis Rheumatol. 2014;66 (6):1659. 
  12. Extremely high serum ferritin levels as diagnostic tool in adult-onset Still's disease. Meijvis SC, Endeman H, Geers AB, ter Borg EJ, Neth J Med. 2007 Jun; 65(6):212-4.

Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder Symptoms and Associated Risk Factors: A cross-sectional study among Syrian refugees

Authors
Antoine Aoun, Janine Joundi & Najwa El Gerges
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2018;11(1):a1106
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Aims: The Syrian conflict has generated a large flow of refugees, more than one million of them located in Lebanon. Very few studies were conducted on mental health of Syrian refugees. The objective of this study was to examine post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD) symptoms and to determine the associated risk factors in a sample of Syrian refugees living in North Lebanon.

Methods: An observational cross-sectional study was conducted, during February and March 2016, on a random sample of 450 (84.67% women and 15.33% men) Syrian refugees, aged between 14 and 45 years, living in North Lebanon. Each participant was interviewed individually using the Primary Care-PTSD (PC-PTSD) screening tool, translated into Arabic, with a back-translation to the original language to verify its accuracy. Reporting three or more PTSD symptoms was defined as a positive screen. Descriptive statistics and multiple regression analyses were used to examine the prevalence of a positive PTSD screen and associations with socio-demographic and health-related characteristics.

Results: The prevalence of positive PTSD screen in our sample of Syrian refugees was 47.3%. There were statistically significant associations between a positive PTSD screen and being a woman (P=0.011), married (P<0.001), older than 18 years (P=0.006), having chronic medical conditions (P<0.001) and reporting more than 2 stressful life events (P<0.001).

Conclusion: The results of this survey are alarming, with high proportions of refugees at risk for PTSD. Early screening may help identify individuals who would benefit from interventions to improve mental health.

Keywords: post-traumatic stress disorder, refugees, war, mental health, Middle-East, screening.

Abbreviations: 
BMI - Body Mass Index; CS - Collective Shelters; DSM-4 - Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders Version 4; DSM-5 - Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders Version 5; IRB - Institutional Review Board; ITSs - Individual Tented Settlements; kg - kilograms; m - meters; NDU - Notre Dame University; PC-PTSD - Primary Care Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder; PHCs - Primary Health Care Centres; PTSD - Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder; SLE - Stressful Life Events; SPSS - Statistical Package for Social Science; UNHCR - United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees
Keywords: 
Post-traumatic stress disorder, refugees, war, mental health, Middle-East, screening

INTRODUCTION

Several studies found that refugees develop post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD) after having endured war trauma1, or certain circumstances related to migration like moving to a new country, being unemployed and poor housing2. PTSD is described as distress and disability due to a traumatic event that occurred in the past3. In 2013, the American Psychiatric Association revised the PTSD diagnostic criteria in the fifth edition of its Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-5) and PTSD was included in a new category, Trauma- and Stressor-Related Disorders4. All of the conditions included in this category required exposure to a traumatic or stressful event as a diagnostic criterion4. The person with PTSD often avoids trauma-related thoughts and emotions, and discussion of the traumatic event4. PTSD patients are invariably anxious about re-experiencing the same trauma. The trauma is usually re-lived by the person through disturbing, repeated recollections, flashbacks, and nightmares4. Symptoms of PTSD generally begin within the first 3 months after the provocative traumatic event, but may not begin until several years later4. A large number of children (10-40%), 16 or younger, who have experienced a traumatic event in their life, tend to develop PTSD later on5. Moreover, many families with children growing in war zones and then moving to safer places, experience trauma, stress and reduced functioning6. These families have different resilience rates in their survival mechanisms, coping strategies and adaptation levels7.

The latest war in Syria has led to the migration of large parts of the Syrian population to neighboring countries such as Lebanon, Jordan and Turkey8.The United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees (UNHCR) estimates that approximately 1.5 million refugees are located in Lebanon9. These refugees have been exposed to several types of traumatic events that may increase the incidence of mental health problems10.

We hypothesize that the proportion of positive PTSD screens would be high among Syrian refugees with the presence of some specific related risk factors. Thus, the objective of our study was to examine PTSD symptoms and to determine the associated risk factors in a sample of Syrian refugees living in North Lebanon.

METHODS

1. Study design and population

This was a cross-sectional study that aimed to assess the proportion of Syrian refugees in North Lebanon who were at high risk of developing PTSD, and to examine the association of PTSD high risk with other factors. The survey was carried out during February and March 2016. A convenient sample of Syrian refugees of both gender, aged between 14 and 45 years, living in North Lebanon, was selected out of a population of 262,15111.

The estimated minimum sample size, calculated using Raosoft sample size calculator, with a margin of error of 5% and a confidence interval of 95%, was 384 refugees. A total number of 450 Syrian refugees, residing in individual tented settlements (ITSs), collective shelters (CS) or Primary Health Care Centers (PHCs) located in North Lebanon, was selected according to inclusion and exclusion set criteria.

The inclusion criteria were: Syrian refugees, aged (14-45 years), physically and mentally independent. Hence, all subjects that were younger than 14 or older than 45, speechless, deaf, physically and mentally dependent, or have undergone recent moderate or severe surgery (less than one week earlier), were excluded from the study.

2. Ethical considerations

The study protocol received approval from the Notre Dame University (NDU) Institutional Review Board (IRB). The approval comprised details about the procedure of the study and the rights of the participants. Informed consent was obtained from each participant. The questionnaires were answered anonymously, ensuring confidentiality of collected data.

3. The Interview questionnaire

The interview questionnaire was divided into six sections consisting of a total of 46 questions. The questions were dichotomous, close-ended and open-ended. A cover page described the purpose of the study, ensuring the anonymity and confidentiality, and soliciting the consent of participants. The questionnaire collected data on the demographic and socio-economic characteristics of the participants. Information about health status and stressful life events (SLE) were also obtained. The PC-PTSD (Primary Care Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder) tool was used to screen PTSD.

For the purposes of the study, subjects were classified as having/not having positive PC-PTSD. The results were used to calculate the proportion of Syrian refugees who are at high risk of developing PTSD.

PC-PTSD questionnaire: The PC-PTSD was initially developed in a Veteran Affairs primary care setting and is currently used to screen for PTSD, based on the fourth edition of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-4) diagnostic criteria12. The screen consisted of 4 questions related to a traumatic life event: In the past month you (1) Have had nightmares about it or thought about it when you did not want to?; (2) Tried hard not to think about it or went out of your way to avoid situations that reminded you of it?; (3) Were constantly on guard, watchful, or easily startled?; (4) Felt numb or detached from others, activities, or your surroundings? The answers to these questions were dichotomous (Yes/No) and the total screen was considered "positive" when a patient answered "yes" to three out of four questions. PC-PTSD showed a high sensitivity (86%) and moderate specificity (57%) when using a cutoff score of 213.

In order to validate the Arabic version of the PC-PTSD questionnaire, it was translated into Arabic and translated back into English. The original version of the Arabic questionnaire was pilot-tested on 10 Syrian refugees to ensure the validity of the answers, and to guarantee its reliability.

Anthropometric measurements: The main anthropometric measurements were weight and height. Participants were dressed in light clothes and barefooted, and standing height was measured to the nearest 0.1 cm using a stadiometer. Body weight was measured to the nearest 100g using an electronic scale. Body Mass Index (BMI) is a measure of weight adjusted to height (kg/m2), calculated by dividing weight (in kilograms) by the square of height (in metres). For the purposes of the study, BMI was recoded into four categories: underweight, normal, overweight and obese.

4. Data entry and statistical analysis

The Statistical Package for Social Science (SPSS) for Windows (version 22) was used for data entry and analysis.

First, bivariate analyses of categorical variables were performed using the Fisher exact tests, Chi-squared tests and Student’s t-test. The dependent variable was the high risk of PTSD, using the PC-PTSD tool. Thus, the PC-PTSD score was considered the dependent variable: a dichotomous variable of PC-PTSD (-) and PC-PTSD (+), and all variables that might be a risk factor or might lead to PTSD were set as the independent variables. Two main independent variables were: age and gender. Other variables included: marital status, place of residence, number of people and families living in the same household (crowding index), income, education status, profession, work status, lifestyle habits, medical or psychological problems, medication taken and SLE. Frequencies and percentages were calculated for qualitative variables, and mean and standard deviations for quantitative variables (BMI, crowding index). A p-value of 0.05 or less was considered to be statistically significant.

RESULTS

Table 1: Socio-demographic characteristics of the 450 Syrian refugees

Variables Frequency
(n) or Mean
Percentage (%)
or Standard Deviation
Gender    
· Male 69 15.3
· Female 381 84.7
Age (years) 27.9 8.1
Crowding index (co-residents/room) 4 2.4
Crowding index    
· ≤ 2.5 135 30
· 2.51-3.5 108 24
· > 3.5 207 46
Current place of residence    
· Tented settlements 62 13.8
· Collective shelters 92 20.4
· Building 296 65.8
Educational level    
· Don’t know how to read and write 33 7.3
· Know how to read and write/Elementary 216 48
· Complementary/Secondary/Technical 178 39.6
· College degree 23 5.1
Marital status    
· Single 54 12
· Married 378 84
· Divorced 5 1.1
· Widowed 13 2.9
Current employment status    
· No 379 84.2
· Full-time job 40 8.9
· Part-time job 31 6.9
Presence of income    
· No 379 84.2
· Yes 71 15.8
Perceived income (n=71)    
· Satisfactory 25 35.2
· Non-Satisfactory 46 64.8

Table 2: Health characteristics and migration factors of the 450 Syrian refugees

Variables Frequency (n) Percentage (%)
BMI category (kg/m2)    
· <18.5 11 2.4
· 18.5-24.9 176 39.1
· ≥ 25 263 58.5
Tobacco consumption    
· Yes 97 21.6
· No 353 78.4
Presence of medical conditions    
· No 337 74.9
· Yes 113 25.1
Migration status    
· Before 2011 15 3.3
· 2011-2013 339 75.3
· After 2013 96 21.4
Seeking professional help for psychological disorders    
· No 439 97.6
· Yes 11 2.4
Number of stressful life events    
· None 22 4.9
· [1-2] 181 40.2
· [3-4] 235 52.2
· [5-6] 12 2.7
PC-PTSD    
· Negative 237 52.7
· Positive 213 47.3

Table 3: Socio-demographic characteristics associated with positive screen for PTSD among the 450 Syrian refugees (bivariate analyses)

Variables Positive PC-PTSD
n(%) or mean±SD
Negative PC-PTSD
n(%) or mean±SD
p-value
Gender     0.011*
· Male 23 (33.3) 46 (66.7)  
· Female 190 (49.9) 191 (50.1)  
Age (years) 28.9 ± 7.6 26.9 ± 8.5 0.009*
Crowding index (co-residents/room) 4.2 ± 2.7 3.8 ± 2.2 0.069
Crowding index     0.294
· ≤ 2.5 58 (43.0) 77 (57.0)  
· 2.51-3.5 49 (45.4) 59 (54.6)  
· > 3.5 106 (51.2) 101 (48.8)  
Current place of residence     0.137
· Tented settlements 27 (43.5) 35 (56.5)  
· Collective shelters 52 (56.5) 40 (43.5)  
· Building 134 (45.3) 162 (54.7)  
Educational level     0.479
· Don’t know how to read and write 16 (48.5) 17 (51.5)  
· Know how to read and write/Elementary 95 (44.0) 121 (56.0)  
· Complementary/Secondary/Technical      
· University level 92 (51.7) 86 (48.3)  
  10 (43.5) 13 (56.5)  
Marital status     0.000*
· Single 9 (16.7) 45 (83.3)  
· Married 191 (50.5) 187 (49.5)  
· Divorced 4 (80.0) 1 (20.0)  
· Widowed 9 (69.2) 4 (30.8)  
Current employment status     0.205
· No 184 (48.5) 195 (51.5)  
· Full-time job 14 (35.0) 26 (65.0)  
· Part-time job 15 (48.4) 16 (51.6)  
Presence of income     0.233
· No 184 (48.5) 195 (51.5)  
· Yes 29 (40.8) 42 (59.2)  
Perceived income (n=71)     0.264
· Satisfactory 8 (32.0) 17 (68.0)  
· Non-Satisfactory 21 (45.7) 25 (54.3)  

*Significant with p-value < 0.05

Table 4: Health characteristics and migration factors associated with positive screen for PTSD among the 450 Syrian refugees (bivariate analyses)

Variables Positive PC-PTSD
n (%)
Negative PC-PTSD
n (%)
p-value
BMI category (kg/m2)     0.183
· <18.5 7 (63.6) 4 (36.4)  
· 18.5-24.9 75 (42.6) 101 (57.4)  
· ≥ 25 131 (49.8) 132 (50.2)  
Tobacco consumption     0.369
· Yes 42 (43.3) 55 (56.7)  
· No 171 (48.4) 182 (51.6)  
Presence of medical conditions     0.000*
· No 143 (42.4) 194 (57.6)  
· Yes 70 (61.9) 43 (38.1)  
Migration status     0.094
· Before 2011 5 (33.3) 10 (66.7)  
· 2011-2013 154 (45.4) 185 (54.6)  
· After 2013 54 (56.2) 42 (43.8)  
Seeking professional help for psychological disorders     0.003*
· No      
· Yes 203 (46.2) 236 (53.8)  
  10 (90.9) 1 (9.1)  
Number of stressful life events     0.000*
· None 0 (0.0) 22 (100.0)  
· [1-2] 66 (36.5) 115 (63.5)  
· [3-4] 138 (58.7) 97 (41.3)  
· [5-6] 9 (75.0) 3 (25.0)  

* Significant with p-value < 0.05

All the socio-demographic, health and migration characteristics of our sample of Syrian refugees were described in Tables 1 and 2. Out of the 450 participants, 47.3% had positive PC-PTSD. In order to study the association between the socio-demographic characteristics among the Syrian refugeesand PTSD screening, abivariate association was explored as shown in Table 3. The results indicate a significant difference between gender groups, as almost half of the women (49.9%) had a positive screen for PTSD compared to 33.3% of the men (p=0.011). Mean age was significantly higher in refugees with positive PC-PTSD (28.9 ± 7.6 years) versus those with negative PC-PTSD (26.9 ± 8.5 years) (p=0.009). PTSD screening was shown to be significantly associated with marital status. In fact, positive PC-PTSD was mostly perceived in divorced participants (80%) compared to 69.2% of widowed, 50.5% of married, and 16.7% of single subjects (p=0.000). Yet, crowding index, current place of residence, educational level, employment status, and income were not significantly associated with positive PC-PTSD (p>0.05).

The association of health characteristics and migration factors among the Syrian refugees with PTSD screening was displayed in Table 4. A significant association was observed between the presence of medical condition and positive screen for PTSD, as 61.9% of subjects suffering from a medical condition had a positive PC-PTSD, compared to 42.4% of participants without medical conditions (p=0.000). However, BMI and tobacco consumption were not significantly associated with PTSD screening (p>0.05). PTSD screening was significantly associated with the presence of psychological disorders. Thus, 90.9% of refugees who sought professional help for psychological disorders had positive PC-PTSD, versus 46.2% of those who did not (p=0.003). Positive PC-PTSD was significantly associated with the increase in the number of SLE. In fact, none of the participants without any stressful event had a positive PC-PTSD, compared to 36.5% of participants with 1-2 SLE, 58.7% of participants with 3-4 SLE and 75% of participants with 5-6 SLE (p=0.000). On the other hand, no significant association was observed between PC-PTSD and migration status (p>0.05).

DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSION

PTSD represents the most frequently occurring mental disorder occurring among refugees14. PTSD prevalence rates ranging between 15% and 80% have been reported in refugees. A study of Cambodian refugees living in the Thailand-Cambodia border camp indicated that 15% had PTSD15. A cohort study aimed to show the prevalence of PTSD among Iranian, Afghani and Somalian refugees that have moved to the Netherlands at a 7-year interval [(T1=2003) - (T2=2010)]. Results displayed a high prevalence at both T1 (16.3%) and T2 (15.2%). The reason for this high unchanged prevalence may be due to the late onset of the PTSD symptoms, and the low use of mental health care centers16. De Jong and colleagues reported that 50% of the refugees in Rwandan and Burundese camps had serious mental health problems, mainly PTSD17. While Teodorescu and colleagues aimed to illustrate the prevalence of PTSD among refugees in Norway; results showed that 80% of the refugees had PTSD18. In our study, the high proportion of positive screen for PTSD among Syrian refugees was estimated at 47.3%. In 2006, a mental health assessment demonstrated that Lebanese citizens exposed to war were more likely to develop psychiatric problems such as PTSD19. Subsequently, a cross-sectional study was done in South Lebanon on 681 citizens in 2007 (1-year after the 2006 war in Lebanon). The aim of the study was to examine the prevalence of PTSD 12 months after 2006 war cessation. Results showed that the prevalence of PTSD was 17.8%19. A recent cross sectional study, aimed to show the prevalence of PTSD and explore its relationship with various variables. The study included 352 Syrian refugees settled in camps in Turkey. An experienced psychiatrist evaluated the participants, and results demonstrated that 33.5% of study participants had PTSD, mainly female refugees, people who experienced 2 or more SLE, or those who had a family history of psychiatric disorder20.

PTSD has been associated with a wide range of traumatic events: emotional or physical abuse21, sexual abuse22, parental break-up23, death of a loved one24, domestic violence25, kidnapping26, military services27, war trauma28, natural disasters29 and medical conditions including cancer30, heart attack31, stroke32, intensive-care unit hospitalization33, and miscarriage34.

Our findings should be interpreted taking into account several limitations. The first limitation is the use of screening tools, instead of the more accurate diagnosis of the clinician, in order to detect PTSD. Given that a standardized screening tool for PTSD was used, our rates are likely an overestimate of the true prevalence rates. Secondly, this study was conducted with a limited sample of Syrian refugees and therefore should not be generalized to all refugees of other eras or from other countries. The third limitation is represented by the lack of information on the presence of other Axis I psychiatric comorbidities such as anxiety or mood disorder that could facilitate the development of PTSD or influence its manifestations35-36.

Refugees are an important group to examine, given the high prevalence of mental health disorders. Although refugees are evaluated for health problems, currently there are no standardized screening and clinical practice guidelines for assessing PTSD in all refugees. Therefore, we may be missing opportunities to detect and treat these harmful and potentially fatal conditions. Our findings suggest the need to consider a standardized screening tool for PTSD in this population. In addition, a far greater percentage of patients may have “PTSD symptoms,” that are abnormal but do not meet full criteria of the DSM5 for PTSD diagnosis, but still cause functional impairment and may later develop into a diagnosable PTSD. Given the overall high prevalence, one possible model for evaluation would be a stepped screening approach: Positive screens for PTSD could trigger a standardized clinical diagnosis for PTSD with more comprehensive assessment and early intervention. Considering the high cost of treating individuals with PTSD, screening and intervention strategies should be addressed. Greater awareness among providers and increased targeted assessment and treatment efforts may increase early detection of a wide range of PTSD, preventing more serious future health problems and functional impairment among refugees.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Acknowledgement: 
The authors would like to thank the whole team and the refugees who took part of this study despite the extreme difficult conditions.
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
ANTOINE AOUN, MD PhD, Notre Dame University, Zouk Mosbeh, Lebanon. JANINE JOUNDI, MS, Notre Dame University, Zouk Mosbeh, Lebanon. NAJWA EL GERGES, RN MPH, Notre Dame University, Zouk Mosbeh, Lebanon.
Corresponding Author Details: 
Antoine Aoun, MD PhD, Notre Dame University, Zouk Mosbeh, Lebanon.
Corresponding Author Email: 
aaoun@ndu.edu.lb
References
References: 
  1. Fazel M, Wheeler J, Danesh J. Prevalence of serious mental disorder in 7000 refugees resettled in western countries: A systematic review. Lancet. 2005;365(9467):1309-14.
  2. Robjant K, Hassan R, Katona C. Metal health implications of detaining asylum seekers: systematic review. Br J Psychiatry. 2009;194(4):306-12.
  3. Graf A, Schiest C, Landolt MA. Posttraumatic stress and behavior problems in infants and todlers with burns. J Pediatr Psychol. 2011;36(8):923-31.
  4. American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders. 5th ed. Arlington, VA: American Psychiatric Publishing; 2013.
  5. Meiser-Stedman R, Smith P, Glucksman E, et al. The posttraumatic stress disorder diagnosis in preschool- and elementary school-age children exposed to motor vehicle accidents. Am J Psychiatry. 2008;165(10):1326-37.
  6. Birman D, Chan Y. Screening and assessing immigrant and refugee youth in school-based mental health programs. Center for Health and Health Care in Schools. Available from: http://www.rwjf.org/files/research/3320.32211.0508 [Accessed May 2008].
  7. American Psychological Association. Resilience and recovery after war: Refugee children and families in the United States. Washington, DC; 2010.
  8. United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees. Syria regional Response plan Strategic overview. Available from: http://www.unhcr.org/syriarrp6/midyear/docs/syria-rrp6-myu-strategic-overview.pdf [Accessed 4th January 2016].
  9. United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees. Country operations profile- Lebanon. Available from: http://www.unhcr.org/pages/49e486676.html/ [Accessed 4th January 2016].
  10. Mollica RF, McInnes K, Pham T, et al. The dose-effect relationships between torture and psychiatric symptoms in Vietnamese ex-political detainees and a comparison group. J. Nerv. Ment. Dis. 1998;186(9):543-53.
  11. United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees. Syria regional refugee response. Available from: http://data.unhcr.org/syrianrefugees/region.php?id=87&country=122/ [Accessed 4th January 2016].
  12. American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders. 4th ed. Arlington, VA: American Psychiatric Publishing; 1994.
  13. Van Dam D, Ehring T, Vedel E, et al. Validation of the Primary Care Posttraumatic Stress Disorder screening questionnaire (PC-PTSD) in civilian substance use disorder patients. J Subst Abuse. 2015;25-32.
  14. Acarturk C, Konuk E, Cetinkaya M, et al. EMDR for Syrian refugees with posttraumatic stress disorder symptoms: results of a pilot randomized controlled trial. Eur J Psychotraumatol. 2015;6:2741-4.
  15. Mollica RF, Donelan K, Tor S, et al. The effect of trauma and confinement on functional health and mental health status of Cambodians living in Thailand-Cambodia border camps. JAMA 1993; 270(5):581-6. 
  16. Lamkaddem M, Stronks K, Devillé W, et al. Course of post-traumatic stress disorder and health care utilisation among resettled refugees in the Netherlands. BMC Psychiatry. 2014;14:90.
  17. De Jong JP, Scholte WF, Koeter MW, et al. The prevalence of mental health problems in Rwandan and Burundese refugee camps. Acta Psychiatr. Scand. 2000;102(3),171-7.
  18. Teodorescu DS, Siqveland J, Heir T, et al. (2012). Posttraumatic growth, depressive symptoms, posttraumatic stress symptoms, post migration stressors and quality of life in multi-traumatized psychiatric outpatients with a refugee background in Norway. Health Qual Life Outcomes. 2012;10:84.
  19. Farhood L, Dimassi H, Strauss NL. Understanding Post-Conflict Mental Health: Assessment of PTSD, Depression, GeneralHealth and Life. Events in Civilian Population One Year after the 2006 War in South Lebanon. J Trauma Stress Disor Treat. 2013;2(2):2-8.
  20. Alpak G, Unal A, Bulbul F, et al. Post-traumatic stress disorder among Syrian refugees in Turkey: A cross-sectional study. Int J Psychiatry Clin Pract. 2015;19:45-50.
  21. Kessler RC, Sonnega A, Bromet E, et al. Posttraumatic stress disorder in the National Comorbidity Survey. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1995;52(12):1048-60. 
  22. Kessler RC, Aguilar-Gaxiola S, Alonso J, et al. Trauma and PTSD in the WHO World Mental Health Surveys. Eur J Psychotraumatol. 2017;8(5):1353383.
  23. Mahon J, Bradeley SN, Harvey PK, et al. Childhood trauma has dose-effect relationship with dropping out from psychotherapeutic treatment for bulimia nervosa: a replication. Int J Eat Disord. 2001;30(2):138-48.
  24. Atwoli L, Stein DJ, King A, et al. Posttraumatic stress disorder associated with unexpected death of a loved one: Cross-national findings from the world mental health surveys. ‎Depress. Anxiety. 2017;34(4):315-26.
  25. Rothschild B. The Body Remembers: The Psychophysiology of Trauma and Trauma Treatment. New York: W.W. Norton & Company; 2000.
  26. Liu H, Petukhova MV, Sampson NA, et al. Association of DSM-IV Posttraumatic Stress Disorder With Traumatic Experience Type and History in the World Health Organization World Mental Health Surveys. JAMA Psychiatry. 2017;74(3):270-81.
  27. Shalev A, Liberzon I, Marmar C. Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder. N Engl J Med. 2017;376(25):2459-69. 
  28. Hollifield M, Warner TD, Lian N, et al. Measuring trauma and health status in refugees: a critical review. JAMA. 2002;288(5):611-21.
  29. Carmassi C, Bertelloni CA, Massimetti G, et al. Impact of DSM-5 PTSD and gender on impaired eating behaviors in 512 Italian earthquake survivors. Psychiatry Res. 2015;225(1-2):64- 
  30. Cordova M J, Riba MB, Spiegel D. Post-traumatic stress disorder and cancer. Lancet Psychiatry. 2017;4(4):330-38. 
  31. Edmondson D, Richardson S, Falzon L, et al. Posttraumatic stress disorder prevalence and risk of recurrence in acute coronary syndrome patients: a meta-analytic review. PloS One. 2012;7(6):e38915.
  32. Edmondson D, Richardson S, Fausett JK, et al. Prevalence of PTSD in Survivors of Stroke and Transient Ischemic Attack: A Meta-Analytic Review. PloS One. 2013;8(6):e66435.
  33. Davydow DS, Gifford JM, Desai SV, et al. Posttraumatic stress disorder in general intensive care unit survivors: a systematic review. ‎Gen. Hosp. Psychiatry. 2008;30(5):421-34.
  34. Christiansen DM. Posttraumatic stress disorder in parents following infant death: A systematic review. Clin Psychol Rev. 2017;51:60-74.
  35. Pollack MH, Simon NM, Fagiolini A, et al. Persistent posttraumatic stress disorder following September 11 in patients with bipolar disorder. J Clin Psychiatry. 2006; 67(3):395-9.
  36. Dell'Osso L, Carmassi C, Musetti L, et al. Lifetime mood symptoms and adult separation anxiety in patients with complicated grief and/or post-traumatic stress disorder: a preliminary report. Psychiatry Res. 2012;198(3):436-40.

Resuscitation

Authors
Jennifer Wolkin
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2018;11(1):a1104

Stale and stilted inhales and exhales:
a striking absence of contentedness.

This neuroplastic beast of a brain-
wired with the wonder and wisdom to thrive

and yet, too, the demons
clinging to dendritic branches
choking cellular expression.

I can hear myself screaming
for a serotonergic surge
then goading the glia:

start pruning any circuitry that has died from shame
and find a neurogenesis waiting to be unearthed.

Sometimes, layers upon layers have to be excavated
before the brain’s resuscitation allows for easier breaths.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
JENNIFER WOLKIN, PhD, Psychologist, NYC, USA
Corresponding Author Details: 
Jenniferwolkinphd@gmail.com
Corresponding Author Email: 
Jenniferwolkinphd@gmail.com

BJMP March 2017 Volume 10 Issue 1

BJMP March 2017 Volume 10 Issue 1

Full Issue Booklet   PDF

Review Articles

Clinical Practice

Education and Training

Improving Medical Student Placements in Psychiatry: Review of Literature And A Practical Example
Yasir Hameed, Roger Wesby, Syvarna Wagle, Stephen Agius, Jonathan Hillam & Andrew Tarbuck
Full Text  PDF

Medical Images

Photo Quiz: Localized, reticulated erythema
Andrew A Lawson & Thomas C Michels
Full Text  PDF

Training student doctors to become educators

Authors
Aimee Charnell, Laura Stephenson & Michael Scales
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2018;11(1):a1103
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Introduction: Doctors are expected to teach from a very early stage in their foundation training, often without prior formal instruction in clinical teaching skills.   We provided a course with an aim of providing newly qualified doctors with the skills to teach students and peers.

Methods: We developed two, half day courses which ran over subsequent years, addressing feedback from the first course to allow improvement.  Sessions included Teaching Theory, Teaching Your Peers and Teaching for Your Learning and Portfolio, with small group discussions also incorporated into the second course.

Results: Results from the second course showed 100% of delegates rated each individual session either ‘Good’ or ‘Very Good’. 70% felt that this day should be compulsory for all new doctors. Delegates were contacted six months into their foundation posts for further, reflective feedback. Of 14 responses, 100% felt this course should be delivered again and all respondents felt more confident in teaching compared to their peers.

Conclusions: We propose that formal education in Clinical teaching should be provided to students at undergraduate level.  We suggest this could be made a compulsory part of the curriculum or during hospital inductions or at least offered as student selected components.

Keywords: 
education, training, teaching, simulation

Introduction

Within the United Kingdom, all doctors are expected to teach.1 It is assessed throughout their professional career, during annual appraisals for doctors in training and during consultant revalidation. But how are those just embarking on their medical career expected to develop the necessary teaching skills? As three educators at various stages in our clinical careers, we developed and delivered a small course with the aim of addressing this issue.

The General Medical Council within the United Kingdom, suggest that a basic comprehension of teaching should be gained during the undergraduate and postgraduate training of doctors.2 Dandavino et al. further suggest that early development of these teaching skills may have additional benefits for the clinician; such as improving communication and assisting undergraduates to develop their own ability to learn.3 Our local training region, Yorkshire and the Humber Deanery (HEYH), have a mandatory post-graduate training day in teaching skills which focuses on generic and clinical teaching skills. This is delivered towards the end of the first foundation year. It is delivered by doctors who have various roles in medical education. Whilst useful in its content, for many it comes late. Doctors have often already been involved in providing teaching to medical students on placement at this time.

AMC recalls from her first postgraduate (foundation) year. One peer was thrilled to have ‘shaken-off’ a final year medical student who was supposed to accompany them on a shift as a learning experience; stating that they were now able to ‘do some work’. She couldn’t understand the desperation to escape one-to-one teaching. On reflection, it was probable that her colleague found it overwhelming to incorporate the additional responsibility of teaching alongside an already stressful clinical workload. Many share these feelings, with new doctors finding time pressures along with competing clinical demands a challenge to implementing clinical teaching.4

We thought that giving our graduates simple tools to understand and overcome these challenges may empower them as teachers. It may also improve their confidence in other areas, such as in their own learning and presentation skills.5-6 This paper proposes a solution; after creating a short course to be delivered immediately following graduation, to empower new doctors as teachers by providing some basic training in clinical teaching. These doctors are then able to use this training as soon as they begin their foundation training, which is ultimately the beginning of their teaching career.

Methods

Two versions of a half-day course, titled ‘Teach the Medic’ were developed in HEYH which ran in successive years. The original course was designed by a surgical trainee (AMC) and a general practitioner running the undergraduate education curriculum (MS). Initial topics were chosen based on experiences of the authors and colleagues. The optional course (see figure 1), was offered to the cohort of Leeds medical students who were in the transition period between finishing their final examinations and commencing their first post as a doctor.


Figure 1: A representation of the initial course structure. Stations were developed as interactive lectures and delivered to participants by doctors of various training levels.

The initial course received encouraging verbal and written feedback from the participants, which was collected on the day of the course. Further feedback was collected a few months into foundation training, allowing enough time to pass for delegates to use this knowledge. This feedback, whilst encouraging, included that delegates were keen for additional workshop style sessions. Subsequently, a modified half-day course ran the following year, with the recruitment of additional postgraduate teachers (including LES). A further 17 newly qualified doctors from various medical schools completed the course, prior to commencing their HEYH foundation post. This modified course (see figure 2) included scenario based sessions around potentially difficult situations for the clinical teacher, and also explored alternative styles of teaching that could be adopted successfully in the workplace.


Figure 2: A representation of the modified course structure. Building on feedback from the initial course, the three co-authors incorporated new small group scenario based discussions, alongside the interactive lectures.

Results

Initial feedback received from evaluation of the day was positive for both courses. For the second course, initial feedback found that all participants found every session very good (71%) or good (29%) overall. 12/17 (71%) thought that the course should be made compulsory to medical students. We also sent a follow-up survey, distributed six months after the course which generated 14 responses. All respondents felt that the course should be run again. All participants either strongly agreed (n=2, 14%) or agreed (n=12, 86%) that they felt more confident in teaching compared with their peers. Regarding individual sessions, 10 participants (71%) had directly incorporated learning from the ‘Teaching Theory’ session, 12 (86%) from the ‘Teaching for your Learning and Portfolio’ session, 11 (79%) from the ‘Teaching your Peers’ session, and 10 (71%) from the ‘Scenarios’ workshop. All participants stated they would still recommend this course to colleagues. They also reported directly incorporating their learning from the sessions into their teaching practice. The responses gathered from the second course implied that participants felt more confident in teaching when compared to their peers.

Discussion

We feel the course content in ‘Teach the Medic’ complements other courses available later in one’s career, such as the Royal College of Surgeons’ ‘Train the Trainer’ course. We propose this course could be run by a junior doctor who has a strong interest in clinical teaching with involvement of a senior colleague with extensive medical education experience. We felt the course was especially beneficial as participants had continued to find it useful long after its delivery.

To expand this project to include a whole year group as a compulsory course is ambitious. It would require development and the use of more resources, but initial feedback suggested participants will find it extremely useful. Bing-You et al.6 agree, having found that undergraduate students would be willing to undertake formal instruction in clinical teaching prior to graduation.

As our short course gains momentum within HEYH, this prospect becomes more achievable. When considering a wider delivered course, one must remember that attendance to ‘Teach the Medic’ was optional; suggesting that those who attended had already identified an interest in teaching. This has the potential to bias our data to some degree. However, we still believe that making the session compulsory would allow skill development and empowerment for those who may not consider themselves aspiring medical educators, but who are still in positions to deliver teaching.

Conclusion

Our evolving teaching skills course suggests that close work with both local medical schools and deaneries is important to allow this course to be incorporated into the training of newly qualified doctors. This may be included as a compulsory part of the final year medical school curriculum, an option for a SSC, or as an integrated part of the new starter induction programme delivered by individual hospitals.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Acknowledgement: 
N/A
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
AIMEE CHARNELL, BSC, MBCHB, MRCS (ENG), PG CERT., University of Leeds, School of Medicine. UK. LAURA STEPHENSON, BSC, MBCHB, PG CERT. University of Leeds, School of Medicine. UK. MICHAEL SCALES. MBCHB, PG CERT, Clinical Lecturer. University of Leeds, School of Medicine. UK.
Corresponding Author Details: 
AIMEE CHARNELL, Via Learning and Teaching Office, Level 7, School of Medicine, University of Leeds, LS2 9JT
Corresponding Author Email: 
aimee.charnell@doctors.org.uk
References
References: 
  1. General Medical Council.  Good Medical Practice.  London: GMC, 2013
  2. General Medical Council.  Developing teachers and trainers in undergraduate medical education.  London: GMC, 2011
  3. Dandavino M, Snell L, Wiseman J. Why medical students should learn how to teach. Med Teach. 2007;29(6):558-65   
  4. Spencer J.  ABC of learning and teaching in medicine.  Learning and teaching in the clinical environment.  BMJ. 2003;326:591-4
  5. Hill AG, Srinivasa S, Hawken SJ, Barrow M, Farrell SE, Hattie J, Yu T. Impact of a resident-as-teacher workshop on teaching behavior of interns and learning outcomes of medical students. The Journal of Graduate Medical Education. 2012;4(1):34-41
  6. Marton GE, McCullough B, Ramnanan CJ.  A review of teaching skills development programmes for medical students. Med Educ. 2015;49:149-60
  7. Bing-You RG, Sproul MS. Medical students’ perceptions of themselves and residents as teachers. Med Teach. 1992;14(2-3): 133-8

Physicians Involved Assisted Suicide

Authors
Dr James Paul Pandarakalam
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2018;11(1):a1102
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Irrespective of the UK parliamentary verdict against the Marris Bill in 2015, the debate on assisted dying will inevitably continue for an unforeseeable time. This is quite evident in the recent editorial of BMJ on 10th February, 2018 suggesting that it is time to poll doctors for a healthy debate on assisted suicide. The different views intrinsic to the deliberations will persist as a concern throughout the world – though very often discreetly embellished with euphemistic terms – because the human life span is inexorably increasing. California has recently passed the assisted suicide bill. The other four US states are Oregon, Montana, Vermont and Washington and around half of all US states are looking at passing a similar legislation. Also, assisted suicide is already being practiced in certain other parts of the world and such a situation justifies a medical discussion on the subject. After-death existence is not an apparent factor in the public discussion of this issue even though it is one of its most significant philosophical aspects. Just as Newtonian and Darwinian world views emanating in previous centuries influenced cultural beliefs and attitudes, neuro science has contributed to the spiritual shallowness of the twentieth and twenty-first centuries. The existential despair of the second half of the twentieth century has been particularly instrumental in promulgating a voluntary death imperative. The moral and ethical dilemmas associated with assisted suicide are interwoven with spiritual concepts because human beings are spiritual personalities and survive after physical extinction.

Keywords: 
Assisted suicide, discarnate existence, ethics, thanatology

Introduction

Medical scientists who espouse a strict biological model of the mind tend to care less about the prolongation of life than do those who have faith in higher authority.1 The prevailing reductionist model of mind has recently been challenged effectively.2,3,4,5. That has led to a position in which there is some justification for claiming that there is scientific evidence to enable a suspension of disbelief in life after death. 6 Medical profession should respect the theology veiled in thanatology and should be careful not to become instrumental in creating a culture of death; alleviating suffering is not by eliminating the patient.

In the absence of spiritual conviction, human suffering lacks deep meaning and death is regarded as the ultimate tranquilliser. Prolonging life at any cost may be perceived as a worthless endeavour. To counter that, without suffering evolution would not take place and human consciousness would fail to expand. Without stress and struggle the spirit buds to which we may be likened would not mature and grow leaves and fruit, and our characters would not develop; we would lead the lives of lotus-eating sybarites. 7

Evidence for discarnate survival

According to those who are sceptical about after-death survival, there is only as much evidence to justify belief in life after death as there is for the historical existence of dinosaurs. Some scientific researchers however argue that there are compelling reasons to support those who are proponents of belief in life after death. Dr Vernon Neppe, a neuropsychiatrist turned parapsychologist, has declared that the combined body of evidence for discarnate survival is overwhelming – so great that it may be regarded as scientifically cogent.8 This emerging scientific view, coupled with the wisdom of the faith traditions, challenges the rationality of supporting assisted suicide. The following are examples of evidence for discarnate existence that are commonly cited:

  • clinical death experiences
  • pre-death visions
  • shared death experiences
  • collective apparitions
  • some forms of mediumistic incidents, particularly ones that involve cross-correspondence, drop-in communications and physical phenomena
  • children’s memories of previous lives
  • electronic voice phenomena
  • instrumental trans-communications
  • transplant cases
  • Scientifically studied Marian apparitions

The list is becoming longer as survival research progresses. Encouraged by the success of afterlife experiments with mediums,9 the multi-specialist professor Gary Schwartz of Arizona University claims to have invented a device to communicate with discarnate spirits; the holy grail of survival research that could possibly offer a fool proof scientific evidence of afterlife existence,10 but also takes account of all the potential negative consequences. He claims to have worked with black boxes in his laboratory, using a software programme that has generated proof that there is a spirit world by measuring light. 11It appears that he has developed a technique whereby faint light can be detected in a totally dark box. Measurements are taken at the beginning of an experimental session, and then a specific “hypothesized spirit collaborator” is asked to show a “spirit light” in the box and a second reading is taken. The finding is that instruction for specific spirits to enter a light sensing system was associated with reliable increase in the apparent measurement of photons. Such a curious result means that these communicating spirits are able to hear, respond and produce light in an otherwise dark enclosure. 12,13 The conclusion is that survival research opens up new vistas which seem much more important than cosmology or quantum electrodynamics.

Scientifically examined Marian apparitions are a recent addition to the evidences for discarnate existence. 14 Mainstream scientists seem never to have attempted to develop the conceptual tools and vocabulary needed to investigate the possibility of post-mortem existence. It may be that science will not accept the possibility of discarnate survival without a new theory of physical reality. In the early part of the twentieth century the prevailing view of scientists was that there was no possibility whatsoever of proving the existence of life after death. Over the years that have passed since then attitudes have evolved, and in the world, we are now in it is asserted by some researchers that there is scientific evidence for the existence of life after death. Some of the evidence relating to discarnate existence may not however satisfy the criteria of the physical sciences since the latter are based on speculative science and court room logic.

Paradigmatic shift

Demonstrating post-mortem existence as an irrefutable phenomenon is a route to establishing empirically that humans have a higher consciousness. Unfortunately, in survival research there are many phenomena that have multiple possible explanations, and these augments add to the complexity of this immensely significant area of scientific enquiry. All the types of evidence postulated as supporting discarnate survival are simultaneously a form of evidence of a non-biological component that operates in association with the brain. The existence of a non-biological component indirectly proves the possibility of survival after physical extinction. A huge paradigmatic shift towards non-reductionism is now taking place in the cognitive sciences – consciousness is no longer considered an epiphenomenon of brain activity, but asthe designer and prime mover of the material body. Nowadays, some mainstream scientists are themselves paradoxically trying to debunk mainstream science.

Suicide victims

Through suicide, a person is simply changing the location of their suffering. While wrapped in the physical planet by space and time, we are in an advantageous position for inducing personality changes swiftly, whereas in the timeless state of discarnate existence changes are sluggish and personality development is much slower. Contemporary data for survival research may be congruent with the wisdom of the faith tradition. 15 To use a simple analogy for this, carrying out assisted suicide is like destroying the shell of a pupa and forcefully freeing it in a premature state. Such a pupa will not be able to fly about like a butterfly. It is arguable that a person subjected to violent death – as in the case of suicide – may not be able to enjoy the beauty of God’s grand other-worldly dimensions until they have become spiritually compatible with them. They have to navigate through the physical plane like wingless birds. 10 To look at this way, if fruit that is unripe drops from a tree, it will be sour. Suicide breaks a solemn law because it deprives the conscious self of the natural growth that life in a physical body can best provide.7The Chinese saying “One day of earthly existence is not equivalent to a thousand days of ghostly existence” is a statement of the sanctity of terrestrial life.

Lord Alton has campaigned against the Assisted Suicide Bill of 2014 since its inception. Referring to his dying father’s account of how he had seen his own brother, a member of the Royal Air Force who had died in the Second World War, Lord Alton argued that a forced death, as opposed to a natural one, may deprive a person of their “healing moment.” 16 A graceful and natural death may be supposed to be accompanied by benign caretaker spirits with exuberant love who assist those who are dying by making them comfortable for the big transition.17,18 A person who terminates their own life prematurely may not be so fortunate as to get such benevolent assistance from the spiritual realm. Most hospice workers are very familiar with departing and death-bed visions such as that described by Lord Alton. Furthermore, it has been suggested that beings from the imperceptible spiritual sphere who assist in delivery from the terrestrial plane have a role in such matters as the timing of death, and it is arguable that their part in what happens should not be impeded by intervention.

It appears that human brain is designed to have some doubts about discarnate survival for some reason and a fool proof evidence of post-mortem existence may have its down side in that somebody who is fed up of life might use it to justify ending his earthly life voluntarily. 19An ultra-optimistic view of discarnate life is spiritually counterproductive and such an over optimism could be seen as a justification by the patient and carers in the decision making of assisted suicide. In a weak moment of extreme psychological or physical sufferings, such a belief can also become the final rationalization for ending one’s own life voluntarily. In my own clinical practice, I have come across suicidal patients telling me, “It will be always better on the other suicide.” A belief in discarnate existence based on parapsychological proof alone did not deter one such patient making a serious suicidal attempt

End-of-life concerns

The evening of life was considered as a great opportunity for spiritual, emotional and psychological growth and a celebration of one’s life journey. These are also times to harvest the wisdom of yesteryears and share them with the succeeding generation. Spiritually enlightened people consider this to be the time to conquer the fear of death. Fear of death is not the fear of the physical pain of death, but the fear of truthful self-judgement after death. Recent observations in thanatology favour a belief in post-mortem self-assessment and appraisal. For some, it would be voluntary or assisted, whereas for others it could turn out to be forced upon them. The final phase of life is the time to settle the errors committed against fellow beings that have not been remedied in life. Fortunately, modern medicine has prolonged this period, which grants an opportunity for most people to experience conscious ageing. Sadly, traditional attitudes towards the evening of life have changed in today’s youth-obsessed culture. For some, medical procedures have extended life and made dying a lingering process rather than a sudden event, and have contributed their own problems. For several reasons, terminally ill people who are in crisis may wish to die rather than being kept alive longer (Table 1).

From an evolutionary point of view, there can be only a survival instinct – no Freudian death instinct. Avoiding death rather than seeking it is a natural human urge and the fear of death may affect every individual action. The very concept of euthanasia is totally against the human make-up and is entirely artificial. Assisted dying and assisted suicide are the same thing when a member of the medical professional gives a lethal drug to a person so that they can take their own life. Euthanasia is different; it happens when, for example, someone injects a lethal substance into a patient. Involuntary euthanasia refers to a situation in which the patient has the capacity to give consent, but has not done so; and in non-involuntary euthanasia a person is unable to give consent, for example because of dementia or being in a coma. Mercy killing is claimed to be a compassionate act to end the life of a patient.

Table 1: End of Life Concerns

  1. Losing autonomy
  2. Less able to engage in activities making life enjoyable
  3. Loss of dignity
  4. Burden on family, friends/caregivers
  5. Losing control of bodily functions
  6. Inadequate pain control or concern about it
  7. Financial implications of treatment

Moral and ethical issues

It has been observed that the risk of suicide is higher among people with a family history of suicide. Family culture and genetics may account for the increased incidence of suicide in such situations. Assisted suicide would create a trail in the culture of more families and more succeeding generations would perhaps be at increased risk of considering suicide as a serious option at a time of crisis. Kevil Yull (2013) comments that changes in the law of assisted suicide would have an additional impact on those left behind, because of their effect on the moral connections, assumptions and accepted responses to situations on which we base our relationships with fellow human beings and establish ourselves in the world. 20 He argues that the legalisation of assisted suicide would undermine freedom instead of promoting freedom of choice, and also that the proposed safeguards and regulations would breach the privacy of the death-bed.

Assisting someone to kill themselves is assisting them in murder. According to all the major faith traditions, life is a gift from God and ending it is like throwing a precious object back to the giver. All spiritual traditions teach and believe that bringing the human heart to a standstill is God's business (Table 2). There are patients who assert that even if all their limbs were amputated, they would still want to hold on to the treasured gift of life. It is very difficult to define what unbearable suffering is; extreme suffering is a subjective matter that it is not possible to separate from an individual’s outlook on life. A fundamental question is that of who would be the one to pronounce a verdict on when suffering is intolerable – the patient or medical personnel?

Laws are not precision-guided arrows and they may become perverted. In a world full of violence and crime, assisted suicide is unsafe and could be exploited. There would be many unintended consequences. For reasons of public safety alone, some people oppose assisted dying. Financial abuse by relatives of the elderly seems to be becoming more common; those with a vested interest could be tempted to put an inheritance before life.

The regulation of assisted dying has been modified in recent times in some countries, an example being the Netherlands in 2014. There it is now lawful to kill a patient without their consent, and euthanasia and assisted suicide may be offered to people with mental health problems (consensus with the family is required in all these situations). Inboth Belgium and the Netherlands the euthanasia of children is legal with family consent (in Belgium there is no age limit; in the Netherlands the child must be 12 or above and must give consent). In Belgium blind adults who were developing further problems were granted euthanasia at their own instigation a few years ago. There is public concern about collaboration between euthanasia teams and transplant surgeons in Belgium.

Table 2: Medical dilemmas

  1. Assisted suicide promotes a human right to commit suicide and gives wrong messages to suicidal patients in psychiatry. 
  2. It undermines the Universal Declaration of Human rights and strikes at the foundations of all spiritual values. 
  3. It is hard to define unbearable sufferings. 
  4. Assisted suicide has many unintended consequences. 
  5. Death with dignity could deteriorate as death with indignity. 
  6. It might permit the unlawful killing of innocent people in certain circumstances. 
  7. It is founded on unethical principles-survival of the fittest.      

In 2013, 1.7% of all deaths in Belgium were hastened without the explicit request of the patients. 21 Professor Cohen Almagor, the author of 2015 report on euthanasia in Belgium stated that the decision as to which is no longer worth-living is not in the hands of the patient but in the hands of the medical personal. 22 More than 500 people in the Netherlands are subjected to euthanasia without their consent.23 Data from Oregon where assisted suicide was legalised in 1977 shows that the top five reasons people choose assisted suicide are not because they are suffering from a terminal illness and 49% stated that feeling like a burden and a fear of loss of control are among the main reasons for choosing assisted suicide Oregon .24 In Washington state in 2013, 61% of people who were killed in assisted dying said that being a burden was a key factor for their choice of death. 25

Medical Dilemmas

Majority of British medical practitioners are against assisted suicide. 26 A 2013 survey showed that 77% hold the view that they would oppose a change in the current law to allow assisted dying, 18% favoured the RCGP moving to a neutral position, and only 5% favoured a change in the current law. They opined that a change in the law would make patients afraid of their doctor and would alter doctor –patient relationship, and would make vulnerable patients most at risk from assisted dying. According to Marris bill, some people should be given help to die meaning that some lives are worth less than others. Vulnerable people would feel pressurised to choose death and could be killed without their explicit consent. GPs feel that it is their privilege to protect the disadvantaged and vulnerable people of the society.

Assisted dying would lead to less focus on investment in palliative care. The RCGPs also cautioned in the survey that a change in the position of the law makers would become like abortion legislation, which started as something for extreme circumstances and is now effectively on demand. They are also anxious for the fact that legalisation of assisted dying would make it impossible to tell the real reason why patients decided to die, because illness can cause people to become depressed and frightened. As debate on assisted suicide has become hotter, in clinical practice suicidal patients have already started enquiring about the prospects of assisted death.

Thanatology

Medical sciences have not advanced enough in matters of death to offer details to make informed choice for those who want to die voluntarily and thanatology is only a fledgling science. Thanatology is the scientific study of death and investigates the mechanisms and forensic aspects of death, such as bodily changes that accompany death and the post-mortem period, as well as wider psychological, parapsychological and social aspects related to death. They are not particularly interested in the meaning of life and related philosophical issues, but this is an area where science and philosophy not be separate. In recent years, studies of parting visions by Elizabeth Kubler Ross and Raymond Moody’s NDE studies. 27,28,29,30,31,32 have given a spiritual dimension to thanatology. Theology and Thanatology are two major corpuses of human wisdom that cannot but overlap. Assisted dying would probably become also an issue of forensic sciences.

It is the job of the doctor to keep the patient alive whereas it is the job of the psychotherapist to have a sense of a bigger picture. 33 People wanting to hasten death should also have the choice of receiving pastoral and psychotherapeutic assistances to distract themselves from their preoccupations of death and allow nature take its own natural course. New generation psychotherapists will have to be well versed in all aspects of death related sciences. Thanatology has a rightful place in medical studies, but I content that medical professionals need not to be unduly concerned about the different forms of afterlife existences, the borderland between religion and thanatology. Medical professionals are expected to be above religion and politics. Thanatologists now fear that if assisted suicide is legalised, they might be pressurised to slip from the original goal of acquiring more knowledge of human dying to serve the dying into the pursuit of death.

Concluding Remarks

Assisted suicide or euthanasia is incongruous with the theological view that it is the weakest and the vulnerable who can teach us the values of life and the concepts of euthanasia or assisted suicide have an indirect message of discarding them. The right to die would soon deteriorate as duty to die to prepare room for fittest ones. Instead of looking for reasons to live, people will be looking for reasons to die. What is need is better understanding of death process and advancements in the palliative care of the terminally ill, rather than doing away with them. Until we know more about the death process, assisted dying debate should be kept on hold. More research in palliative care and allowing people to die naturally with dignity should be the concern of medical profession.

Evolution may be taking place in biological and spiritual streams and they are interconnected: biological sufferings maybe aiding spiritual evolution. 34. From a philosophical perspective, the rationale of terminal sufferings is to help the individual to disengage from the “pleasant illusions” of earthly life. The debate of assisted suicide raises the question whether human beings are mere electrical animals, quantum beings or fundamentally spiritual personalities-humans maybe all the three.The sanctity of human sufferings need to be brought into the equation of assisted suicide discussion. Assisted suicide would only add to the growing violence in the present world that could do with reintroduction of principles of non-violence.

USA may have better legal infrastructure to negate the unwanted and unintended errors of assisted suicide, but in many third world countries, where there is no such legal infrastructure, the procedure would easily get dishonoured. Oriental religions as well as Abrahamic faith traditions are opposed to ending life voluntarily. In general, all faith traditions believe that life that is nearing the biological end need not be preserved at all costs and that one does not have to go to extraordinary lengths to preserve a terminally ill person’s life. This means, for instance, that while a terminally ill person should not be denied basic care, he or she could refuse treatment that might prove to be futile or unduly burdensome for the dying person - passive voluntary euthanasia.

A scientific belief in after death existence is not without its pitfalls unless it is accompanied by the spiritual corollary of sanctity of earthly life. Science alone cannot highlight the sanctity of life; Divine standards are helpful in comprehending the sacredness of life. In fact, science has taken us to a cross road with Professor Schwartz’s new instrumental communication and it is time mark the boundaries of healthy survival research and the unhealthy ones.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
Dr James Paul Pandarakalam, Consultant Psychiatrist, Northwest Boroughs Health Care NHS Foundation Trust, Warrington WA2 8WN, UK
Corresponding Author Details: 
Dr James Paul Pandarakalam, Consultant Psychiatrist, Northwest Boroughs Health Care NHS Foundation Trust, Hollins Park Hospital & AFG Rehab Hospitals, Winnick Lane, Warrington WA2 8WN, UK
Corresponding Author Email: 
jpandarak@hotmail.co.uk
References
References: 
  1. Cole Andrew. Doctor’s religious beliefs affect their views on end life care.  BMJ 341; C4732 (2010).
  2. Kelly Edward; Kelly Emily Williams; Crabtree Adam; Gauld Alan; Grosso Michael; Greyson Bruce. The Irreducible Mind. Lanham: Rowman& Littlefield Inc (2006).
  3. Tart T. Charles.  The End of Materialism. Oakland: New Harbinger Publications (2009).
  4. Beichler E. James. To Die For. London: Trafford Publications (2008).     
  5. Fontana David. Life beyond Death. London: Watkins Publishing (2009).
  6. Braude Stephen. Immortal Remains. New York: Bowman & Littlefield Publishers (2003). 
  7. Betty Stafford. Heaven and Hell unveiled. Guildford: White crow books (2014).
  8. Tymn Michael. An Interview with Dr Vernon Neppe. The Search Light. Vol 21, No 4. (2002). 
  9. Schwartz E.  Gary. The Afterlife Experiments. New York: Atria Books (2002).
  10. Schwartz E. Gary. After life communications. Florida: ASCS Publications (2014).
  11. Herrick E Karen. President’s message: Looking ahead. The Search Light, Vol 23, No4(2014).
  12. Schwartz E. Gary. The Sacred Promise: How science is Discovering Spirit’s Collaboration with Us in Our Daily Lives. New York: Atria Books (2011a)
  13. Schwartz E. Gary. Photonic measurement of Apparent Presence of Spirit Using a Computer Automated System.drgaryschwatz.com(2011b).
  14. Laurentin Rene and Joyeux Prof. Henv. Scientific and Medical Studies on the Apparitions at Medjugorje, Dublin, Mount Salus Press (1987).
  15. Heath Rae Pamela, Klimo John. Suicide, what really happens in the Afterlife? California: North Atlantic Books (2006).
  16. Bennet Claire. Senior doctor backs assisted dying in UK. Catholic Universe 14th November. New York: Palgrave Macmillan (2014).
  17. Osis Karles & Haraldsson Erlendur. At the hour of death, New York: Avon books (1977).
  18. Barrett, W. Death Bed Visions. London: Methuen (1926).
  19. Fontana David. Evidences for survival. Christian Parapsychologist. March Volume 14, No2 (2001)
  20. Yull Kevin. Assisted Suicide, The Liberal, Humanist Case Against Legislation (2013). 
  21. Chambaere Kenneth, Vander Stichele, Mortier Robert, Cohen Joachim, Luc Deliens Freddy. Recent Trends in Euthanasia and Other End-of-life(2015) Practices in Belgium New England Journal of Medicine. March,372(12). p.1179-1181
  22. Cohen- Almagour Raphael. First do no harm: internationally shortening lives of patients without their explicit request in Belgium. J Med Ethics doi:10.1136/medethics-2014-102387(2014)  
  23. Pereira J. Legalising euthanasia or assisted suicide: the illusion of safeguards and controls. Current Oncology. Volume 18, No2 (2011).
  24. Oregon Public Health Division, Death and Dignity Act Report. http://public.health.oregon.gov/ProviderPartnerResources/EvaluationResearch/DeathwithDignityAct/Documents/year2015
  25. Washington State Department of Health (2014) Death and Dignity Act Report, http://www.doh.wa.gov/DataandStatisticalReports/VitalStatisticsData/DeathwithDignityData.aspx
  26. Royal College of General Parishioners Assisted Dying Consultation Analysis, January. (2014).
  27. Kubler-Ross Elizabeth. The Tunnel and the Light. New York: Avalon (1999).
  28. Kubler-Ross Elizabeth. Encountering Death and Dying. New York: Facts On File, In (2004).
  29. Kubler-Ross Elizabeth. On Death and Dying, revised. New York: Scribner publishing (2014).
  30. Moody Raymond. The Last Laugh: A new philosophy of near death experiences, apparitions and the paranormal. Charlottesville, VA: Hampton Roads (1999). 
  31. Moody Raymond. Life after death. New York: Bantam (1975). 
  32. Moody Raymond. Light Beyond. New York: Bantam (1988).
  33. Hillman James. Suicide and the Soul. New York: Spring Publications (1997).
  34. Stevenson Ian. Reincarnation and biology. Westport, USA: Praeger Publishers (1997).

It takes all sorts – a curious case of pseudohyperaldosteronism, hypertension and liquorice tea.

Authors
Peter Allan, Michael Newman & Tareq Husein
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2018;11(1):a1101
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Patient X is usually fit and well, slim 49-year old woman was admitted with a collapse in association with a 3-week history of headache, nausea and paraesthesia of the hands. She was found to be hypertensive, and investigations demonstrated a hypokalaemia, hypophosphataemic metabolic alkalosis. Upon further questioning, she stated she usually consumes 6 liquorice tea infusions per day, and a diagnosis of pseudohyperaldosteronism was made. She underwent intravenous phosphate and potassium replacement as an inpatient, and was initiated on 5mg of Amlodipine with oral potassium supplementation on discharge with a 3-month follow up. She was advised to stop consuming liquorice products. Upon follow up, she was normotensive and normokalaemic, and her Amlodipine and potassium supplementation were subsequently ceased.

Abbreviations: 
Na-Sodium, K-Potassium.

Background

This case highlights a rare and interesting medical condition bought about by liquorice ingestion.  While there have been many previous reports of liquorice toxicity secondary to eating confectionary, I have only found one case report of liquorice toxicity secondary to liquorice tea ingestion and the patient there had only a mild case of hypokalaemia and did not require hospital admission unlike patient X.1

Case presentation

Patient X is a usually fit and well 49-year-old woman who was admitted following a collapse.  Prior to this collapse she had experienced a 3-week history of gradual onset, slowly worsening dull headache and a feeling of tingling in her hands which increased over this timeframe.  On the day of admission, she experienced nausea.  Her past medical history included migraines, for which she self-medicated with paracetamol, ibuprofen and codeine as necessary.  She was also using Cerazette.  She was in full time work, was a lifelong non-smoker and used alcohol very rarely.  She had no family history of note.

On examination, Patient X was a slim individual who was hypertensive with a blood pressure of 170/100 mmHg.  Her other observations were normal.  Her general and neurological examinations were unremarkable.

While initially the medical team felt that Conn’s syndrome was a likely cause of the abnormalities, this was reconsidered on a ward round where, following research on the internet into her abnormalities, patient X brought it to the attention of the team that she had been consuming between six and eight liquorice tea infusions per day for the past two months and had been consuming around three a day for a significant period time prior to this (roughly 18 months).  The diagnosis was made based on her history. 

Investigations

A venous gas demonstrated a metabolic alkalosis with a pH of 7.57.

Blood tests revealed hypokalaemia (K+ = 2.2 mmol/L) and hypophosphataemia (PO4 = 0.35mmol/L).  No other abnormalities were detected. 

More specialist assays were undertaken, and demonstrated that her plasma renin was 2.3 ng/mL/hour (normal range 0.2 – 3.3 ng/mL/hour).  Her morning supine plasma aldosterone level was 29 pg/mL (normal range 30 – 160 pg/mL).  Her morning plasma cortisol level was 612 nmol/L (normal range 138-635 nmol/L).

In addition, the patient also underwent a CT head and a CT renal angiogram, both of which were normal.

DIFFERENTIAL DIAGNOSIS

  • Apparent mineralocorticoid excess
  • Exogenous mineralocorticoid excess
  • Liddle’s syndrome
  • Congenital adrenal hyperplasia
  • Cushing syndrome
  • Liquorice

Treatment

Intravenous potassium and phosphate replacement, cessation of liquorice intake and amlodipine 5mg OD.

Outcome and follow-up 

The patient was discharged with a blood pressure of 132/66 mmHg on amlodipine, a potassium level of 2.9, and a phosphate level of 1.16.  She was given oral potassium supplementation to be taken 3 times per day.  After two weeks, the amlodipine was stopped as she became mildly hypotensive.  Her blood pressure was 120/60 following cessation of amlodipine.  Three months later her plasma potassium level was 4.6 without supplementation.  Mrs X required no follow up although she reports an ongoing feeling of tingling in her hands. 

Discussion

Liquorice is an extract of the roots of the Glycyrrhiza glabra plant and has been used as both a confectionary flavouring agent and a herbal remedy.  It is also commonly used as a laxative, and as a flavouring agent in chewing gums, sweets, and food products.

The active ingredient in liquorice is glycyrrhetinic acid which inhibits the enzyme 11-β-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase.  This enzyme converts cortisol into inactive cortisone within the distal tubule of the kidney and so in liquorice toxicity there is a build-up of cortisol in distal tubular cells.2  This results in increased mineralocorticoid like activity as there are structural similarities between cortisol and aldosterone, with increased Na+ and water retention in conjunction with increased H+ and K+ excretion.3  Here hyperaldosteronism occurs, but with a low or low-normal plasma aldosterone and renin level.  Serum glycyrrhetinic acid levels can be measured with enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) and high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC).   Urinary glycrrhetinic acid levels can be measured with gas chromatography-mass spectrometry (GC-MS).4

Pseudoaldosteronism secondary to liquorice consumption is a relatively rare occurrence.  Case reports demonstrate a range of clinical manifestations from an asymptomatic patient fortuitously diagnosed to those with more severe presentations such as rhabdomyolysis, hypertensive encephalopathy, asthenia, paralysis, heart failure, and cardiac arrhythmias such as polymorphic ventricular tachycardia and ventricular fibrillation secondary to hypokalaemia.  For these reasons, it has been suggested that the public should be made aware of the potential dangers associated with liquorice consumption. 5-13

The combination of alkalosis hypokalaemia and hypertension suggests increased mineralocorticoid activity leading to increased renal tubular Na+ reabsorption along with increased k+ and H+ excretion.  Both primary and secondary hyperaldosteronism cause these abnormalities, the former via an appropriate response (renin release) to decreased renal perfusion pressure or decreased sodium concentration in the ultra filtrate, the latter an inappropriate release of aldosterone from the adrenal cortex, often a result of an adrenal adenoma.

Other genetic syndromes, such as Bartter’s or Gitelman’s, cause hypokalaemia with alkalosis but without hypertension.14

Features of low potassium include generalised weakness and lethargy, ascending paralysis, and rhabdomyolysis.15-17   Decreased intake is rarely a cause of low potassium as the western diet usually contains significantly more potassium than is needed and because the renal tubular reabsorption mechanism can be extremely effective in limiting potassium excretion.17

The maximum recommended dose of liquorice is 100mg/day although cases of liquorice toxicity have been reported in association with doses as low as 80mg/day.  Each liquorice tea bag contains approximately 500mg of glycyrrhetic acid, of which approximately 20mg is ingested per infusion.

This is a relatively rare occurrence and it has been suggested that certain groups are more susceptible to toxicity than others – for example those with 11-β-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase deficiency.18  It is also thought that those with essential hypertension are also more at risk.19

LEARNING POINTS/TAKE HOME MESSAGES

  • Consumption of liquorice can cause pseudoaldosteronism.
  • The clinical picture is similar to that of primary aldosteronism, but is characterised by low levels of both aldosterone and renin.
  • While liquorice toxicity can be asymptomatic, clinical manifestations are wide ranging and include cardiac arrhythmias, rhabdomyolysis, weakness and paralysis.
  • Pseudohyperaldosteronism caused by liquorice consumption is reversible and generally resolves upon cessation of liquorice consumption.  Prior to resolution, potassium supplements are usually necessary.
Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Acknowledgement: 
Dr Paul Johnston, Consultant Nephrologist, Royal Cornwall Hospital.
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
PETER ALLAN, MBChB(hons) and M(Biol), Royal Perth Hospital, Australia. MICHAEL NEWMAN, MBChB and MSc AND BSc(Hons), Queen Alexandra Hospital, Portsmouth, Uk. TAREQ HUSEIN, MBBS, Morriston Hospital, Swansea, Uk.
Corresponding Author Details: 
TAREQ HUSEIN, 43 Glan Yr Afon Gardens, Swansea, SA2 9HX.
Corresponding Author Email: 
tareqhusein@yahoo.co.uk
References
References: 
  1. Emily Allcock and James Cowdery.  Hypertension induced by Liquorice tea.  BMJ Case Reports.  2015.
  2. Armanini D, Fiore C, Mattarello MJ, Bielenberg J, Palermo M. History of the endocrine effects of licorice.  Experimental and Clinical Endocrinology and Diabetes. 2002. p. 257–61.
  3. Armanini D, Lewicka S, Pratesi C, Scali M, Zennaro MC, Zovato S, et al.  Further studies on the mechanism of the mineralocorticoid action of licorice in humans.  J Endocrinol Invest.  1996;19:624–9.
  4. Seth Schonwald MD, FACEP.  Liquorice poisoning workup.  Medscape.  Updated 2017.
  5. Janse A, van Iersel M, Hoefnagels WHL, Olde Rikker MGM.  The old lady who liked liquorice: hypertension due to chronic intoxication in a memory-impaired patient.  The Netherlands journal of medicine.  2005.  p. 149–50.
  6. Van den Bosch AE, van der Klooster JM, Zuidgeest DMH, Ouwendijk RJT, Dees A.  Severe hypokalaemic paralysis and rhabdomyolysis due to ingestion of liquorice.  The Netherlands journal of medicine.  2005.  p. 146–8.
  7. Van Beers EJ, Stam J, van den Bergh WM.  Licorice consumption as a cause of posterior reversible encephalopathy syndrome: a case report. Crit Care.  2011;15:R64.
  8. Robles BJF, Sandoval a RH, Dardon JDP, Blas CA.  Lethal liquorice lollies (liquorice abuse causing pseudohyperaldosteronism).  BMJ Case Rep [Internet].  2013; 2013:9–11.  Available from: http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/24051150
  9. Famularo G, Corsi F GM.  Iatrogenic worsening of hypokalemia and neuromuscular paralysis associated with the use of glucose solutions for potassium replacement in a young woman with licorice intoxication and furosemide abuse. Acad Emerg Med. 1999;6:960–3.
  10. Harada T, Ohtaki E M k.  Congestive heart failure caused by digitalis toxicity in an elderly man taking a licorice-containing chinese herbal laxative.  Cardiology. 2002;98(218).
  11. Eriksson J, Carlberg B, Hill??rn V.  Life-threatening ventricular tachycardia due to liquorice-induced hypokalaemia.  J Intern Med. 1999;245:307–10.
  12. Brusselaers N, Vogelaers D, Blot S.  The rising problem of antimicrobial resistance in the intensive care unit.  Annals of Intensive Care.  2011. p. 47.
  13. Omar HR, Komarova I, El-Ghonemi M, Fathy A, Rashad R, Abdelmalak HD, et al. Licorice abuse: time to send a warning message.  Therapeutic Advances in Endocrinology and Metabolism.  2012.  p. 125–38.
  14. Simon DB, Lifton RP.  The molecular basis of inherited hypokalemic alkalosis: Bartter’s and Gitelman's syndromes.  Am J Physiol.  1996;271:F961–F966.
  15. Cumming AM, Boddy K, Brown JJ, Fraser R, Lever AF, Padfield PL, et al.  Severe hypokalaemia with paralysis induced by small doses of liquorice.  Postgraduate medical journal.  1980.  p. 526–9.
  16. Kishore B, Thurlow V, Kessel B.  Hypokalaemic rhabdomyolysis.  Annals of clinical biochemistry.  2007.  p. 308–11.
  17. Rastegar A, Soleimani M.  Hypokalaemia and hyperkalaemia.  Postgrad Med J. 2001;77:759–64.
  18. Edwards C.  lessons from licorice.  N Engl J Med.  1991;325:1242–3.
  19. Sigurjonsdottir HA, Manhem K, Axelson M, Wallerstedt S.  Subjects with essential hypertension are more sensitive to the inhibition of 11 beta-HSD by liquorice. Journal of human hypertension.  2003 p. 125–31.

Skin and Seizures: Tuberous Sclerosis Complex, A Pictorial Essay.

Authors
Murtaza Rashid, Samir Altalafha & Mohammed Al Mogbil
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2017;10(1):a1003

A 23 y/o male was brought to our Emergency Department after having a seizure. He was alert and his vital signs were stable. He is known to have epilepsy and is on regular anti-epileptic medication for three years. He is being followed up at a neighborhood medical center at his native village . On physical examination numerous brown papules were seen over his nose and both cheeks in a butterfly pattern which correspond to facial angiofibromas (Figure 1). Ash Leaf Hypomelanotic macules were seen over his extremities (Figure 2). Few hyperpigmented café au lait macules were observed over his trunk (Figure 3). A big fibroma was also seen over his scalp (Figure 4). Areas of thick leathery texture of orange peel known as Shagreen patches were observed on back (Figure 5).

Figure 1: Facial angiofibromas

Figure 2: Ash Leaf spot

Figure 3: Cafe au lait macule

Figure 4: Scalp fibroma

Figure 5: Shagreen patch

A Brain CT scan revealed multiple subependymal giant cell astrocytomas. Laboratory investigations were normal.

This patient was clinically diagnosed as Tuberous Sclerosis Complex having a myriad of skin lesions.1

Tuberous sclerosis complex is an autosomal-dominant, neurocutaneous, multisystem disorder characterized by cellular hyperplasia and tissue dysplasia.2 Seizures are commonly encountered in Emergency Room however, conspicuous lesions as described above must alert the physician to guide the patient for a multidisciplinary approach.3

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
MURTAZA RASHID; M.D Medicine; Royal Commission Hospital, Jubail, Saudi Arabia. SAMIR ALTALAFHA; M.D Emergency Medicne, Fellowship Critical Care, Royal Commission Hospital, Jubail, Saudi Arabia. MOHAMMED ALMOGBIL; M.D, FRCPC, Pediatric Emergency Medicine, Royal Commission Hospital, Jubail, Saudi Arabia.
Corresponding Author Details: 
MURTAZA RASHID; M.D.; Department Of Emergency Medicine, Royal Commission Hospital, Jubail Industrial City, 31961, Saudi Arabia
Corresponding Author Email: 
dr.murtazarashid@gmail.com
References
References: 
  1. DiMario FJ Jr, Sahin M, Ebrahimi-Fakhari D. Tuberous   sclerosis complex. Pediatr Clin North Am. 2015  Jun;62(3):633-4.
  2. Curatolo P, Moavero R, de Vries PJ. Neurological and neuropsychiatric aspects of tuberous sclerosis complex. Lancet Neurol. 2015 Jul;14(7):733-45. 
  3. Saxena A, Sampson JR. Epilepsy in Tuberous Sclerosis: Phenotypes, Mechanisms, and Treatments. Semin Neurol. 2015 Jun;35(3):269-76 . 

Combined Botulinum Toxin Injections and Phenol Nerve / Motor Point Blocks to Manage Multifocal Spasticity in Adults

Authors
Fahim Anwar & Shruthikaa Ramanathan
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2017;10(1):a1002
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Objectives: To highlight the importance of combining phenol and botulinum toxin in the treatment of spasticity in adult patients resulting from upper motor neuron lesion.
Design: A retrospective case series.
Setting: A tertiary care hospital.
Participants: Patients in spasticity clinic
Intervention: 29 patients with spasticity resulting from various neurological conditions underwent combined botulinum toxin and phenol nerve block to manage spasticity.
Results: The most frequently used combination was obturator nerve block with botulinum toxin to hamstring muscles (34.4%). The combination of a posterior tibial nerve block with hamstring botulinum toxins was used in 3 (10.3%) patients. There were no adverse events from both phenol and botulinum toxins.
Conclusions: The combination of botulinum toxin and phenol nerve/motor point blocks allowed many muscles to be injected, during one clinic attendance, to manage spasticity in adults with neurological conditions.

Abbreviations: 
INR - International Normalised Ratio
Keywords: 
Phenol, botulinum toxin, spasticity, nerve blocks, motor point blocks

Introduction

Spasticity was first described by Lance1 in 1980, and according to him it was described as; a motor disorder characterised by a velocity-dependent increase in tonic stretch reflexes (muscle tone) with exaggerated tendon jerks, resulting from hyperexcitability of the stretch reflex, as one component of the upper motor neuron syndrome. Spasticity can be a consequence of many neurological conditions including traumatic brain injury, spinal cord injury, stroke and multiple sclerosis. The annual incidence of spasticity in the lower limb following a stroke, traumatic brain injury and spinal cord injury is estimated to be 30 to 485 per 100,000, 100-235 per 100,000 and 0.2 to 8 per 100,000 respectively2. Spasticity is characterised by muscle overactivity and can lead to permanent changes in the muscle fibres leading to muscle contractures. Contractures can be very painful and may interfere with seating, posture, mobility and activities of daily living, thus increasing the care cost significantly.

Phenol has been used peripherally and intrathecally for the treatment of spasticity for many years. The botulinum toxin became available in the last decade for treatment of spasticity. Its use has increased since then, and this has led to a decline in the use of phenol. It is still being used in patients who are sensitive to botulinum toxins or have developed antibodies to them. Phenol is both neurolytic and anaesthetic in nature3. The anaesthetic effect of phenol can be seen immediately after the injection where the patient reports an immediate effect. The neurolytic effect takes at least two weeks, and therefore patients should be educated not to expect any significant change in the spasticity before two to four weeks. Phenol can also be used in combination with botulinum toxin to treat multifocal spasticity where the maximum dose of botulinum exceeds the recommended safe dose. This allows several groups of muscles to be treated in a single setting3.

The lethal dosage of phenol has been reported to be greater than eight grams4. Phenol in aqueous solution is preferred for peripheral nerve and motor point blocks and is available in 5, 6 and 7% concentration. Injecting botulinum toxins is quite different from performing nerve and motor point blocks. Phenol nerve and motor point blocks take a longer duration of time to perform as compared to botulinum toxins. For motor point blocks, a nerve stimulator with a surface electrode is needed to localise the motor points on the muscles. In the present study, we highlight the importance of management of spasticity in adults with a combination of botulinum toxin and phenol nerve /motor point blocks. A case series of patients who underwent combined phenol and botulinum toxin is presented, describing the diagnosis, number and location of muscles injected, types of phenol nerve and motor point blocks and any complications encountered.

Methods

This is a retrospective study conducted at the Rehabilitation Medicine Department of the University Hospital in Cambridge UK. The study period included from December 2014 to January 2017. The patients were identified from the spasticity clinic database. All patients were assessed in the spasticity clinic, and a plan to inject the botulinum toxin along with phenol nerve block/motor point block agreed with the patient. The patients who decided to have the procedure were appointed to a clinic to perform the agreed injections and blocks. If the patients were on anticoagulants (warfarin, dalteparin or clopidogrel), they were advised to stop the anticoagulation 3 days before the procedure. International Normalised Ratio (INR) was checked before the procedure. The usual dose of anticoagulation was started after the procedure.

Patients were consented and placed on a plinth. Botulinum toxin type A only was used in our study. It was diluted with normal saline, and the muscles were injected either using the surface anatomy or electrical stimulation. Each muscle was either injected at one to two sites, depending on the size of the individual muscle.

Phenol nerve blocks and motor point blocks were performed according to the techniques described by Roy3 and Gaid5. Aqueous phenol 5% (phenol in water) was used for all the procedures. The nerves were identified using a nerve stimulator with a surface electrode using 2mA current (Figure 1). The skin was infiltrated with 1% lignocaine, and the nerve was approached with a stimulator needle. The nerve was then ablated with 5% phenol under stimulation guidance. The dose of the phenol was titrated while the nerve was being stimulated. The motor points were located similarly with the help of a surface electrode and marked before ablation with 1 to 2 ml of 5% phenol. The amount of botulinum toxin and phenol was recorded. All patients were reviewed in 6 weeks’ time for any complications.

Figure 1: Nerve Stimulator with surface electrode

Results

Between December 2014 to January 2017, we treated 29 patients with spasticity caused by different neurological conditions with a combination of aqueous phenol and botulinum toxin injections. There were 15 males and 14 females with an age range of 18 to 80 years and a mean age of 49.3 years. The most common diagnosis was multiple sclerosis followed by stroke (Figure 2). A total of 40 phenol nerve or motor point blocks were performed in 29 patients. Nineteen patients (65.5%) received phenol blocks once, 9 (31%) twice and only 1 patient (3.4%) had the phenol block done three times. Where the phenol blocks were repeated, the mean duration between the phenol injection was 14.1 months (range 6-23 months). The procedure was bilateral in 16 (55.2%) and unilateral in 13 (44.8%). The local anaesthetic (trial block) was performed in 6 (20.6%) patients who were ambulatory before the phenol block.

Figure 2: Frequency of Diagnosis

Obturator nerve block was the most common phenol procedure performed (44.8%), followed by posterior tibial nerve block (37.9%). Two (6.9%) patients had both obturator nerve blocks and posterior tibial nerve blocks, whereas 1(3.4%) patient had hamstring motor point blocks, 1(3.4%) patient had gastrocnemius motor point blocks. One patient (3.4%) had bilateral obturator nerve blocks, posterior tibial nerve blocks and rectus femoris motor point blocks (Figure 3).

Figure 3: Frequency of Phenol Nerve/Motor Point Blocks

Botulinum toxin was also injected into various muscles in all 29 patients. The botulinum was repeated every 4 to 6 months in the same muscles. Botulinum toxins were injected bilaterally in 12 (41.4%) and unilaterally in 17 (63.6%) patients. The most common muscles injected with botulinum toxin were hamstrings (44.8%) followed by finger flexors (13.8%). The frequency of botulinum toxins injections is shown in Figure 4.

Figure 4: Muscles Injected with Botulinum Toxins

The most common combination in our series was obturator nerve block and hamstring botulinum toxin injections (34.4%). The combination of posterior tibial nerve block with hamstring botulinum toxins was used in 3 (10.3%), and 2 (6.8%) patients received posterior tibial nerve block with finger flexor botulinum toxin injections. The combination of phenol and botulinum toxin injection is shown in Table 1. There were no complications noted following both phenol as well as botulinum toxin injections.

Table 1: Combination of Phenol and Botulinum Toxins used

Phenol Nerve/Motor Point Blocks

    Obturator Nerve Block Posterior Tibial Nerve Block Obturator and Posterior Tibial Nerve Block Hamstrings Motor Point Blocks Gastrocnemius Motor Point Blocks Obturator, Posterior Tibial Nerve Block and Rectus Femoris Motor Point Block

Muscles Injected with Botulinum

Hamstrings 10 3 0 0 0 0
Finger Flexors 0 2 1 0 0 0
Finger and Wrist Flexors 0 2 0 1 0 0
Wrist, Finger Flexors and Hamstrings 1 0 1 0 0 0
Elbow and Finger Flexors 0 1 0 0 1 0
Elbow, Wrist and Finger Flexors 0 1 0 0 0 0
Elbow and Wrist Flexors 0 1 0 0 0 0
Wrist Flexors and Knee Extensors 1 0 0 0 0 0
Ankle Planter Flexors 1 0 0 0 0 0
Flexor Digitorum 0 1 0 0 0 0

Discussion

Perineural injection of aqueous phenol (3 to 7%) can reduce spasticity by blocking the nerve signals to the group of muscles supplied by the nerve. Phenol produces an initial local anaesthetic effect which is followed by neurolysis caused by protein coagulation and inflammation6. The neurolysis leaves the nerve with about 25% less function than before but does not disadvantage people with little or no residual function, as a mild progressive denervation can be beneficial in reducing spasticity6. Khalili et al7first described the technique of phenol nerve blocks and also suggested that the re-growth of most axons is seen with preservation of gamma motor neurons. This means that phenol reduces spasticity without reducing the strength of the muscle significantly.

The use of combining phenol with botulinum toxins injections has been documented in children with cerebral palsy and central nervous degenerative diseases8. To date, there are no studies in the literature showing the use of combined phenol and botulinum toxins in the treatment of spasticity in adults. The combination of phenol with botulinum toxin helps to treat multifocal spasticity allowing more spastic areas to be treated. The most frequent pattern used in Gooch et al8 study was obturator nerve block and gastrocnemius botulinum toxin injections. In our study, the most common combination was obturator nerve block and hamstring botulinum toxin injections. The possible explanation for this variance is that the majority of our study population suffered from multiple sclerosis and hamstring with hip adductor spasticity is a very common pattern.

The mechanism of action of phenol is different from botulinum toxins. However, the reduction in spasticity with phenol and botulinum toxins is comparable. Manca et al9 compared botulinum toxins and phenol nerve blocks to reduce ankle clonus in spastic paresis and concluded that both patient groups showed significant clonus reduction over time with the phenol group effect greater than the botulinum toxins group. They also suggested that the two drugs have a different mechanism of action with phenol reducing the excitability of the alpha motor neuron. A randomised double-blind trial by Kirazli et10 al compared the effects of botulinum toxins Type A and phenol on post-stroke ankle plantar flexor and invertor spasticity. There was a significant change in Ashworth scores at week 2 and 4 in the group who received botulinum toxins but there was no significant difference between the two groups at week 8 and 1210. Similarly, the decrease in clonus duration (detected by electromyography) was significant in both groups. However, the group that received botulinum toxins showed significant change at week 2 and 4 compared to phenol group. The reason for this may be the delayed onset of action of phenol as compared to botulinum toxins. Burkel et al6 studied the effects of phenol into the peripheral nerves of rats and showed that Wallerian degeneration of the nerves occurs before healing by fibrosis that starts after about 4-6 months following phenol injections. Their study also concluded that following phenol the nerves are left with 25% less function than before and this does not disadvantage the people with little or no residual function6.

There is always a risk of deteriorating the mobility or function due to weakness caused by the phenol nerve block. It is our usual practice to perform a local anaesthetic block (trial block) before injecting the phenol in all ambulatory patients or patients who are using spasticity functionally to their advantage. In our series, 20.6% of patients underwent local anaesthetic block before proceeding to the phenol block. There were no adverse effects noted following the local anaesthetic block, and all six patients chose to have the phenol blocks. A recent study by McCrea et al11 looked at the effects of phenol on position and velocity components of spasticity in addition to strength in post-stroke elbow flexor spasticity. The study concluded that phenol paradoxically improved muscle strength in addition to reducing hypertonia11.

In our series, we used phenol mainly for lower limb muscles and botulinum toxins for both the lower and upper limb muscles. For smaller muscles of the upper limb, it is difficult, but not impossible, to find the motor points. The technique for upper limb phenol blocks has been well described in literature3. However, when combining the botulinum toxins with phenol, we find it useful to prefer the phenol block for the lower limb muscles. Gooch et al8 also injected larger proximal muscles with phenol, and smaller distal and deeper muscles with botulinum toxins. In our series, the maximum dose of botulinum toxins used was 1000 units of Dysport and the maximum dose of phenol used was 20 ml of 5% aqueous phenol.

Conclusion

The combination of botulinum toxin with phenol injections is effective in treating multi-focal spasticity in clinical settings. The advantage of using phenol in combination with botulinum toxins is cost-reduction and the flexibility of managing various muscle groups at the same time. Further studies are needed to evaluate the long-term cost-effectiveness and complications of combining phenol and botulinum toxins, especially after repeated injections.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Acknowledgement: 
NONE
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
FAHIM ANWAR, MBBS, MRCS, FRCP, FEBPRM, Cambridge University Hospital Nhs Foundation Trust SHRUTHIKAA RAMANATHAN, MBBS, MRCP, Cambridge University Hospital Nhs Foundation Trust
Corresponding Author Details: 
FAHIM ANWAR, Box 248, Addenbrooke's Hospital, Cambridge, United Kingdom
Corresponding Author Email: 
fanwar@nhs.net
References
References: 
  1. Feldman RG, Young RR, Koella WP, Spasticity, disordered motor control. Miani, FL: Symposia Specialist; Chicago; 1980. 485-494p. 
  2. Martin A, Abogunrin S, Kurth H. Epidemiological, humanistic, and economic burden of illness of lower limb spasticity in adults: a systematic review. Neuropsychiatric Disease and Treatment 2014; 23(10):111-22.
  3. Roy C. Phenol Block for Upper Limb Spasticity. ACNR 2012; 12(5): 34-36.
  4. Gracies JM, Elovic E, McGuire J, et al. Traditional pharmacological treatments for spasticity. Part I: Local treatments. Muscle Nerve Suppl. 1997;6:S61–91.
  5. Gaid M. Phenol Nerve Block for the Management of Lower Limb Spasticity. ACNR 2012;12(13):1–3.
  6. Burkel WE, McPhee M. Effect of phenol injection into peripheral nerve of rat: electron microscope studies. Archives of physical medicine and Rehabilitation 1970 ;51(7):391–7.
  7. Khalili AA, Harmel MH, Forster S, Benton JG. Management of Spasticity by Selective Peripheral Nerve Block with Dilute Phenol Solutions in Clinical Rehabilitation. YAPMR. W.B. Saunders Ltd; 1964; 45:513–9.
  8. Gooch JL, Patton CP. Combining botulinum toxin and phenol to manage spasticity in children. Archives of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation 2004;85(7):1121–4. 
  9. Manca M, Merlo A, Ferraresi G, et al. Botulinum toxin type A versus phenol. A clinical and neurophysiological study in the treatment of ankle clonus. Eur J Phys Rehabil Med 2010;46(1):11–8.
  10. Kirazli Y, On AY, Kismali B, et al. Comparison of Phenol Block and Botulinus Toxin Type A in the Treatment of Spastic Foot after Stroke: A Randomized, Double-Blind Trial. American Journal of Physical Medicine & Rehabilitation 1998;77(6):510.
  11. McCrea PH, Eng JJ, Willms R. Phenol Reduces Hypertonia and Enhances Strength: A Longitudinal Case Study. Neurorehabilitation and Neural Repair 2004;18(2):112–6.

Splenic tuberculosis : Report of two cases and literature review

Authors
Ibrahim Masoodi
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2017;10(1):a1001
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Tuberculosis is endemic in many developing nations of the world. However, with the epidemic of AIDS, the disease has re-emerged in advanced countries as well. Tuberculosis presenting as pyrexia of unknown origin is well known and can affect any organ in the body. Two patients presented with pyrexia of unknown origin and on evaluation splenic lesions were discovered which proved to be splenic tuberculosis after fine needle aspiration. Both patients were HIV negative. One patient had well controlled diabetes mellitus   while as another patient had no co morbidities at all. Splenic abscesses could be one of the complications of bacterial Endocarditis and in the past splenectomy used to be the treatment of choice. But now CT-guided aspirations and demonstration of AFB have eased out management in these cases. After the demonstration of acid-fast bacilli both patients improved after therapy with antitubercular treatment. Clinical description and literature review is described in this brief report.

Keywords: 
Tuberculosis , HIV , Diabetes mellitus , Fever of unknown origin

Introduction

Isolated splenic tuberculosis is extremely rare, particularly in the immunocompetent persons. Splenic tuberculosis, however, can be part of military tuberculosis in immunocompromised patients. Tuberculosis spleen invariably presents in the form of an abscess. The risk factors for splenic abscess described in the literature are sickle cell disease, hemoglobinopathies, splenic trauma endocarditis or tuberculosis elsewhere in an immunocompetent patient. Although rare cases of splenic tuberculosis in immunocompetent patients have been described in the past. With re-emergence of tuberculosis due to AIDS and use of immunosuppressive medications around the globe, it is very important to bear this rare clinical condition while evaluating pyrexia of unknown origin in a given case.

Case 1

A 54-year-old male vet nary doctor by profession presented with the history of off and on fever of 8 weeks duration. The fever was low grade, intermittent and was associated with weight loss of 4 kilograms. There was no evening rise of temp and no sweating. The patient denied any history of a cough, urinary symptoms or diarrhoea. There was no history of travel or contact with sick people. He had been type II diabetic for last 12 years controlled on oral hypoglycemic agents and had no history of acute or chronic complications. There was no history of tuberculosis in the past or in close contacts . He was non-alcoholic and denied any high-risk behaviour. The clinical examination revealed an average built person who was conscious oriented and had stable vitals. There was no jaundice or lymphadenopathy. Abdominal examination revealed moderate splenomegaly. The liver was not palpable and there was no ascites. Respiratory and cardiovascular systems were normal. During the hospitalisation temp. recorded ranged from 380 C to 390C with no night sweats during his hospital stay. Patient’s evaluation showed haemoglobin levels of 10.5g/dl Leukocyte and platelet counts were normal. ESR was 88mm for the first hour. The tests on kidney and liver functions were normal. An ultrasound abdomen showed the presence of two heterogenic space occupying lesions measuring 3×4cms suggestive of splenic abscesses. An echocardiogram was done to rule out any features of subacute bacterial endocarditis. All the valves of his heart were normal and no feature of endocarditis was noted. The patient had normal ejection fraction and the pericardial cavity was normal too. Blood cultures and urine cultures were found to be sterile. A 24-hour collection of urine showed no evidence of albuminuria and funduscopic examination ruled out retinopathy. Keeping in view splenic abscesses CT guided fine needle aspiration was done and acid-fast bacillus were demonstrated by Zeal-Neilson s stain and the patient was put on antitubercular treatment. The culture of the aspirate a few weeks later turned out to be positive for Mycobacterium tuberculosis. His HIV serology was negative .The patient continued standard four-drug regimen for two months followed by two drug regimen for another seven months. Patients fever settled after two weeks of treatment and followed our clinic till completion of his treatment.

CASE 2

A 24-year-old female student presented with the history of off and on fever of 5 weeks duration. The fever was low grade intermittent and not associated with sweating She also complained of loss of appetite and weight loss of 3 kilogrammes over a period of 2months She denied any history of a cough, urinary symptoms. The patient had no history of contact with sick persons or travel. She had no co morbid illness. On examination she was conscious oriented and had mild pallor, no lymphadenopathy or jaundice was noted. Her respiratory and cardiovascular system was normal. Abdominal examination showed splenomegaly 5cms below the costal margin. Her laboratory data showed haemoglobin levels of 9.8gm/dl WBC count of 4200 and platelets were 1.5×103. ESR was 90mm in the first hour. Blood culture, widal tests and Brucella serology were negative. Tests on liver and kidney functions were normal. An ultrasound abdomen showed the presence of three small space occupying lesions in the spleen.Each was measuring 2×2 cms. Portal vein diameter and spleno-portal axis were normal. CT scan abdomen confirmed splenic abscesses and no abdominal lymphadenopathy was noted. CT guided fine needle aspiration was done which turned out to be positive for AFB and cultures a few weeks later confirmed Mycobacterium tuberculosis. Her transthoracic echocardiography showed normal values and didn’t show any features of vegetations. Her HIV serology was negative. The patient was started on conventional four drugs antitubercular regimen for two months followed by two drug regimen for another seven months. Her fever settled and she had marked improvement in her appetite and her weight increased.

DISCUSSION:

Splenic abscesses presenting as fever of unknown origin is well known. Most of the cases of TB spleen present as fever, vague ache in left hypochondrium or weight loss. Although the frequency of splenic tuberculosis is more common in immunosuppressed patients but splenic abscess due to tuberculosis has been described in immune competent patients as well1. Due to the advent of AIDS epidemic prevalence of tuberculosis has increased globally and more cases are now getting reported. Another scenario leading to increased frequency of this previously rare entity is the widespread use of immunosuppressed therapies for chronic disorders like Rheumatoid arthritis, Crohn's disease Psoriasis etc. The index cases were neither HIV positive nor where on any immunosuppressant medication but developed splenic lesions, reflecting some other hitherto unknown predisposing factor for such lesions. The splenic abscess does occur in the setting of infective endocarditis as infective emboli get lodged in the spleen. Splenic abscess following endocarditis in an 80 year old male presenting with abdominal pain during the course of treatment was reported by Pereira et al2 and in another series3 of 3 patients with bacterial endocarditis, splenic abscess was diagnosed based on CT abdomen with evidence of endocarditis on Echocardiography. In the same series two of the patients underwent splenectomy before valve repair while as splenectomy was performed after the valve repair in the other patient .The echocardiogram in index cases, however, were normal without any evidence of endocarditis. After the diagnosis and initiation of ATT, the index cases became afebrile and splenectomy was thus averted . While one of the cases had well controlled diabetes mellitus but the other patient was euglycemic and had no other known risk factor for splenic tuberculosis as is described in the literature. What lead to splenic tuberculosis in the second case remained unidentified? .There is a well known linkage between diabetes mellitus and TB and as per WHO a bidirectional screening has been recommended. Sri Lankan data4 on 112 patients with TB found that 8 patients with TB already were already known cases of diabetes mellitus and in their study further screening unravelled TB in another 17 patients. It is thought that metabolic adaptation is critical during the pathogenesis of mycobacterium tuberculosis5,6..

In time management of tubercular abscess is very crucial as without treatment patients can have complicated clinical course.Splenic abscess can rarely rupture or lead to fistulous communication with adjacent organs. A gastrosplenic fistula has been reported by Lee et al7 in a 61-year-old male presenting with abdominal discomfort and cough. The authors demonstrated a fistulous tract between the spleen and the stomach on endoscopic examination. The fistulous track healed in their case after completion of anti-tubercular treatment. It is quite possible that delay in diagnosis may be a factor that leads to such complications. The index cases, however, had favourable outcome without any complications and successfully completed anti-tubercular treatment.

The other side of the coin is that complications are even known during the antitubercular treatment as a result of reaction to antitubercular treatment. Spontaneous rupture during treatment leading to splenectomy was reported by et Yea et al8 .Splenic tubercular abscess are known to be associated with miliary tuberculosis or with haematological diseases where leucopenia and thrombocytopenia are profound9.The index cases had normal platelet count and leucocytic count highlighting that there was neither bone marrow suppression nor hypersplenism. The patients with ITP on treatment are also prone to develop Tuberculosis of spleen and conversely, patients with TB spleen can per se develop thrombocytopenia.

The management of splenic abscess used to be splenectomy in the past but with the advent of FNAC splenectomy is avoided . Here a word of caution is that various other lesions in spleen can mimick splenic TB hence it is very important to confirm the disease especially in endemic areas where TB is prevalent. Kunnathuparambil et al10 described melioidosis in a 47 year old male who was treated as case of splenic tuberculosis based on splenic lesions on imaging and fever. The diagnosis of splenic tuberculosis in past was mainly reached after histological examination of surgical specimens but now fine needle aspiration has become the procedure of choice. Spleen being highly vascular organ bleeding is the most feared complication of any intervention but fine needle aspiration has been found to be technically safe and in a retrospective data no significant complication was observed11 .With the advent of non-invasive biomarkers diagnosis of tuberculosis has advanced further and a step further is Quantiferon Gold test which has come up another non-invasive modality in the diagnosis of TB. In various studies12, the sensitivity of this test to the tune of 75% has been demonstrated.

While treating an HIV patient the clinician requires high alert in patients presenting with pain abdomen as the splenic abscess is one of the differentials and it is recommended that initial ultrasound must be carried out to diagnose this condition13. In modern era ,Splenectomy may be offered only to resistant cases otherwise ATT is considered to be the therapy of choice.

To conclude tuberculosis of spleen must be kept in mind while evaluating fever of unknown origin in any patient on immunosuppressant treatment or having HIV and even in immunocompetent patients as well. The Fine needle aspiration is a safe diagnostic modality and treatment with antitubercular medication is rarely unsuccessful.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
IBRAHIM MASOODI; MD, DM(Gastroenterology), FACP; Associate Professor, Taif University, Saudi Arabia
Corresponding Author Details: 
IBRAHIM MASOODI; MD, DM(Gastroenterology), FACP; Associate Professor, College of Medicine, Post Box 888, Taif University, Taif, Saudi Arabia 21974
Corresponding Author Email: 
ibrahimmasoodi@yahoo.co.in
References
References: 
  1. Basa JV, Singh L, Jaoude WA, Sugiyama G. A case of isolated splenic tuberculosis. Int J Surg Case Rep. 2015;8C:117-9.
  2. Pereira L, Machado A, Oliveira J, et al  . Infective Endocarditis Presenting as Acute Renal Failure and Unusual Complications. Intern Med. 2015;54(10):1259-63.
  3. Elasfar A, AlBaradai A, AlHarfi Z, et al . Splenic abscess associated with infective endocarditis; Case series. J Saudi Heart Assoc. 2015 Jul;27(3):210-5.
  4. Rajapakshe W, Isaakidis P, Sagili KD et al . Screening patients with tuberculosis for diabetes mellitus in Ampara, Sri Lanka. Public Health Action. 2015 Jun 21;5(2):150-2.
  5. Garay CD, Dreyfuss JM, Galagan JE. Metabolic modeling predicts metabolite changes in Mycobacterium tuberculosis. BMC Syst Biol. 2015 Sep 16;9:57.
  6. Riccomi A, Palma C. B Cells and Programmed Death-Ligand 2 Signaling Are Required for Maximal Interferon-γ Recall Response by Splenic CD4⁺ Memory T Cells of Mice Vaccinated with Mycobacterium tuberculosis Ag85B. PLoS One. 2015 Sep.17;10(9)
  7. Lee KJ, Yoo JS, Jeon H, et al A Case of Splenic Tuberculosis Forming a Gastro-splenic Fistula. Korean J Gastroenterol.2015 Sep;66(3):168-71
  8. Yeo HJ, Lee SY, Ahn E, et al  Spontaneous Splenic Rupture as a Paradoxical Reaction during Treatment for Splenic Tuberculosis. Tuberc Respir Dis (Seoul). 2013 Nov;75(5):218-21
  9. Dal MS, Dal T, Tekin R Idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura associated with splenic tuberculosis: case report. Infez Med. 2013 Mar ;21(1):50-5.
  10. Kunnathuparambil SG, Sathar SA, Tank DC Splenic abscess due to chronic melioidosis in a patient previously misdiagnosed as tuberculosis.Ann Gastroenterol. 2013;26(1):77-79.
  11. Gochhait D, Dey P, Rajwanshi A, Role of fine needle aspiration cytology of spleen. APMIS. 2015 Mar;123(3):190-3
  12. Kwon JC, Kim SH, Park SH et al, Clinical characteristics and the usefulness of the QuantiFERON-TB Gold In-Tube test in hematologic patients with hepatic or splenic lesions. Korean J Intern Med. 2013 Mar;28(2):187-96
  13. Tiri B, Saraca LM, Luciano E Splenic tuberculosis in a patient with newly diagnosed advanced HIV infection. IDCases. 2016 Sep 3;6:20-2

 

BJMP March 2016 Volume 9 Number 1

BJMP March 2016 Volume 9 Number 1

Full Issue Booklet   PDF

A review of NICE guidelines on the management of Borderline Personality Disorder

Authors
Syed Ali and Christopher Findlay
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2016;9(1):a909
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Aims and objectives: This report aims to review the current guidelines regarding the management of Borderline Personality Disorder and explore the literature according to the research recommendations. The psychological/psychosocial and pharmacological aspects will be the focus of this review.

Methods: A summary of the NICE guidance was made and each recommended psychotherapy (i.e. mentalization-based therapy, dialectical behaviour therapy, cognitive analytic therapy, cognitive behavioural therapy, schema-focused therapy and transference focussed therapy) and pharmacological options were dissected and analysed using the literature.

Results: All of the psychotherapies showed promising results when applied to borderline personality disorder. Two were seen as superior due to there being more evidence to support their use. In terms of psychotropics, despite the NICE guidance negating their use, the literature found evidence that some second-generation antipsychotics and mood stabilisers could improve symptoms in the short term. Those pharmacological agents that carry the strongest evidence base should be considered if off-label use is deemed appropriate.

Conclusion: Specialist psychological treatments such as dialectical behaviour therapy and mentalization based therapy substantiate the use of psychotherapy in borderline personality disorder. By crystallising the important aspects of the array of psychotherapies available, a more comprehensive approach could be developed. By understanding the disorder in terms of psychological and biological aberrations, it will enable a more specific dual approach to its management in the future. 

Abbreviations: 
BPD - Borderline Personality Disorder, DSM-5 - The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorder, ICD-10 - The International Classification of Diseases, NICE - The National Institute for Health and Care Excellence, DBT - Dialectical Behaviour Therapy, MBT - Mentalization Based Treatment, CAT - Cognitive Analytic Therapy, NHS - National Health Service (UK), CBT - Cognitive behavioural therapy, TFT - Transference focussed therapy, NHMRC - The National Health and Medical Research Council of Australia.
Keywords: 
Borderline Personality Disorder, Emotionally unstable personality disorder, Personality disorder.

INTRODUCTION

During my placement in Psychiatry at the Brooker Centre, Runcorn, UK, I have come into contact with a wide array of psychiatric disorders, none more so than borderline personality disorder (BPD). It is undoubtedly one of the most prevalent problems in the area which the Brooker Centre serves. I can recall an example of a patient with BPD who had been quite unwell for a prolonged period of time and had struggled with affective instability. This patient had been quite successfully treated with Lithium therapy, has exhibited stability and is happy on the current treatment. There is a pattern of pharmacological treatment in BPD patients despite the fact that guidelines suggest otherwise…

Personality disorders are defined as ‘an enduring pattern of inner experience and behaviour that deviates markedly from the expectations of the individual’s culture, is pervasive and inflexible, has an onset in adulthood, is stable over time, and leads to distress or impairment’ . Personality disorders are representative of long-term functioning and are not considered in terms of episodes of illness 1.

The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 5th edition (DSM-5), groups the various personality disorders into three clusters based on their descriptive similarities.

Cluster A includes the Paranoid, Schizoid, and Schizotypal personality disorders which are categorised as ‘odd/eccentric’;

Cluster B includes the Antisocial, Borderline, Histrionic, and Narcissistic personality disorders which are categorised as ‘dramatic/emotional/erratic’;

Cluster Cincludes the Avoidant, Dependent, and Obsessive-compulsive personality disorders which are categorised as ‘anxious/fearful’ 2.

The International Classification of Diseases, 10th edition (ICD-10), specifies the condition of emotionally unstable personality disorder which has two subtypes: The impulsive type and the borderline type. The borderline type in essence overlaps with the DSM-5 definition 3.

It has proven difficult to provide robust clinical recommendations with regards to the treatment of personality disorder. This is, in part, due to the fact that study populations are diverse but also compounded by the use of different assessment criteria. Furthermore, it is important to consider that personality disorders often present with a great deal of psychiatric comorbidity. Of the personality disorders, particular attention has been paid to borderline personality disorder (BPD) as the symptom clusters which it involves have been shown to improve considerably with treatment 4.

Figure 1: Diagnostic Criteria for Borderline Personality Disorder according to DSM-5 2:

A pervasive pattern of instability of interpersonal relationships, self-image, and affects, and marked impulsivity, beginning by early adulthood and present in a variety of contexts, as indicated by five (or more) of the following:
1. Frantic efforts to avoid real or imagined abandonment. (Note: Do not include suicidal or self-mutilating behaviour covered in Criterion 5.)
2. A pattern of unstable and intense interpersonal relationships characterised by alternating between extremes of idealization and devaluation.
3. Identity disturbance: markedly and persistently unstable self-image or sense of self.
4. Impulsivity in at least two areas that are potentially self-damaging (e.g. spending, sex, substance abuse, reckless driving, binge eating). (Note: Do not include suicidal or self-mutilating behaviour covered in Criterion 5.)
5. Recurrent suicidal behaviour, gestures, or threats, or self-mutilating behaviour.
6. Affective instability due to a marked reactivity of mood (e.g. intense episodic dysphoria, irritability, or anxiety usually lasting a few hours and only rarely more than a few days).
7. Chronic feelings of emptiness.
8. Inappropriate, intense anger or difficulty controlling anger (e.g. frequent displays of temper, constant anger, recurrent physical fights).
9. Transient, stress-related paranoid ideation or severe dissociative symptoms.

Borderline personality disorder is characterised by a pervasive instability in mood, interpersonal relationships, self-image and behaviour. The condition was first recognised in the United States by Adolf Stern in 1938. He described that these are a group of patients who neither fit into psychotic or psychoneurotic group, which gave rise to the term ‘borderline’. BPD is often diagnostically comorbid with depression and anxiety, eating disorders (notably bulimia), post-traumatic stress disorder, substance misuse and bipolar affective disorder. Furthermore, psychotic disorders have also been found to overlap. Due to this extent of comorbidity it is rare to see a patient who has a pure BPD 5.

The pharmacological treatments of BPD are tailored according to the symptom clusters that present. These include impulsivity, affective instability, transient stress-related psychotic symptoms and suicidal & self-injurious behaviours 5,6.

Recommended Psychological and Pharmacological treatment, 2009 National Institute for Health and Clinical Excellence (NICE) guidelines on Borderline Personality Disorder 5, 7:

Psychological

NICE guidelines state that when offering psychology for BPD or for the individual symptoms of the disorder, brief psychological interventions (i.e. less than a 3 month period) should not be used. It states that the frequency of psychotherapy sessions should be adapted to the patient’s needs and ‘context of living’ and suggests that twice-weekly session may be considered. The guidelines also specify that for women with BPD for whom recurrent self-harm is a priority, a comprehensive dialectical behaviour therapy programme should be considered. NICE recommends that when psychological treatment is provided in BPD, the effects should be monitored using a broad range of outcomes. These should include personal functioning, drug and alcohol use, self-harm, depression and the symptoms of BPD.

Pharmacological

The NICE guidance states that drug treatment should not be used specifically for BPD or for the individual symptoms or behaviour associated with the disorder (e.g. repeated self-harm, marked emotional instability, risk taking behaviour and transient psychotic symptoms). It goes on to suggest that antipsychotics should not be used for the medium- and long term treatment of BPD. However, with regards to the management of comorbidities, it specifies that drug treatment may be considered and that in each case, the NICE guidelines for each comorbid condition must be referred to. Antidepressants, mood stabilisers and antipsychotics are commonly used in clinical practice. The guidelines mention that short-term use of sedative medication may be considered in a crisis. ‘Short-term’ denotes treatment lasting no longer than one week.

With regards to drug treatment during a period of crisis, NICE recommends that there should be a consensus among prescribers and other involved professionals about the proposed drug treatment and also that a primary prescriber should be identified. There should be an appreciation of the likely risks of prescribing, including alcohol and illicit drug use. NICE emphasises that the psychological role of prescribing (both from the patient’s and prescriber’s perspective) should be taken into account, and the impact that such prescribing decisions may have on the therapeutic relationship and overall care plan. NICE recommends that a single drug be used and that polypharmacy is to be avoided as much as possible.

In a crisis NICE recommends prescribing ‘a drug that has a low side-effect profile, low addictive properties, minimum potential for misuse and relative safety in overdose.’ The minimum effective dose is favourable, prescribing fewer tablets more frequently if there is a significant risk of overdose and also agreeing with patient on the symptoms that are being targeted. NICE suggests that following a crisis, a plan should be made to stop drug treatment that was started during a crisis. If this is not possible, a regular review of the effectiveness, side effects, misuse and dependency of the drug is advised. BPD patients can often have concomitant insomnia and for this, NICE details basic advice regarding sleep hygiene and forwards on to the guidance on the use of zaleplon, zolpidem and zopiclone for the short-term pharmacological management of insomnia.

AIMS AND OBJECTIVES

This report will review the current guidelines specifically regarding the management of borderline personality disorder and explore the literature according to the research recommendations that are set by NICE. The report is to focus on the two aspects of the management of BPD – The psychological/psychosocial aspect and the pharmacological aspect.

CURRENT NICE GUIDELINES ON PSYCHOLOGICAL AND PHARMACOLOGICAL TREATMENT OF BPD 7:

Psychology

Mentalisation-based therapy and dialectical behavioural therapy are proposed in the setting of a ‘well structured, high quality community based service’ e.g. a day hospital setting or a community mental health team. NICE suggests that these techniques should be compared with ‘high-quality community care delivered by general mental health service without the psychological intervention for people with BPD’ in order to measure efficacy. For outpatients, cognitive analytic therapy, cognitive behavioural therapy, schema-focussed therapy and transference focussed therapy are suggested and are catered to those with less severe BPD (i.e. fewer comorbidities, higher level of social functioning, greater ability to depend on self-management methods). Randomised controlled trials reporting medium term outcomes (e.g. quality of life, psychosocial functioning, employment outcomes and BPD symptomatology) of a minimum of 18 months are recommended

Pharmacology

Mood stabilisers are proposed as it is detailed that emotional instability is a key feature in BPD. In particular, topiramate and lamotrigine are mentioned as they have been shown to produce encouraging results in small-scale studies. A randomised placebo-controlled trial with medium to long-term follow up is recommended.

ANALYSIS

Psychology: Dialectical Behaviour Therapy (DBT)

Dialectics can be defined as the art of investigating the relative truth of opinions, principles, and guidelines 8. Dialectical in DBT refers to a means of arriving at the truth by examination of the argument i.e. the ‘thesis’ and ‘antithesis’ and resolving the two into a rational synthesis. DBT was introduced in 1991 by Marsha Linehan (a psychology researcher) and colleagues tailored as a treatment for BPD. In this, patients are supported in understanding their own emotional experiences and are taught new skills for dealing with their stresses. A combination of individual and group sessions are used. More adaptive responses and effective problem-solving techniques are integrated to improve functioning and quality of life as well as improving morbidity and mortality 9, 10.

A study published in 2015 by M. Linehan et al detailed a randomized clinical trial that set out to compare

1) Standard DBT (DBT group skills training + DBT individual therapy) with

2) A treatment that evaluated DBT group skills training with manual case management (i.e. with the removal of DBT individual therapy) and

3) A treatment that removed DBT skills training by providing only DBT individual therapy with an activities group and prohibited individual therapists from teaching DBT skills.

All 3 versions of the treatment were found to be comparably effective at reducing suicide attempts, suicidal ideation, medical severity of intentional self-harm, use of crisis services owing to suicidality and improving reasons for living 11.

Psychology: Mentalization based therapy

Mentalization is ‘the process by which we make sense of each other and ourselves, implicitly and explicitly, in terms of subjective states and mental processes.’ It is a social construct suggesting that we are attentive to the mental states of those we are with, physically or psychologically 12. Mentalization based treatment is a psychosocial treatment for BPD in which therapists monitor attachment and mentalizing capacity, and use interventions that aim to reinstate or maintain the capacity of patients to mentalize 13.

A longitudinal study, published in 2008, involving an eight-year follow-up of patients treated for BPD evaluated the effect of mentalization-based treatment (MBT) with partial hospitalization compared with treatment as usual. Five years after discharge from MBT, the MBT group exhibited clinical and statistical superiority to treatment as usual measured on suicidality, diagnostic status, service use, medication use, global function and vocational status 14. A more recent review article, published in 2015, emphasises the consideration of disruptions in three closely related domains in individuals with BPD. These are ‘in attachment relationships, in different polarities of mentalizing, and in the quality of epistemic vigilance and trust’. It is suggested that this approach allows seemingly paradoxical features of BPD patients appear more coherent. It is supposed that this approach provides a clear focus for the therapist enabling them to monitor the therapeutic process in terms of imminent mentalizing impairments and epistemic mistrust due to activation of the attachment system.

The article goes on to assert that the effectiveness of MBT in BPD may be elucidated due to the fact that it ‘enables the therapist to maintain and foster a mentalizing stance, even–and perhaps particularly–under high arousal conditions that are so characteristic of work with these patients’ 15.

Psychology: Cognitive analytic therapy (CAT)

CAT is a brief focal therapy that is informed by cognitive therapy, psychodynamic psychotherapy and elements of cognitive psychology. It was originally developed by Anthony Ryle tailored towards the needs of the NHS 16. It is based on a collaborative therapeutic position which sets out to create narrative and diagrammatic reformulations with patients concerning their difficulties. The theory centres on descriptions of sequences of linked external, mental and behavioural events. At first, the emphasis was on how such procedural sequences prevented revision of dysfunctional ways of living. More recently, this has been extended to understanding the origins of reciprocal role procedures in early life and their repetition in current relationships and self-management 17.

One study detailed a randomised controlled trial which aimed to investigate the effectiveness of time-limited CAT for participants with personality disorder. The study found that participants receiving CAT exhibited reduced symptoms and showed considerable improvement compared with the control group who showed signs of deterioration during the treatment period. They concluded that CAT is superior to treatment as usual in improving outcomes associated with personality disorder 18.

Psychology: Cognitive behavioural therapy (CBT) and Schema-focussed therapy

CBT is a time-limited, problem focussed psychotherapy that has been applied to a wide range of psychiatric disorders. The development of this technique was born out of the observation that patients referred for psychotherapy often would hold ingrained, negatively skewed assumptions of themselves, their future and their environment. The therapy is based on the notion that disorder is caused not by life events, but by the view the patient adopts of events. The therapy focusses on current problems and helps to develop new skills to provide symptom relief and sustain recovery 9, 19.

Initially CBT was predominantly insight-orientated, using introspection to bring about change. Beck et al began to integrate a range of behavioural techniques to improve the impact on dysfunctional controlling belief systems (schemas). The goal of treatment is not to replace the dysfunctional schemas; it aims to modify beliefs and develop new ones allowing the patient to cope more effectively in challenging situations 20, 21.

A 2013 review article that set to explore schema-focussed therapy concluded that schema-therapy is based on a ‘cohesive theoretical model’ and that there seems to be sufficient evidence supporting its validity. Regarding effectiveness, it goes on to indicate that one should be encouraged by the results of studies, however it points out that due to the small number of ‘methodologically-good efficacy studies’ it is difficult to be certain. The article claims that when evaluated against other psychotherapeutic treatments, specifically DBT and MBT, schema-therapy requires more investigation 22. A pilot study (2013) set out to monitor the effects of group schema-based CBT on global symptomatic distress in young adults with personality disorders or features of personality disorder. Their findings provide preliminary evidence that schema-based CBT might be an effective treatment 23.

Furthermore, there is a multicentre randomized controlled trial being conducted with the aim of investigating schema-focussed therapy versus treatment as usual in BPD, which has a closing date of 1st February 2016 24.

Psychology: Transference focussed therapy (TFT)

The classic use of the term transference originates in psychoanalysis and comprises “the redirection of feelings and desires and especially of those unconsciously retained from childhood toward a new object” 25. Transference-focussed psychotherapy is an evidence-based manualised treatment using a psychodynamic approach with a focus on object relations theory 26. TFT aims to ‘facilitate the reactivation, under controlled circumstances, of the dissociated internalised object relations in the transference relationship to observe the nature of the patient’s split polarised internal representations, and then, through a multistep interpretive process, work to integrate them into a fuller, richer, and more nuanced identity 27.

Yeomans et al produced an article in 2013 consisting of vignettes to illustrate the techniques used in TFT with the view to evaluate its use in treating BPD. Their findings supported the validity of TFT in treating BPD patients who specifically had difficulty with relationships.

They distilled TFT down to three important components 28:

1) The treatment contracting/setting the frame

2) Managing one’s affective response

3) The interpretative process

Pharmacology

A Cochrane intervention review assessing the effects of drug treatments in BPD, included twenty-eight randomised control trials, published in the period 1979-2009 (20 of 28 trials dating from 2000 or later), involving a total of 1742 participants 29.

Figure 2: The pharmacological agents that were tested included the following:

First-generation antipsychotics:
Flupenthixol decanoate
Haloperidol
Thiothixene
Second-generation antipsychotics:
Aripriprazole
Olanzapine
Ziprasidone
Mood stabilisers:
Carbamazepine
Valproate semisodium
Lamotrigine
Topiramate
Antidepressants:
Amitriptyline
Fluoxetine
Fluvoxamine
Phenelzine sulfate
Mianserin
Dietary supplementation:
Omega-3 fatty acid

The authors arrived at the conclusion that pharmacotherapy in BPD ‘is not based on good evidence from trials’. The review found that there is support for the use of Second-generation antipsychotics (in improving cognitive-perceptual symptoms and affective dysregulation); Mood stabilisers (in diminishing affective-dysregulation and impulsive-aggressive symptoms); and Omega-3 fatty acids.

However, these claims were made based on single study effects and therefore require replication. No drug was found to significantly affect the symptom clusters, specific to BPD, including avoidance of abandonment, chronic feelings of emptiness, identity disturbance, and dissociation.

One noteworthy finding was that Olanzapine was associated with an increase in self-harming behaviour. Furthermore, the review states that ‘special attention’ is needed in BPD when prescribing tricyclic antidepressants (due to toxic effects in overdose) and hypnotics & sedatives (due to there being potential for misuse or dependence). Another problem that was highlighted was that in comorbid eating disorders the use of Olanzapine can contribute to weight gain and Topiramate can produce weight loss.

The review goes on to elucidate that there is not any evidence from randomised controlled trials that any drug reduces the severity of BPD and that it consists of ‘distinct pathology facets’. They recommend that the pharmacotherapy of BPD should be targeted at ‘defined symptoms’ and that polypharmacy is not supported by the latest evidence and should be avoided as much as possible.

The authors end by reaffirming that the evidence is not robust and that the studies may not satisfactorily reflect certain characteristics of the clinical environment. They propose that further research is needed in order to produce reliable recommendations. They detail the complications that arise from the ‘polythetic nature’ of BPD i.e. each patient is likely to experience different aspects of the disorder. There lacks a consensus among researchers about a common battery of outcome variables and measures. They comment that there is a fragmentary view on drug effects and that it is unknown as to how the alteration of one symptom affects another.

Comorbidity

Comorbidity is a foremost concern in the interpretation of data concerning personality disorders 30. A majority of individuals diagnosed with one personality disorder often meet criteria for at least one other personality disorder 30. A large proportion of patients with personality disorder have one axis I 31 disorder comorbidly, mostly depression, anxiety and alcohol and substance use disorders 32. [Axis I is a reference to the multi-axial classification system used in the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders that was removed in the latest version, DSM-5 2

It is important to consider therefore that, an improvement in the symptom clusters in personality disorders might be an improvement in comorbid axis I disorder symptoms. It is reported that the rates of depression are very high in BPD 33 and that the response to antidepressants in depressed individuals with comorbid personality disorders appears lower than in those without comorbid personality disorder 32.

The most recent guidance on the treatment of BPD from the National Health and Medical Research Council of Australia (NHMRC), which reviewed the literature and integrated a series of meta-analyses, details that pharmacotherapy does appear to be effective in altering the nature and course of BPD and that evidence does not warrant the use of pharmacotherapy as a sole or first-line treatment for BPD 34.

DISCUSSION

All of the aforementioned psychotherapy techniques are shown to produce promising results when applied to the treatment of BPD, with some standing out, such as DBT and MBT, due to the presence of a relatively robust evidence base. With such a wide variety of different approaches that all show some propensity for successful treatment of BPD it is clear that these approaches must be taken more seriously in clinical practice. These treatments have been shown to considerably improve symptomatic outcomes however there is a shortcoming in that they have failed to significantly improve social functioning. Each of the therapies follow distinct theories, however, when each treatment modality is applied to BPD, similar effects are seen. This is intriguing and should be explored further.

An analysis of these therapies revealed some common features which are now suggested as core requirements for all effective psychotherapeutic treatments:

Figure 3: Five common characteristics of evidence-based treatments for BPD 35, 36.

1. Structured (manual directed) approaches to prototypic BPD problems
2. Patients are encouraged to assume control of themselves (i.e. sense of self-agency)
3. Therapists help connections of feelings to events and actions
4. Therapists are active, responsive, and validating
5. Therapists discuss cases with others, (including personal reactions)

An update to the aforementioned Cochrane review 29 was published in 2013. The update focussed on the psychotherapies that are available for the treatment of BPD and included a total of 1804 participants spread over 28 studies. The psychotherapies discussed were divided into ‘comprehensive’ if they substantially involved an individual psychotherapy element or as ‘non-comprehensive’ if they did not. The comprehensive therapies included dialectical behaviour therapy, mentalization-based therapy (delivered in either a partial hospitalisation or outpatient setting), transference-focussed therapy, cognitive behavioural therapy, dynamic deconstructive psychotherapy, interpersonal psychotherapy and interpersonal therapy for BPD. These were assessed against a control condition and also with some direct comparisons against each other. Non-comprehensive psychotherapies included DBT-group skills training, emotion regulation group therapy, schema-focussed group therapy, systems training for emotional predictability and problem solving for borderline personality disorder (STEPPS), STEPPS plus individual therapy, manual assisted cognitive treatment, and psychoeducation 37.

The authors concluded that both comprehensive and non-comprehensive therapies indicated beneficial effects for the core pathology of BPD and associated general psychopathology. The authors identified that dialectical behaviour therapy had been studied the most comprehensively followed by mentalization-based therapy, transference-focussed therapy, schema-focussed therapy and STEPPS. However, the authors do state that none of the treatments presented a very robust evidence base and that there are concerns over the quality of individual studies 37.

In terms of pharmacotherapy, the NICE and NHMRC guidelines agree with the 2006 Cochrane interventional review among others 38, 39 that there is some evidence that some second-generation antipsychotics (aripriprazole and olanzapine) and some mood stabilisers (topiramate, lamotrigine and valproate) could improve BPD symptoms in the short term. However, for some of these agents, it is necessary to balance risks against benefits as they have considerable long-term risks (e.g. with antipsychotics, extrapyramidal side effects such as tardive dyskinesia can persist even after withdrawal of the drug 40). Such risks are not a problem in psychological treatments and it is probable that this influences guidelines. In practice, off-label use of psychotropics is widespread, despite the fact that the NICE guidance negates their use. It is arguable that clinicians should preferentially use pharmacological treatments that have the strongest evidence base (i.e. antipsychotics and mood stabilisers) and refrain from using agents with the least evidence (i.e. antidepressants and benzodiazepines).

CONCLUSION

Specialist treatments, in particular DBT and MBT substantiate the use of psychotherapy in BPD and these findings support the validity of the NICE guidance. However, the array of such treatments must be amalgamated with the view to provide a comprehensive, multi-faceted treatment approach. Each treatment must be broken down in order to outline the components that are particularly useful in BPD with the view to understand the condition in greater depth and to provide more focussed therapies.

The 2013 Cochrane review 37 highlights that further psychotherapies are available and have been shown to successfully treat BPD core pathology, however, as it is clearly stated the evidence base lacks robustness and there is a need for further studies that can replicate results. The therapies that have been included in this Cochrane review that have not been covered in the guidelines (e.g. STEPPS) may prove to be superior to those put forward by NICE, and I recommend that these be explored thoroughly when the guidelines are due for update.

While the NICE guidance emphasises that the use of psychotropics is reasonable in the management of comorbidities, it worth noting that to understand BPD, it is necessary to explore both the underlying aberrant psychological processes and biological processes that manifest in the disorder. This will enable the use of more specific pharmacological therapies in targeting the symptoms of BPD in the future.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
SYED ALI, 5th Year Medical Student, University of Liverpool. CHRISTOPHER FINDLAY, BSc MB ChB MMedSc MRCP (UK) FRCP Edin MRCGP FRCPsych DRCOG, Consultant Psychiatrist, The Brooker Centre, Halton General Hospital, Hospital Way, Runcorn, Cheshire, WA7 2DA.
Corresponding Author Details: 
SYED ALI, 5th Year Medical Student, University of Liverpool.
Corresponding Author Email: 
syedali103@gmail.com
References
References: 
  1. Andreasen NC, Black DW. Introductory Textbook of Psychiatry, 3rd ed. American Psychiatric Publishing, 2001
  2. American Psychiatric Association: Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders, 5th ed. American Psychiatric Publishing, 2013
  3. World Health Organisation: The ICD-10 Classification of Mental and Behavioural Disorders, 1992
  4. Bateman AW, Gunderson J, Mulder R. The treatment of personality disorder, The Lancet 2015; 385: 735-43
  5. Borderline personality disorder: Treatment and Management, National Clinical Practice Guideline Number 78. The British Psychological Society and The Royal College of Psychiatrists, 2009
  6. Jackson MH, Westbrook LF. Borderline personality disorder: New research. Nova science publishers, 2009
  7. Borderline personality disorder: Treatment and Management. NICE clinical guideline 78 summary. National Institute for Health and Clinical Excellence, 2009
  8. Pederson LD. Dialectical behaviour therapy: A contemporary guide for Practitioners. Wiley Blackwell, 2015
  9. Semple D, Smyth R. Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry, 2nd ed. OUP 2009
  10. http://psychcentral.com/lib/an-overview-of-dialectical-behavior-therapy/
  11. Linehan MM, Korslund KE, Harned MS, et al. Dialectical behaviour therapy for high suicide risk in individuals with Borderline personality disorder: A randomised clinical trial and component analysis, JAMA Psychiatry 2015; 72: 475-482
  12. Bateman A, Fonagy P. Mentalization based treatment for borderline personality disorder, World Psychiatry 2010; 9: 11-15
  13. Swenson CR, Choi-Kain LW. Mentalization and Dialectical Behavior Therapy, American Journal of Psychotherapy 2015; 69: 199-217
  14. Bateman A, Fonagy P. 8-year follow-up of patients treated for borderline personality disorder: Mentalization-Based Treatment versus Treatment as Usual, Am J Psychiatry 2008; 165: 631-638
  15. Fonagy P, Luyten P. Translation: Mentalizing as Treatment target in Borderline Personality Disorder, Personality Disorders: Theory, Research and Treatment 2015; 6: 380-392
  16. Denman C. Cognitive analytic therapy, Advances in Psychiatric Treatment 2001; 7: 243-256
  17. Ryle A, Kerr IB. Introducing Cognitive Analytic Therapy: Principles and Practice. John Wiley & Sons, 2002
  18. Clarke S, Thomas P, James K. Cognitive analytic therapy for personality disorder: randomised controlled trial, BJPsych 2013; 202: 129-134
  19. Thoma N, Pilecki B, McKay D. Contemporary cognitive behaviour therapy, A review of theory, history and evidence, Psychodynamic Psychiatry 2015; 43(3): 423-462
  20. Evershed S. Treatment of personality disorder, skills-based therapies, Advances in psychiatric treatment 2011; 17: 206-213
  21. Beck AT, Freeman A, Davis DD, et al. Cognitive Therapy of Personality Disorders, 2nd ed. Guilford Press 2003
  22. Sempértegui GA, Karreman A, Arntz A, et al. Schema therapy for borderline personality disorder: a comprehensive review of its empirical foundations, effectiveness and implementation possibilities, Clinical Psychology Review 2013; 33: 426-447
  23. Renner F, Van Goor M, Huibers M, et al. Short-term group schema cognitive-behavioural therapy for young adults with personality disorders and personality disorder features: Associations with changes in symptomatic distress, schemas, schema modes and coping styles, Behaviour Research and Therapy  2013; 51: 487-492
  24. Wetzelaer P, Farrell J, Evers SMAA, et al. Design of an international multicentre RCT on group schema therapy for borderline personality disorder, BMC Psychiatry 2014; 14: 319
  25. https://www.psychologytoday.com/blog/in-therapy/201206/clients-guide-transference
  26. Hersh RG. Using transference-focussed psychotherapy principles in the pharmacotherapy of patients with severe personality disorders, Psychodynamic Psychiatry 2015; 43(2) 181-200
  27. Diamond D, Yeomans FE, Stern B, et al. Transference focused psychotherapy for patients with comorbid narcissistic and borderline personality disorder, Psychoanalytic inquiry 2013; 33: 527-551
  28. Yeomans FE, Levy KN, Caligor E. Transference-focused psychotherapy, Psychotherapy 2013; 50(3): 449-453
  29. Stoffers J, Vollm BA, Rucker G, et al. Pharmacological interventions for borderline personality disorder (review), Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews 2010; Issue 6
  30. Lenzenweger MF, Lane MC, Loranger AW, et al. DSM-IV personality disorders in the National Comorbidity Survey Replication. Biol Psychiatry 2007; 62:553–64
  31. Widiger TA, Shea T. Differentiation of Axis I and Axis II disorders, J Abnorm Psycho 1991; 100(3):399-406
  32. Newton-Howes G, Tyrer P, Johnson T, et al. Influence of personality on the outcome of treatment in depression: systematic review and meta-analysis, J Pers Disord 2014;28: 577–93
  33. Zanarini MC, Frankenburg FR, Hennen J, et al. Axis I comorbidity in patients with borderline personality disorder: 6-year follow-up and prediction of time to remission, Am J Psychiatry 2004;161: 2108–14
  34. National Health and Medical Research Council. Clinical practice guidelines for the management of borderline personality disorder. Melbourne: National Health and Medical Research Council, 2012
  35. Bateman AW. Treating borderline personality disorder in clinical practice, Am J Psychiatry 2012;169: 560–63.
  36. Gunderson JG, Links PL. Handbook of good psychiatric management (GPM) for borderline patients. American Psychiatric Publishing, 2014
  37. Stoffers JM, Vollm BA, Rucker G, et al. Psychological therapies for people with borderline personality disorder, Cochrane Database Systematic Reviews. 2012; Issue 8
  38. Abraham PF, Calabrese JR. Evidenced-based pharmacologic treatment of borderline personality disorder: a shift from SSRIs to anticonvulsants and atypical antipsychotics, J Aff ect Disord 2008;111: 21–30.
  39. Mercer D, Douglass A, Links PS. Meta-analyses of mood stabilizers, antidepressants and antipsychotics in the treatment of borderline personality disorder: effectiveness for depression and anger symptoms. J Pers Disord 2009;23: 156–74.
  40. https://www.evidence.nhs.uk/formulary/bnf/current/4-central-nervous-system/42-drugs-used-in-psychoses-and-related-disorders/421-antipsychotic-drugs#PHP2206

BJMP March 2015 Volume 8 Number 1

BJMP March 2015 Volume 8 Number 1

Full Issue Booklet   PDF

Editorial

Research Articles

Cervical ripening balloon as an alternative for induction of labour: a randomized controlled trial
Toh Lick Tan, Grace Yang Huang Ng, Sheri Ee-Lin Lim, Shephali Tagore, Ei Ei Phyo Kyaw and George Seow Heong Yeo
Full Text  PDF
Trend of developing resistance among isolates of Acinetobacter spp.; Threat of hospital acquired infection
Sadia Zafar, Syed Baqir Shyum Naqvi, Tanveer Abbas, Faaiza Qazi and Rabia Sheikh
Full Text  PDF

Review Articles

Current management of oesophageal cancer
Naufal Rashid, Mohamed Elshaer, Michael Kosmin and Amjid Riaz.
Full Text  PDF
Legal Highs - Not so new and still growing in popularity
Francis J Dunne, Khalid Jaffar and Shazia Hashmi
Full Text  PDF

Case Reports/Series

Clinical Practice

A feasibility study to establish a Deliberate Self-harm Register in a state hospital in southern India.
Rajgopal Rajendra, Murali Krishna, Sumanth Majgi, Narendra Heggere, Catherine Robinson, ROb Poole
Full Text  PDF

Homeopathy: In God we trust, all others must bring data.

Authors
Nasseer A Masoodi MD, MBA, FACP
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2015;8(1):a809
Abstract / Summary
Keywords: 
Homeopathy, effectiveness, science based medicine

Effectiveness of homeopathic remedies continues to be a question of concern for public, policy makers and the other involved stakeholders. A recent systematic review of studies by Australian National Health and Medical Research Council (NHMRC) 1 heightened further the concerns about the perception of effectiveness of homeopathic treatments in general. After an exhaustive review, the authors found no good quality, or well-designed studies with adequate sample size to support claims made by homeopathic practitioners. They concluded that the homeopathic remedies are no better than a placebo. Authors of the report cited concerns about the designs of the most of the studies especially the ones that showed any beneficial effect. Authors noted that such studies either had smaller sample sizes, were conducted poorly and/or were insufficiently powered to detect a statistically significant outcome. NHMRC concluded that there is no evidence from systematic reviews regarding the effectiveness of homeopathy as a treatment for any clinical condition in humans. The NHMRC identified “claiming benefits for human health not based on evidence”1 as a major health issue in Australia.

NHRMC’s report comes as no surprise as many other exhaustive reviews had failed to show any objective benefits of such remedies. Authors of a 2009-10 UK report titled as Evidence Check 2: Homeopathy2, reached to a similar conclusion. They questioned the lack of homeopathic treatment trials and cited that there is plenty of evidence showing that it is not efficacious. Their conclusion was no different from NHRMC’s and proposed that “systematic reviews and meta-analyses conclusively demonstrate that homeopathic products perform no better than placebo”2. They further recommended stopping any public funding of Homeopathic remedies in UK. Although a Swiss report3 argued otherwise claiming that homeopathy is a “valuable addition to the conventional medical landscape”3; however its methodology was considered to be flawed, biased, misinterpreting and discrediting the current science based study methodologies4.

The homeopathic notion of successive dilution of its products in water increasing the potency of the final product and “like cures like” doesn’t only defy any science based medicine logic, it is also in contrast to other alternative systems of medicine. The paucity of good-quality studies of sufficient size that examine the effectiveness of homeopathy as a treatment for any clinical condition in humans does no favors to this notion either. As cited by many reports referenced above, the available evidence is not compelling and fails to demonstrate that homeopathy is an effective treatment for any of the reported clinical conditions in humans. In spite of these significant concerns about the legitimacy and efficacy of homeopathy, the industry continues to benefit from public’s increasingly favorable attitudes toward homeopathy. The National Institutes of Health5 in the United States, reports that there is little evidence to support homeopathy as an effective treatment for any specific condition however millions of American adults and thousands of children use homeopathy. Even in UK6 where there is no legal regulation of homeopathic practitioners, The National Institute of Health and Care Excellence (NICE)-that advises the NHS on proper use of treatments, doesn’t recommend that homeopathy should be used in the treatment of any health condition. However homeopathy has seen a significant increase in its market share not only in UK but many other European countries too7.

With its market share in USA and rest of the world markets reaching in billions of dollars with yearly incremental increase, its claims for its remedial effects albeit lacking any generally acceptable evidence, raises concern that a vulnerable person may choose an ineffective remedy that may actually worsen their clinical status. There is a clash between patient autonomy and informed consent in decision making by a vulnerable patient about the appropriateness of homeopathic remedies. The ethical and policy debate on the appropriate balance between public’s access to different remedies (autonomy) and government institutional duty of public’s protection from potentially harmful or ineffective medicines is a delicate balance.  An objective and thorough evaluation of homeopathic remedies is needed however how to decide what is an objective and accurate way to assess homeopathic research continues to be the bone of contention. Although from a science based medicine perspective, homeopathic remedies have no scientific explanation, its advocates3, 4 don’t agree that it has to fall or go through same process of research methodology for its effectiveness as do allopathic remedies. Though it is a valid logic that reasoning directly from data that is gathered by controlled structure, as is true of science based trials in allopathy, is not always accurate as it’s with many biases and confounders, however the statistical testing helps to get beyond mere correlation to cause-and-effect and eliminate most of these concerns. These trials also help to formulate conclusions that can be further validated or refuted by gathering real world data. The mainstream science considers the homeopathic notion of ultra-dilutions, particle leaving imprint of itself on water, and “likes cures like” to be scientifically implausible. Even though this notion of scientists may be considered as a bias towards evaluating any homeopathic remedy, the public health institutions have an ethical obligation to educate public especially the vulnerable ones, not to substitute a proven and effective treatment for the ones whose effectiveness has not been scientifically proven.

As the saying goes, “change the rule and you will get a new number”, the onus is on homeopathic advocates not only to design trials, gather data, and publish papers but also to collect real world data to further study the impact of treatments on outcomes. The real world data can further help to understand the effects of treatments on patient outcomes that was not generated from a clinical trial. It is also an obligation of the homeopathic practitioners and organizations to seek to create standards of medical treatment, that are objective, replicable, and that will be made broadly available to physicians, researchers, parents, policy makers, and others who want to improve the care of individuals. As recommended by many exhaustive reviews1,2, these studies should recruit larger samples of patients, utilize methodologies that eliminate the bias, better discoverable record keeping for proper reporting and follow up, an objective analysis of outcomes data and how they were measured, and better discussion of potential confounders or biases. Besides they have to adequately and accurately report study details including treatment regimens, length of follow up, outcomes studied and the clinical and statistical significance of results. 

Going by the logic of famous words attributed to the noted statistician and management scientist, W Edwards Deming, “In God we trust; all others must bring data,” the ball is in their court.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
NASSEER A MASOODI, MD, MBA,FACP, Senior Consultant, Department of Medicine, Hamad Medical Corporation, Qatar.
Corresponding Author Details: 
Dr Nasseer A Masoodi, Senior Consultant, Department of Medicine, Hamad Medical Corporation, Qatar.
Corresponding Author Email: 
haadin@yahoo.com
References
References: 
  1. Effectiveness of Homeopathy for Clinical Conditions: Evaluation of the Evidence. Overview Report. Prepared for the NHMRC Homeopathy Working Committee, October 2013. Available at http://www.nhmrc.gov.au/_files_nhmrc/file/your_health/complementary_medicines/nhmrc_homeopathy_overview_report_october_2013_140407.pdf, accessed on April 04, 2015. 
  2. House of Commons Science and Technology Committee. Evidence check 2: Homeopathy. 2009. Available at: http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm200910/cmselect/cmsctech/45/45.pdf, accessed on April 04, 2015.
  3. Bornhöft G, Matthiessen P, Eds (2012). Homeopathy in Healthcare: Effectiveness, Appropriateness, Safety, Costs: An HTA report on homeopathy as part of the Swiss Complementary Medicine Evaluation Programme. Springer-Verlag, New York. 
  4. Shaw D (2012). The Swiss report on homeopathy: a case study of research misconduct. Swiss Med Wkly 142:w13594.
  5. Homeopathy: An Introduction. Available at https://nccih.nih.gov/health/homeopathy, accessed on April 04, 2015.
  6. Homeopathy: Overview. Available at http://www.nhs.uk/Conditions/Homeopathy/Pages/Introduction.aspx, accessed on April 04, 2015.
  7. Homeopathy- a healthcare choice for everyone. Available at http://www.britishhomeopathic.org/what-is-homeopathy/facts/the-growing-demand-for-homeopathy/, accessed on April 2015.

Successful Anaesthetic Management of an Intra-tracheal Tumour

Authors
Harshal D Wagh
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2015;8(1):a808
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

We report a successful management of an intra-tracheal tumour in a 56 year old patient. The tumour was situated  about 4 cm above the carina.The case was managed without the need of cardiopulmonary bypass. An orotracheal tube placed above the tumour was used to ventilate the lungs before the trachea was opened. A smaller  tube was placed in the left bronchus to ventilate the left lung after the trachea was opened to facilitate sleeve resection and anastomosis of the trachea. The patient was extubated in the immediate postop period without any adverse effects. Careful preoperative planning and good team work made the procedure possible and without complications.

INTRODUCTION

Anaesthetic management of a patient with a tracheal tumour is challenging, as the airway is shared with the surgeon and patency must be maintained despite airway manipulation.

Several anaesthetic techniques have been used in patients requiring tracheal resection and reconstruction. Cardiopulmonary bypass standby after femoral artery and vein cannulation and then intravenous/inhalational induction while oxygenating the patient has been considered to be a reasonable approach. Intratracheal tumours are challenging to anaesthetists because of the difficulty in establishment of a patent airway before commencement of surgery. The principal anaesthetic consideration is ventilation and oxygenation in the face of an open airway.

CASE REPORT

A 56 year old male with no other co-morbidities presented to the Thoracic Oncology department with a history of progressive dyspnoea and orthopnoea.On examination he was found to have dyspnoea at rest and could not complete full sentences while talking. Change of position made no difference to his symptoms.

Routine blood investigations which included full blood count, renal and liver functions, coagulation profile, ECG and 2DEcho were within normal limits. PFT showed a typical intrathoracic obstructive picture.

His chest X-ray showed bilateral hyperinflated lungs suggesting airtrapping. CT of the chest showed an intratracheal growth about 4 cm above the carina almost completely obstructing the lumen. An awake flexible bronschoscopy confirmed the CT scan findings. A 2.7mm flexible bronschocope was passed with difficulty beyond the tumour to visualise the carina. Excision of the intratracheal tumour was planned with possible resection and anastomosis of the involved tracheal segment. A careful perioperative plan was  discussed and decided in agreement with the thoracic surgeons, anaesthetist, cardiovascular surgeons and the rest of the team members.

Flexible and rigid bronchoscope, a Sanders venturi, an additional anaesthesia machine and various sizes of reinforced and normal endotracheal tubes and tracheostomy tubes were kept ready.

Preoperatively the patient had incentive spirometry and bronchodilator nebulisation and intravenous steroids. An awake epidural at T9-10 level and radial artery cannulation were done under local anaesthesia without any problems. Two 16 gauge peripheral IV lines were sited under local anaesthesia.

After adequate preoxygenation anaesthesia was induced with IV propofol along with oxygen and sevoflurane with BIS monitoring.  As mask ventilation proved to be easy the patient was paralysed with suxamethonium. There was no difficulty in ventilation after muscle paralysis. An 8.5 number COETT portex tube was placed in  the trachea with the cuff just beyond the cords to avoid possible trauma to the tumour. Since there was preoperative evidence of airtrapping, ventilator settings were set to an I:E ration of 1:3 with a tidal volume of 550ml, respiratory rate of 12-14 per minute and PEEP of 4. At these ventilator settings the airway pressures were reaching up to 22 cm of  H20 and ETCO2 reaching a maximum of 40mmHg. Anaesthesia was maintained with oxygen: air with sevoflurane and atarcurium for muscle paralysis.

Flexible bronchoscopy was done to confirm the position of the endotracheal tube, which showed that the ETT was adequately above the tumour.

A laryngeal drop procedure was done in the supine position with neck extension to facilitate mobilisation of the trachea for resection anastomosis. After the laryngeal drop procedure a right thoracotomy was done in the left lateral position. At this point of the procedure, the patient was ventilated with low tidal volumes of 300 and respiratory rate of 16-20 to keep the ETCO2 at around 40.The right lung was surgically retracted and the trachea  was exposed up to the carina. A repeat bronchoscopy was done through the ETT to help identify the upper and lower extent of the tumour. The trachea was then opened below the tumour, after which a 6.5 reinforced tube was introduced through the left bronchus to aid ventilation of the left lung. This ETT was withdrawn intermittently to help visualisation and aid surgical excision of the tumour and  sleeve resection of the trachea. The left lung was ventilated till partial closure of the trachea. The left-sided tube was then removed. Ventilation resumed through the orotracheal tube with intermittent occlusion of the defect with gauze by the surgeon.  The orotracheal tube was adjusted under vision before closure of the trachea to position it above the anastomotic site. The trachea was sutured and the thoracotomy incision closed without any adverse event. The neck was kept in a flexed position to avoid tension on the tracheal anastomotic area.

The patient was then extubated in the immediate postoperative period without any problems and the recovery was uneventful.

DISCUSSION

Anaesthetic management of a patient with a tracheal tumor is challenging, as the airway is shared with the surgeon, and patency must be maintained despite airway manipulation1, 2. Several anaesthetic techniques have been used in patients requiring tracheal resection and reconstruction 3–5.

Primary tracheal masses are very rare and mostly malignant, occurring in 0.2 in 1,00,000 persons per year 6 and among these squamous cell carcinomas form the main bulk. Cardiopulmonary bypass standby after femoral artery and vein cannulation and then intravenous/inhalational induction while oxygenating the patient with the oxygen inhalation has been considered to be a reasonable approach 7. Byrne JG et al (2004) advocated planned use of CPB to facilitate complete resection of thoracic malignancies after careful patient selection 8.

These patients are often mistaken to have asthma and require treatment with inhaled corticosteroids and beta agonists 9. They are generally treated for many years for asthma or COPD, unless a CT scan or endoscopic procedure is done for the symptoms 10. Intratracheal masses usually start getting symptomatic when 75% or more of the tracheal lumen is obstructed. Tracheal lesions present at lower level can have more complicated management of airway, anaesthesia and surgery for successful and safe removal of the mass. 10

Intratracheal tumours are challenging to anaesthetists because of the difficulty in establishment of a patent airway before commencement of surgery. The principal anaesthetic consideration is ventilation and oxygenation in the face of an open airway. Ventilation can be managed in many ways, including manual jet ventilation, high frequency jet ventilation, distal tracheal intubation, tracheostomy, spontaneous ventilation and CPB.11

Knowledge of various techniques available for management of such cases is vital. In order to have a successful and safe outcome it is extremely important to have good communication between the anaesthetic, surgical and intensive care team.

The challenge in managing such cases lies in establishing and maintaining a patent airway and also preventing seepage of blood and tumour particles distally into the tracheobronchial tree during the surgery.

There is a possibility of total airway obstruction during ventilation attempts using positive pressure because airway obstruction has a fixed and dynamic component. Dislodgement of the tumour, possibly from trauma following intubation causing total obstruction, should also be considered.

Thus an intratracheal tumour was successfully removed without any complications and by avoiding CPB. This case report also highlights the importance of proper planning and good communication between team members to ensure a successful and safe outcome.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Acknowledgement: 
RAJESH MISTRY, Consultant and Head of the Department of Oncosurgery, Kokilaben Ambani Hospital, Mumbai, India.
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
DR.HARSHAL D WAGH, MBBS,DA,DNB,FCPS,FRCA(LON), Kokilaben Ambani Hospital, Mumbai, India.
Corresponding Author Details: 
DR HARSHAL WAGH, Kokilaben Ambani Hospital, Andheri, 4 Bungalows, Mumbai, 400053,INDIA.
Corresponding Author Email: 
drhdw@yahoo.com
References
References: 
  1. Licker M, Schweizer A, Nicolet G, et al.Anaesthesia of a patient with an obstructing tracheal mass: a new way to manage the airway. Acta Anaesthesiol Scand 1997;41:84–6.
  2. Furimsky M, Aronson S, Ovassapian A.Perioperative management of a patient presenting for resection of a tracheal mass. J Cardiothorac Anesth 1998;12:701–4.
  3. Divatia JV, Sareen R, Upadhye SM, et al.Anaesthetic management of tracheal surgery using the laryngeal mask airway.Anaesth Intensive Care 1994;22:69 –73.
  4. Kawaraguchi Y, Taniguchi A. Anesthetic management of a 9-year-old child undergoing resection of a tracheal tumor. Paediatr Anaesth 2005;15:512– 4.
  5. Mentzelopoulos SD, Romana CN, Hatzimichalis AG, et al. Anesthesia for tracheal resection: a new technique of airway management in a patient with severe stenosis of the midtrachea. Anesth Analg1999;89:1156–60.
  6. Azar T, Abdul-Karim FW, Tucker HM: Adenoid cystic carcinoma of the trachea. Laryngoscope 1998, 108(9):1297-300.
  7. Céline Pinsonneault, Joanne Fortier, François Donati: Tracheal resection and reconstruction. Can J Anesth 1999, 46(5):439-455.
  8. Byrne JG, Leacche M, Agnihotri AK, Paul S, Bueno R, Mathisen DJ, Sugarbaker DJ: The use of cardiopulmonary bypass during resection of locally advanced thoracic malignancies: a 10- year two-center experience. Chest 2004, 125(4):1581-6.
  9. Jones TM, Alderson D.Sheard JD,Swift AC.Tracheal paraganglioma: A diagnostic dilemma culminating in a complex airway management problem.J Laryngol Otol 2001;115:747-9.
  10. Azorin J, Lamberto JF, Personne C, Larmignat P, Khellaf M, Lmeny JL,et al. Adenoid cystic carcinoma of the trachea: Treatment by combined laser therapy and surgery.Rev Mal respire 1987;4:95-6.
  11. Pinsonneault C, Fortier J, Donati F. Tracheal resection and reconstruction.Can J Anaesth 1999;46:439-55

A feasibility study to establish a Deliberate Self-harm Register in a state hospital in southern India.

Authors
Rajgopal Rajendra, Murali Krishna, Sumanth Majgi, Narendra Heggere, Catherine Robinson and Rob Poole
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2015;8(1):a807
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Background: Deliberate self harm (DSH) registers are the first step towards understanding self-harm in developing countries.
Aims: To determine the  feasibility of a DSH register in a state hospital in India.
Methods: For each individual presenting with DSH between February and July 2012, data was collected by interview and from records. Time taken for  complete data entry was recorded. The proportion of DSH patients correctly identified and traced after admission was recorded, indicating ‘representativeness’, the proportion for whom a full data set was captured was recorded,  indicating ‘completeness’, and the proportion willing to be included in the register and followed up was recorded, indicating ‘acceptability’.
Results: 1072 presented with deliberate self-harm. All inpatient survivors (817) were traced and none objected to their details being entered on the register. Of 1023 on the register, complete data was available for 740 (72.3%). Data was incomplete for 283 (27.7%). All 1023 had performed an act of self-harm necessitating medical intervention. The time between identification and completion of data entry ranged from 30 minutes to 2 hours.
Conclusions: It is feasible to establish an accurate, reliable and complete DSH register in a large Indian state hospital.The clinical and service implications are discussed.

Abbreviations: 
DSH : Deliberate Self Harm, ICD: International Classification of disorders
Keywords: 
Self-harm, Register, Feasibility, Developing Countries.

BACKGROUND

Suicide and deliberate self-harm (DSH) have been recognised as major public health problems in India for some time, but there are significant obstructions to effective intervention including difficulties in following Western models to understand these behaviours.1, 2, 3

The World Health Organisation (WHO) recognises suicide as one of the three leading causes of death in young adults globally.4 The greatest burden of suicide is now in low- and middle-income countries like India where annual suicide rates are 10-11 per 100,000.5, 6, 7 India is second only to China in the absolute number of annual deaths by suicide.5 The number of individuals who die by suicide each year in India alone is more than the total number of suicides in the four top ranked European countries combined.3, 5, 8

DSH, defined as intentional self-poisoning or self-injury, is a closely related public health problem.9WHO estimates that for every suicide there are at least 10-20 DSH acts.10 If this estimated proportion, based on Western research, is also true in India then there are 1-2 million DSH acts in India each year.

Official data for 2005 suggest that 19.6% (n=22,327) of India's 113,914 officially recorded suicides were self-poisonings with pesticides7 (predominately organophosphates, which are freely available and widely used in agriculture). The official suicide rate for India, 10.3 per 100,000 in 2005,7 is thought to be an under-estimate.3, 11 Studies from several regions suggest that India's suicide rates may be as high as 40 per 100,000 and that 30% or more of these deaths are due to pesticide self-poisoning.11 The studies reporting the highest suicide rates within India are from Tamil Nadu (>60 per 100,000 – three times higher than the official figure for the state).12, 13, 14, 15 Whilst some of the discrepancies between official statistics and findings in local studies may be due to urban-rural differences in the incidence of suicide, data collated by the Indian police suggest that around 90% of suicides in India occur in non-urban areas.7, 11, 15 Extrapolating from these figures, it is conservatively estimated that there may be up to 420,000 suicides per annum in India (126,000 from pesticide self-poisoning).

India's centrally collated self-harm and suicide data are unreliable owing to a number of factors. Death registration processes are below Western standards. Only about 25% of deaths are registered and only about 10% are medically certified.16, 17 Attempted suicide is a crime in India.18 Survivors are interviewed by the police. Fear of legal and social consequences following an act of self-harm probably influence willingness to acknowledge DSH and preparedness to seek medical intervention.

India contributes almost 20% to the world's population, and suicides rates are increasing particularly amongst the young.11, 19 Obtaining reliable and nationally representative data on DSH rates in India should be a priority for health-funding agencies over the next decade. In order to reduce fatalities following self-harm, information and investment are needed to improve quality, affordability and accessibility of health care close to the affected communities.20

If, as seems likely, self-harm (especially pesticide poisoning) occurs predominantly in rural areas of India,11 Western models of data collection and intervention aimed at reducing pesticide poisoning (which is predominately accidental in developed economies) are likely to require significant modification to be reliable and effective. The WHO's global suicide prevention strategy is largely based on findings from research and models of suicide prevention developed in the West.21 Health care resources in rural areas of India are thinly spread, and are often rudimentary compared to those in the West. There is an urgent need for research in low- and middle-income communities – particularly in rural areas of India – to provide the evidence base to underpin public health strategies for preventing pesticide suicides in these countries.

The establishment of DSH registers is a first step towards the systematic collection of data in relation to self-harm, both for epidemiological purposes and to understand pesticide self-poisoning at an individual level. If DSH registers can be shown to generate reliable information in India, in due course it may be possible to identify the factors that put individuals at risk of behaving in this way, and create relevant evidence-based policies to develop interventions for reducing mortality and morbidity associated with DSH (particularly pesticide poisoning).

This paper explores the feasibility of setting up a DSH register in a resource-poor large State hospital in south India, where rates of suicide and DSH are high.

METHODS

Setting

This study was carried out at Mysore Medical College and Research Institution (MMCRI), a State-run hospital in Mysore, southern India. The hospital serves a catchment area of 1,500,000 population and 135 primary health centres. The hospital has most specialities, with 1050 beds and a 10-bedded intensive care unit. 800-1000 patients attend the hospital outpatient department daily. Daily attendance to the casualty department for the purpose of medico-legal registration (which includes self-harm) is between 110 and 130. All other presentations including emergencies are managed through respective speciality outpatient departments.

Figure 1. Care Pathway for deliberate self-harm (DSH) at Mysore Medical College and Research Institution (MMCRI)

Setting up of the register

The flow diagram (Fig. 1) illustrates the care pathway of those presenting with DSH to MMCRI highlighting that only a few receive psychosocial assessment. A working group of psychiatrists, psychologists, social workers, casualty medical officers, statisticians and hospital managers was formed to arrive at a consensus on the minimum dataset that could be gathered from DSH survivors for the purpose of setting up a register. Literature on establishing self-harm registers was reviewed along with international guidelines in relation to self-harm assessment in the general hospital.22, 23 Opinion was sought from senior psychiatrists and public health personnel from the private and public sector in Mysore and from the United Kingdom (UK). The team was visited, supported and advised by the Centre for Mental Health and Society, Bangor, UK.

The items listed in Table 1 were considered as ‘minimal yet essential’ for informing clinical practice, service development and patient engagement in future research. The study was not externally funded and, due to time and resource implications, it was agreed that outcomes of mental health assessments would not be recorded in the register. The method of DSH was coded according to the International Classification of Diseases 10th Revision (ICD-10) criteria24 and socio-economic indicators were derived from a modified Kuppuswamy’s scale25 that is validated for the south Indian urban population.

Table 1. Contents of the deliberate self-harm (DSH) register.

An electronic DSH register was set up in February 2013 and is currently held in the Department of Psychiatry, MMCRI, and Mysore. Two pre-registration House Officers (junior resident equivalent) visited the casualty department daily and identified those cases registered as self-harm from both the standard patient register and medico-legal case registers. If the individual was discharged from casualty (condition necessitated no further treatment, no intensive care bed available, or patient chose admission in private sector after first aid) the available information is captured from the registers and medical records. If they admitted to the general hospital they were traced and personally contacted. Information (as in Table 1) was collected from DSH survivors and from medical records. The data was verified by a Consultant Psychiatrist before being entered in the register. DSH survivors are asked to provide two contact details (postal address and phone number) for future tracing if they consent to further contact either in person or by phone. Table 2 is a list of the sources of data for the DSH register in Mysore and their limitations.

Table 2. Sources of data for deliberate self harm (DSH) register in Mysore and their limitations.

Feasibility

A DSH register should be representative, complete and accurate. The register should be acceptable to the entrants and only take a minimal time for data collection and registration. For the purpose of this study the following were identified as indicators of feasibility:

· Time between identifying that the patient should be included in the register and completion of data entry in the register. This was recorded for 80 randomly chosen inpatient DSH survivors.

· The proportion of patients presenting with alleged DSH who were correctly identified and, if admitted to the general hospital, traced for the purpose of inclusion to the register (representativeness).

· Proportion of those included in the register for whom a full data set could be captured (completeness).

· Proportion of the DSH survivors who were willing to be included in the register and provided contact details for future follow-up (acceptability).

· Over a period of a week, every month during study period February 2013 to July 2013, a Consultant Psychiatrist independently collected data from casualty registers and checked against the total number registered on the DSH register for the corresponding month (accuracy).

RESULTS

Between February 2013 and July 2013, a total of 19,563 patients attended the casualty department. Of these, 1072 attended in relation to self-harm. 1041 of them were hospitalised for further intervention. All of those who were hospitalised and survived (n=817) were traced and contacted. None objected to their details being entered on the register. However, only 253 of the 817 (30.9%) agreed to be contacted for future follow-up. Of the 817, only 109 (13%) had been formally referred to the psychiatry department for an assessment prior to contact with the research team. None of the 817 had any involvement with Social Services.

Out of the 1023 on the register, complete data was available and/or obtained for 740 (72.3%) individuals and data was incomplete for 283 (27.7%) patients. Either by reviewing the medical records or interviewing the patient, it was confirmed in all 1023 cases that there had been an act of self-harm necessitating medical intervention. The time between identifying that the patient should be included in the register and completion of data entry in the register varied between 30 minutes and 2 hours. When the data collected was cross-verified (n=315) by a Consultant Psychiatrist (author RR), entries of 310 individuals were accurate, with a minor discrepancy in less than 3 items for another 5 individuals.

Various terminologies were used to report a case of DSH in the case records (for example, suicide attempt, failed suicide, self-harm, poisoning, deliberate harm).

DISCUSSION

This is the first description of a method of successfully setting up and maintaining a DSH register in an Indian setting. It was a labour-intensive exercise due of lack of electronic patient data management, administrative support and the absence of an agreed care pathway for DSH in the hospital. Despite these obstructions, we have illustrated that it is feasible to set up a DSH register in a busy tertiary care hospital in India. Results of our study indicate that the register details are accurate and representative of those who seek help from the specialist centre. However, it cannot capture those patients whose DSH was managed successfully within primary health centres, those individuals who failed to seek help and those who died before admission.

Clinical Implications

The experience of establishing a DSH register has lead to changes in local clinical practice. DSH is associated with increased morbidity and increased utilisation of health services.26 DSH survivors who were contacted (n=817) by the psychiatry residents were offered psychosocial assessments. Under normal circumstances, 708 (87%) of this group would not have received any psychosocial assessment. The process of setting up the register has helped to identify DSH cases so that an intervention can be offered before discharge from the general hospital. The register has also played a major role in the identification of people who harmed themselves but were discharged without admission to a ward. This group can also be helped. We have now developed an education and service information leaflet which includes emergency contact details (similar to a crisis card in the UK), which is given to DSH patients on discharge. These are known to decrease the repetition of DSH in the developed world.27 Deaths from suicide are largely preventable if knowledge and understanding of this maladaptive behaviour is used to ensure timely intervention.8

By auditing DSH data in a systematic way, clinical decision-making will be based on pooled experience, not just on each clinician’s recall. Comprehensive registers of DSH provide clinicians with the opportunity to review cases of suicide where they have had clinical involvement, using techniques such as psychological autopsy, improving clinical skills and judgements. Overall there is a need for an attitude of vigilance about suicide risk, and of enthusiasm about pursuing initiatives for suicide prevention based on evidence. Better understanding of self-harm will assist in devising means of reaching out to those at risk of dying without having had contact with health care services.

Reporting of DSH in case records was inconsistent. There is a need for uniform recording, medical coding and reporting of DSH. In the DSH register, the method of self-harm is recorded using an international recognised coding system (e.g. ICD-10).

If we continue to offer psychiatric assessment to all cases of DSH, the much higher rate of ascertainment arising from the DSH register will place further strain on an already stretched psychiatric service. Further investment in services specifically targeting self-harm in India is urgently needed.

Service Implications

Use of the register

The register creates an opportunity for a standing DSH audit, allowing for identification of trends over time and comparisons with other services that establish DSH registers using similar methods. Systematic collection of demographic and clinical data will allow calculation of admission rates, repetition rates and other indices of importance in service development. Collaboration with non-governmental organisations in the region who work with those who self-harm will allow development and evaluation of specific culturally appropriate interventions.

Where the register should be held?

In the developed world DSH registers are normally held on electronic systems in the Accident and Emergency department or liaison psychiatric services. In India, it is a mandatory obligation to hold a medico-legal register (which includes DSH) in casualty. Maintaining an additional DSH register risks unnecessary duplication, but modification of a medico-legal register creates an ethical problem and risks under-reporting. There are few liaison psychiatry services in India. On balance, we suggest that our practice of holding the DSH register within the department of adult psychiatry is the optimal arrangement in the Indian setting.

Confidentiality

Confidentiality must be respected. In the UK, when establishing a DSH register, it is necessary to discuss issues of confidentiality and legality with the local Data Protection Officer, and to register under the Data Protection Act. Use of the data for research purposes requires approval from local Research Ethics Committees. In India, there is little regulation of this sort. In order to establish our register it was only necessary to obtain consultant approval and consent through the local medical committee. We suggest that good practice would demand that standards of confidentiality and oversight should, as far as possible, match Western standards.

Manpower and resources

Setting up this register in Mysore required input by a Consultant Psychiatrist, for 2 sessions per week for 6 months, to negotiate with casualty medical officers, consultant physicians and reception staff. The resident from the psychiatry department spent at least 2 hours a day collating and updating the register. The absence of a patient electronic data system and lack of administrative support has placed additional strain on residents and has prolonged the time to identify a case of DSH from the casualty records and trace them on the medical wards. We believe that once the register is established, these tasks could be managed by a trained Social Worker spending 1 session per day collecting the data and 1 session per week editing the register. The work load might vary in other hospitals, depending on the number of daily hospital attendances for DSH.

Integration with other data sources

Linking this register with post mortem records, local civil registration of deaths and police records is desirable but this needs co-ordinated effort from several civil bodies and public health organisations. In the absence of any legislation or national record linkage systems, there are few motivators to drive this change or the allocation of resources. However, a unique person identification number system is presently being rolled out across India. The development of cross-agency electronic databases will facilitate easier record linkage in the future, which creates the opportunity for collection of reliable and representative data at a regional level.

None of those who were contacted during the study period had any formal input from Social Services. Though the models and mode of delivery by Social Services in India is radically different to those in Europe, DSH survivors form a stigmatised vulnerable group who are frequently in need of social assessment and support.

Future investment and development

There are good humanitarian reasons to seek the de-criminalisation of acts of self-harm in India, and there is presently strong lobbying to bring this about. It is reasonable to suppose that this might lead to readier help-seeking and better reporting of self-harm and suspected suicide. However, there are other measures that would be necessary to reduce rates of DSH and completed suicide. Regulating the supply of organophosphate insecticides, so that they are only available in dilutions that make fatal overdose more difficult, would be one such measure. There is also a need to develop liaison psychiatric services, offering psychosocial assessments to a higher proportion of those who present with features indicative of probable self-harm. Other necessary developments include investment in patient electronic records and systematic strategies for destigmatisation of DSH.

The register has provided us with a cohort of individuals who are willing to be contacted for future studies. The register has continued beyond the study period. We presently have 3720 individuals on the register. The unit has established formal links with research centres in the UK. We intend to carry out longitudinal studies to examine the patterns of DSH, rates of repetition, compliance with follow-up and suicide rates. This will help to identify the culture-specific access, adherence and prognostic factors, and will influence the development and validation of brief psychosocial interventions in a social, economic and cultural context that is radically different to the West.

CONCLUSIONS

We have illustrated that it is feasible to set up a DSH register in a busy tertiary care hospital in India where rates of self-harm are high. Results of our study indicate that the register details are accurate and representative of those who seek help from the specialist centre.

Very few were referred for psychosocial assessment following an act of self-harm and none of them had any formal input from Social Services. Though the models and mode of delivery by Social Services in India is radically different to those in Europe, DSH survivors form a stigmatised vulnerable group who are frequently in need of social assessment and support.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Acknowledgement: 
We thank Prof Raveesh, Head of the Department of Psychiatry MMCRI, Mysore, India and Prof Geeta Avadani Dean MMCRI Mysore for providing access to the hospital records, casualty and wards.
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
RAJAGOPAL RAJENDRA, Associate Professor, Department of Psychiatry, Mysore Medical College and Research Institute, Mysore, India. MURALI KRISHNA, Early Career Research Fellow, Wellcome Department of Biotechnology (DBT) Alliance and Consultant Psychiatrist at CSI Holdsworth Memorial Hospital, Mysore, India. SUMANTH M MAJGI, Assistant Professor, Department of Community Medicine , Mysore Medical College and Research Institute, Mysore, India. NARENDRA HEGGERE, Assistant Professor in Psychiatry, Department of Psychiatry, Mysore Medical College and Research Institute, Mysore, India. CATHERINE A. ROBINSON, Professor of Social Policy Research, Centre for Mental Health and Society, School of Social Sciences, Bangor University, United Kingdom. ROB POOLE, Professor of Social Psychiatry, Centre for Mental Health and Society, School of Social Sciences, Bangor University, United Kingdom.
Corresponding Author Details: 
DR MURALI KRISHNA, Early Career Research Fellow, Wellcome DBT Alliance and Consultant Psychiatrist at CSI Holdsworth Memorial Hospital, PO Bo 28 Mandi – Mohalla, Mysore, India PIN 570021
Corresponding Author Email: 
muralidoc@gmail.com
References
References: 

1. Aaron R, Joseph  A, Abraham S, Muliyil J, George K, Prasad J, Minz S. Suicides in young people in rural southern India. Lancet 2004; 363:1117-1118.

2. Bose A, Konradsen F, John J, Suganthy P, Muliyil J, Abraham S.  Mortality rate and years of life lost from unintentional injury and suicide in South India. Trop Med Int Health 2006; 11: 1553-1556.

3. Gunnell D, Eddleston M, Phillips MR, Konradsen F.  The global distribution of fatal pesticide self-poisoning: systematic review. BMC Public Health 2007; 7:357.

4. World Health Organization Suicide prevention (SUPRE). Retrieved March 18, 2011 from http://www.who.int/mental_health/prevention/suicide/suicideprevent/en/

5. Patel V, Ramasundarahettige C, Vijayakumar L, Thakur JS, Gajalakshmi V, Gururaj G, Jha P. Million Death Study Collaborators. Suicide mortality in India: a nationally representative survey. Lancet 2012; 379(9834):2343-2351.

6. National Crime Records Bureau (NCRB) New Delhi: National Crime Records Bureau (NCRB); 2010. Accidental deaths and suicide. www.ncrb.nic.in.

7. Accidental deaths and suicides in India 2005. (National Crime Records Bureau [NCRB], Ministry of Home Affairs, New Delhi, 2006).

8. World Health Organization. Emerging from darkness. Mental health and substance abuse facts and figures suicide prevention: South East Asia, 2007.

9. Hawton K, van Heeringen K.  Suicide. Lancet 2009; 373(9672): 1372-1381.

10. World Health Organization. The World Health Report 2001. Mental health: new understanding, New Hope, Geneva, 2001.

11. Radhakrishnan R, and Andrade C. Suicide: An Indian perspective. Indian J Psychiatry 2012; 54(4): 304-319.

12. Joseph A, Abraham S, Muliyil JP, George K, Prasad J, Minz S, Jacob KS.  Evaluation of suicide rates in rural India using verbal autopsies, 1994-9. BMJ 2003; 326:1121-1122. 

13. Bose A, Konradsen F, John J, Suganthy P, Muliyil J, Abraham S.  Mortality rate and years of life lost from unintentional injury and suicide in South India. Trop Med Int Health, 2006; 11:1553-1556.

14. Prasad J, Abraham VJ, Minz S, Abraham S, Joseph A, Muliyil J P, Jacob KS (2000).  Rates and factors associated with suicide in Kaniyambadi Block, Tamil Nadu, South India, 2000–2002. Int J Soc Psychiatry 2000; 52:65-71.

15. Gajalakshmi V, Peto R.  Suicide rates in rural Tamil Nadu, South India: Verbal autopsy of 39 000 deaths in 1997–98. Int J Epidemiol, 2007; 36(1): 203-207.

16. Bhat M. Vol. 7. Minneapolis, MI, United States: Centre for Population Analysis and Policy, Humphrey Institute of Public Affairs, University of Minnesota; Mortality from accidents and violence in India and China, Research Report 91-06-1, 1991.

17. Ruzicka LT. Suicide in countries and areas of the ESCAP region.  Asia Pac Popul J, 1998; 13(4):55-74.

18. Yadwad BS, Gouda Hareesh S. Is attempted suicide an offence? Journal of Indian Academy of Forensic Medicine, 2005; 7(2):108-111.

19. Accidental Deaths and Suicides in India 2008. National Crime Records Bureau [NCRB], New Delhi: Ministry of Home Affairs, Government of India, 2010.

20. Eddleston M, Buckley N A, Gunnell D, Dawson AH, Konradsen F. Identification of strategies to prevent death after pesticide self-poisoning using a Haddon matrix. Inj Prev, 2006; 12:333-337.

21 World Health Organization. Suicide rates per 100,000 by country, year and sex.  2011 Retrieved from http://www.who.int/mental_health/prevention/suicide_rates/en/index.html

22. National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. Self-harm: the short-term physical and psychological management and secondary prevention of self-harm in primary and secondary care. NICE clinical guideline 16. 2004.

23. National Institute for Health and Care Excellence.  Self-harm: longer-term management. NICE clinical guideline CG133.2011.

24. World Health Organisation. ICD-10 Classifications of Mental and Behavioural Disorder: Clinical Descriptions and Diagnostic Guidelines. Geneva. World Health Organisation.1992

25. Sharma, R.  Kuppuswamy's socioeconomic status scale - revision for 2011 and formula for real-time updating. Indian J Pediatr 2012; 79(7):961-962.

26. Evans J, Johnson C, Stanton R. How to establish case registers: II. Non-fatal deliberate self harm. Psychiatric Bulletin 1996; 20:403-405.

27. Evans MO, Morgan HG, Hayward A. Crisis telephone consultation for deliberate self harm patients: effects on repetition. British Journal of Psychiatry 1999;175: 23-27.

Cervical ripening balloon as an alternative for induction of labour: a randomized controlled trial

Authors
Toh Lick Tan, Grace Yang Huang Ng, Sheri Ee-Lin Lim, Shephali Tagore, Ei Ei Phyo Kyaw and George Seow Heong Yeo
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2015;8(1):a806
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Objective: To evaluate the use of cervical ripening balloon (CRB) for induction of labour (IOL) in Singapore.
Design: Prospective cohort randomised controlled study comparing CRB to Prostin (PGE) for IOL
Setting: Tertiary maternity hospital in Singapore.
Population: Women aged 21 to 40 years old for IOL in a singleton term pregnancy without major fetal anomaly suitable for vaginal delivery were recruited unless they were in labour, had cervical dilatation ³3 cm, ruptured membrane, abnormal CTG, scarred uterus or malpresentation.
Methods: Suitable women were recruited in the ante-natal period and randomized to receive either CRB or PGE on the day of IOL. Characteristics of the women, labour and birth outcomes, as well as their pain and satisfaction scores were obtained from case notes and by interviewing the women at IOL and after delivery.
Main Outcome Measures: Characteristics of participants, labour outcomes, birth outcomes.
Results: 98 women were enrolled for the study with 31 CRB and 52 PGE cases analysed. Both groups had similar maternal age, ethnic mix, proportion of primigravidae, weight, gestational age, cervical dilatation, indication for IOL, baby gender and birth weight. The induction to vaginal delivery time and vaginal delivery rate, as well as risk of low Apgar scores, meconium aspiration, pyrexia in labour, neonatal intensive care unit or intensive care unit admissions were also similar. Although only 1 (3.2%) in CRB arm failed to be induced compared with 9 (17.3%), this was not statistically significant (p = 0.082). Only 1 case of uterine hyperstimulation was observed and was from the PGE group.
Conclusions: Both CRB and PGE are effective and complementary methods for IOL. The availability of both methods in an obstetric unit will allow women and clinicians choice in their method of IOL.

Keywords: 
cervical ripening; Cook balloon; labour induction; mechanical ripening

Introduction

Increasing number of term deliveries undergo induction of labour (IOL). This figure is as high as 1 in 4 in developed countries, making it one of the most common procedures a woman may experience in pregnancy. 1 IOL may be achieved with pharmacological, mechanical or surgical methods. 1, 2 Mechanical methods were the first methods used to ripen the cervix and induce labour. The National Institute of Clinical Excellence (NICE) does not recommend the routine use of mechanical methods for IOL as only heterogeneous small studies were available at their time of publication more than half a decade ago. 2 However, since then there is increasing evidence of safety and efficacy of mechanical IOL. Subsequent publications including those from World Health Organization (WHO) and Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews support the use of balloon catheter for IOL. 1, 3 It is therefore important to revisit the role of mechanical methods of IOL.

The Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews concluded that mechanical methods of induction of labour have a lower risk of uterine hyperstimulation with similar caesarean section rates and delivery within 24 hours as prostaglandins. Furthermore, mechanical methods reduce the risk of caesarean section when compared with oxytocin induction of labour. 3 This review is consistent with another earlier systematic review. 4

Both Pfizer’s Prostin (PGE) and Cook Medical’s Cervical Ripening Balloon (CRB) are licensed for IOL. While the use of Prostin is a standard care in Singapore, the CRB has not been used routinely. We therefore propose a study to evaluate the use of CRB for IOL in Singapore.

Methods

A prospective cohort randomised controlled study was conducted in a tertiary referral maternity unit in Singapore. Pregnant women aged 21 – 40 years old with a singleton pregnancy with no major fetal anomaly who were suitable for vaginal delivery and scheduled for a planned IOL at 37+0 to 41+6 weeks gestation were invited for the study. Cases were excluded if at the start of the planned IOL, they were in spontaneous labour, had a cervical dilatation of ³3 cm, had confirmed rupture of membrane, had abnormal cardiotocogram (CTG), had a scarred uterus such as previous caesarean section, had malpresentation in labour, or if caesarean section delivery was indicated. Women who were unable to give or had withdrawn their consent to participate in the trial were also excluded for the study.

All suitable pregnant women receiving team care who require elective IOL were identified in antenatal clinic, antenatal or labour wards by the attending doctor or clinical research coordinator (CRC). Following routine counselling for IOL by the attending doctor, the woman will be offered participation in the study and a member of the research team will counsel and obtain informed consent from her. The woman will be made to understand that participation in the study is voluntary, does not affect her medical care and consent for participation can be withdrawn at any stage of the study. Women who were uncertain in their participation were offered the opportunity to participate during her follow-up or on the day of IOL after further consideration. Patient information leaflet on IOL as well as information of the study were made available to the participants.

On the day of the IOL, the participants were reviewed for the appropriateness of the IOL and participation in the study. A presentation scan, vaginal examination for cervical dilatation and CTG were performed. If they were suitable, they were randomly allocated PGE or CRB IOL in labour ward. Randomization was achieved with third party sealed envelope allocation. A total of 75 envelopes containing a folded paper with the words “Cervical Ripening Balloon” and another 75 identical envelopes containing a folded paper with the word “Prostin” were prepared and shuffled after sealing. These randomized envelopes were then labelled sequentially with their randomization allocation number from 1 to 150. The participants who underwent randomization were allocated to the next randomization allocation numbered envelop which contain either allocation for CRB or PGE IOL.

Participants undergoing CRB IOL will have the CRB inserted after cleaning the vulva and vagina with Cetrimide solution. The uterine and vaginal balloons of the CRB will be gradually inflated with normal saline, initially 40 ml and 20 ml respectively, and a further 20 ml each hour later until each balloon is 80 ml. CTG monitoring was undertaken before and after each inflation for at least 20 minutes. If the participant was not in labour after complete inflation of the balloons, she would be transferred to the antenatal wards for rest before removing the CRB 12 hours after insertion in labour ward when possible.

Participants undergoing PGE IOL will have 3 mg Prostin tablet inserted in the posterior fornix after cleaning the vulva with Cetrimide solution. CTG monitoring was also undertaken for at least 40 minutes after PGE insertion. If the participant was not in labour, she would be transferred to the antenatal wards. If there was no response to the first PGE, a repeat dose was given after 6 hours in labour ward when possible.

Participants will undergo artificial rupture of membrane (ARM) and/or oxytocin infusion augmentation of labour as necessary. If the participant was not in labour or ARM was not possible after removing the CRB or 2 cycles of PGE, the participant would have been considered having a failed IOL and will leave the study protocol with her subsequent management determined by the specialist attending to her. This would typically involve insertion of a third or first PGE in the PGE or CRB arm respectively.

Upon delivery of the pregnancy, a member of the research team will interview the participant and obtain demographics, labour and delivery outcomes data from the clinical notes. Pain and maternal satisfaction scores and comments were also recorded by interviewing the participants in the post-natal period; these findings will however be discussed separately.

The data was collected on a pro forma and entered into an excel spreadsheet. The data was then analysed using IBM SPSS Statistics version 19.

This study was approved by the SingHealth centralised institutional review board with the reference number of 2013/553/D.

Results

A total of 138 women were approached to join the study but 40 (29.0%) women declined. There was no significant difference in maternal age (27.8 ± 5.4 vs 28.7 ± 5.2 years; p = 0.373), ethnicity, proportion of primigravidae (62.5% vs 53.1%; p = 0.349), weight (61.2 ± 15.4 vs 64.4 ± 13.8 kg; p = 0.228), BMI (24.8 ± 5.8 vs 25.3 ± 5.0 kg/m2; p = 0.646) and primary indication for IOL between women who declined and accepted enrolment to the study respectively.

The remaining 98 women were enrolled for the study. Eight-seven women were randomized after excluding 6 women in spontaneous labour, 1 woman with non-cephalic fetal presentation, and 1 woman had confirmed ruptured of membrane on admission for their IOL, as well as 3 other cases in which the women presented for IOL without the availability of the research team (figure 1).

Figure 1. Flow diagram of recruitment, randomisation and completion status

In the CRB arm, one woman withdrew from the study after 8 hours 55 minutes as she felt the discomfort was too unbearable. Another woman was excluded when she was found to have spontaneous version to breech in labour. One woman randomized to PGE did not receive it as she went into spontaneous labour prior to IOL. Another woman in the PGE arm was subsequently found to be only 36+3 weeks and was therefore excluded from analysis (figure 1). The remaining 83 cases were analysed and their characteristics are shown in table 1.

The induction to vaginal delivery time, as well as, vaginal delivery rate were similar in both arms of the study (table 2). Compared to PGE arm, participants undergoing CRB IOL were faster in achieving cervical dilatation ≥4 cm (14.4 ± 5.7 vs 23.5 ± 16.6 hr; p = 0.001) and requesting epidural (16.4 ± 5.4 vs 23.2 ± 15.8 hr; p = 0.040), as well as more likely to require oxytocin infusion for augmentation (77.4% vs 50.0%; p = 0.020). Uterine hyperstimulation defined as >5 contractions every 10 minutes was only found in PGE arm. Cervical dilatation from 0 – 2 cm to ≥4 cm was achieved without regular contractions in 2 (6.9%) cases in the CRB arm and 1 (2.4%) case in the PGE arm. The mean frequency of uterine contractions at cervical dilatation ≥4 cm was 2.5 ± 1.4 in 10 minutes for CRB arm compared to 3.8 ± 1.4 in 10 minutes for PGE arm (p <0.001). No case of uterine rupture was observed.

There was 1 (3.2%) case for failed CRB IOL where both uterine and cervical balloons were found in the vagina suggesting that either placement of the uterine balloon was not optimal or it was expelled after placement. The woman went on to have Prostin and delivered vaginally. In the 9 (17.3%) cases in the PGE group that did not respond after 2 cycles, all went on to have the third Prostin successfully except for 2 women who required Caesarean section for persistent failed IOL.

The birth outcomes of both arms of the study were also similar with no case of stillbirth (table 3). There were 2 case of neonatal intensive care unit admission in the PGE arm for continuous positive airway pressure therapy; both were discharged from NICU within 24 hours.

Table 1. Characteristics of participants undergoing cervical ripening balloon (CRB) and Prostin (PGE) induction of labour.

  CRB (n = 31) PGE (n = 52) p
Maternal age, years (83) 1 28.2 ± 5.3 28.7 ± 5.0 0.646
Ethnicity (83) 2         0.222
· Chinese 35.5% (11) 42.3% (22)  
· Malay 54.8% (17) 36.5% (19)  
· Indian 3.2% (1) 15.4% (8)  
· Others 6.5% (2) 5.8% (3)  
Primigravidae (83) 2 61.3% (19) 44.2% (23) 0.174
Weight, kg (83) 1 64.4 ± 15.0 63.9.4 ± 13.2 0.861
BMI, kg m-2 (83) 1 25.5 ± 5.0 25.0 ± 5.1 0.706
Pre delivery Hb, g dl-1 (80) 1 11.6 ± 1.8 12.0 ± 1.3 0.211
GBS positive (79) 2 22.6% (7) 21.2% (11) 0.204
Gestational age, weeks (83) 1 39.4 ± 1.1 39.2 ± 1.9 0.357
Cervical dilatation, cm (83) 1 1.0 ± 0.7 0.9 ± 0.7 0.954
Primary indication for IOL (83) 2         0.108
· Decreased fetal movement 3 -   11.5% (6) 0.082
· Post dates 3 54.8% (17) 32.7% (17) 0.065
· Gestational diabetes 3 16.1% (5) 13.5% (7) 0.756
· Impending macrosomia 3 -   1.9% (1) 0.526
· IUGR 3 3.2% (1) -   0.137
· Low amniotic fluid index 3 19.4% (6) 34.6% (18) 0.089
· Maternal request 3 3.2% (1) 5.8% (3) 0.489
· Pre-eclampsia 3 3.2% (1) -   0.373

1 Values are mean ± SD, p calculated with Student t-test; 2 Values are percentage (n), p calculated with Pearson chi-square test; 3 Values are percentage (n), p calculated with Fisher’s exact test.

Table 2. Labour outcomes of participants undergoing cervical ripening balloon (CRB) and Prostin (PGE) induction of labour.

  CRB (n = 31) PGE (n = 52) p
IOL to ≥4 cm dilatation, hr (78) 1 14.4 ± 5.7 23.5 ± 16.6 0.001
IOL to full dilatation, hr (66) 1 20.8 ± 6.1 24.8 ± 15.7 0.150
IOL to vaginal delivery, hr (63) 1 21.2 ± 6.8 25.6 ± 16.1 0.136
Duration of 2nd stage, hr (63) 1 0.9 ± 2.9 0.8 ± 0.9 0.741
Delivery within 24 hr (83) 2 77.3% (17) 61.0% (25) 0.265
Failed IOL (83) 3 3.2% (1) 17.3% (9) 0.082
Number of PGE used (83) 2         <0.001
· 0 96.8% (30) -    
· 1 3.2% (1) 53.8% (28)  
· 2 -   28.8% (15)  
· 3 -   17.3% (9)  
Augmentation use (83) 3 77.4% (24) 50.0% (26) 0.020
           
Epidural use (83) 3 58.1% (18) 55.8% (29) 1.000
· IOL to epidural use, hr (47) 1 16.4 ± 5.4 23.2 ± 15.8 0.040
· Epidural use to delivery, hr (47) 1 9.2 ± 4.1 7.0 ± 3.8 0.065
Contractions 1          
· At IOL (83) 0.2 ± 0.6 0.2 ± 0.5 0.579
· 3 hr after IOL (81) 2.0 ± 1.9 1.6 ± 1.9 0.451
Contractions >5 every 10 min 3          
· 30 min after IOL (81) -   -   -
· 3 hr after IOL (81) -   2.0% (1) 1.000
Vaginal delivery (83) 3 71.0% (22) 78.8% (41) 0.438
Indication for LSCS (20) 2         0.513
· Failed IOL -   18.2% (2)  
· FTP in 1st stage of labour 55.6% (5) 36.4% (4)  
· FTP in 2nd stage of labour 22.2% (2) 9.1% (1)  
· NRFS 11.1% (1) 27.3% (3)  
· FTP and NRFS 11.1% (1) 9.1% (1)  

1 Values are mean ± SD, p calculated with Student t-test; 2 Values are percentage (n), p calculated with Pearson chi-square test; 3 Values are percentage (n), p calculated with Fisher exact test.

Table 3. Birth outcomes of participants undergoing cervical ripening balloon (CRB) and Prostin (PGE) induction of labour.

  CRB (n = 31) PGE2 (n = 52) p
Male fetus (83) 2 51.6% (16) 42.3% (22) 0.496
Birth weight, g (83) 1 3,166 ± 478 3,094 ± 417 0.472
Apgar at 5 min <7 (83) -   -   -
Meconium aspiration (83) -   -   -
Pyrexia in labour (83) 3 6.5% (2) 5.8% (3) 1.000
NICU admission (83) 2 -   3.8% (2) 0.526
ITU admission (83) -   -   -

1 Values are mean ± SD, p calculated with Student t-test; 2 Values are percentage (n), p calculated with Pearson chi-square test; 3 Values are percentage (n), p calculated with Fisher exact test.

Discussion

To the best of our knowledge, this is the first randomized controlled study to assess the use of CRB for IOL in Singapore. Our study concur with the published literature that both CRB and PGE have similar rate of vaginal deliveries and rate of deliveries within 24 hours. Both methods are effective and safe with PGE having a higher risk of uterine hyperstimulation and need for Caesarean section for failed IOL.

Pharmacological induction of labour using PGE is the most established form of IOL. However, it is important to be able to offer alternative methods to women particularly in cases of hypersensitivity or allergy to PGE. PGE can cause bronchospasm complicating asthma, a medical condition which affects 4 – 12% of pregnant women. 5, 6 Similarly, caution should be exercised in the use of PGE in women with other common medical conditions such as hypertension and epilepsy.

In addition, women may not respond to PGE for IOL, or the PGE may only result in uterine tightenings which do not lead to cervical dilatation. In these situations the CRB may be considered as an adjunct for IOL to avoid Caesarean section of ‘failed IOL’.

The risk of uterine hyperstimulation and the need for a repeat dose in 6 to 8 hours for PGE typically require the women to be admitted for IOL. The use of CRB does not require planned intervention until 12 hours later. This potentially allows an outpatient IOL if further studies support its safety in this aspect.

The application of PGE is relatively straightforward and is already performed by both doctors and midwives. The insertion of CRB may however be considered too invasive for midwives thus limiting the type and hence availability of staff to commence IOL. We have explored the learning curve in the insertion of CRB and will discuss this separately.

Conclusion

Both CRB and PGE are effective methods for IOL at term. Each method has its own benefits and limitations. The availability of both methods in an obstetric unit will allow the clinician to choose the most appropriate form of IOL, provide a complementary method of IOL, as well as offer women choice in their IOL.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Acknowledgement: 
We are grateful for the supply of cervical ripening balloons for the study provided by Cook Medical.
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
TOH LICK TAN , MBBS MRCOG, Department of Obstetrics and Gynaecology, KK Women’s and Children’s Hospital, Singapore. GRACE YANG HUANG NG, MBChB, Department of Obstetrics and Gynaecology, KK Women’s and Children’s Hospital, Singapore. SHERI EE-LIN LIM, MBBS PhD MRCOG, Department of Obstetrics and Gynaecology, KK Women’s and Children’s Hospital, Singapore. SHEPHALI TAGORE, MBBS MRCOG, Department of Maternal Fetal Medicine, KK Women’s and Children’s Hospital, Singapore. EI EI PHYO KYAW, BDS, BSc (Hons) , Department of Maternal Fetal Medicine, KK Women’s and Children’s Hospital, Singapore. GEORGE SEOW HEONG YEO, MBBS FRCOG FAMS, Department of Maternal Fetal Medicine, KK Women’s and Children’s Hospital, Singapore.
Corresponding Author Details: 
Dr Tan Toh Lick, Department of Obstetrics and Gynaecology, KK Women’s and Children’s Hospital, 100 Bukit Timah Road, Singapore 229899, Singapore.
Corresponding Author Email: 
tan.toh.lick@kkh.com.sg
References
References: 
  1. WHO recommendations for Induction of labour. Geneva, World Health Organization, 2011.
  2. National Collaborating Centre for Women’s and Children’s Health. Induction of labour. London: RCOG Press; 2008.
  3. Jozwiak M, Bloemenkamp KW, Kelly AJ, Mol BW, Irion O, Boulvain M. Mechanical methods for induction of labour. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2012 Mar 14;3.
  4. Vaknin Z, Kurzweil Y, Sherman D. Foley catheter balloon vs locally applied prostaglandins for cervical ripening and labor induction: a systematic review and metaanalysis. 11. Am J Obstet Gynecol. 2010 Nov; 203(5): 418-29.
  5. Rey E, Boulet LP. Asthma in pregnancy. BMJ 2007; 334: 582–5.
  6. Kwon HL, Belanger K, Bracken MB. Asthma prevalence among pregnant and childbearing-aged women in the United States: estimates from national health surveys. Ann Epidemiol 2003; 13: 317–24.

25 years of Hallucinogen Persisting Perception Disorder- A diagnostic challenge

Authors
Fabida Noushad, Qutaiba Al Hillawi, Vasantha Siram and Muhammad Arif
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2015;8(1):a805
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

We present an interesting case of a forty eight year old man who took LSD in his early twenties. He continued to experience visual perceptual disturbances for 25 years following cessation of the hallucinogen.  This is a unique case, where symptoms of hallucinogen persisting perception disorder have persisted for over two decades after the cessation of Lysergic acid diethylamide. He was treated with clonazepam 1 mg four times a day with good effect. There is a need for raising awareness about this condition to prevent misdiagnosis and delay in appropriate treatment.

Abbreviations: 
EEG- electroencephalogram, MRI- magnetic resonance imaging, LSD- Lysergic acid diethylamide, DSM- Diagnostic and statistical manual, HPPD: Hallucinogen persisting perceptual disorder, SSRI- selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors.
Keywords: 
LSD- Lysergic acid diethylamide

Case report

A forty-eight year old man presented with unusual and distressing visual experiences with varying degrees of severity for over twenty years. Some of these included the following; red objects having a green shimmer around them like 3-D glasses, altered sense for distance estimation, people’s faces seeming to change shape when looked at, alteration of own reflection, anything patterned appearing to move all the time, words moving about while reading, things appearing to be multi-layered, bright lights throwing up shadows, vehicles appearing to stretch as they drive past, flying birds looking like animation and difficulty in focussing.

When present, his symptoms interfered markedly with his functioning. For example, he could not cross the road, could not read, and had to dim his lights. He struggled with knowing which visual perceptions were real and which were not. The patient felt his visual experiences were related to his past LSD use twenty-five years ago. He felt the drug had put him “in a coma” and he was “dreaming all of this”.

He specifically remembered a party with friends where he took a cocktail of illicit drugs, including LSD and marijuana, with alcohol. He said he would usually take drugs and alcohol in a binge pattern. The ‘trips’ would usually last twelve hours. He felt he experienced some memory loss of that particular night. When he woke up the next morning he was still experiencing the effects of LSD and said he has felt these effects ever since. He tried to explain that it was like drinking alcohol, waking up drunk and being drunk from that point on. After this incident he did not use illicit drugs again.

Prior to this particular night he said he may have used LSD about fifteen times, as Microdot tablets, usually one at a time, with cannabis. He said it was “like having a tripping switch in your brain”. When you took LSD, “the switch turned the tripping on and after a while it turned off”. He said his switch “was broken” and he therefore continued to re-experience the effects of the drug.

His other complaint was that of feeling he was “not real”; to the extent he even thought he should harm his family members so he could prove he was real.

He also complained of low mood, decreased concentration, anxiety and an inability to cope.

His first contact with mental health services was at the age twenty two years. He presented with symptoms of anxiety but it was not felt he had a mental illness. He was referred again a year later and was diagnosed to have Primary Depersonalization syndrome.

The patient himself reported that all his symptoms started after he had used LSD about fifteen times in six months. At the time he had described having undergone a complete personality change due to his experiences. He felt objects and experiences had a dream-like quality. His visual experiences caused so much distress he felt suicidal.

Over the next twenty-five years he has had various other diagnoses; LSD induced Depersonalisation Syndrome, Depersonalisation-Derealisation Syndrome, LSD induced Simple schizophrenia, depressive disorder and anxiety disorders. His visual disturbances had been interpreted as visual hallucinations. He had received treatment with antidepressants (Imipramine, Amitriptyline, and Venlafaxine); antipsychotics (Trifluperazine, Promazine); Benzodiazepines (Diazepam); Propranolol; and Fentazine. He was also prescribed Hydergine (which helped reduce symptoms briefly) at one point.

Investigations: EEG, MRI Brain, and Carotid ultrasound were normal.

He was admitted to a psychiatric hospital at the age of forty-eight years old where the admitting doctor described his symptoms as visual hallucinations and started him on Risperidone, which increased the intensity of his symptoms. He was also treated with Citalopram for his low mood. It was noted that his symptoms were different from common psychotic illnesses. Detailed history taking and assessment of his perceptual abnormalities over the following few weeks in hospital confirmed the diagnosis of hallucinogen persisting perception disorder (HPPD).

He was treated with Clonazepam 1 mg four times a day with good effect; as seen by the reduction of symptoms - see Table 1.

Table 1:

DSM IV/V Symptom Checklist Prior to treatment with Clonazepam 3 months after initiation of Clonazepam treatment
Geometric hallucinations Present Absent
False perception of movement in peripheral fields Present Absent
Flashes of colour Present Absent
Intensified colours Present Absent
Trails of images of moving objects Present Absent
Positive after images Present Absent
Halos around objects Present Present but reduced in intensity and frequency
Macropsia Present Absent
Micropsia Present Absent

After discharge he had .a depressive episode and was treated with Escitalopram. This was later changed to Reboxetine.

Discussion:

This is the first case that we are aware of where symptoms of HPPD have persisted for over two decades after the cessation of the use of Lysergic acid diethylamide. There is a need for raising awareness about this condition to prevent misdiagnosis and delay in appropriate treatment.

This patient presented to psychiatric services over twenty-five years ago and at that time he felt his symptoms were related to his use of LSD. He was given a variety of different diagnoses before the correct diagnosis was established and treatment initiated with good outcome.

The patient had also experienced migraines and used alcohol excessively on occasions in the past. Although we are not aware of any connection between this disorder and these factors, future reports and studies may help provide further knowledge in these areas.

HPPD is a recognised condition described in DSM V and DSM IV with a diagnostic code 292.89. In DSM III it was referred to as post hallucinogen perception disorder (PHPD). It is described in ICD 10 under the code F16.983.

LSD has been known to alter perception and mood in the presence of an unaltered sensorium. HPPD was first described by Eisner and Cohen, who observed spontaneous recurrences of LSD like states in subjects, days to weeks following cessation of drug use1.

Other authors have described more or less the same clinical picture; for example, Rosenthal described patients suffering from post drug visual hallucinations lasting as long as five months from the time of drug use2

In a survey of sixty five users of LSD, Holsten found fifty users who described post LSD disturbances eighteen months to four years later3.

Flashbacks have been suggested to be a misnomer as patients described cases of continuous rather than paroxysmal visual disturbances from LSD 4

It is not clear what made our patient re-experience these visual disturbances however the literature suggests that emerging into a dark environment can precipitate or exacerbate post LSD visual symptoms. Among other precipitating factors are intentional inductions, marijuana use, medications like: neuroleptics (phenothiazine), amphetamines, cold remedies, anti-Parkinson’s agents and SSRI’s5.

The patient mentioned that he had ingested LSD approximately fifteen times before he developed this condition. The data suggests that peak incidence occurs with fifteen exposures and second smaller peaks at around forty to fifty exposures 6.

A number of hypotheses have been formulated in order to understand the underlying aetiology. HPPD is related to the recreation of symptoms experienced in intoxication. LSD has been shown to be excitotoxic to neurons. It is also known to be a partial agonist at post synaptic 5HT2 receptors and enhances glutaminergic transmission.

The patient had suffered from these rather distressing visual disturbances for more than two decades, which have had considerable impact on his daily living. He was given different diagnoses which included Induced depersonalisation, depersonalisation-derealisation syndrome, LSD induced simple schizophrenia, depressive disorder and anxiety disorders.

The patient had been treated with different psychotropic medications including antidepressants, antipsychotics, benzodiazepines, propranolol, fentazine and hydergine. Some had little effect like hydergine, whilst others worsened symptoms, in particular antipsychotic medications.

A case series of three HPPD patients treated with Risperidone reported an exacerbation of LSD-like panic and visual symptoms. Thus from these reports and our case report Risperidone could be contraindicated in patients with HPPD 7.

There have been some published case reports on treatment of HPPD, including the use of Reboxetine, which suggest it is beneficial in the treatment of the visual disturbances and depressive features associated with HPPD. This is possibly due to its alpha 2 adrenoceptor modulating effect on both Noradrenaline and Serotonin release8. Another case report suggested the use of a combination of Fluoxetine and Olanzapine in the treatment of HPPD9.

Benzodiazepines seem to be the most beneficial treatment so far and Clonazepam is the most effective due to its high potency compared to low potency Benzos and its long action at the GABA receptors10.

Conclusion:

Hallucinogen Persisting Perception Disorder is one of the outcomes associated with the ingestion of LSD. Symptoms can be present for years as demonstrated by different case reports, and for over two decades as reported in this report. The effect could be devastating to the person experiencing extremely distressing and disturbing perceptual phenomenon. It can last up to twenty five years after the cessation of the hallucinogenic drug. Early diagnosis and appropriate treatment can significantly help improve the quality of life of patients with this condition.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
FABIDA NOUSHAD, MRCPsych, Consultant Psychiatrist, Leicestershire Partnership NHS Trust, UK. QUTAIBA AL HILLAWI, MRCPsych, Speciality Trainee ST6, Norfolk And Suffolk Foundation Trust, UK. VASANTHA SIRAM, MRCPsych, Specialty Trainee ST4, Leicestershire Partnership NHS Trust, UK. MUHAMMAD ARIF, MRCpsych, Consultant Psychiatrist, Leicestershire Partnership NHS Trust, UK.
Corresponding Author Details: 
DR MUHAMMAD ARIF, Consultant Psychiatrist, Bradgate Mental Health Unit, Groby Road, Leicester, LE3 9EJ, UK.
Corresponding Author Email: 
muhammad.arif@leicspart.nhs.uk
References
References: 
  1. Rosenthal, S. H. (1964) Persistent Hallucinosis following repeated administration of hallucinogenic drugs, American Journal of Psychiatry, 121, pp. 238-244
  2. Robbins, E., Frosch, W. A. and Stern, M. (1967) Further observations on Untoward Reactions to LSD, American Journal Of Psychiatry, 124, pp. 393-395
  3. Holsten, F. (1976) Flashbacks: Clinical and social significance 1 ½-4 years after the first admission , Journal of Norwegian Medical Association; 96: 875-878
  4. Anderson, WH, O’Malley, JE (1972) Trifluperazine for the “Trailing” phenomenon. Journal of American Medical Association, 220: 1244-1245
  5. Abraham, H.D. (1983) Visual Phenomenology of the LSD flashbacks, Archives of General Psychiatry, 40, pp. 884-889
  6. Abraham HD, Visual phenomenology of the LSD flashbacks. Archives of General Psychiatry. 1983; 40:884-889
  7. Abraham, Henry David MD, Mamen, Anita MD. LSD like Panic from Risperidone in post-LSD Visual Disorder. Journal of Clinical Psychopharmacology: June 1996; Volume 16; Issue 3: 238- 241
  8. Lerner AG, Shufman E, Kodesh A, Kretzmer G, Sigal M. LSD induced Hallucinogen Persisting Perception Disorder with depressive features treated with Reboxetine. Israel Journal of Psychiatry and Related Sciences; 2002; 39(2):100-3
  9. Aldurra, G; Crayton, J. Improvement of Hallucinogen-Induced Persistent Perception disorder by Treatment with a Combination of Fluoxetine and Olanzapine: Case report; letter to the editor; Journal of Clinical Psychopharmacology. June 2001- Volume 21- Issue 3- pp 343-344
  10. Lerner AG; Gelkopf M; Skladman I; Rudinski D; Nachshon; Bleich A. Clonazepam treatment of Lysergic acid diethylamide induced hallucinogen persisting perception disorder with anxiety features, International Clinical Psychopharmacology 2003, Volume 18- Issue 2 : 101-105

Current management of oesophageal cancer

Authors
Naufal Rashid, Mohamed Elshaer, Michael Kosmin and Amjid Riaz.
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2015;8(1):a804
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Background: Oesophageal cancer is the eighth most common cancer and it’s the sixth leading cause of death in the world. The five years overall survival is reported to be between 15-20%. The aim of this review is to highlight the current trends of management of oesophageal cancer.

Methods: A literature search of PubMed/MEDLINE, EMBASE and Cochrane Library and Central Register of Controlled Trials (CENTRAL) databases up to November 2014 was conducted.

Results: Oesophageal cancer accounts for almost 3% of all cancers and is the ninth most common malignancy in the UK. Diagnosis is usually made by oesophago-gastro-duodenoscopy where multiple biopsy samples must be taken from any mucosal abnormality to exclude early tumours. The management of oesophageal cancers requires a multi-disciplinary team approach involving surgeons, oncologists, radiologists, pathologists, specialist nurses, dietitians and specialists from other specialties if required.

Conclusions: Treatment of oesophageal cancer is still a challenge however recent advances in surgery, endoscopic treatments and new therapeutic agents will hopefully improve prognosis.

Keywords: 
Oesophageal cancer, staging, Transhiatal oesophagectomy, Ivor-Lewis oesophagectomy, chemotherapy.

Introduction

Oesophageal cancer (OC) is the eighth most common cancer affecting an estimated 481,000 people worldwide with a rapidly rising incidence. Due to the poor prognosis of patients with these cancers it is the sixth leading cause of cancer related mortality with 406,000 deaths.1,2 Although the overall 5-year survival has increased from 4% in the 1970s3 to currently ranging between 15 to 20%4, it remains a challenge to treat as clinical presentation is often late and diagnosis is made at advanced stages. Incidence and mortality rates for OCs are two fold higher in males compared to females, however this ratio rises to up to 5-10:1 for oesophageal adenocarcinomas. Cohort studies have shown that the incidence of OC increases with age; the average of onset is between 65 to 70 years. 14 This article seeks to discuss the epidemiology, diagnosis and staging, prevention and current trends in the management of OC.

Methods

We searched PubMed/MEDLINE, EMBASE and Cochrane Library and Central Register of Controlled Trials (CENTRAL) databases up to November 2014. Our search strategy used a combination of MeSH, textwords, and appropriate words variants of “oesophagus”, “cancer”, “epidemiology”, “adenocarcinoma”, or “squamous cell carcinoma”, and “staging”, “transhiatal oesophagectomy”, “transthoracic oesophagectomy”, “chemotherapy”, “radiotherapy”. This was supplemented with selected systematic reviews, evidence based guidelines and consensus statements.

Epidemiology

There have been major changes in the epidemiology of OC over the last thirty years. The two key histological types of OC are adenocarcinoma and squamous cell carcinoma (SCC) and they differ significantly in their fundamental patterns of incidence and aetiological factors. Oesophageal SCC comprises the majority of cases worldwide and represents 90% of all OCs in most Eastern countries. However the incidence of adenocarcinoma has risen rapidly over the last three decades and it is now the predominant histological type in Western Europe, USA and Australia, particularly amongst white males.5, 6 There are other rare histological types, which include lymphoma, leiomyosarcoma, melanoma, rhabdomyosarcoma and small cell carcinoma.7 OC accounts for almost 3% of all cancers in the UK and is the ninth most common malignancy in the UK. There were 8,173 new cases in 2008; incidence rates have increased over the last thirty years in the UK and are now one of the highest in Europe.8 Incidence rates of OC differ markedly by geographical locations and between ethnic groups; overall, rates are twice as high in less developed regions compared with more-developed regions and the highest rates occur in Asia. In this region, especially in Iran, Turkey, Kazakhstan and China, a very high incidence of oesophageal SCC exists with greater than 100 cases per 100,000 population annually. A similar trend is also seen in South Africa.9-12 In contrast, the rate of rise in incidence of oesophageal adenocarcinoma in more-developed countries has exceeded that of oesophageal SCC, which has remained the same or decreased. Oesophageal adenocarcinoma now comprises approximately 50% of all OCs in these countries. 13

Who gets oesophageal cancer?

The aetiology of OC is multifactorial, with interactions between environmental risk exposures and genetic factors. These can be divided between the two different histological types of OC.

Pathology of oesophageal tumours

Oesophageal tumours are classified as epithelial and non epithelial. Epithelial tumours include papilloma, intraepithelial neoplasia, carcinoma and carcinoid tumours. Non epithelial tumours include leiomyoma, lipoma and gastrointestinal stromal tumours (Table 1).

Table 1: WHO histological classification of oesophageal tumours

Epithelial Non Epithelial
Squamous cell papilloma Intraepithelial neoplasia
· Squamous
· Glandular (adenoma)
Carcinoma
· Squamous cell carcinoma
· Verrucous (squamous) carcinoma
· Basaloid squamous cell carcinoma
· Spindle cell (squamous) carcinoma
· Adenocarcinoma
· Adenosquamous carcinoma
· Mucoepidermoid carcinoma
· Adenoid cystic carcinoma
· Small cell carcinoma
· Undifferentiated carcinoma
· Others
Carcinoid tumour
Leiomyoma Lipoma
Granular cell tumour
Gastrointestinal stromal tumour
· benign
· uncertain malignant potential
· malignant
Leiomyosarcoma
Rhabdomyosarcoma
Kaposi sarcoma
Malignant melanoma
Others
Secondary tumours

Oesophageal adenocarcinoma

Established risk factors for oesophageal adenocarcinoma (Fig. 1) include gastro-oesophageal reflux disease, Barrett’s oesophagus, obesity, male sex, tobacco smoking and a low intake of fruit and vegetables.15, 16 There is evidence to suggest that previous infection with Helicobacter Pylori and the use of non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs may decrease the risk of OC. 17

Fig. 1: Adenocarcinoma of the oesophagus (from Lewin et al. Gastrointestinal pathology and its clinical implications)

Barrett’s oesophagus (Fig. 2) occurs when there is metaplastic change in the lining of the oesophagus from normal stratified squamous mucosa to single layered columnar glandular mucosa with variable degrees of goblet cell differentiation.18 This transition usually occurs in the context of chronic gastro-oesophageal reflux disease, which causes exposure of the epithelium to refluxate. Gastro-oesophageal reflux disease is a major contributory factor and 5% of people with reflux disease develop Barrett’s oesophagus. The estimated prevalence of Barrett’s oesophagus is just under 2% amongst adults in the West and the annual incidence is approximately 0.1%. However, there is evidence to suggest that the rate of diagnosis is increasing by 2% annually.19 There has been a rise in the incidence of gastro-oesophageal reflux disease, which may be explained by a number of factors. The rise in the prevalence of obesity, specifically central and intra-abdominal obesity has been found to have a link with oesophageal adenocarcinoma. This can be explained by the fact that an increase in adiposity will cause a rise in intra-abdominal pressure thereby increasing reflux that may be asymptomatic. However, studies also suggest that obesity is a strong independent risk factor for oesophageal adenocarcinoma regardless of gastro-oesophageal reflux symptoms implying an underlying link. 20, 21 Another factor that may contribute to the rise in reflux disease is the increased use of drugs that relax the lower oesophageal sphincter. There is evidence to suggest that individuals with previous H. Pylori infections are less likely to develop oesophageal adenocarcinoma.22 This might be explained by the gastric atrophy that results from this infection, which will reduce the acidity and quantity of gastric secretions and thus decreasing the chances of gastro-oesophageal reflux. However, the prevalence of H. Pylori infections is decreasing in the Western population, which may contribute to the rising incidence of oesophageal adenocarcinoma. Gastro-oesophageal junction (GOJ) adenocarcinoma was classified by Siewert and Stein into three types. Type I arises from 1 to 5 cm proximal to the GOJ (tumours of the distal oesophagus), type II arises from 1 cm proximal to 2 cm distal to the GOJ (true cardiacarcinoma), and type III arises from 2 to 5 cm distal to the GOJ (subcardial gastric carcinoma). 61

Fig. 2: Barrett’s oesophagus (adapted from WHO classification of oesophageal tumours)

Oesophageal squamous cell carcinoma

The major risk factors for the development of oesophageal SCC (Fig. 3,4) are tobacco use and alcohol consumption; particularly a combination of both.23, 24 Nitrosamine exposure in tobacco smoking and the alcohol metabolite aldehyde, which is a known carcinogen, are probably the underlying reasons for these two risk factors. The high incidence of oesophageal SCC in Northern China, Iran and areas of Southern Africa may be related to a diet rich in nitrosamines and deficient in trace elements and vitamins A & C.

Other risk factors for oesophageal SCC in the Western world include low socioeconomic status, poor oral hygiene, achalasia, history of thoracic radiation, caustic injury, hereditary tylosis and Plummer-Vinson Syndrome.25

Fig. 3: Squamous cell carcinoma of the oesophagus

Fig. 4: Microscopic picture of squamous cell carcinoma (adapted from WHO classification of oesophageal tumours)

How does oesophageal cancer present clinically?

Patients presenting with symptoms of OC almost invariably have advanced disease. The most common presenting symptom is progressive dysphagia with 74% of patients reporting difficulty swallowing.26 This is graded according to the following: 27

  • Grade 1: Able to swallow most foods
  • Grade 2: Able to swallow soft foods only
  • Grade 3: Able to swallow liquids only
  • Grade 4: Unable to swallow anything

17% of patients will also report pain on swallowing food and liquids (odynophagia). 26 Typically, patients with oesophageal adenocarcinoma will be white males with a background of gastro-oesophageal reflux disease who have developed dysphagia. On the other hand, patients with oesophageal SCC will present with dysphagia, associated with weight loss and a history of smoking and increased alcohol intake may exist.

Other less common symptoms include dyspnoea, cough, hoarseness, acute haemorrhage and pain which may be retrosternal, back or right upper abdominal. These will usually represent the existence of metastatic disease.

Physical examination is often normal; positive clinical findings may include cachexia, lymphadenopathy and hepatomegaly in the presence of metastases.

How is oesophageal cancer diagnosed?

It is essential to have a low threshold if cancers are to be detected at an early, treatable stage. National Institute for Health and Clinical Excellence (NICE) guidelines state that a patient presenting with symptoms suggestive of upper gastrointestinal cancer should be referred to a team specialising in the management of these cancers. Specifically; patients of any age presenting with dyspepsia in association with alarm symptoms should be urgently referred for endoscopy or to a specialist. The classical ‘alarm’ symptoms associated with OC includes dysphagia, vomiting, anorexia, weight loss and symptoms associated with gastro-intestinal blood loss. Patients aged 55 or more with persistent, recent onset, and unexplained dyspepsia should be referred urgently for an endoscopy.

Diagnosis is usually made by oesophago-gastro-duodenoscopy where multiple biopsy samples must be taken from any mucosal abnormality to exclude early tumours. Suspicious lesions including oesophageal strictures may require repeated biopsies if initial results are negative.

Once diagnosis is made patients should be urgently referred to an Upper Gastro-intestinal team at a specialist centre for investigations to stage disease and further management.

Staging oesophageal cancers

It is essential to accurately stage disease to exclude patients with widespread metastatic disease for whom surgery will not be curative and to identify subgroups of patients who will require neo-adjuvant therapies. Whilst it is difficult to completely eliminate the possibility of ‘open and shut’ cases where tumours are found to be inoperable at the time of surgery; it is important to develop a staging strategy with investigations and procedures that help to minimise this risk. The TNM (Tumour, Node, Metastasis) staging system is used to classify the depth of tumour invasion into or through the oesophageal wall, the status of regional lymph nodes and metastases to distant sites. The TNM7 categories are shown in Tables 2 and the current stage groupings is shown in Table 3. 28

Table 2: TNM7 staging system

Primary Tumour (T)
TX Primary tumour cannot be assessed
T0 No evidence of primary tumour
Tis High-grade dysplasia
T1 Tumour invades lamina propria, muscularis mucosae, or submocusa
T1a Tumour invades lamina propria, muscularis mucosae
T1b Tumour invades submucosa
T2 Tumour invades muscularis propria
T3 Tumour invades adventitia
T4 Tumour invades adjacent strictures
T4a Resectable tumour invading pleura, pericardium, or diaphragm
T4b Unresectable tumour invading other adjacent structures, such as aorta, vertebral body, trachea etc.
Regional Lymph Nodes (N)
NX Regional lymph nodes cannot be assessed
N0 No regional lymph node metastasis
N1 Metastases in 1-2 regional lymph nodes
N2 Metastases in 3-6 regional lymph nodes
N3 Metastases in ≥ 7 regional lymph nodes
Distant Metastasis (M)
M0 No distant metastasis
M1 Distant metastasis

Table 3: Stage classification for oesophageal cancer in the 2010 TNM7 staging system

Squamous-cell carcinoma
Stage Tumour Node Metastasis Grade Tumour location
0 Tis (HGD) N0 M0 1, X Any
IA T1 N0 M0 1, X Any
IB T1 N0 M0 2-3 Any
T2-3 N0 M0 1, X Lower, X
IIA T2-3 N0 M0 1, X Upper, middle
T2-3 N0 M0 2-3 Lower, X
IIB T2-3 N0 M0 2-3 Upper, middle
T1-2 N1 M0 Any Any
IIIA T1-2 N2 M0 Any Any
T3 N1 M0 Any Any
T4a N0 M0 Any Any
IIIB T3 N2 M0 Any Any
IIIC T4a N1-2 M0 Any Any
T4b Any M0 Any Any
Any N3 M0 Any Any
IV Any Any M1 Any Any
Adenocarcinoma  
Stage Tumour Node Metastasis Grade  
0 Tis (HGD) N0 M0 1, X  
IA T1 N0 M0 1-2, X  
IB T1 N0 M0 3  
T2 N0 M0 1-2, X  
IIA T2 N0 M0 3  
IIB T3 N0 M0 Any  
T1-2 N1 M0 Any  
IIIA T1-2 N2 M0 Any  
T3 N1 M0 Any  
T4a N0 M0 Any  
IIIB T3 N2 M0 Any  
IIIC T4a N1-2 M0 Any  
T4b Any M0 Any  
Any N3 M0 Any  
IV Any Any M1 Any  

Initial staging assessment includes Computed Tomography (CT) (Fig. 5) of the thorax, abdomen and pelvis and its major role will be in evaluating the T stage to detect local tumour invasion into adjacent structures and determining the presence or absence of metastatic disease. However CT will not be able to determine the depth of tumour invasion. Endoscopic ultrasound (EUS) (Fig. 6) is the main modality used to stage the primary tumour and primarily aids in distinguishing T1 lesions from T2-4 lesions. This method has an accuracy ranging from between 73% to 89% in tumour staging.29 Accurately distinguishing tumour stage will affect treatment as T1 lesions may be treated with endoscopic therapy or with oesophagectomy whereas T2-4 lesions may require neo-adjuvant chemo-radiotherapy prior to surgery. EUS is also used for evaluation of regional lymph nodes however although sensitivity is approximately 80%, the specificity is lower at approximately 70%. 30 It is best to perform a EUS-guided lymph node biopsy for confirmation of involvement.

Fig. 5: CT scan shows irregular wall thickening of the esophagus and enlarged metastatic lymph node.

Fig. 6: Endoscopic ultrasound (EUS) of oesophagus showing T3 tumour

FDG-PET (18F-fluoroudeoxyglucose PET) (Fig. 7) is a key modality for the detection of distant metastatic disease in OC.31, 32 PET may reveal previously occult distant metastases in nodal and non-nodal sites with a sensitivity of 67% and high specificity of 97%. 33 It can also reveal metastases to bone, which may not be detected using conventional methods. An investigation has shown PET to be the only modality that predicted intended curative resection and it may also be used to prevent unnecessary surgical explorations.34 The use of PET has been shown in a study to change the management of patients from curative to palliative due to detection of previously unknown metastases.35 It has also been used in a prospective study to assess response early after neo-adjuvant chemotherapy to determine the need for urgent surgery or further chemotherapy. The usage of CT and PET in combination has become increasingly available and is useful in selective cases.36

Fig. 7: FDG PET/CT image demonstrating increased uptake at the distal oesophagus and coeliac lymph node in oesophageal cancer case

Minimally invasive surgery is also used as a method to stage OC in many specialist centres.37 A staging laparoscopy can visualise the primary tumour, identify metastases such as hepatic and regional nodal and can accurately detect intraperitoneal dissemination of disease, which may not have been appreciated on other radiological staging investigations. Samples of peritoneal ascites or washings for cytology can also be obtained at this stage if present.

Endoscopic mucosal resection (EMR) can provide accurate histological staging for high grade dysplasia and intramucosal carcinomas. 38 In many cases EMR alone can be a therapeutic intervention depending on the depth of invasion on the specimen.

Treatment

The management of OCs requires a multi-disciplinary team approach involving surgeons, oncologists, radiologists, pathologists, specialist nurses, dietitians and specialists from other specialties if required. Patients considered for surgery or chemo-radiotherapy will require a fitness assessment. In addition to pulmonary function tests, ECG and echocardiogram, cardio-pulmonary exercise testing (CPEX/CPET) is now being increasingly used to assess fitness for major surgery.

OCs can be managed with surgery, chemotherapy or radiotherapy, a combination of the three or palliation in many cases. Disease that is locally advanced without signs of distant metastases is treated with an intention to cure and this will involve a multimodal approach. Metastatic, disseminated and recurrent disease will be treated with palliative intent with chemotherapy to increase survival or measures such as radiotherapy or stent placement for symptomatic relief.

Surgical

Surgical resection can be part of a multimodal approach or alone and is the main option for curative treatment. There are a number of surgical procedures that can be used however it is important to ensure removal of macroscopic and microscopic tumour in association with dissection of lymph nodes with either method as these are vital prognostic factors following surgery.

Open oesophagectomy (OO):

Options for resection include trans-hiatal oesophagectomy and transthoracic approaches and the choice of approach will depend on the location of the tumour, access to lymph nodes and surgeon preference. An Ivor Lewis oesophagectomy (also known as Lewis-Tanner oesophagectomy) involves abdominal mobilization of the stomach and right thoracic approach for resection of the oesophagus. The three-stage modified McKeown oesophagectomy involves a laparotomy, right thoracotomy and neck anastomosis. A resection margin 8-10 cm proximally and 7 cm distally is recommended to achieve an R0 resection (recommendation class IIB, level of evidence C). The next step is to construct a conduit for the anastomosis and this can be achieved by using a gastric tube, large or small bowel. A gastric tube is preferred due to the following factors; ease of use, tension free and longest term conduit survival (recommendation class IIA, level of evidence C). The anastomosis can be performed in the chest or the neck. This relies on multiple factors such as ease of the anastomosis, tension on the repair, ability to diagnose and treat complications and the oncological status. Circular staplers or hand sewn technique usually used with no significant differences in the outcomes. A drainage procedure such as pyloroplasty is recommended to avoid delayed gastric emptying (recommendation class I, level of evidence B). 62

Radical oesophagectomy using either approach has a perioperative mortality of 5-10% and morbidity of 30-40%. 39 Lymph node dissection plays an important role owing to the extensive submucosal lymphatic drainage of the oesophagus. This has meant that nearly 80% of patients undergoing surgery have positive lymph nodes and prognostically this is of importance.40, 41 However, there has been controversy with regards to the extent of lymph node dissection required. For optimal staging 10 lymph nodes for T1 and 20-30 lymph nodes for T2 and T3 tumours should be harvested. 62 In order to perform a curative resection for carcinoma of the middle and lower third of the oesophagus it is recommended to dissect the abdominal and mediastinal lymph nodes. Three-field lymphadenectomy in the abdomen, chest and neck, is performed in Japan for oesophageal SCC.42 Proponents of radical lymphadenectomy argue that it does allow optimal staging, improves loco-regional disease free survival improving the quality of life for these patients.

Minimally invasive oesophagectomy (MIO):

Minimally invasive approaches, which involve laparoscopic mobilisation of the stomach, thoracoscopic mobilisation of the oesophagus and hybrid or robotic approaches, are increasing in many specialist centres. Benefits of this approach include shorter recovery times, decreased post-operative pain and reduced cardiopulmonary complications without jeopardising the oncological outcomes. Luketich et al. reported a mortality rate of 1.7%, leak 5% and empyema 6% following MIO. 63Several randomised controlled trials (RCTs) and comparative studies were conducted to investigate the efficacy and outcomes of MIO. A study by Li et al was conducted on 407 patients underwent MIO and OO found that the overall incidence of complications was lower in the MIO patients. The incidence of pulmonary complications was 20.7% in contrast to 39.7% in the OO group. However, there was no difference in the overall survival among the groups. Another comparative retrospective study by Mu et al. didn’t reveal any difference in the morbidity, anastomotic leak rate, pulmonary complications and length of stay between the approaches and the authors concluded that both techniques are equivalent. 63, 64

Neo-adjuvant chemotherapy

This aims to improve operability; achieving this by shrinking the tumour prior to surgery, down-staging the disease as well as treating occult metastatic disease. Response to treatment can be assessed prior to surgery with repeat radiological investigations. It is now common for patients in the UK with locally advanced disease to undergo neo-adjuvant chemotherapy followed by resection. This is based on the results of a multi-centre study conducted by the Medical Research Council (OEO2), which showed a 9% improvement in two-year survival in patients given 2 cycles of Cisplatin and 5-Fluorouracil chemotherapy compared to those who were not. Five-year survival with surgery alone was 17%, compared with 23% with neoadjuvant chemotherapy.43 The MRC Adjuvant Gastric Infusional Chemotherapy (MAGIC) trial randomized patients to chemotherapy with surgery or to surgery alone and it was found that patients in the chemotherapy group (who received Epirubicin, Cisplatin and infused 5-Fluorouracil, ‘ECF’) had a significant improvement in progression-free survival and a 13% increase in 5-year survival.45

In a meta-analysis of neoadjuvant chemotherapy, there was an overall all-cause absolute survival benefit of 7% at 2 years with the addition of chemotherapy. When analysed by subtype, chemotherapy had no significant effect on mortality for patients with squamous cell carcinoma; however, there was a significant survival benefit for patients with oesophageal adenocarcinoma (HR 0.78; p=0.014). 47

As a result of this evidence, neoadjuvant chemotherapy is a standard of care for patients with operable mid and lower oesophageal and GOJ adenocarcinoma. The ongoing MRC OEO5 trial is evaluating optimal neoadjuvant chemotherapy regimens: 4 cycles of chemotherapy with ‘ECX’ (Epirubicin, Cisplatin and Capecitabine) compared to two cycles Cisplatin and 5-Fluorouracil, as in OEO2.44

Patients who are deemed suitable for surgical management of mid or distal oesophageal (including GOJ) adenocarcinomas are referred to the GI oncology team to assess fitness for chemotherapy. Many of the criteria assessed are similar to those in the pre-operative assessment, particularly performance status and medical comorbidities. Significant history of renal disease or cardiovascular disease, especially ischaemic heart disease would be a relative contraindication to systemic chemotherapy. Toxicities from chemotherapy are wide-ranging and include gastrointestinal upset, hair loss, skin rash, neurotoxicity, renal toxicity, bone marrow suppression (with risk of neutropaenic sepsis, thrombocytopaenia, and anaemia), cardiovascular toxicity, and chemotherapy-related fatigue. In the MAGIC trial, three cycles of epirubicin, cisplatin and capecitabine (ECX) chemotherapy were given both before and after surgery, and approximately one quarter of patients had CTCAE grade 3 or 4 neutropaenia. 45

The REAL 2 trial 48 was a 2x2 factorial non-inferiority comparison of cisplatin versus oxaliplatin and 5-fluorouracil (5-FU) versus oral capectiabine in patients with oesophageal, gastro-oesophageal junction and gastric tumours. Treatment was given as triplet chemotherapy: epirubicin plus platinum agent (cisplatin or oxaliplatin) plus 5-FU or capecitabine. The trial results showed that oxaliplatin was at least as effective as cisplatin, and oral capectibine was at least as effective as intravenous 5-fluorouracil. There was less grade 3 and 4 neutropaenia with oxaliplatin versus cisplatin, but this was offset by an increase in neuropathy and diarrhoea. As a result of this trial, EOX chemotherapy can be used as an alternative to ECX in both the neoadjuvant and metastatic settings (Table 4).

Table 4: Efficacies of major combination chemotherapy drugs

Drug Histologic type No. of cases Response rate (%)
5-FU + cisplatin Squamous cell carcinoma 39 36
Cisplatin + paclitaxel Squamous cell carcinoma/adenocarcinoma 32 44
Cisplatin + irinotecan Squamous cell carcinoma/adenocarcinoma 35 57
Cisplatin + gemcitabine Squamous cell carcinoma/adenocarcinoma 32 45
5-FU + nedaplatin Squamous cell carcinoma 38 40

Neo-adjuvant chemo-radiotherapy

In contrast to the UK, patients in the USA commonly receive neo-adjuvant chemo-radiotherapy (CRT) for locally advanced oesophageal carcinoma. There is evidence that preoperative CRT is superior to surgery alone. A meta-analysis of ten randomised controlled trials showed a hazard ratio for all-cause mortality of 0.81 (95% CI 0.70 to 0.93; p=0.002). This corresponded to a 13% absolute survival benefit at 2 years.47 In the subgroup analysis of the Dutch CRT trial (which used paclitaxel and carboplatin combination chemotherapy), the beneficial effect was more pronounced in patients with squamous cell carcinoma (HR 0.34; 95% CI 0.17 to 0.65) compared to adenocarcinoma (HR 0.82; 95% CI 0.58 to 1.16).49

There has been no direct head-to-head comparison of neoadjuvant chemotherapy and neoadjuvant CRT in the context of a phase III randomised control trial. Concerns regarding the added morbidity of CRT have meant that chemotherapy alone is the standard neoadjuvant treatment of choice in the UK. However, the role of neoadjuvant CRT is currently being reassessed in the Neo-SCOPE trial.

Definitive chemo-radiotherapy (CRT)

According to current UK consensus guidelines, CRT is the definitive treatment of choice for localised squamous cell carcinoma of the proximal oesophagus. 50 Localised squamous cell carcinoma of the middle or lower oesophagus may be treated with CRT alone, or CRT plus surgery. 50

In a pivotal study, US Intergroup RTOG-8501 randomised 121 patients with squamous cell carcinoma or adenocarcinoma to receive CRT (cisplatin and 5-Fluorouracil with 50 Gray in 25 fractions), or radiotherapy alone (64 Gray in 32 fractions). This trial 46, together with a subsequent systematic review 55, demonstrated a survival superiority of CRT over radiotherapy alone (1-year mortality odds ratio 0.61; 95% CI 0.31 to 0.89; p<0.001). This was at the expense of increased toxicity.

This and similar studies 56-57 have demonstrated a remarkably consistent median survival of 14-18 months and 2 year overall survival of 30-40% with CRT.

CRT practice in the UK is somewhat varied, but within the authors’ multidisciplinary team Cisplatin and 5-Fluorouracil chemotherapy is given in weeks 1 and 5 of a five-and-a-half week course of radiotherapy. The radiation dose used is 50.4 Gray in 28 daily fractions, treating Mondays to Fridays. An alternative radiation dose-fractionation which is supported by the Royal College of Radiologists guidelines is 50 Gray in 25 daily fractions. 58

There are few trials directly comparing surgery alone with CRT. A study of 80 patients with squamous cell carcinoma randomised to surgery or CRT failed to show superiority of either strategy in terms of early disease free survival or overall survival. 51 Adding surgery to CRT can improve local control rates compared with CRT alone, but combined-modality therapy has not been shown to improve survival. It predictably also leads to significantly more treatment-related morbidity.52

The French FFCD 9102 trial recruited 444 patients with potentially resectable OC (90% squamous cell carcinoma) to receive induction CRT. Those patients who showed evidence of response to CRT were then randomised to further CRT or surgery. Median overall survival was 19.3 months in the CRT alone arm, and 17.7 months in those randomised to surgery. The trial met its endpoint of non-inferiority for 2 year overall survival. Again, toxicity was shown to be significantly higher in patients who received both CRT and surgery.53

Although definitive CRT is a current recommended standard of care for localised squamous cell carcinoma of the oesophagus, there is insufficient evidence to to support either a surgical or non-surgical approach 50. Surgery should be considered in patients who have histologically-confirmed residual disease at the end of CRT.

For patients deemed unsuitable for surgery with localised adenocarcinoma of the oesophagus, CRT is a valid option for treatment. An American case series of 25 patients with a median age of 77 years showed that CRT using two cycles of mitomycin-C and 5-fluorouracil in combination with radiation (dose 50.4Gy in 28 daily fractions) was effective and tolerable. 68% of these patients had no evidence of residual disease on post-treatment endoscopy. This small series of patients had a two year overall survival of 64%, with a median overall survival of 35 months.54

Salvage surgery after definitive CRT

Local recurrence occurs within the first year in 10-30% of patients treated with definitive CRT.50 Salvage curative oesophagectomy may be considered within a multidisciplinary team setting. Repeat staging investigations including a CT-PET and EUS are required before a final decision for salvage surgery is made. Survival benefit is limited, and such surgery is associated with an increased in-hospital mortality rate and increased morbidity.59 Informing patients of the potential high risks and poor outcomes is an integral part of the decision-making process for salvage surgery.

Palliation

The majority of patients diagnosed with OC are never treated with curative intent as a result of advanced disease or their physical fitness and comorbidities not allowing for radical treatment. It also includes patients who have developed recurrent or metastatic disease following resection. For this group of patients, there are a number of palliative treatments available for relief of symptoms, prolonging and maximising their quality of life. Once again, a multidisciplinary, holistic approach is required to provide the best treatment.

Treatments to provide symptomatic relief such as dysphagia can include intraluminal brachytherapy, endoscopic stenting using self-expanding metal stents or repeated endoscopic dilatations. Dysphagia can also be palliated by chemotherapy or external beam radiotherapy. Laser-thermal Nd-YAG endoluminal tumour destruction and photodynamic therapy can also be administered however this requires a number of treatments and may be more suitable for short exophytic tumours. It is essential to manage pain and nutrition and feeding options through a gastrostomy, jejunostomy or even intravenously can be provided to ensure adequate nutritional status. In addition to providing symptomatic relief it is important to also ensure that these patients receive social and psychological support by identifying and addressing the needs of the patients as well as their carers.

Palliative radiotherapy can be offered to patients with symptomatic primary oesophageal tumours in the context of metastatic or inoperable disease. Palliative dose and fractionation options are varied, but include 27 Gray in 6 fractions treating twice a week for 3 weeks; 30 Gray in 10 fractions treating daily for 2 weeks; 20 Gray in 5 fractions treating daily for 1 week.58 The aim of such radiation treatment is to palliate dysphagia. This effect is not immediate, and therefore patients with significant dysphagia are better served initially by endoscopic stenting.

Chemotherapy has been shown to be effective in improving symptoms and overall survival. Patients with good performance status are offered combination chemotherapy. This can be with EOX, as per the MAGIC trial, 45or with Cisplatin and 5-Fluorouracil, with or without the addition of Epirubicin (CF or ECF). 5-Fluorouracil can be substituted for oral Capecitabine (i.e. CX or ECX) without any adverse effects on outcomes.45

When choosing palliative systemic chemotherapy for patients with incurable OC, the primary aim should be about maximising quality of life. Improvements in outcome with more intensive chemotherapy regimens, such as docetaxel, cisplatin and 5-Fluorouracil, have been shown to be offset by significantly more toxicity.60 As a result, Docetaxel containing regimens are not approved in the UK for this indication.50

Conclusions

The incidence of oesophageal carcinoma is increasing and despite advances in management and treatment the overall prognosis remains poor. It is essential to recognize and diagnose early, to have a clear pathway for subsequent investigations to ensure accurate staging. This will allow appropriate therapy to be administered to ensure the best possible outcomes are achieved. Treatment of OC is still a challenge however recent advances in surgery, endoscopic treatments and new therapeutic agents will hopefully improve prognosis.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
NAUFAL RASHID, Department of Upper GI Surgery, West Hertfordshire Hospitals, England. MOHAMED ELSHAER, Department of Upper GI Surgery, West Hertfordshire Hospitals, England. MICHAEL KOSMIN, Department of Oncology, Mount Vernon Hospital, England. AMJID RIAZ, Department of Upper GI Surgery, West Hertfordshire Hospitals, England.
Corresponding Author Details: 
AMJID ALI RIAZ, Department of Upper GI Surgery, Watford General Hospital, Vicarage road, Watford, WD18 0HB, United Kingdom.
Corresponding Author Email: 
mrariaz@hotmail.com
References
References: 
  1. Ferlay J, Shin HR, Bray F, Forman D, Mathers C, Parkin DM. Estimates of worldwide burden of cancer in 2008: GLOBOCAN 2008. Int J Cancer 2010; 127: 2893–917
  2. Pisani P, Parkin DM, Bray F, Ferlay J. Estimates of the worldwide mortality from 25 cancers in 1990. Int J Cancer 1999; 83: 870-3.
  3. Brown L, Devesa S. Epidemiologic trends in esophageal and gastric cancer in the United States. Surg Oncol Clin N Am 2002; pp. 235–256
  4. Howlader N, Noone AM, Krapcho M, Neyman N, Aminou R, Altekruse SF, Kosary CL, Ruhl J, Tatalovich Z, Cho H, Mariotto A, Eisner MP, Lewis DR, Chen HS, Feuer EJ, Cronin KA (eds). SEER Cancer Statistics Review, 1975-2009 (Vintage 2009 Populations), National Cancer Institute. Bethesda, MD, Available on http://seer.cancer.gov/statfacts/html/esoph.html#survival, accessed on 02/04/2013
  5. Lepage C, Rachet B, Jooste V, Faivre J, Coleman MP. Continuing rapid increase in esophageal adenocarcinoma in England and Wales. Am J Gastroenterol 2008; 103: 2694–99
  6. Devesa S, Blot, WJ and Fraumeni, JF (1998), Changing patterns in the incidence of esophageal and gastric carcinoma in the United States. Cancer, 83: 2049–2053
  7. Shields TW, LoCicero J, Reeds C, Fein R, Less Common Malignant Tumors of the Esophagus. General Thoracic Surgery 2005 Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. pp. 2041 - 2055.
  8. Office for National Statistics. Cancer Statistics registrations: Registrations of cancer diagnosed in 2008, England. Series MB1 no.39. 2011, National Statistics: London
  9. Blot WJ, McLaughlin JK.,The changing epidemiology of esophageal cancer. Seminars in Oncology 1999; 26(5 Suppl 15): 2-8
  10. Holmes R, Vaughan T, Epidemiology and pathogenesis of Esophageal Cancer. Seminars in Radiation Oncology 2007; Volume 17, Issue 1: 2-9
  11. Umar SB, Fleischer DE, Esophageal cancer: epidemiology, pathogenesis and prevention. Nat Clin Pract Gastroenterol Hepatol 2008; 5: 517–26.
  12. Kamangar F, Dores GM, Anderson WF. Patterns of cancer incidence, mortality, and prevalence across five continents: defining priorities to reduce cancer disparities in different geographic regions of the world. J Clin Oncol 2006; 24: 2137–50.
  13. Edgren G, Adami H, Vainio E, & Nyrén O, A global assessment of the oesophageal adenocarcinoma epidemic. Gut 2012.
  14. Cancer Research UK. Oesophageal Cancer Incidence Statistics 2008. Available online at http://www.cancerresearchuk.org/cancer-info/cancerstats/types/oesophagus/incidence/#source5. Accessed on -04/04/2013
  15. Vaughan T, Davis S, Kristal A, Thomas DB. Obesity, alcohol,
and tobacco as risk factors for cancers of the esophagus and gastric cardia: adenocarcinoma versus squamous cell carcinoma.
Cancer Epidemiol Biomarkers Prev 1995; 4: 85–92.
  16. Gammon MD, Schoenberg JB, Ahsan H, et al. Tobacco, alcohol, and socioeconomic status and adenocarcinomas of the esophagus and gastric cardia. J Natl Cancer Inst 1997; 89: 1277–84.
  17. Corley D, Kerlikowske K, Verma R, et al. Protective association of aspirin/NSAIDs and esophageal cancer: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Gastroenterology. 2003;124(1):47–56.
  18. Fitzgerald R, Barrett’s oesophagus and oesophageal adenocarcinoma: how does acid interfere with cell proliferation and differentiation. Gut. 2005 Mar; 54 Suppl 1:i21-6.
  19. Jankowski J, Barr H, Wang K, Delaney B, Diagnosis and management of Barrett’s oesophagus. BMJ. 2010; 341: c4551
  20. Edelstein ZR, Farrow DC, Bronner MP, Rosen SN, Vaughan TL. Central adiposity and risk of Barrett's esophagus. Gastroenterology. 2007; 133:403-411.
  21. Corley DA, Kubo A, Zhao W. Abdominal obesity and the risk of esophageal and gastric cardia carcinomas. Cancer Epidemiol Biomarkers Prev. 2008; 17: 352-358.
  22. Anderson LA, Murphy SJ, Johnston BT, et al. Relationship between Helicobacter pylori infection and gastric atrophy and the stages of the oesophageal inflammation, metaplasia, adenocarcinoma sequence: results from the FINBAR case-control study. Gut. 2008; 57: 734-739.
  23. Lubin JH, Cook MB, Pandeya N, et al. The importance of exposure rate on odds ratios by cigarette smoking and alcohol consumption for esophageal adenocarcinoma and squamous cell carcinoma in the Barrett's Esophagus and Esophageal Adenocarcinoma Consortium. Cancer Epidemiol. 2012; 36: 306-316.
  24. Gammon MD, Schoenberg JB, Ahsan H, et al. Tobacco, alcohol, and socioeconomic status and adenocarcinomas of the esophagus and gastric cardia. J Natl Cancer Inst 1997; 89: 1277–84
  25. Stoner GD, Gupta A, Etiology and chemoprevention of esophageal squamous cell carcinoma. Carcinogenesis 2001; 22 (11): 1737 – 46
  26. Daly JM, Fry WA, Little AG, et al. Esophageal cancer: results of an American College of Surgeons Patient Care Evaluation Study. Journal of the American College of Surgeons 2000; 190: 562-72.
  27. Knyrim K, Wagner H-J, Bethge N, Keymling M, Nimish. A controlled trial of an expansile metal stent for palliation of esophageal obstruction due to inoperable cancer. New England Journal of Medicine 1993; 329: 1302-7
  28. AJCC: Esophageal and esophagogastric junction. In: Edge SB, Byrd DR, Compton CC, et al., AJCC Cancer Staging Manual. 7th ed. New York, NY: Springer, 2010, pp 103-15.
  29. Cen P, Hofstetter WL, Lee JH, et al. Value of endoscopic ultrasound staging in conjunction with the evaluation of lymphovascular invasion in identifying low-risk esophageal carcinoma. Cancer. 2008; 112: 503–10
  30. Van Vliet EP, Heijenbrok-Kal MH, Hunink MG, Kuipers EJ, Siersema PD. Staging investigations for oesophageal cancer: a meta-analysis. Br J Cancer. 2008; 98: 547–57.
  31. Luketich JD, Friedman DM, Weigel TL, et al. Evaluation of distant metastases in esophageal cancer: 100 consecutive positron emission tomography scans. Ann Thorac Surg. 1999; 68: 1133–6.
  32. Meyers BF, Downey RJ, Decker PA, et al. The utility of positron emission tomography in staging of potentially operable carcinoma of the thoracic esophagus: results of the American College of Surgeons Oncology Group Z0060 trial. J Thorac Cardiovasc Surg. 2007; 133: 738–45.
  33. van Westreenen HL, Westerterp M, Bossuyt PM, et al. Systematic review of the staging performance of 18F-fluorodeoxyglucose positron emission tomography in esophageal cancer. J Clin Oncol. 2004; 22: 3805–12.
  34. van Westreenen HL, Heeren PA, van Dullemen HM, et al. Positron emission tomography with F-18-fluorodeoxyglucose in a combined staging strategy of esophageal cancer prevents unnecessary surgical explorations. J Gastrointest Surg. 2005; 9: 54–61.
  35. Duong CP, Demitriou H, Weih L, et al. Significant clinical impact and prognostic stratification provided by FDG-PET in the staging of oesophageal cancer. Eur J Nucl Med Mol Imaging. 2006; 33: 759–69
  36. Plukker J, van Westreenen HL, Staging in Oesophageal Cancer. Best Practice & Research Clinical Gastroenterology. 2006; 20 (5): 877-91
  37. Conlon KCP, Minnard EA, The Value of Laparoscopic Staging in Upper Gastrointestinal Malignancy. The Oncologist 1997, 2(1): 10-17
  38. Ponchon, Thierry, Endoscopic Mucosal Resection. Journal of Clinical Gastroenterology 2001; 32 (1): 6-10
  39. Wu PC, Posner MC, The role of surgery in the management of oesophageal cancer. The Lancet Oncology 2003; 4: 481-88
  40. Holscher AH, Bollschweiler E, Bumm R, et al. Prognostic factors of resected adenocarcinoma of the esophagus. Surgery 1995; 118: 845–55
  41. Clark GW,Peters JH, Ireland AP, et al. Nodal metastasis and sites of recurrence after en bloc esophagectomy for adenocarcinoma.
 Ann Thorac Surg 1994; 58: 646–53; discussion 653–54
  42. Nishihira T, Hirayama K, Mori S. A prospective randomized trial of extended cervical and superior mediastinal lymphadenectomy for carcinoma of the thoracic esophagus. Am J Surg 1998;
175: 47–51.
  43. Medical Research Council Oesophageal Cancer Working Party. Surgical resection with or without preoperative chemotherapy in oesophageal cancer: a randomised controlled trial. Lancet 2002; 359: 1727-1733.
  44. Evans M, Crosby T, Oesophageal cancer: current trends and management. J R Coll Physicians Edinb 2008; 38: 242-5
  45. Cunningham D, Allum WH, Stenning SP, et al, and the MAGIC Trial Participants. Perioperative chemotherapy versus surgery alone for resectable gastroesophageal cancer. N Engl J Med 2006; 355: 11–20.
  46. Cooper JS, Guo MD, Herskovic A, et al, and the Radiation Therapy Oncology Group. Chemoradiotherapy of locally advanced esophageal cancer: long-term follow-up of a prospective randomized trial (RTOG 85-01). JAMA 1999; 281: 1623–27.
  47. Gebski V, Burmeister B, Smithers BM, et al. Survival benefits from neoadjuvant chemoradiotherapy or chemotherapy in oesophageal cncaer: a meta-analysis. Lancet Oncology 2007: 8: 226-34.
  48. Cunningham D, Starling N, Rao S, et al. Capecitabine and Oxaliplatin for Advanced Esophagogastric Cancer. N Engl J Med 2008; 358: 36-46.
  49. Gaast AV, van Hagen P, Hulshof MASCO. Effect of preoperative concurrent chemoradiotherapy on survival of patients with resectable esophageal or esophagogastric junction cancer: results from a mulitcenter randomised phase III study. J Clin Oncol 2010; 25(15 Suppl): Suppl Abs. 4004.
  50. Allum WH, Blazeby JM, Griffin SM, et al. Guidelines for the management of oesophageal and gastric cancer. Gut 2011; 60: 1449-1472.
  51. Chiu PW, Chan AC, Leung SF, et al. Multicenter prospective randomized trial comparing standard esophagectomy with chemoradiotherapy for treatment of squamous esophageal cancer: early results from the Chinese University Research Group for Esophageal Cancer (CURE). J Gastrointest Surg 2005; 9: 794-802.
  52. Stahl M, Stuschke M, Lehmann H, et al. Chemoradiation with and without surgery in patients with locally advanced squamous cell carcinoma of the esophagus. J Clin Onc 2007; 25: Suppl Abs. 4530.
  53. Bedenne L, Michel P, Bouche O, et al. Chemoradiation followed by surgery compared with chemoradiation alone in squamous cell carcinoma of the esophagus: FFCD 9102. J Clin Onc 2007; 25: 1160-8.
  54. Anderson SE, Minsky BD, Bains M, et al. Combined modality chemoradiation in elderly esophageal cancer patients. Br J Cancer 2007; 96: 1823-7.
  55. Wong R, Malthaner R. Combined chemotherapy and radiotherapy (without surgery) compared with radiotherapy alone in localized carcinoma of the esophagus. Cochrane Database Systematic Review 2006: CD002092.
  56. Gwynne S, Hurt C, Evans M, et al. Definitive chemoradiation for oesophageal cancer – a standard of care in patients with non-metastatic oesophageal cancer. Clin Onc 2011; 23(3): 182-188.
  57. Herskovic A, Martz k, al-Sarraf M, et al. Combined chemotherapy and radiotherapy compared with radiotherapy alone in patients with cancer of the esophagus. NEJM 2006; 326(24): 1593-8.
  58. Website: https://www.rcr.ac.uk/docs/oncology/pdf/DoseFract_45_Gastro-oes.pdf [Accessed 26th October 2014]
  59. Gardner-Thorpe J, Hardwick RH, Dwerryhouse SJ. Salvage oesophagectomy after local failure of definitive chemoradiotherapy. Br J Surg 2007; 94: 1059-66.
  60. Van CE, Moiseyenko VM, Tjulandin S, et al. Phase III study of docetaxel and cisplatin plus fluorouracil compared with cisplatin and fluorouracil as first-line therapy for advanced gastric cancer: a report of the V325 Study Group. J Clin Onc 2006;24: 4991-7.
  61. Siewert, J.R. & H.J. Stein. 1998. Classification of adenocarcinoma of the oesophagogastric junction. Br. J. Surg. 85: 1457–1459.
  62. Allum WH, Bonavina L, Cassivi SD, Cuesta MA, Dong ZM, Felix VN, Figueredo E, Gatenby PA, Haverkamp L, Ibraev MA, Krasna MJ, Lambert R, Langer R, Lewis MP, Nason KS, Parry K, Preston SR, Ruurda JP, Schaheen LW, Tatum RP, Turkin IN, van der Horst S, van der Peet DL, van der Sluis PC, van Hillegersberg R, Wormald JC, Wu PC, Zonderhuis BM. Surgical treatments for oesophageal cancers. Ann N Y Acad Sci. 2014;1325:242-68.
  63. Li J, Shen Y, Tan L, Feng M, Wang H, Xi Y, Wang Q. Is minimally invasive oesophagectomy beneficial to elderly patients with esophageal cancer?. Surg Endosc. 2014 Sep 24. [Epub ahead of print].
  64. Mu J, Yuan Z, Zhang B, Li N, Lyu F, Mao Y, Xue Q, Gao S, Zhao J, Wang D, Li Z, Gao Y, Zhang L, Huang J, Shao K, Feng F, Zhao L, Li J, Cheng G, Sun K, He J. Comparative study of minimally invasive versus open oesophagectomy for oesophageal cancer in a single cancer centre. Chin Med J (Engl). 2014;127(4):747-52.

Refractory Disseminated Intravascular Coagulation Following Ovarian Torsion and Rupture in a Pregnant Patient

Authors
Joelle Williams, Amaju Ikomi, Chanaka Karunaratne and Preethi Angala
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2015;8(1):a803
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

This report describes a case of a 36 year old pregnant woman presenting at 33 weeks’ gestation with torsion and rupture of a malignant ovarian tumour. She undergoes an emergency laparotomy, Caesarean section and oophorectomy following which develops severe Disseminated Intravascular Coagulation (DIC) develops. Persistent blood loss warranted multiple surgical explorations, as well as, blood and blood product transfusions in excess of 100 units. Additional complications that arose included hyperkalaemia and VF cardiac arrest. The clinician should be alerted to the possibility of a deleterious coagulopathy which may be seen following a malignant ovarian tumour rupture and torsion.

Abbreviations: 
DIC- Disseminated Intravascular Coagulation,DVT - Deep vein thromboses, IABP -Invasive Arterial Blood Pressure, FFP - Fresh Frozen Plasma
Keywords: 
ovarian cancer, tumour, rupture, pregnancy, Disseminated Intravascular Coagulation, haemorrhage

Case report

A 36 year old multiparous woman presented to the Labour Ward at 33 weeks’ gestation with lower abdominal pain. She had mild asthma and her obstetric history included 2 previous normal vaginal deliveries.

At 16 weeks’ gestation she was found during antenatal scanning to have a right ovarian cystic lesion measuring 59x34x50mm. This was monitored and a repeat scan at 25 weeks’ showed it had increased in size to 73x55x47mm.

At 32 weeks’ she was diagnosed with a DVT and was commenced on therapeutic enoxaparin (stopped two days before current presentation). (D-Dimer > 4000micrograms/L). An inferior vena cava filter was inserted. The patient declined any surgical intervention of the cystic lesion during pregnancy and an early elective Caesarean Section with surgical management of the cyst at 34 weeks’ gestation was planned. She had no symptoms or signs suggestive of a PE and was not formally investigated for one prior her current presentation.

On this presentation at 33 weeks’ gestation, her pain suddenly worsened with associated hypotension and evidence of foetal distress and so an emergency exploratory laparotomy was performed.

Admission haematology results: haemoglobin 10g/dL, platelets 158 x 109 /L, INR 1.0, APTT 28.4 seconds, APTT ratio 1, fibrinogen 3g/L.

She underwent a rapid sequence induction in the supine wedged position using thiopentone and suxamethonium. She was a Grade 1 intubation and anaesthesia was maintained with oxygen/nitrous oxide/sevoflurane and muscle relaxation was achieved with atracurium. A ruptured, torted right ovarian mass containing an estimated one litre of altered blood was noted. At Caesarean section a live male infant was delivered. A right oophrectomy was then performed. The infant was subsequently intubated and transferred to the Neonatal Intensive Care Unit.

Oxytocin 5IU followed by a 40IU infusion over 4 hours was administered following delivery of the baby. Effective haemostats was achieved, the uterus appeared well-contracted and the patient’s abdomen was closed. Surgical blood loss was estimated as 600mls (excluding blood within the ovarian mass).

Thirty minutes following completion of surgery the patient, fresh blood was noted vaginally. A HemoCue* reading was taken as 5.9g/dL. Four units of blood and two units of FFP were transfused whilst a second laparotomy was performed. Fresh blood was noted intra-abdominally and the uterus was markedly atonic. Ergometrine 500mcg and carboprost trimethamine 250mcg were administered intramuscularly, as well as, misoprostol 800mg vaginally. A hysterectomy was performed due to the rate of bleeding and the evident haemodynamic instability.

Coagulation studies: platelets 27 x 109/L, INR 1.4, APTT 101.8 seconds, APTT ratio 3.6 and fibrinogen 1g/L.

A further 4 units of blood, 4 units of FFP, 1 pool of platelets and 2 units of cryoprecipitate were transfused. Factor VII was also administered on advice from the Haematologist.

An internal jugular central venous catheter was inserted and a noradrenaline infusion started. Initial attempts to insert an arterial cannula were unsuccessful as peripheral pulses were difficult to palpate. Venous blood gas readings revealed hyperkalaemia (K+ 6.4mmol/L) which was treated with sodium bicarbonate, 10mls 10% calcium chloride and a continuous 50% dextrose and insulin infusion. Her abdomen was packed and percutaneous drains were inserted. Anaesthesia, close monitoring and resuscitation continued.

Ongoing output from drains prompted a third exploration after an hour. There was generalised oozing particularly around the bed of the resected ovary in the pouch of Douglas.

Coagulation profile: platelets 50 x 109/L, INR 1.4, APTT 89.6 seconds, APTT ratio 3.1 seconds, fibrinogen 1.4g/dL.

A further 10 units of blood, 3 pools of platelets, 5 units of FFP and 3 units of cryoprecipitate were transfused. Sequential coagulation profiles and thromboelastography were used to guide transfusion.

During this exploration, ECG revealed a broad complex tachycardia with no palpable pulse confirming cardiac arrest likely secondary to hypovolaemia and/or hyperkalaemia. Return of spontaneous circulation was achieved after 3 cycles of continuous cardiac massage, 4 direct current shocks and adrenaline 1mg.

A femoral artery cut-down was performed and arterial cannula was inserted by a general surgeon. IABP monitoring commenced.

A fourth exploration was carried out around two hours later for ongoing blood loss. Again only generalised oozing was noted particularly from the oophrectomy site. Her abdomen was re-packed.

Coagulation profile: haemoglobin 7.4g/dL, INR 1.2, APTT 48.9 seconds, APTT ratio 1.7, fibrinogen 1.9g/dL, platelets 94 x 109/L.

She was transferred to the ICU eight hours from the start of the primary operation. Estimated total blood loss was 13,200mls. Transfusions continued and her abdomen was closed two days later. She received haemofiltration therapy for acute kidney injury. She recovered to her premorbid level with no neurological deficit before being discharged with her baby a few weeks later. In total, she was transfused 64 units of blood, 35 units of FFP, 10 pools of platelets and 11 units of cryoprecipitate. Histology of the ovarian mass revealed high grade clear cell carcinoma for which she received chemotherapy but unfortunately she died two years later.

Discussion

The association between cancer and thromboembolism has been well established for many decades.1Ovarian cancer patients have one of the highest incidences of VTE amongst cancer patients, particularly clear cell carcinoma (CCC). One study found the incidence of thromboembolic complications to be significantly higher in CCC when compared with other epithelial types of ovarian cancer (27.3% vs 6.8%).2

The pathological mechanism behind the hypercoaguable state induced in ovarian cancer patients appears to be largely multi-faceted. A variety of procoagulant subtances may be involved. Of particular interest is tissue factor (TF), a potent procoagulant found in endothelial and blood cells, as well as, in tumour cells. TF may play an important role in this hypercoaguable state through activation of the coagulation cascade.3 TF is frequently over-expressed in ovarian cancer tissue and there is research suggesting it influences tumour progression.3,4

A hyperviscosity syndrome may also be seen in association with ovarian cancer which favours thrombosis and may accelerate tumour progression and metastasis.DVT is a recognised complicating factor of ovarian cancer which may adversely affect the course of the disease possibly as a component of this hyperviscosity syndrome5,6 Ovarian cancer patients are also vulnerable to developing cerebrovascular complications and carry a higher risk of developing ischaemic strokes which has a significant impact on morbidity and mortality.7

The hypercoagulable state seen in cancer patients can have a spectrum of manifestations that ranges from DIC to massive thromboembolism. DIC in these instances is usually chronic and subclinical.8

The degree of coagulopathy which was seen in this case could not be attributed solely to dilutional effects incurred through fluid resuscitation. Instead we propose the acute severe coagulopathy was a consequence of procoagulant factors inherent to neoplastic tissue, including TF, which were suddenly released into the circulation following rupture and surgery to the ovarian tumour. The overall result would be widespread activation of the clotting cascade and a consumptive coagulopathy.

This case aims to increase awareness of a refractory coagulopathy which may be seen following rupture and/or surgical resection of a malignant ovarian tumour. The presence of an ovarian cyst especially in conjunction with evidence of vascular thrombosis in pregnancy should raise suspicion for an ovarian malignancy and hence vigilance for this potential complication. Anticipation of such a severe coagulopathy and associated significant blood loss should pre-empt early establishment of invasive monitoring, ample intravenous access and ensuring quick access to blood and blood products. Bedside coagulation tests such as thromboelastography are useful guides to blood product transfusion.9 Prompt mobilisation of resources, multi-disciplinary input and effective team work were crucial factors which facilitated the management of this case.

Acute, severe DIC associated with ovarian intratumoural bleed which resolves following resection of the tumour has been reported previously.10 This is the first case to the best of our knowledge occurring following ovarian cancer torsion and rupture during pregnancy.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Acknowledgement: 
Dr Niroshoni Rathnasiri for her role in information gathering.
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
JOELLE WILLIAMS(MBBS), Basildon Hospital, Nethermayne, Basildon, Essex, SS16 5NL, United Kingdom. AMAJU IKOMI(MSc FRCOG),Basildon Hospital, Nethermayne, Basildon, Essex, SS16 5NL, United Kingdom. CHANAKA KARUNARATNE (FRCA),Basildon Hospital, Nethermayne, Basildon, Essex, SS16 5NL, United Kingdom. PREETHI ANGALA(FRCOG), Basildon Hospital, Nethermayne, Basildon, Essex, SS16 5NL, United Kingdom.
Corresponding Author Details: 
JOELLE WILLIAMS, Basildon Hospital, Nethermayne, Basildon, Essex, SS16 5NL, United Kingdom.
Corresponding Author Email: 
joellesw011@gmail.com
References
References: 
  1. Trousseau A. Clinique Médicale de l'Hôtel-Dieu de Paris. Paris: Bailliere et Fils. 1865; 654-712
  2. Matsuura Y, Roberston G, Marsden D, et al. Thromboembolic complications in patients with clear cell carcinoma of the ovary. Gynecol Oncol. 2007;104(2):406-10
  3. Uno K, Homma S, Satoh T, et al. Tissue factor expression as a possible determinant of thromboembolism in ovarian cancer. Br J Cancer. 2007; 96:290–295
  4. Zhang Y, Deng Y, Luther T, et al. Tissue factor controls the balance of angiogenic and antiangiogenic properties of tumor cells in mice. J Clin Invest. 1994; 3:1320-1327
  5. Sorensen HT, Mellemkjær L, Olsen JH, et al. Prognosis of cancers associated with venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med. 2000; 343:1846-1850
  6. Von Templehoff GF, Nieman F, Heilmann L, et al. Association between blood rheology, thrombosis and cancer survival in patients with gynecologic malignancy. Clin Hemorheol Microcirc. 2000;22:107-130
  7. Kuan A, Teng C, Wu H, et al. Risk of ischemic stroke in patients with ovarian cancer: a nationwide population-based study. BMC Medicine. 2014;12:53 
  8. Caine GJ, Stonelakey PS, Lip, et al. The Hypercoagulable State of Malignancy: Pathogenesis and Current Debate. Neoplasia. 2002;6:465-473.
  9. Trapani L. Thromboelastography: Current Applications, Future Directions. O J Anaes. 2013; 3(1):23-27.
  10. Matsushita H, Kurabayashi T, Tomita M, et al. Disseminated Intravascular Coagulation associated with Intratumoral Haemorrhage of Ovarian Cancer. Gynecol Obstet Invest. 2001; 51:274-276.

BJMP March 2014 Volume 7 Number 1

BJMP March 2014 Volume 7 Number 1

Full Issue Booklet   PDF

Review Articles

Case Reports/Series
Medical Images
Photo Quiz: Palatal swelling with pain
Segun Adeoye, Sylvester Sarfraz and Kiranmayi Korimerla
Full Text  PDF
Miscellaneous

Winners Vs. Losers: Are the Patients the Real Winners in this Game?

Authors
Juan S. Barajas-Gamboa
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2014;7(1):a710

It cannot be denied that healthcare services have become an attractive business for any party involved, whether it be government, insurance companies, hospitals and doctors, to look out for their own interest and leave aside the real priority of this system – the patients’ healthcare and welfare.1

Recent proposed changes in the health system (i.e. healthcare reform) have commanded the attention of all people involved. If nothing else, it has provided an avenue in which each detail can be scrutinized and assessed. And, ultimately, it can be used to optimize the balance of clinical outcomes with resource requirements.

As expected, each guild has its own theories and proposals for improving the delivery of care. However, coming to a consensus will be a difficult task given the economic interests at stake. It should be obvious that the most important guild affected by the changes is the guild formed by patients.2

From the physician’s point of view, achieving optimal patient care has become more difficult. In part, this is due to how the government has chosen to assess and improve the delivery of healthcare services, which is by implementing patient surveys to assess the quality of care and level of satisfaction. Basically, the government has hired private companies to prepare and distribute these assessments. Based on the results of these surveys, the government will allocate various economic resources. As a strategy to face these measures, hospitals have established annual incentive plans to motivate doctors to get good scores in patient satisfaction surveys, including offering higher salaries and compensations.2-3

This impasse pushes the system to operate in an inappropriate manner. For example, hospitals and physicians have increased the number of diagnostic tests, surgical interventions, use of medications, and number of hospitalizations with the sole purpose of making their patients happier. By showing more interest in their patients’ diseases, the hospital and physicians expect to get better scores on the surveys. However, this excess of interventions and expenses does not always ensure the best clinical outcomes. Instead, increased monetary investments can directly affect the finances of the health system.3-4

Currently, 66% of physicians are sheltered under an annual incentive plan; this leads to the idea that "more satisfaction of patients = higher salary.” Many authors consider this to be the silent murderer of the healthcare system since it does not guarantee increased patient satisfaction but it surely guarantees high monetary investment strategies.5

There are two key questions to address as a result of the problems generated by the survey results: How reliable are these surveys? Must we, as healthcare providers, modify our daily clinical practice based on these results? To start, I should mention that from my perspective as a physician, I do not agree that wage benefits and salaries of medical staff should be defined based on these results. More importantly, it should not determine the amount of money provided by the government to the health system and as aid to hospitals.5

Up to today, many scientific studies have been conducted to determine the impact of these assessments on the quality of the service in terms of clinical outcomes and patient satisfaction. The findings are controversial because some studies support the hypothesis that there is direct relationship between the scores of the surveys and the quality of healthcare services provided to patients. However, other studies have shown opposite results. There are some key points to be considered to reach a more objective conclusion regarding the implementation of these evaluation systems for medical staff and hospitals.2-4

There are many factors involved in each patient's experience that can affect the general opinion on the quality of his or her medical treatment and how satisfied he or she was with the treatment. Many observers argue that the number of treatments directly correlates with a better perception of the quality of patient care, regardless of the final outcome of the disease. On the other hand, some authors argue that there is a direct relationship between the expected and actual results achieved, thus fulfilling levels of patient expectations.

Based on this relationship, patients judge the effectiveness of physicians and medical staff according to their levels of satisfaction. However, it should be noted that patients receiving a greater number of interventions and treatments do not always get maximum level of satisfaction in spite of all the effort from the physicians and their teams. In fact, better results have been found on surveys when patients are encouraged to take the leadership of their medical treatment. This leads to better clinical outcomes and a reduction of resources used.

Other factors that may influence the assessment outcomes are: the number of events evaluated per patient (since many of them are chronic patients and have different experiences to be evaluated), the number of physicians involved in the patient care (i.e. different specialties working together), the time between medical care, and the evaluation of that care.3

Despite the variety of studies available in this particular area of knowledge, there is no clear definition of patient satisfaction in healthcare. In turn, many authors are concerned with the patients’ lack of medical knowledge. Therefore, if they receive negative patient comments, they cannot adequately judge and modify their medical practice.

In conclusion, the government must design healthcare reform strategies with all parties in mind. The ultimate goal of these strategies should be to safeguard the healthcare and welfare of patients, not to implement controversial evaluation systems that create conflicts within the system and ultimately lead to detrimental changes in physicians’ clinical practices.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Acknowledgement: 
None
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
Juan S. Barajas-Gamboa, MD, University of California, San Diego School of Medicine, 9500 Gilman Dr, 92093, La Jolla, California, United States.
Corresponding Author Details: 
Juan S. Barajas-Gamboa, MD, University of California, San Diego School of Medicine, 9500 Gilman Dr, 92093, La Jolla, California, United States.
Corresponding Author Email: 
jbarajasgamboa@gmail.com
References
References: 
  1. Fu AZ, Wang N. Healthcare expenditures and patient satisfaction: cost and quality from the consumer's perspective in the US. Curr Med Res Opin. 2008 May;24(5):1385-94. doi: 10.1185/030079908X291994 . Epub 2008 Apr 2.
  2. Fenton JJ, Jerant AF, Bertakis KD et al. The cost of satisfaction: a national study of patient satisfaction, health care utilization, expenditures, and mortality. Arch Intern Med. 2012 Mar 12;172(5):405-11. doi: 10.1001/archinternmed.2011.1662. Epub 2012 Feb 13.
  3. Manary MP, Boulding W, Staelin R et al. The patient experience and health outcomes. N Engl J Med. 2013 Jan 17;368(3):201-3. doi: 10.1056/NEJMp1211775. Epub 2012 Dec 26.
  4. Jha AK, Orav EJ, Zheng J, et al. Patients' perception of hospital care in the United States. N Engl J Med. 2008 Oct 30;359(18):1921-31. doi: 10.1056/NEJMsa0804116.
  5. Falkenberg K. Why Rating Your Doctor Is Bad For Your Health.Forbes. (2013, Jan 21). Retrieved from http://www.forbes.com/sites/kaifalkenberg/2013/01/02/why-rating-your-doctor-is-bad-for-your-health

“Of the depression" - A Poem by Dr Javed Latoo

 

Cite this as: BJMP 2014;7(1):a709

 

When aquamarine sky looks grey to our eyes
  And golden rays of sunlight disappear from the skies.
When stars no longer adorn the heavens or shine bright
  And silver moon looks like a phantom of the night.
 
When we feel imprisoned in a dark place,
  Sorrowful eyes stare into a cold empty space.
When dazzling beauty looks like an old wrinkled face,
  Oblivious of the loved ones, their beauty and grace.
 
When we feel abandoned by the angel of sleep,
  Soul is drained, our eyes are eager to weep.
When our favourite food loses all its allure,
  Foggy brain cannot concentrate anymore.
 
When our mind tricks us to believe we are worthless,
  All consolations about the future seem fruitless.
When our heart is eaten by guilt over the trivialness,
  Soul is overwhelmed by stabbing hopelessness. 
 
When our mind ruminates about the days of yore,
  Life seems devoid of vigour, shine and decor. 
When reassurance fails to dampen our agitation
  And thoughts of optimism are replaced by suicidal ideation.
 
When we are in such a dark place of despair,
  Remember, It is a condition called Depression. Beware, 
It is a transitory phase, not an everlasting snare, 
  And help is available from the experts who care.
 
 
Competing Interests
None declared
Author Details
JAVED LATOO MBBS DPM MRCPsych, Consultant Psychiatrist and Honorary Lecturer, 5 Borough Partnership NHS Foundation Trust, Warrington, United Kingdom.
CORRESSPONDENCE: Dr JAVED LATOO MBBS, Consultant Psychiatrist, 5 Borough Partnership NHS Foundation Trust, Hollins Park, Hollins Lane, Warrington, United Kingdom.
Email: javedlatoo@gmail.com

Physical activity after cancer: An evidence review of the international literature

Authors
Robert James Thomas, Mea Holm and Ali Al-Adhami
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2014;7(1):a708
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

The importance of physical activity during and after cancer treatments is now being appreciated, as emerging evidence suggests that it improves several common side-effects of cancer treatments, as well as correlating with improving overall survival and reduced the probability of relapse. The biological mechanisms through which these benefits are achieved may include effects on cell growth regulatory pathways, levels of hormones, gene expression patterns and tumour immunity. Here we review the evidence for the benefits of exercise during and after cancer, discuss the possible underlying biological mechanisms, and suggest ways in which this knowledge may be used to improve mainstream care of cancer patients.

Keywords: 
Exercise, cancer, survival, side effects.

Introduction

The number of individuals surviving cancer is expected to rise by one-third according to estimates from the American Cancer Society and the National Cancer Institute1. This means that in the UK over 3 million individuals, and in the USA over 18 million individuals, will be living with the consequences of cancer by 2,022. The increase in the number of survivors is attributed to earlier diagnosis, an aging population, better cure rates and more effective systemic therapies to keep patients with metastatic disease alive for longer. To achieve these benefits, patients often have to endure more complex and arduous therapies, frequently leaving them beleaguered with acute and long-term adverse effects. In addition to being unpleasant, these adverse effects result in financial implications for patients and their families, as well as resulting in a greater usage of health resources.

Although the importance of exercise is beginning to be recognised by health professionals, advocacy groups and charities, it still remains an under-utilised resource. This article highlights the evidence that a physically active lifestyle and formal exercise programmes can help relieve many of the common concerns and adverse effects which plague individuals in the cancer survivorship period.

Physical activity improves well-being after cancer

Dozens of interventional studies have tested the feasibility and potential benefits of exercise in cancer survivors2,3,4. Recent meta-analyses of randomised trials involving exercise interventions after cancer, encouragingly demonstrate that the benefits of exercise spanned across several common cancer types and following a range of treatments including surgery, radiotherapy, chemotherapy, hormones and even the newer biological therapies. The most recent meta-analysis of 34 randomised trials published in the BMJ in 2012 involving patients exercising after cancer, demonstrated a benefit for a number of troublesome symptoms particularly fatigue, mood, anxiety and depression; muscle power, hand grip, exercise capacity and quality of life5.

The American College of Sports Medicine also published a comprehensive review of exercise intervention studies in cancer populations which included data from 85 RCT’s of exercise in cancer survivors. Evidence consistently demonstrated that exercise could be performed safely in adjuvant and post-treatment settings. Exercise led to significant improvements in aerobic fitness; increased flexibility and strength; quality of life; anxiety and depression; fatigue, body image, size and composition4.

The individual categories of symptoms which commonly afflict cancer survivors are now discussed in more detail:

Cancer related fatigue (CRF) is one of the most distressing symptoms experienced by patients during and after their anti-cancer therapies. It is reported by 60-96% of patients during chemotherapy, radiotherapy or after surgery, and by up to 40% of patients taking long-term therapies such as hormonal or biological therapies6. The first step to treating CRF is to correct, if possible, any medical conditions that may aggravate it, such as anaemia, electrolyte imbalance, liver failure and nocturia; or to eliminate drugs such as opiates, anti-histamines and anti-sickness medication7. The role of exercise was reviewed in 28 randomised, controlled trials (RCTs) involving 2083 participants in a variety of exercise programmes and showed that exercise improved CRF, although the benefit overall was small8. A second review of 18 RCTs involving 1,109 participants, sub-divided the data into types of exercise and demonstrated that supervised exercise programmes had the most impact on CRF9. Further meta-analyses and reviews have also showed that supervised exercise programmes had better results, with a greater reduction in CRF amongst breast cancer survivors assigned to exercise programmes compared to home-based programmes4,5,8,10.

Psychological distress, including anxiety and depression, is common after cancer with reported prevalence rates of 25-30%11. Patients with psychological distress have also been shown to have reduced survival compared to those who are psychologically healthy12. Exercise may help alleviate this symptom and improve mood, as a number of observational studies have shown that cancer patients who exercise have reduced levels of depression and anxiety, better self-esteem and are happier, especially if they involve group activities13. The recent meta-analyses of RCTs also demonstrated a reduction in anxiety and depression among individuals assigned to exercise programmes4,5.

Quality of life (QOL) is lower in many cancer sufferers and survivors, linked to other physical and psychological symptoms of cancer and its’ treatment. Meta-analyses of studies of exercise intervention programmes have demonstrated an improvement of QOL at all stages of the illness for the common cancer types and following several types of treatment4,5. For example, in a study involving 1,966 patients with colorectal cancer, patients achieving at least 150 minutes of physical activity per week had an 18% higher QOL score than those who reported no physical activity, as measured by the QOL FACT-C14. Another study showed similar benefits for breast cancer survivors who had completed surgery, radiotherapy or chemotherapy, and also demonstrated that change in peak oxygen consumption correlated with change in overall QOL15.

Weight gain:45% of women with breast cancer report significant weight gain16, and in a study of 440 prostate cancer survivors, 53% were overweight or obese17. For patients with bowel cancer, the CALBG 8980 trial showed that 35% of patients post-chemotherapy were overweight (BMI 25.0–29.9), and 34% were obese (BMI 30.0–34.9) or very obese (BMI >35)16. The reasons for this are multifactorial, but may include other symptoms of cancer treatment such as fatigue and nausea, causing patients to stop exercising. Regardless of the reasons for weight gain, numerous reviews and a comprehensive meta-analysis of the published literature have demonstrated that individuals who gain weight after cancer treatments have worse survival and more complications18. Fortunately, supervised exercise programmes have been shown to reduce weight and have significant other benefits on body constitution and fitness, such as improved lean mass indices, bone mineral density, cardiopulmonary function, muscle strength and walking distance18,19.

Bone mineral density (BMD): Pre-menopausal women who have had breast cancer treatment are at increased risk of osteoporosis, caused by reduced levels of oestrogen brought on by a premature menopause due to chemotherapy, surgery or hormones. Men who receive hormone deprivation therapy for prostate cancer are also at an increased risk of developing osteoporosis. Accelerated bone loss has also been reported for many other cancers, including testicular, thyroid, gastric and CNS cancers, as well as non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma and various haematological malignant diseases20,21. Lifestyle factors linked to an increase in the risk for developing osteoporosis include a low calcium and vitamin D intake, a diet low in plant-based protein, lack of physical activity, smoking and excessive alcohol intake22. A number of studies have linked regular physical activity with a reduction in the risk of bone mineral loss. Sixty six women with breast cancer were randomized to a control group or an exercise programme. The rate of decline of BMD was -6.23% in the control group, -4.92% in the resistance exercise group, and -0.76% in the aerobic exercise group. The statistically significant benefit was even greater in pre-menopausal women23. In another RCT of 223 women with breast cancer, it was found that exercise, over 30 minutes 4-7 times a week, helped preserve bone mineral density even when bisphosphonates (risedronate), calcium and vitamin D had already been prescribed24.

Thromboembolism: Those with pelvic involvement, recent surgery and immobility, previous history of varicose veins or thrombosis or receiving chemotherapy, are at higher risk25. Although strategies such as compression stockings, warfarin and low molecular weight heparin are essential, early mobilisation and exercise remains a practical additional aid in reducing this life-threatening complication18,26.

Constipation caused by immobility, opiate analgesics or anti-emetics during chemotherapy is a significant patient concern. Exercise reduces bowel transit time, and ameliorates constipation and its’ associated abdominal cramps26.

Physical activity improves survival and reduces relapse

In addition to improving the side effects of treatment for cancer, regular physical activity during and after cancer appears to improve overall survival and reduces the probability of relapse. One of the most convincing studies was an RCT in which 2,437 post-menopausal women with early breast cancer were randomised to nutritional and exercise counselling, or no counselling, as part of routine follow-ups19. In the group receiving counselling, fewer women relapsed and overall survival was greater in the oestrogen-negative subgroup. In another RCT, men with early prostate cancer were randomised to an exercise and lifestyle intervention or standard active surveillance. The average PSA in the intervention group went down, whilst in the control group it went up27. This supports a previous RCT of which the primary end point evaluated a salicylate-based food supplement, but it required men in both arms to receive exercise and lifestyle counselling. Although there was no difference in the primary end point, 34% of men, who’s prostate specific antigen (PSA) was climbing before trial entry, stabilized28.

The majority of the other published evidence for a reduced relapse rate and improved survival after cancer originates from retrospective analysis or prospective cohort studies. The National Cancer Institute, in a recent meta-analysis, reviewed 45 of these observational studies. The strongest evidence was demonstrated for breast cancer survivors; the next strongest evidence was for colorectal cancer survivors, followed by prostate cancer10. The most notable are summarised below:

Breast cancer: The five most prominent prospective cohort studies (in aggregate more than 15,000 women), have examined the relationship between physical activity cancer and prognosis:

  • Irwin et al. (2008)29 investigated a cohort of 933 breast cancer survivors and found that those who consistently exercised for >2.5 hours per week had a 67% lower risk of all deaths compared to sedentary women.
  • Holmes et al. (2005)30 performed a separate evaluation of 2,987 women in the Nurses’ Health Study and found that women walking >3 hours a week had lower recurrence rates, and better overall survival.
  • Holick et al. (2008)31 performed a prospective observational study of 4,482 breast cancer survivors, and found that women who were physically active for >2.8 hours per week had a 35-49% lower risk of dying from breast cancer.
  • Pierce et al. (2007)32 found that the benefits of 3 hours of exercise were even greater if combined with a healthy diet.
  • Sternfeld et al. (2009)33 in the LACE study, evaluated 1,870 women within 39 months of diagnosis. There was a significant difference in overall death rate between the highest and lowest quartile of exercise levels.

Colorectal cancer: The scientific community eagerly awaits the results of the CHALLENGE RCT mentioned above, but a number of retrospective analyses of randomised chemotherapy and cohort trials have been published:

  • Haydon et al. (2006)34retrospectively analysed a RCT involving patients with stage III bowel cancer and found a significant association between exercise and a 31% reduction in relapse rate.
  • Giles et al. (2002)35found that of 526 patients recruited into the Australian Cohort Study, those participating in recreational sport 1-2 days per week had a 5 year overall survival of 71%, as opposed to 57% in non exercisers.
  • Meyerhardt et al. (2006)16 found in an analysis of the Intergroup CALGB study, that physically active patients with bowel cancer had 35% reduction in relapse rate in after chemotherapy.
  • Meyerhardt et al. (2009)36 analysed 668 patients with colorectal cancer within the Health Professionals Study. Men who exercised >27 vs. < 3METS-hours / week had a lower cancer-specific mortality.

Prostate cancer: Three cohort studies have demonstrated a survival benefit for physically active men with prostate cancer:

  • Kenfield et al. (2011)37performed a subset analysis of 2,686 men with prostate cancer, within the Health Professional Study, who exercised >30minutes per week or >3 MET-hours of total activity, had a 35% lower risk of overall death, and men who walked at a brisk pace for >90 minutes had a 51% lower risk of overall death.
  • Richman et al. (2011)38 reported that 1,455 men with prostate cancer, walking more than 3 hours a week, correlated with an improved survival but only if >3miles/hour.
  • Giavannucci (2005)39, within a prospective analysis, reported that men who exercised vigorously had a lower risk for fatal prostate cancer, although this effect was only seen for men over the age of 65.

Quantity and type of exercise recommended for cancer patients

For reduced cancer relapse and improved well-being, most of the cohort studies summarized above suggest moderate exercise of around 2.5 to 3 hours a week for breast cancer survivors. However, for prostate cancer survivors, mortality continues to decrease if the patient walks 4 or more hours per week, and more vigorous activity is also associated with significant further reductions in risk for all-cause mortality37. When the mode of exercise is primarily walking, a pace of at least 3 miles/hour (for >3 hours/week) is recommended for a reduced risk of relapse 38. Therefore, both the pace and duration of exercise affect the survival benefit achievable from exercise, with more vigorous activity generally having a greater benefit (see Table 1). The best results appear to be with programmes including a combination of aerobic and resistance exercises, particularly within a social group.

Table 1: Summary of exercise guidelines for cancer survivors

· Exercising for >3 hours/week has proven benefits for cancer survival
· A pace of at least 3 miles/hour when walking provides greater benefit than a slower pace
· For optimal benefit, exercise should consist of a combination of resistance and aerobic exercises
· Supervised exercise programmes have shown greater benefits for cancer survivors than home-based programmes

The precise amount of exercise has to be determined on an individual basis and depends on pre-treatment ability, current disability caused by the cancer itself or the treatment, as well as time proximity to major treatments. An exercise programme supervised by a trained professional has major advantages, as they can design a regimen which starts slowly and gradually builds up to an acceptable and enjoyable pace. In addition, they can help motivate the individual to continue exercising for the short and the long-term, and they can judge the optimal exercise levels to improve fatigue, and not aggravate it.

The underlying mechanisms of the potential anti-cancer effects of exercise

The body’s chemical environment significantly changes after exercise, best demonstrated in the Ornish study, which found that serum from prostate cancer patients who exercised, had an almost eight times greater inhibitory effect on the growth of cultured androgen dependent prostate cancer cells compared to serum from patients in the control group27. The precise chemical mechanism, which the anti-cancer effect remains incompletely understood, but one of the most likely mechanisms involving growth factors such as insulin-like growth factor (IGF-1) and its’ binding proteins insulin-like growth factor binding proteins (IGFBPs), due to the central role of these proteins in the regulation of cell growth (see Table 2). After binding to its receptor tyrosine kinase, IGF-1 activates several signalling pathways including the AKT pathway, leading to the inhibition of apoptosis and the promotion of cell growth and angiogenesis34,40,41. An inverse relationship of cancer risk with IGFBP3 levels has also been shown, although this effect has not been confirmed in all studies42. Exercise has been shown to increase the levels of IGFBP3, and this was associated with a 48% reduction of cancer-specific deaths in a large prospective cohort study of 41,528 participants43. Decreased levels for IGF-1 in physically active patients have been reported with an associated survival benefit44.

Table 2: Summary of the potential biochemical pathways of the anticancer effects of exercise

Class of Effector Molecule Effector Molecule Effects of Exercise on Effector Molecule

Cell growth regulators

IGF1 Decreased levels
IGFBP3 Increased levels

Proteins involved in DNA damage repair

BRCA1 Increased expression
BRCA2 Increased expression
Regulator of apoptosis and cell cycle arrest p53 Enhanced activity

Hormones

Oestrogen Decreased levels
Vasoactive intestinal protein (VIP) Decreased levels
Leptin Decreased levels (indirect)

Immune system components

NK cells Enhanced activity
Monocyte function Enhanced activity
Circulating granulocytes Increased proportion

Exercise has also been shown to have a large impact on gene expression, although the mechanisms through which the patterns of gene expression are affected remain to be determined. In a recent study of the mechanisms through which exercise impacts prostate cancer survival, it was found that 184 genes are differentially expressed between prostate cancer patients who engage in vigorous activity, and those who do not 37. Amongst the genes that were more highly expressed in men who exercise were BRCA1 and BRCA2, both of which are involved in DNA repair processes.

Another neuropeptide which changes after exercise is Vasoactive Intestinal Protein (VIP). Breast and prostate cancer patients have been found to have higher VIP titres compared to individuals who regularly exercise, and who have increased production of natural anti-VIP antibodies45. In hormone-related cancers such as cancers of the breast, ovaries, prostate and testes, the association between high levels of circulating sex hormones and cancer risk is well established46. Another mechanism through which exercise may affect cancer, is through decreasing the serum levels of these hormones. For breast cancer survivors, the link between exercise and lower levels of oestrogen has been shown13,34,47. An indirect, related mechanism is that exercise helps reduce adiposity, and adiposity in turn influences the production and availability of sex hormones48. In addition, greater adiposity leads to higher levels of Leptin, a neuropeptide cytokine with has cancer promoting properties49,50.

Other pathways include the modulation of immunity, such as improvements in NK cell cytolytic activity 11; the modulation of apoptotic pathways through impacting on a key regulator, p5351, and an exciting recent discovery, the messenger protein irisin, which is produced in muscle cells in response to exercise and is found is to be an important molecule in linking exercise to the health benefits52 , However, we are only beginning to scratch the surface with these and the other mechanisms discussed here, and much more research needs to be done to in this area.

Incorporating exercise into mainstream cancer management

The challenge for health professionals is how to encourage and motivate individuals with cancer to increase their exercise levels. Some, of course, are motivated to increase physical activity or remain active after cancer. However, a recent survey of 440 men with prostate cancer found that only 4% of patients exercised for more than the 3 hours a week recommended by the WCRF17. Macmillan Cancer Relief has produced a series of helpful booklets and web-based patient information materials designed to inform and motivate individuals to exercise as part of its ‘Move More’programme. The Cancernet website has a facility to search for local exercise facilities by postcode, which can be an aid for health professionals when counselling patients. It highlights activities that men will hopefully find feasible and enjoyable such as golf, exercise groups and walking groups, and are encouraged to attend in addition to work place activity and gardening.

Several pilot schemes have been started throughout the UK with the aim to incorporate exercise programmes into standard oncology practice. The difficulty with small schemes is that they tend to be poorly funded, often poorly attended and are unlikely to be sustainable in the longer term. Many agree that the gold standard model would be similar to the cardiac rehabilitation programme53. This would involve a hospital scheme run by a physiotherapist or an occupational therapist, supervising patients immediately after surgery, radiotherapy and even during chemotherapy. This is followed by refering the patient to a community-based scheme for the longer term. Unfortunately, this type of scheme is expensive and unlikely to be funded at present, despite the obvious savings by preventing patient relapsing and ultilising health care facilities to help late effects of cancer treatment54. However, expanding existing services, such as the National Exercise Referral Scheme, is a practical solution. The National Exercise Referral Scheme exists for other chronic conditions such as cardiac rehabilitation, obesity and lower back pain. The national standards for the scheme to be expanded to include cancer rehabilitation were written and accepted in 2010. Training providers have now developed training courses for exercise professionals set against these standards. Trainers completing the course gain a Register of Exercise Professionals (REPs) Level Four qualification, allowing them to receive referrals from GPs and other health professionals.

Conclusion

There are a wealth of well-conducted studies which have demonstrated an association between regular exercise and lower risk of side effects after cancer, as well as reasonable prospective data for a lower relapse rates and better overall survival. However, as there are several overlapping lifestyle factors, which are difficult to investigate on their own, there remain some concerns that exercisers may do better in these studies because they are less likely to be over-weight, more likely to have better diets and to be non-smokers. Although the existing RCTs provide encouraging evidence that exercise intervention programmes are beneficial, further large RCTs are needed, particularly in terms of cost-effectiveness, before commissioner’s start investing more in this area.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
ROBERT THOMAS, MRCP MD FRCR, CONSULTANT ONCOLOGIST, Bedford Hospital and Addenbrooke’s University Hospital, c/o The Primrose Research Unit, Bedford Hospital, Kempston Road, Bedford. MK42 9DJ. United Kingdom. MEA HOLM, MSc, STUDENT c/o The Primrose Research Unit, Bedford Hospital, Kempston Road, Bedford. MK42 9DJ. United Kingdom. ALI AL-ADHAMI, MBChB MACP, CLINICAL RESEARCH FELLOW, University of Buckingham and the Lister Hospital, Coreys Mill Lane, Stevenage, Hertfordshire. SG1 4AB. United Kingdom.
Corresponding Author Details: 
ROBERT THOMAS, The Primrose Oncology Unit, Bedford Hospital, Kempston Road, Bedford. MK42 9DJ. UK
Corresponding Author Email: 
robert.thomas@bedfordhospital.nhs.uk
References
References: 
  1. American Cancer Society (ACS); Cancer treatment & survivorship facts & figures 2012-2013. Available from: www.cancer.org/Research/CancerFactsFigures/index.
  2. Markes M, Brockow T, Resch K (2006): Exercise for women receiving adjuvant therapy for breast cancer.Cochrane Database of systemic reviews: art no.CD005001. Doi 10.1002/14651858.CD005001.pub2.;
  3. McNeeley M, Campbell K, Rowe B et al (2006) Effects of exercise on breast cancer patients and survivours: A systemic review and meta-analysis. Canadian Medical Association Journal 175:34-41.
  4. Schmitz KH, Courneya KS, Matthews C et al. (2010) American College of Sports Medicine roundtable on exercise guidelines for cancer survivours. Med Sci Sports Exercise 42: 1409-26
  5. Fong DYT, Ho JWT, Hui BPH, et al.; Physical activity for cancer survivors: meta-analysis of randomised Controlled Trials. Br Med J 2012; 344: e70.
  6. Wagner LI, Cella D.; Fatigue and cancer: causes, prevalence and treatment approaches. Brit J Cancer 2004; 91: 822-828.
  7. Thomas R; Anaemia fatigue and epoeitin in oncology. British Journal of Cancer Management 2005; 2(4): 12-15.
  8. Cramp F, Daniel J; Exercise for the management of cancer-related fatigue in adults. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2008; 2: CD006145.
  9. Velthuis MJ, Agasi-Idenburg SC, Aufdemkampe G, et al.; The effect of physical exercise on cancer-related fatigue during cancer treatment: A meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials. Clin Oncol 2010; 2(3): 208-221.
  10. Ballard-Barbash R, Friedenreich CM, Courneya KS, et al.; Physical Activity, Biomarkers, and Disease Outcomes in Cancer Survivors: A Systematic Review. J Natl Cancer Inst 2012; 104(11): 815-840.
  11. Drouin JS, Armstrong H, Krause S, et al.; Effects of aerobic exercise training on peak aerobic capacity, fatigue, and psychological factors during radiation for breast cancer. Rehabil Oncol 2005; 23: 11­17.
  12. Kadan-Lottick NS, Venderwerker LC, Block SD, et al.; Psychiatric disorders and mental health service use in patients with advanced cancer. Cancer 2005; 104(12): 2872-2881.
  13. Mock V, Picket M, Ropka ME, et al.; Fatigue and quality of life outcomes of exercise during cancer treatment. Cancer Pract. 2001; 9(3): 119-127.
  14. Lynch B, Cerin E, Owen N, et al.; Prospective relationships of physical activity with quality of life among colorectal cancer survivors. J Clin Oncol 2008; 26(27): 4480-4487.
  15. Courneya KS, Segal RJ, Mackey JR, et al.; Effects of aerobic and resistance exercise in breast cancer patients receiving adjuvant chemotherapy: A multicenter randomized controlled trial. J Clin Oncol 2007; 25(28): 4396-4404.
  16. Meyerhardt JA, Heseltine D, Niedzwiecki D, et al.; The impact of physical activity on patients with stage III colon cancer: Findings from Intergroup trial CALGB 89803. J Clin Oncol 2006; 24(22): 3535-3341.
  17. Thomas R, Holm MM, Williams M, et al.; Lifestyle habits during and after prostatic radiotherapy influences the risk of late toxicity. 7th NCRI Cancer Conference; 2011; Liverpool, UK. (full paper in print Clinical Oncology for 2013).
  18. Knols R, Aaronson NK, Uebelhart D, et al.; Physical exercise in cancer patients during and after medical treatment: A systemic review of randomized controlled trials. J Clin Oncol 2005; 23(16): 3830-3842.
  19. Chlebowski R, Aiello E, McTiernan A; Weight loss in breast cancer patient management. J Clin Oncol 2002; 20(4): 1128-1143.
  20. Brown JK, Byers T, Doyle C, et al.; Diet and physical activity during and after cancer treatment: An American cancer society guide for informed choices. CA Cancer J Clin 2003; 53(5): 268-291
  21. Saad F, Adachi JD, Brown JP et al. Cancer Treatment – Induced Bone Loss in Breast Cancer and Prostate Cancer. J Clin Oncol 2008;26:5465-76.
  22. Weikert C, Hoffmann K, Dierkes J, et al.; Homocysteine metabolism related dietary pattern and the risk of coronary heart disease in two independent German study populations. J Nutr 2005; 135: 1981–1988.
  23. Waltman NL, Twiss JJ, Ott CD, et al.; The effect of weight training on bone mineral density and bone turnover in postmenopausal breast cancer survivors with bone loss: A 24-month randomized controlled trial. Osteoporos Int 2010; 21(8): 1361-1369.
  24. Schwartz AL, Winters-Stone K, Gallucci B.; Exercise effects on bone mineral density in women with breast cancer receiving adjuvant chemotherapy. Oncol Nurs Forum 2007; 34(3): 627-633.
  25. Galster H, Kolb G, Kohsytorz A, et al.; The pre-, peri-, and postsurgical activation of coagulation and the thromboembolic risk for different risk groups. Thromb Res 2000; 100(5): 381-388.
  26. Davis N, Bateman L, Thomas R Exercise and lifestyle after cancer – evidence review 2011 British Journal of Cancer vol 105 pp 52-73.
  27. Ornish D, Weidner G, Fair WR, et al.; Intensive lifestyle changes may affect the progression of prostate cancer. J Urol 2005; 174: 1065-1070.
  28. Thomas R, Blades M, Williams M. Can dietary and lifestyle intervention alter prostate cancer progression 2007.. Nutrition & Food Science, 2007 vol 37, no.1 pp 24-36.
  29. Irwin ML, Wilder Smith A, McTiernan A, et al.; Influence of Pre- and Postdiagnosis Physical Activity on Mortality in Breast Cancer Survivors: The Health, Eating, Activity, and Lifestyle Study. J Clin Oncol 2008; 26(24): 3958-3964.
  30. Holmes M, Chen WY, Feskanich D, et al.; Physical activity and survival after breast cancer diagnosis. JAMA 2005; 293: 2479-2486.
  31. Holick C, Newcomb PA, Trentham-Dietz A, et al.; Physical Activity and Survival after Diagnosis of Invasive Breast Cancer. Cancer Epidemiological Biomarkers Prev 2008; 17: 379-386.
  32. Pierce JP, Natarajan L, Caan BJ; Influence of a diet very high in vegetables, fruit, and fiber and low in fat on prognosis following treatment for breast cancer. JAMA. 2007 Jul 18;298(3):289-98.
  33. Sternfeld B, Gunderson E;Life After Cancer Epidemiology (LACE) Study: a cohort of early stage breast cancer survivors (United States). Cancer Causes Control. 2005 Jun;16(5):545-56.
  34. Haydon AM, McInnis RJ, English DR, et al.; The effect of physical activity and body size on survival after diagnosis with colorectal cancer. Gut 2006; 55(1): 62-67.
  35. Giles GG, English DR. The Melbourne Collaborative Cohort Study IARC Sci Publ, 2002. 156: p. 69-70.
  36. Meyerhardt LA, Giovannucci EL, Ogino S et al. (2009) Physical activity and male colorectal cancer survival. Arch Intern Med 169:2102-8.
  37. Kenfield SA, Stampfer MJ, Giovannucci E, et al.; Physical Activity and Survival After Prostate Cancer Diagnosis in the Health Professionals Follow-Up Study. J Clin Oncol 2011; 29(6): 726-732.
  38. Richman EL, Kenfield SA, Stampfer MJ, et al.; Physical Activity after Diagnosis and Risk of Prostate Cancer Progression: Data from the Cancer of the Prostate Strategic Urologic Research Endeavor. Cancer Res 2011; 71(11): 1-7.
  39. Giavannucci EL, Liu Y, Leitzmann MF, et al.; A prospective study of physical activity and incident and fatal prostate cancer. Arch Intern Med. 2005;165(9): 1005-1010.
  40. Palmqvist R, Halmans G, Rinaldi S, et al., Plasma insulin-like growth factor, insulin-like growth factor binding protein, and colorectal cancer: a prospective study in northern Sweden. Gut 2002; 50: 642-646.
  41. Yu H, Rohan T; Role of the insulin-like growth factor family in cancer development and progression. J Natl Cancer Inst 2000; 92: 1472–1489.
  42. Ma J, Pollak MN, Giovannucci E, et al. Prospective study of colorectal cancer risk in men and plasma levels of insulin-like growth factor (IGF)-I and IGF-binding protein-3. J Natl Cancer Inst 1999; 91(7): 620-625.
  43. Haydon AM, McInnis RJ, English DR, et al.; Physical activity, insulin-like growth factor 1, insulin-like growth factor binding protein 3, and survival from colorectal cancer. Gut 2006; 55(5): 689-94.
  44. Irwin ML, Varma K, Alvarez-Reeves M, et al.; Randomized controlled trial of aerobic exercise on insulin and insulin-like growth factors in breast cancer survivors: the Yale Exercise and Survivorship study. Cancer Epidemiol Biomarkers Prev 2009; 18(1): 306-313.
  45. Velijkovic M, Branch DR, Dopsaj V et al Can Natural Antibodies to VIP facilitate prevention and supportive treatment of breast Cancer? Med Hypothesis 2011 77 (3) 404-8
  46. Kaaks R, Lukanova A; Effects of weight control and physical activity in cancer prevention: role of endogenous hormone metabolism. Ann NY Acad Sci 2002; 963: 268-281.
  47. Folkert E, Dowset M; Influence of sex hormones on cancer progression. J Clin Oncol 2010; 28(26): 4034-4044.
  48. Friedenreich CM, Woolcott CG, McTiernan A, et al.; Alberta physical activity and breast cancer prevention trial: Sex hormone changes in a year-long exercise intervention among postmenopausal women. J Clin Oncol 2010; 28(9): 1458-1466.
  49. Hoffmann-Goetz, Apter D, Demark-Wahnefried W, et al.; Possible mechanisms mediating an association between physical activity and breast cancer. Cancer 1998; 83(3): S621-S628.
  50. Surmacz E; Obesity hormone leptin; a new target for breast cancer? Breast Cancer Res 2007; 9(1): 301.
  51. Sharafi, Rahimi; The Effect of Resistance Exercise on p53, Caspase-9, and Caspase-3 in Trained and Untrained Men. J Strength & Cond Res 2012; 26(4): 1142–1148.
  52. BostrÖm P, Wu J, Jedrychowski MP, Korde A et al. Irisin induces brown fat of white adipose tissue in vivo and protects against diet-induced obesity and diabetes. Nature (2012) 481, 463-468 doi:10.1038/natutre10777.
  53. Jolliffe JA, Rees K, Taylor RS, et al.;Exercise-based rehabilitation for coronary heart disease, Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2003. Abstract available at: http://www.cochrane.org/colloquia/abstracts/ capetown/capetownPC01.html
  54. Thomas R, R Oakes, J Gordon, S Russell, M Blades and M Williams (2009) A randomised double-blind phase II study of lifestyle counselling and salicylate compounds in patients with progressive prostate cancer. (2009) Nutrition & Food Science, 39(3):295 – 305.

An unusual reaction to IV pethidine - A Case Report

Authors
Prakash Krishnan and Asquad Sultan
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2014;7(1):a707
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Pethidine is used in some centres for post operative rescue analgaesia, among other indications. We report an unusual and dramatic side effect from IV pethidine administration and its implications.

Abbreviations: 
ECG- electrocardiogram, BMI- body mass index, SSRI- selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors, MAO inhibitors- monoamine oxidase inhibitors, IV- intravenous, ASA- American Society of Anesthesiologists.
Keywords: 
Pethidine, Intravenous, Histamine, Adverse effect, Side effect

Case

A 41 year old female patient (ASA II) underwent an incision and drainage of her perianal abscess under a general anaesthetic as an urgent procedure. She was known to have anorexia nervosa and was under medical management for it. She had a BMI of 18.5. She also suffered from eczema and mild asthma. She gave a history of irregular heart rhythm in the past. She had a normal ECG and echocardiogram. She was on fluoxetine, salbutamol inhaler, beclometasone inhaler and ricatriptan. She had normal blood investigations prior to induction.

Her anaesthetic was induced with propofol and fentanyl and was maintained on oxygen/ air/ sevoflurane. She was on spontaneous ventilation through a laryngeal mask. She also received paracetamol and ondansetron intraoperatively. She was haemodynamically stable during the twenty minute procedure, which was done in the lateral position.

The laryngeal mask came out ten minutes after her arrival in recovery. The patient asked for pain relief ten minutes after waking up. IV pethidine 25mg (diluted to 12.5 mg/ml) was given by the recovery nurse who, within five minutes, noted severe redness in the distribution of the vein into which it was injected (Figure 1). The anaesthetist was notified, who then flushed the IV line with normal saline. The redness settled down within 15-20 minutes of the start of the reaction ( Figure 2 to 4). The patient was haemodynamically stable and didn't complain of any local or systemic symptoms.

Discussion

Pethidine has been known to release histamine on systemic administration1. It can also have interactions with various drug groups like SSRIs and MAO inhibitors to cause serotonin syndrome2,3  and can present with tachycardia, hypertension, hyperthermia, agitation and even seizures, among other signs and symptoms. Pethidine is equipotent to morphine and codeine in terms of histamine release 4.

This case is most likely due to profound histamine release in a patient with atopic tendency. The factors thought to increase the incidence and severity of this reaction are 5:

  • Old age
  • Thin body structure
  • Poor peripheral circulation
  • Volar > dorsal veins
  • Repeated injection into the same superficial vein
  • High concentration of solution of injection (>10 mg/ml solution)

The factors that have no influence are:

  • Pretreatment with an antihistamine
  • History of previous pethidine use
  • Using pethidine as a premedication

In the past, diluting pethidine with 0.25% procaine also provided protection against the reaction.

There were no other signs of serotonin excess in this patient and she came to no harm. The presentation was dramatic enough to cause concern but was self-limiting.


Figure 1: Time - 0


Figure 2: Time - 5 min


Figure 3: Time - 10 min


Figure 4: Time - 20 min

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Acknowledgement: 
Chantelle Burley, Recovery nurse, Kettering General Hospital for her help in gathering information regarding this case.
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
PRAKASH KRISHNAN, FRCA, MD, Department of Anaesthetics And Critical Care, Kettering General Hospital, UK. ASQUAD SULTAN, FFARCSI, EDRA, Department of Anaesthetics And Critical Care, Kettering General Hospital, UK.
Corresponding Author Details: 
PRAKASH KRISHNAN, Department of Anaesthetics And Critical Care, Kettering General Hospital, NN16 8UZ, UK.
Corresponding Author Email: 
drprakash.krishnan.nhs@gmail.com
References
References: 
  1. Schachter M-The release of histamine by pethidine, atropine, quinine, and other drugs - Br J Pharmacol Chemother. 1952 December; 7(4): 646–654.
  2. BNF, Novemeber 2013
  3. Gillman P. K.-  Monoamine oxidase inhibitors, opioid analgesics and serotonin toxicity- British Journal of Anaesthesia 95 (4): 434–41 (2005)
  4. Grosman N - Histamine release from isolated rat mast cells: effect of morphine and related drugs and their interaction with compound 48/80- Agents Actions. 1981 May;11(3):196-203
  5. Argent DE, Dinnick OP- Pethidine phlebitis- Br Journal of Anaesthesia (1954) 26, 260

An aggressive follicular variant of papillary thyroid carcinoma with unusual metastases - A case report and review of literature

Authors
Isaac Sachmechi, Rachelle N Bitton, Susan Sanelli-Russo and Supat Thongpooswan
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2014;7(1):a705
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Metastatic carcinoma to the sinonasal tract is rare, by papillary thyroid cancer even rarer. We describe a 44-year old Hispanic woman with follicular variant papillary thyroid carcinoma treated with total thyroidectomy and post-surgery I 131 ablation. Post therapy, two consecutive body scans were negative and thyroglobulin level was less than 5 ng/ml. A year later, she presented with history of urinary retention and lower extremity weakness. A myelogram revealed block at T1-T2. Patient underwent laminectomy followed by external radiation. Pathology revealed metastatic follicular variant of papillary thyroid carcinoma. Total body scan post surgery was negative, and the thyroglobulin level was 5 ng/ml. Patient was maintained on thyroxine suppression therapy.

Two years later, patient started complaining of headaches and double vision. Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) was done and revealed a soft tissue mass in the sphenoid sinus, eroding the basi-sphenoid and extending into the nasopharynx. Biopsy was positive for metastatic papillary thyroid cancer, follicular variant. Pituitary function testing revealed TSH 0.1 mIU/ml, free T4 level 1.2 mIU/ml.  AM cortisol 5.3 mcg/dl, prolactin 182 ng/ml, ACTH 12 pg/ml, FSH 11.5 mIU/ml, LH 4.0 mIU/ml, and Estradiol 20 pg/ml.

Metastasis to the sphenoid sinus is rare from any tumour, and from papillary thyroid cancer is extremely rare. An extensive world literature review revealed only 4 cases of papillary thyroid carcinoma with spread to sphenoid sinus region. Of 12 case reports of thyroid carcinoma with spread to the sphenoid sinus, 6 were follicular thyroid carcinoma.  Generally, total body scan negative with low stimulated thyroglobulin is an excellent prognostic sign. Our patient demonstrates that we need to remain vigilant for the unusual tumour especially when the initial presentation showed a large lesion.

Abbreviations: 
MRI- Magnetic resonance imaging TSH- Thyroid stimulating hormone PET- positron emission tomography CT- computerized tomography
Keywords: 
papillary thyroid carcinoma, metastasis, sphenoid sinus

Introduction

Metastatic carcinoma to the sinonasal tract is rare. We describe a patient with an aggressive follicular variant of papillary thyroid carcinoma who presented with an unusual metastasis to sphenoid sinus.

Case report

A 44 year old Hispanic woman presented at Queens Hospital Center in June 1988 with airway obstruction and was found to have a 10x12 cm firm mass in the left thyroid lobe, and palpable left supraclavicular node. She had no prior history of radiation, and no family of thyroid cancer. She underwent a total thyroidectomy with a modified radical neck dissection. Pathology revealed a follicular variant of papillary thyroid carcinoma: non-tall cell variant. Six of fifty (6/50) lymph nodes were positive. Post-surgery, patient received Iodine-131 ablation therapy (93 mCi) and was placed on thyroid hormone suppressive therapy. Non-stimulated thyrogen total body scan a week after therapy was negative. Thyrogen was not available at that time.

The patient was non-compliant with thyroxine and thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH) was often elevated (13-80 mlU/ml). However, the serum thyroglobulin remained less than 5.0 ng/ml and antithyroglobulin antibody was negative. A repeat total body scan (with 5 mCi I131) 6 months later and 4 years later with thyroxin withdrawal (TSH 36 mIU/ml and 48 mIU/ml respectively) was negative, and patient was continued on thyroxine suppression therapy.

Five years after initial presentation, the patient developed urinary retention and lower extremity weakness. A myelogram revealed block at T1-T2. Patient underwent laminectomy. Pathology revealed metastatic follicular variant of papillary thyroid carcinoma. Since iodine containing contrast was used during the myelogram, I131 iodine therapy was not given. External radiation of 2000 CGY to C7-T5 was administered.

A total body scan 8 weeks post laminectomy (when 24 hour urine iodine < 100 microgram/litre, and TSH was 38 mIU/ml after thyroid hormone withdrawal) was negative, the thyroglobulin level was 5 ng/ml and negative antithyroglobulin antibody (at that period of time, positron emission tomography (PET) scan was not an available option). For the next 2 years of follow up, the patient was maintained on thyroxin suppression therapy, this time with good compliance (TSH 0.1 mIU/ml, thyroglobulin less than 5 ng/ml and negative antithyroglobulin antibody). She did not show up for follow up lumbar computerised tomography (CT).

Seven years after the initial presentation, she complained of headache and double vision, and a three month history of amenorrhea. The thyroglobulin at this time was elevated (20 ng/ml). Chest X-ray was positive for two nodules in the right lung. Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) revealed a soft tissue mass in the sphenoid sinus, eroding the basi-sphenoid and extending into the nasopharynx (Fig. 1 ABCD). The mass also eroded the sella floor displacing the pituitary gland upwards (arrows). Bone scan revealed focal abnormalities in the upper thoracic spine, ethmoid bones and base of the skull. At that period of time, PET scan was not an available option. Pituitary function testing revealed TSH 0.1 mIU/ml, free T4 level 1.2 mIU/ml.  AM cortisol 5.3 mcg/dl, prolactin 182 ng/ml, ACTH 12 pg/ml, FSH 11.5 mIU/ml, LH 4.0 mIU/ml, and Estradiol 20 pg/ml.


Figure 1
: A-T1 weighted midline sagittal MRI scan without contrast. B-T1 weighted midline sagittal MRI scan with contrast. C-T2 weighted axial MRI scan through the lesion. D-Axial CT scans without (on the left) and with (on the right) contrast. Note: The large destructive and enhancing lesion (*) in the sphenoid sinus associated with destruction of the basisphenoid, clivus and sellar floor. Note the normal pituitary gland (arrow) is displaced upwards out the sellaturcica.

Biopsy of the sphenoid sinus mass confirmed that it was metastatic papillary thyroid cancer, follicular variant. The tumour cell nuclear DNA was diploid and P53 and K167 were negative (Impat, NY). The patient was placed on hydrocortisone replacement and continued on thyroxine suppression therapy. Three months later the patient suffered a cardiorespiratory arrest and expired.

Discussion

Metastasis to the sphenoid sinus is rare from any tumour, and from papillary thyroid cancer it is extremely rare. An extensive world literature review revealed only 4 cases of spread to sphenoid sinus region from papillary thyroid cancer.1-4

Renal cell carcinoma is the most common tumour of paranasal sinus metastasis, 41.8%. The average age is 58 years, with slight predominance of males. The most common presentation was epistaxis, 31%. The most common causes of sphenoid metastasis are gastrointestinal and renal tumours5.

Von Eiselsberg et  al. in 1893 described one case of metastasising thyroid carcinoma to sphenoid sinus.6 Harmer et al., 1899, reported a case of medullary thyroid carcinoma metastasis to sphenoid/ ethmoid sinus and nose. 7 Barrs et al. in 1979 reported a case of metastasis of follicular thyroid carcinoma to sphenoid sinus and sphenoid bone.8 Chang et al. in 1983 described a case of metastatic carcinoma of the thyroid to the sphenoid sinus.9 Renners et al. in 1992 reported one case of metastasis of follicular thyroid carcinoma to the paranasal sinuses, including the sphenoid sinus. 10Yamasoba et al. in 1994 reported a case with follicular thyroid carcinoma metastasising to sinonasal tract which also included sphenoid sinus.11 In the same year, Cumberworth et al. reported a case of metastasis of a thyroid follicular carcinoma to the sinonasal cavity which head CT showed sphenoid, ethmoid, frontal and maxillary sinuses. 12In 1997, Altman et al. described a case of follicular metastatic thyroid carcinoma to paranasal sinuses which included the sphenoid sinus. 13 The reported cases of thyroid cancer metastasis to sphenoid sinus are in table 1. Four cases were papillary thyroid carcinoma (included follicular variant of papillary thyroid carcinoma), six cases were follicular thyroid carcinoma, 1 case was medullary thyroid carcinoma and 1 case was unspecified thyroid carcinoma. 

Table 1: Cases of thyroid metastases to the sphenoid sinus

Author Age Sex Presenting symptoms Histologic type
Present case 44 F Headache, double vision and amenorrhea Follicular variant papillary thyroid carcinoma
Mandronio (2011) 53 F Blurring of vision of left eye Papillary metastatic thyroid carcinoma
Nishijima (2010) 81 F Epistaxis Differentiated papillary thyroid carcinoma
Argibay Vasquez (2005) 53 F Headache, paresthesia in the right eye region and left monocular diplopia Differentiated carcinoma of thyroid, follicular variant of papillary cell
Altman (1997) 81 F Progressive headache Follicular thyroid carcinoma
Freeman (1996) 50 M Facial pain, proptosis of the left globe and left horner’s syndrome Metastatic papillary thyroid carcinoma
Yamatosoba (1994) 34 F Hearing loss in right ear Follicular thyroid carcinoma
Cumberworth (1994) 62 F Right nasal blockage Follicular carcinoma of the thyroid
Renner (1984) 61 F Profuse right unilateral epistaxis Follicular thyroid adenocarcinoma
Chang (1983) 50 F Intermittent epistaxis, weight loss and pain in the right nasopharyngeal region Follicular carcinoma with papillary foci
Barrs (1979) 54 F Progressive loss of vision in the left eye Follicular thyroid carcinoma
Harmer (1899) 44 F Headache Medullary thyroid carcinoma
von Eiselsberg (1893) 38 M Chronic meningitis Thyroid carcinoma

Pathologic lesions involving the sphenoid sinus include inflammatory disease, mucocele, chordoma, nasopharyngeal carcinoma, plasmacytoma, primary sphenoid sinus carcinoma, adenocystic carcinoma, pituitary adenoma, and giant cell granuloma. Benign disease often presents with a more gradual obstruction and disturbance of vision. This contrasts with the acute and progressive disturbances of vision in all cases reported with malignant lesions of the sphenoid sinus.14

Our patient presented with complaints of double vision for 6 months and headache. After imaging with MRI and given her previous history of metastatic thyroid cancer, the most likely diagnosis was metastases to the sphenoid sinus from the thyroid cancer, which was confirmed by tissue biopsy. Since this patient had evidence of bone metastasis, it is likely that the tumour first metastasised to the bone and then ruptured into the sphenoid sinus. The tumour appears to have eroded the sellar floor, extending into and displacing the pituitary gland, causing secondary hypoadrenalism.

In our patient, low thyroglobulin proved to be an unreliable marker because it was low when the patient had metastasis of the tumour in the spine. These tumours are more aggressive and today, PET scanning has proved more reliable in following them, a modality that was not available at the time for our patient. The possible explanations for negative total body scans in patients with metastatic differentiated thyroid cancer are a) technical limitations of the scan in detecting the tumour cells, and b) failure of the tumour tissue to trap iodine.

There are several unusual aspects in this patient’s presentation. Firstly, the initial presentation was unusual, since this tumour was very aggressive with rare sites of distant metastases. Perhaps the long periods of hypothyroidism when patient was noncompliant promoted the aggressive nature of this tumour. Secondly, the failure of known tumour markers, i.e. serum thyroglobulin and total body scan to identify these metastases. Thirdly, our patient’s tumour cell nuclear DNA was diploid. Investigations have shown that the DNA ploidy pattern as determined by flow cytometry is an important and independent prognostic variable.15-17 Fortunately, aggressive follicular variant papillary cancer of thyroid (non-tall cell type) is very uncommon.

Generally, total body scan negative with low stimulated thyroglobulin is an excellent prognostic sign. Our patient demonstrates that we need to remain vigilant for the unusual tumour especially when the initial presentation showed so much bulky disease. The need for additional tumour markers will help to identify aggressive well differentiated thyroid carcinoma cases.

Acknowledgement

Appreciation is extended to Ms. Deborah Goss and Mr. Timothy O’Mara, librarians, in helping with literature search and preparing the manuscript. No other financial sources or funding involved in the formation of manuscript. No potential financial conflicts of interest. 

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Acknowledgement: 
Appreciation is extended to Ms. Deborah Goss and Mr. Timothy O’mara, Librarians, in helping with literature search. No other financial sources or funding involved in the formation of manuscript. No potential financial conflicts of interest.
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
ISAAC SACHMECHI, MD, FACE, FACP, Queens Hospital Center, Department of Medicine, 82-68 164th street, Jamaica, New York 11432, USA. RACHELLE N. BITTON, MD, FACE, Pro Health, New Hyde Park, New York 11040, USA SUSAN SANELLI-RUSSO, MD, Queens Hospital Center, Department of Medicine, 82-68 164th street, Jamaica, New York 11432, USA. SUPAT THONGPOOSWAN, MD, Queens Hospital Center, Department of Medicine, 82-68 164th street, Jamaica, New York 11432, USA.
Corresponding Author Details: 
SUPAT THONGPOOSWAN, MD, Queens Hospital Center, Department of Medicine, 82-68 164th street, Jamaica, New York 11432.
Corresponding Author Email: 
th.supat@gmail.com
References
References: 
  1. Mandronio EB, Lantion-Ang FL. The tale of two tumours: an undiagnosed case of papillary thyroid carcinoma. BMJ Case Reports. 20 Dec 2011.
  2. Nishijima H, Kitahara N, Murata M, Egami N. A case of papillary thyroid carcinoma metastatic to the sphenoid sinus presenting with epistaxis. Nihon Jibiinkoka Gakkai Kaiho. 2010; 113(2):62-66.
  3. Argibay Vázquez S, Lancha Hernández C, Martínez Muñiz A. Metastasis in the sphenoidal sinus in a patient with papillary thyroid cancer. Clin Transl Oncol. 2005; 7(7):324-327.
  4. Freeman JL, Gershon A, Liavaag PG, Walfish PG.  Papillary thyroid carcinoma metastasizing to the sphenoid-ethmoid sinuses and skull base. Thyroid. 1996; 6: 59-61.
  5. Bernstein JM, Montgomery WW, Baloh K Jr. Metastatic tumours to the maxilla, nose and paranasal sinuses. The Laryngoscope. 1966; 76:621-650.
  6. Von Eiselsberg, A. Uber Knochen-metastasen des schilddrusenkrebses.  Verhandlungen der Deutschen Gesellschaft für Chirurgie. 1893; 22:225-268.
  7. Harmer, L. Schilddrusenmetastase in der Nasenhohle. Weiner Klinische Wochenschrift. 1899; 23: 628-631.
  8. Barrs DM, McDonald TJ, Whisnant JP. Metastatic tumours to the sphenoid sinus. The Laryngoscope. 1979; 89:1239-1242.
  9. Chang G, Weber A, Pappanikov A. X-ray study of the month-Metastatic carcinoma of the thyroid to the sphenoid sinus. Ann Otol Rhinol Laryngol. 1983; 92:309-310.
  10. Renner GJ, Davis WE, Templer JW. Metastasis of thyroid carcinoma to the paranasal sinuses. Otolaryngology-Head and Neck Surgery. 1984; 92:233-237.
  11. Yamasoba T, Kikuchi S, Sugasawa M, Higo R, Sasaki T. Occult follicular carcinoma metastasizing to the sinonasal tract.ORL J Otorhinolaryngol Relat Spec. 1994 Jul-Aug; 56(4):239-43.
  12. Cumberworth VL, Ohri A, Morrissey G, Stirling R. Late sino-nasal metastasis from follicular thyroid carcinoma. J Laryngol Otol. 1994; 108:110-111.
  13. Altman KW, Mirza N, Philippe L. Metastatic follicular thyroid carcinoma to the paranasal sinuses: a case report and review. J Laryngol Otol 1997;111: 647-651.
  14. Wyllie JW III, Kern EB and Djalilian M. Isolated sphenoid sinus lesions. The Laryngoscope. 1973; 83:1252-1265.
  15. Hay ID. Papillary thyroid carcinoma. Endocrinol Metab Clin North Am. 1990; 19:545-576.  
  16. Backdahl M, Carstensen J, Auer G, Tallroth E. Statistical evaluation of the prognostic value of nuclear DNA content in papillary, follicular, and medullary thyroid tumours. World J Surg 1986; 10:974-980.
  17. Ozata M, Suzuki S, Miyamoto T, Liu RT, Fierro-Renoy F, DeGroot LJ. Serum thyroglobulin in the follow-up of patients with treated differentiated thyroid cancer. J Clin Endocrinol Metab. 1944; 79:98-105.

Photo Quiz: Palatal swelling with pain

Authors
Segun Adeoye, Sylvester Sarfraz and Kiranmayi Korimerla
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2014;7(1):a704
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

A 32-year old female diabetic patient presents with 2-day history of pain in her mouth. A complete history, physical findings, picture of lesion, differential diagnoses and management is detailed.

Abbreviations: 
STD- Sexually transmitted disease, HIV- Human immunodeficiency virus
Keywords: 
palatal swelling, palatal pain, torus palatinus, palatal abscess, pleomorphic adenoma of salivary gland, hyperplastic candidiasis, median palatal cyst.

A 32-year old female with medical history of Diabetes Mellitus (type 2) presents to the outpatient clinic with a 2-day history of pain in the roof of her mouth. She described the pain as severe, throbbing, non-radiating, and unrelieved by analgesics. Fever was absent and there were no symptoms suggestive of an antecedent respiratory tract infection (RTI).  She had no history of oral mucosa trauma or burns. She gave a remote history of herpes oralis and aphthous ulcers. Her diabetes is well controlled with Sitagliptan-Metformin and Lantus. An annual dental examination done in the past year was described as “normal” by the patient. She maintains oral hygiene with daily teeth brushing without flossing; she had never used dentures. Further review of systems was negative. On examination she was not in distress and vital signs were normal. No external orofacial or neck swelling was observed. Oral examination revealed dental plagues and periodontal lesions. A 2x2cm tender paramedian mass with a small central ulcer was seen and felt on the hard palate anteriorly (see Figure 1 and 2). There were no pharyngotonsillar lesions or regional lymphadenopathy. Tongue and deglutitive movements were normal. Systemic examination was normal.  STD/HIV screening was negative. The clinical picture is most consistent with:

  1. Torus palatinus with aphtous ulceration
  2. Hyperplastic candidiasis
  3. Palatal pleomorphic adenoma
  4. Median palatine cyst
  5. Palatal abscess

Answer

The clinical picture is most consistent with a palatal abscess. Palatal abscess is a pyogenic collection representing a palatally directed drainage of infective pulpal, pericoronal or periodontal process.1, 2 The most common origin is from an infection of the palatal root of maxillary premolars or molars.3 It presents as a very painful, fluctuant swelling, with lateral or paramedian localization. The surrounding edema may give an impression of midline involvement or contralateral extension.4 The prevailing dental plagues and periodontitis present in this patient (her diabetic state abetting), creates a rich source of oral aerobes and anaerobes as well as the environment in which they thrive.  An antecedent herpetic or aphthuos ulcer may also be portal of entry for causative microbes. The patient’s oral hygiene status, her diabetic state, the acuity of symptoms and markedly painful presentation are consistent with acute palatal abscess.  The absence of fever in this patient does not preclude this diagnosis.

Hyperplastic candidiasis is the result of chronic colonization and superficial oral mucosa invasion by Candida sp, causing chronic inflammatory changes with edema and epithelial proliferation.2 The result of these reactive responses is a raised pebbled-like –surfaced lesion.  It is most commonly seen under denture sites in denture wearers.5,6 The lesion depicted in the picture above is not typical for hyperplastic candidiasis, more so, though not an absolute discriminant, the patient had never used dentures.

Torus palatinus is a wide-based, smooth surfaced, bony protrusion in midline of the hard palate caused by cortical bone growth with a thin, poorly vascularized mucosa lining. The etiology is unclear, but is thought to be multifactorial; genetics (autosomal dominant trait) and recurrent superficial palatal injuries most often implicated.1 Torus palatinus is often an incidental finding, though some affected persons may present out of concern for its increasing size or interval development of ulceration or pain in the area of the torus. Pleomorphic adenoma is the most common neoplasm of salivary glands. Though it may occur at any age, pleomorphic adenoma of salivary glands has peak incidence in the fourth to sixth decade of life. Palatal pleomorphic adenoma often presents as a painless, slow-growing tumor.  Median palatine cyst is a rare, non-odontogenic lesion of the hard palate that usually presents as a painless, fluctuant swelling. They are composed histologically of a fibrous collagenous tissue wall, with infiltration of chronic inflammatory cells, and lined by stratified squamous and/or respiratory epithelium. Pain is unusual in the above three oral diagnostic entities, when present it arises from ulcerative, hemorrhagic or infective complications. A detailed history eliciting the chronicity of a preceding midline palatal swelling is often helpful. The patient reported normal palatal examination a year earlier, the relative short history, and the acuity of presentation (severity of pain) make torus palatinus, median palatine cyst or palatal pleomorphic adenoma unlikely.  See Table 1 for discriminants and differential diagnoses.

Table 1: Differential Diagnoses of Palatal Swelling
Onset and course
Acute Palatal abscess
Chronic Torus palatinus, median palatal cyst, pleomorphic adenoma, hyperplastic candidiasis
Shape
Globular Palatal abscess, torus palatinus, median palatal cyst, pleomorphic adenoma
Peppled Hyperplastic candidiasis
Consistency
Fluctuant/tense Palatal abscess, median palatal cyst
Rubbery/firm Torus palatinus, pleomorphic adenoma, hyperplastic candidiasis
Associated pain
Yes Palatal abscess, hyperplastic candidiasis, infective or traumatic complications of: torus palatinus, median palatal cyst, pleomorphic adenoma
No Uncomplicated: torus palatinus, median palatal cyst, pleomorphic adenoma
Associated fever
Yes Palatal abscess (but may not be present)
No Hyperplastic candidiasis, uncomplicated: torus palatinus, median palatal cyst, pleomorphic adenoma
Patient attributes
Poor oral hygiene/caries Palatal abscess
Diabetes/HIV Palatal abscess
Denture wearer Hyperplastic candidiasis

The patient underwent definitive treatment with incision and drainage of abscess as well as extraction of her upper left second molar by a dental surgeon. She completed a course of Clindamycin as well as multiple scaling and polishing sessions by a dental hygienist. Maintaining oral hygiene by daily teeth brushing, and flossing, use of mouth antiseptic, as well as a biannual visit to her dentist was recommended. 

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
SEGUN ADEOYE, MD, MS, Hospitalist, University of Pittsburg Medical Center (Horizon), Greenville, PA. SYLVESTER SARFARAZ, MD, Fellow, Geriatric Medicine, Brown University/Rhode Island Hospital, Providence, RI. KIRANMAYI KORIMERLA, MD, Resident, Department of Family Medicine, The Brooklyn Hospital Center, NY.
Corresponding Author Details: 
Segun Adeoye, MD, University of Pittsburgh Medical Center, Horizon. 110 N Main Street, Greenville, PA 16125.
Corresponding Author Email: 
adeoye.segun@yahoo.com
References
References: 
  1. Hargreaves KM, Goodis HE. Seltzer and Bender’s dental pulp. 3rd. Quintessence Publishing; 1984.
  2. Mitchell CS, Nelson MD., Jr Orofacial abscess of odontogenic origin in the pediatric patient: Report of two cases. Pediatr Radiol. 1993;23:432–434.
  3. Jimenez Y, Bagan JV, Murillo J, et al. Odontogenic infections. Complications. Systemic manifestations. Med Oral Patol Oral C r Bucal. 2004;9:139–147.
  4. Houston GD, Brown FH. Differential diagnosis of the palatal mass. Compendium. 1993;14:1222–1224.
  5. Jainkittivong A, Aneksuk V, Langlais R. Oral mucosal lesions in denture wearers. Gerontology 2010 March 27(1):26-32.
  6. Odell EW. Clinical Problem solving in dentistry. 2nd ed. Elsevier Science; 2004. pp. 223–226.

Patellar fracture fixation: An unreported complication occurring directly attributable to tension band fixation of the patella.

Authors
Peter Alexander Gilmer Torrie, James, Smith and Micheal Kelly.
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2014;7(1):a703
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Patella fractures account for 1% of all fractures but there is little in the contemporary literature regarding either an optimal standardized post-operative rehabilitation regimen or the long-term outcomes following these fractures. Tension band wire fixation for displaced patella fractures is a well-recognised and accepted method of operative treatment for these fractures. In this case the authors report a new complication, yet to be documented in the literature that was directly attributable to a well-recognised complication resulting from this method of fixation.

An atypical osteochondral defect, from the lateral femoral condyle, was generated as a direct result of bony spur at the site of the previous patella fracture malunion. As the patient fell on to her knee the bony spur was driven into the femoral condyle in a similar fashion to an osteotome, generating the atypical osteochondral defect.

This patient had chronic anterior knee pain following the tension band fixation of her patella. An inadequate standardised follow-up regimen failed to identify her fracture malunion that was responsible for her ongoing persistent symptoms. Only as a result of this previously unreported complication, we were able to identify and surgically address the underlying primary pathology responsible for her persistent symptoms. This case highlights the importance for the identification and establishment of a more robust imaging follow-up regimen post patella fracture fixation.

Keywords: 
patella fracture; tension band fixation; unreported complication; post-operative follow-up regimen

Introduction

Patella fractures account for 1% of all fractures but there is little in the contemporary literature regarding outcomes.  It is accepted that where fixation is required it needs to be rigid and tension band wiring using cannulated screws or k-wires is the accepted standard.1 Recognised complications associated with this form of fixation occur in up to 15% of cases2 and include; infection, loss of fixation, knee stiffness, post-traumatic osteoarthritis, malunion, nonunion and irritation from hardware.3Thereis nothing in the literature regarding the natural history following fixation.

We report an unusual complication of an osteochondral defect being generated as a direct result of a malunion of a patella fracture previously fixed by a tension band wiring technique.

Case Report

A 35-year old lady presented to our unit after a direct fall on to her left knee with an associated dislocation of her patella that spontaneously reduced on extension, at the time of injury. Three years previously she had sustained a patella fracture that had been treated with tension band wiring. From the time of the original fixation she had experienced mild persistent anterior knee pain, with a reduced range of motion and grinding. She had been discharged from further follow up.

On this presentation, examination revealed that she had a marked knee effusion with a functional extensor mechanism and a range of motion from 0-60 degrees.

The initial radiographs demonstrated that she had broken hardware and an incongruency of the patella suggesting malunion on the articular surface with a residual step (figure 1). In addition, an osteochondral fragment was identified in the patellofemoral joint. Computer tomography was undertaken and confirmed the osteochondral fragment had come from the lateral femoral condyle and a spur like prominence on the articular surface of the patella (figure 2). The mechanism was that this bony spur had been driven into the articular surface of the lateral condyle on dislocation resulting in the osteochondral fragment being generated. 

Intraoperative findings confirmed this and measured the osteochondral fragment as 40x15mm (figure 3). In addition it was found that the lateral longitudinal wire had protruded into the joint causing a vertical linear defect in the articular surface of the trochlea.

The osteochondral defect was reduced and stabilized with interrupted 3/0 PDS sutures achieving a smooth articular surface (figure 4). In addition a patelloplasty and a lateral release were performed to remove the bony prominence and restore patella tracking respectively. At 6-month follow up this patient was progressing well with rehabilitation and the majority of her chronic symptoms had resolved.

Figure 1. Lateral radiograph demonstrating an incongruency of the patella suggesting malunion on the articular surface with a residual step

Figure 2. Computerised Tomography confirming an osteochondral fragment that had come from the lateral femoral condyle. 

Figure 3. Osteochondral fragment from the lateral femoral condyle measuring 40x15mm.

Figure 4. The osteochondral defect stabilized with interrupted 3/0 PDS sutures achieving a smooth articular surface

Discussion

Although patellae account for 1% of fractures their functional outcome remains largely ignored in the literature. This case presents an unreported complication and highlights that symptoms can remain following the initial fixation that are accepted either by the patient or the treating centre and not further investigated.

Osteoarthritis of the knee remains the most common musculoskeletal complaint in general practice but even then only a third of those with symptoms seek medical advice. Therefore the lack of re-referrals following fixation is not an accurate way to assess outcome following patella fractures treated with this mode of fixation.

Patella fractures represent only a small number of fractures and therefore assessment of treatment and outcomes is problematic, particularly as there is no standardised rehabilitation regimen.

We report on this case as it illustrates a complication of patella fracture fixation that has not been previously described or routinely recognised and, additionally, highlights the fundamental importance of a comprehensive standardised post-operative imaging follow-up regimen. It may be that patients are not currently being correctly counselled regarding the longer-term expectations following patella fracture. A study to define the natural history of patella fractures following contemporary management is needed.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
Peter Torrie MB ChB, MRCS (Eng), PGCertEd; James Smith MRCS (Eng); Michael Kelly FRCS (Tr + Orth); Bristol, UK.
Corresponding Author Details: 
Mr P.A.G Torrie – Flat 12, Muller House, Ashley Down Road, Bristol, BS7 9DA, UK.
Corresponding Author Email: 
alextorrie99@hotmail.com
References
References: 
  1. Smith ST, Cramer KE, Karges DE et al. Early complications in the operative treatment of patellar fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 1997 Apr;11(3):183-7.
  2. Bostman O, Kiviluoto O, Santavirta S, et al. Fractures of the patella treated by operation. Arch Orthop Trauma Surg. 1983; 102:78-81.
  3. Carpenter JE, Kasman R, Matthews LS. Fractures of the patella. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1993;75:1550-1561.

Frequency and severity of depression among mothers of children with cancer: Results from a teaching hospital in Karachi, Pakistan

Authors
Mariam Ghufran, Marie Andrades and Kashmira Nanji
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2014;7(1):a701
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Background: Diagnosis of cancer in one’s child causes not only social but also psychological devastation for the whole family especially mothers. Depressed mothers are less able to help their sick child cope with intensive treatments. This study was doneto identify frequency and severity levels of depression in mothers of children with cancer. 
Methods: 
Across sectional study was conducted from September 2011-March 2012 at Aga Khan University Hospital, pediatric oncology clinics. Hundred mothers were enrolled according to inclusion and exclusion criteria. A pre-coded validated questionnaire regarding mothers and child’s demographics along with Hamilton-D (HAM-D), a depression screening and severity scale, was used. Data was analyzed using SPSS (19.0), frequencies, and proportions were reported accordingly.
Results: Forty-three percent mothers were in the age group of 30-39 yearsSeventy-eight percentmothers were found to be depressed. Out of those 69% had mild, 25% moderate, 5% severe, and 1% had very severe depression. 
Conclusion: Majority of mothers were found to be depressed in this study. This known high level of depression in mothers, it is recommended that early non-therapeutic and/or therapeutic interventions should be done to help them cope with their situation.

Abbreviations: 
AKUH (Aga Khan University Hospital), HAM-D (Hamilton- Depression Scale), WHO (World Health Organization), CDC (Centers for Disease Control and Prevention), ALL (Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia), SPSS (Statistical Package For Social Sciences), US (United States), GNP (Gross National Product), NCI (National Cancer Institute, SD (Standard Deviation), SEER (Surveillance Epidemiology and End Results), CI (Confidence Interval), OR (Odds Ratio)
Keywords: 
Mothers, Cancer Children, Caregiver Depression

Introduction

Currently, depression is the leading cause of disability in the world and is predicted to become the second largest killer after heart disease by the year 20201. Eighty percent of individuals with depression report functional impairment while 27% report serious difficulties at work and home life2. According to a study conducted in 2011, India has the highest rate of depression (36%) in low income countries with women being affected twice more than men3. Cancer in children occurs randomly and spares no ethnic group, socio-economic class, or geographical region. An estimated 11,630 new cases are expected to occur among children aged 0-14 years in 2012 in the US, out of which 1,310 will die by end of 2013 due to it4. Based on Karachi Cancer Registry it is estimated that about 7500 children get cancer every year in Pakistan5. The mortality rates for childhood cancers have declined by 68% over the past four decades, from 6.5 per 100,000 in 1969 to 2.1 in 20094. However, the diagnosis of cancer in one’s child marks the beginning of social and psychological devastation for the whole family especially the mother. The length and intensity of treatment can be as distressing as the disease itself, negatively affecting their functionality as parents and in turn the child’s ability to handle the treatment6. As a primary care provider mother’s responsibility increases substantially starting a vicious cycle of anxiety and socio-economic uncertainty leading her to depression much more than the father7. The available data supports that mothers of children with cancer represent a group prone to high levels of emotional distress, and that the period following their child’s diagnosis and the initiation of treatment may be predominantly stressful and disturbing leading them to depression8. Such mothers have difficulty in taking care of themselves, their household and especially their sick children. Many parents continue to suffer from clinical levels of distress, even after five years off treatment of their child7. Many studies have shown that chronic depression and distress may lead to decrease in immune functioning and an increased risk of infectious disease in healthy individuals 9-11. Mothers are generally with the child mainly and hence are most affected from their child’s disease. In this study, we intended to estimate the frequency and severity of depression in mothers having children with cancer.

There is limited evidence from Pakistan regarding depression in mothers of children with cancer. The previous studies conducted had certain limitations such as small sample size, assessment of depression in both parents and that too of children with leukaemia only. This study intends to determine the frequency and severity of depression among mothers of children with cancer.

Methods

A cross sectional survey was conducted in the paediatric oncology clinics at The Aga Khan University Hospital, a teaching hospital in Karachi over a period of six months (September 2011- March 2012). Mothers of children with cancer were enrolled in the study, consecutively according to the inclusion and exclusion criteria. Mothers having children less than 15 years of age with any type of cancer, diagnosed by oncologist (2 months after diagnosis to rule out bias for normal grief period)12, mothers bringing their sick child for the first time to the teaching hospital or as follow up or for day care oncology procedures were included in the study. Mothers who had existing psychiatric illness (and or already diagnosed as having depression by a doctor) and/or taking medications for it, any recent deaths in family (within six months of interview) or having other co-morbidities (malignancy, myocardial infarction in previous year, neuromuscular disease limiting ambulation or blindness) were excluded.

A pre-coded validated and structured Urdu13, 14 and English15, 16 version of the questionnaire was used for data collection the questionnaire took about 20 minutes to complete and consisted of two sections. Section A, included mother’s and child’s demographic details and treatment status. Section B, consisted of Hamilton Depression Rating Scale (HAM-D 17) a validated scale (sensitivity 78.1% and specificity 74.6%) for assessing frequency and severity of depression in both hospitalised patients and the general population15. Scores of < 7 indicate no depression and scores > 7 are labelled as depressed. Mothers who were found to be depressed were further classified into mild (scores 8-13), moderate (scores 14-18), severe (scores 19-22) and very severe depression (scores > 23)16. Mothers with mild to moderate depression were referred to the family physicians; those with severe, very severe, or suicidal tendencies were urgently referred to a psychiatrist.

Institutional Ethical Committee of the Aga Khan University Hospital approved the study. Confidentiality of participants was maintained and informed written consent was obtained.

Sample sizecalculated by WHO software. The prevalence of maternal depression ranges from 56.5% to 61.5% 17, 18 as evident from different international studies. With 95%, confidence interval and bound on error of 10% the sample size came out to be 95. After an addition of 5% for non-responders, the total required sample size was 100 study participants. Data was double entered and analyzed in SPSS version19. The outcome variable was dichotomized as no depression and depression (cut off score7). Analysis was performed by calculating frequencies of categorical variables (maternal age, education, current marital status, employment, co- morbidities, diagnosed depression and treatment in mother, number of children, gender of sick child, cancer type, time since diagnosis of cancer in child, treatment given so far and current treatment status of child and family income). Means and Standard Deviation was reported for current age of the child.

Results

One hundred and sixty mothers were approached out of which 100 mothers consented to participate in the study yielding a response rate of 62.5% (100/160). With regards to the mothers the most common age group was the 30-39 year old category (43%). Fifty-five percent of mothers had a high level of education (those who had completed class 11-12 or engaged in professional education). Nearly all the mothers (98%) were married and were homemakers (95%). Only 5% of mothers were working outside the home. More than half of the participants (57%) had one to three children while 43% had more than three. Monthly financial income for 65% of the participants were more than fifty thousand Pakistani rupees (Table 1).

Table 1: Demographic Characteristics of Mothers (N=100)

Variables N %
Age of mother    
20-29 years 39 39.00%
30-39 years 43 43.00%
40 years and above 18 18.00%
Education Level of mothers*    
No education 13 13.00%
Primary/secondary/intermediate 32 32.00%
Higher 55 55.00%
Marital status of mothers    
Currently Married 98 98.00%
Divorced 1 1.00%
Widow 1 1.00%
Maternal Employment Status    
Housewife 95 95.00%
Working 5 5.00%
Number of children    
1-3 57 57.00%
More than 3 43 43.00%
Family Income    
< 20,000 4 4.00%
20,000-50,000 31 31.00%
>50,000 65 65.00%

* (Not Educated: Those who do not have primary education, Primary 1-5 years of schooling, Secondary: 6 to 10 years of schooling, Intermediate: Who have studied class 11 and 12, Higher: Who have completed or engaged in professional education)

The demographic characteristics of child are detailed in Table2. Seventy-five percent of sick children were male while 25% were females (n=100). Half the children were diagnosed with cancer between the age of three to nine. Fifty percent of children (n=50), had their diagnosis of cancer in the last one to five years. More than half of children (57%) were on treatment during study phase. Different types of cancers occurring in children are shown in Figure1.

Table 2: Demographics and social characteristics of sick child (N=100)

Variables N %
Current age of child * 6.90(±3.40)*
Gender of Sick Child    
Male 75 75.0%
Female 25 25.00%
Age of child at cancer diagnosis    
10months-3 years 40 40.0%
3 -9 years 50 50.00%
More than 9 years 10 10.00%
Time since diagnosis of child’s cancer    
< 1 year 15 15.0%
1-5 years 50 50.00%
>5 years 35 35.00%
Current treatment status of child    
On treatment 57 57.0%
Off treatment 43 43.00%

*Mean (SD) (t-test values)

Figure 1: Frequency of various types of cancer in children (N=100)

*Others (BLL, Rhabdomyosarcoma, Glioblastoma, Nephroblastoma)

Seventy eight percent of the mothers were depressed. Sixty-nine percent (n= 54) had mild depression, nearly 25% (n=19) had moderate, while 5% (n= 4) had severe and 1% (n=1) had very severe depression.(Table 3)

Table 3: Frequency and levels of severity of Depression in mothers

Variables N %
Frequency of Depression (n=100)    
Depression present 78 78%
Depression absent 22 22%
Severity of Depression (n=78)    
Mild 54 69%
Moderate 19 25%
Severe 4 5%
Very severe 1 1%

Discussion

Depressed patients are frequently encountered in nearly all specialty clinics. However, depression in caregivers accompanying patients is usually overlooked and hence missed, as doctors are mostly focused on the patient’s evaluation, condition, and treatment. When the patient is a child and the diagnosis is cancer, this difficult circumstance has a sudden and long term impact on both the child and the family. Many parents of a child with cancer will have very strong feelings of guilt. As such, parents of cancer survivors may be at risk for impaired physical and mental health. An increasing body of literature supports the conclusion that various levels of parental distress are ongoing, long after treatment is completed 19, 20.

The prevalence of depression in mothers in this study was as high as 78%. Mild depression was seen in 69% of mothers, moderate in 25%, severe in 5% while 1% had very severe depression. This high prevalence of depression in such mothers has not been reported from Pakistan before. The soaring levels of depression however have been consistent with the study conducted in Turkey in 2009 in mothers of children with leukaemia21 where 88% (n=65) mothers were depressed. Mild depression was reported in 22.7 % (n=18) and major depression in 61.5% (n=40). Similar results were reported from a study conducted on both parents of children with leukaemia in 2002 in Pakistan where 65% (n=60) of mothers were found to be depressed 17. Nevertheless, severity of depression in this study was not noted. A Sri Lankan study in 2008, showed moderate to severe depression to be 22.9% and 21.9% in mothers having children with mental and physical disorders respectively22. Another study conducted in Florida in 2008 suggests that an increased symptom of depression in mothers is related to significantly lower ratings in quality of life for their children18.

The existing data supports the argument that mothers of children with cancer represent a group prone to high levels of emotional distress. The time following their child’sdiagnosis and the commencement of treatment may be particularly stressful and traumatic 23 with an incidence as high as 40% 24-26. There could be multi-factorial reasons for this alarmingly high rate of depression seen in Pakistani mothers. One of the causes could be the political instability that Pakistan has been facing for past few years leading to economic volatility. The study conducted in 2002 in Karachi saw 65% of maternal depression17 which has now risen to 78% in this study. Due to political unrest, everyday strikes, bombasts, these mothers may also have difficulty in reaching hospital on scheduled visits leading to postponement of treatment. Other reason could be economic inflation. The cost of daily living has soared while allocated medical budget was 0.27% of its gross domestic product (GDP) on health in 2011-12, which is insufficient to cater the needs of the population (Economic Survey of Pakistan of 2011-2012).

Lately, there has been a recent trend towards nuclear families in Pakistan rather than living in extended families as before27. This in turn may lead to mother being the soul person in looking after the sick and her healthy children as well as managing house chores and doctor’s appointments leading to more frustration. This study also showed that 57% mothers had three children while 43% had more than three children. This could also be one of the factors for high rate of depression as looking after multiple children is demanding and may lead to decreased coping skills of mothers.

Other possible reason for this high rate of depression could be that mostly educated mothers were visiting the hospital that have access to internet and can search up all details, good or bad, on their child’s disease. This may start a vicious circle of worry for mothers. Other possible reasons for this growing depression could be gender of child (as in this society male child is thought to be the support and bread earner of the family), child’s current treatment status and time since diagnosis of cancer in child.

Strengths and Limitations

To the best of authors’ knowledge, this study has touched upon a topic that was not yet been attended to, in local context. Moreover, in this study adjustment phase of two months, for acute stress and posttraumatic stress disorder was given for diagnosis of depression in mothers. It was done to rule out bias in study. HAM-D also focuses on symptoms in the past 1 week, to minimize the recall bias. The findings in this study offer evidence and importance of the need for developing psychological support for families especially mothers who are caring for a child with cancer, in Pakistan.

This study has several limitations. The study was conducted in a tertiary care private hospital, which mostly caters a specific segment of population. Hence, the results may not be a true representation of the population. All data in this study was self-reported by the participants. Thus, it is anticipated that there may be some bias in their responses and recall. Lastly, since this was a cross-sectional study so temporality is difficult to establish.

Conclusion

In conclusion more than three-fourth of our study participants were depressed.

The outcome is expected to identify depressed mothers so that effective strategies can be developed to enhance their coping skills and medically treat them when required. This in the long term is expected to increase quality of life for both their sick and healthy children as well as mothers themselves.

Future Research and Policy Recommendations

Future studies are recommended in order to confirm our findings. Such studies need to be conducted on a larger scale, at national level, in various hospitals and settings to counteract limitations of our study with appropriate means of measuring depression in mothers. Factors, not explored in this study such as personality styles and coping skills of mothers can be explored as these may be significant aspects leading to depression. Further co-morbidities, such as anxiety and post traumatic stress disorder symptoms related to child’s cancer should also be investigated.

Other associated factors, such as the political and economic situation, which perhaps may also be a leading cause of depression in our part of the world, should also be assessed. Simultaneously, measures should be taken to root such factors out at national levels.

The results of current study show the need of incorporating mothers into a treatment process designed for psychological interventions, not only after the diagnosis of cancer in their child but also during their child’s treatment. Psychosocial services should be recognised as an important constituent of comprehensive cancer care for families of children with cancer.

It is highly advocated that the healthcare professionals who work with the families of children with cancer should evaluate the children and their families concerning the psychological and social aspects of their lives. Arrangements for family counselling for those needing help should be made. Mothers should also be referred to family physicians and social support if available. The mother’s crucial position in the family and the proximal and distal effects of her adaptation to the crisis of cancer in the family should lead to the design of interventions intended at decreasing her distress and at promoting her adaptive coping skills as improving mothers’ problem-solving skills has been associated with reductions depression and anxiety28. Thus, all hospitals, dealing with paediatric cancer cases should have a family counselling and support system.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Acknowledgement: 
The authors thank Peadiatric Oncologists Dr. Zehra Fadoo and Dr. Naureen Mushtaq for easy access to their patients
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
MARIAM GHUFRAN, FCPS(FAMILY MEDICINE), MRCGP (INT),Department of Family Medicine, Aga Khan University Hospital, Stadium Road, P.O. Box 3500,Karachi-74800, Pakistan. MARIE ANDRADES, ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR & PROGRAM DIRECTOR FAMILY MEDICINE, Aga Khan University Hospital, Karachi, Pakistan. KASHMIRA NANJI, EPIDEMIOLOGIST,Department of Family Medicine, Aga Khan University Hospital, Karachi, Pakistan.
Corresponding Author Details: 
Dr. MARIAM GHUFRAN, Department of Family Medicine, Aga Khan University Hospital, Stadium Road, P.O. Box 3500,Karachi-74800, Pakistan.
Corresponding Author Email: 
mariamghufran@hotmail.com
References
References: 
  1. WHO. Mental health. Mental health disorders [URL: http://www.who.int/mental_health/management/depression/definition/en/. Accessed Jul 22, 2012.
  2. CDC. NCHS Data Brief:Death in the United States, 2010.  URL: http://www.cdc.gov/nchs/data/databriefs/db99.pdf. Accessed Jun 13, 2012.
  3. Bromet E, Andrade LH, Hwang I, et al. Cross-national epidemiology of DSM-IV major depressive episode. BMC medicine. 2011 Jul;9(1):90.
  4. American Cancer Facts and Figures.  http://www.cancer.org/acs/groups/content/@epidemiologysurveilance/documents/document/acspc-036845.pdf. Accessed Feb 12, 2013.
  5. Childhood Cancers. Children Cancer Foundation Karachi.  URL: http://ccfpakistan.org/2011/05/23/childhood-cancer/. Accessed Jan 15, 2012.
  6. Steele RG, Dreyer ML, Phipps S. Patterns of maternal distress among children with cancer and their association with child emotional and somatic distress. J Pediatr Psychol. Oct 2004;29(7):507-517.
  7. Wijnberg-Williams BJ, Kamps WA, Klip EC, Hoekstra-Weebers JE. Psychological distress and the impact of social support on fathers and mothers of pediatric cancer patients: long-term prospective results. J Pediatr Psychol. Sep 2006;31(8):785-792.
  8. Dolgin MJ, Phipps S, Fairclough DL, et al. Trajectories of adjustment in mothers of children with newly diagnosed cancer: a natural history investigation. J Pediatr Psychol. Aug 2007;32(7):771-782.
  9. Cohen S, Doyle WJ, Skoner DP. Psychological stress, cytokine production, and severity of upper respiratory illness. Psychosom Med. 1999 Mar-Apr;61(2):175-180.
  10. Robles TF, Glaser R, Kiecolt-Glaser JK. Out of Balance A New Look at Chronic Stress, Depression, and Immunity. Current Directions in Psychological Science. 2005;14(2):111-115.
  11. Kiecolt-Glaser JK, Gouin JP, Hantsoo L. Close relationships, inflammation, and health. Neurosci Biobehav Rev. Sep 2010;35(1):33-38.
  12. Kendler KS, Myers J, Zisook S. Does bereavement-related major depression differ from major depression associated with other stressful life events? The American journal of psychiatry. 2008 Aug;165(11):1449.
  13. Raza-Ur-Rahman MAA, Siddiqui AA, Akunzada WA, Hayder Z, Luhano ML. Correlation of Urdu Version of Hospital Anxiety Depression Scale and Hamilton Depression Rating Scale in Quantifying Depression among Post-Myocardial Infarction Patients. JLUMHS. 2009;8(02):131.
  14. Siddiqui A, Syed EU. Comparison of Vitamin B12 Supplementation to Selective Serotonin Reuptake Inhibitor (SSRI) Versus SSRI Antidepressant Treatment Alone. Karachi: Aga Khan University; 2009.
  15. Hamilton M. A rating scale for depression. J Neurol Neurosurg Psychiatry. Feb 1960;23:56-62.
  16. Jha SK. Depression scales.Current Medicine Group. Dec 20; URL: http://www.cnsforum.com/clinicalresources/ratingscales/ratingpsychiatry/depression. Accessed Dec 18, 2011.
  17. Iqbal A, Siddiqui KS. Depression among parents of children with acute lymphoblastic leukemia. J Ayub Med Coll Abbottabad. Apr-Jun 2002;14(2):6-9.
  18. Roddenberry A, Renk K. Quality of Life in Pediatric Cancer Patients: The Relationships Among Parents’ Characteristics, Children’s Characteristics, and Informant Concordance J Child Fam Studies. 2008 Mar;17(3):402-426.
  19. Hutchinson KC, Willard VW, Hardy KK, Bonner MJ. Adjustment of caregivers of pediatric patients with brain tumors: a cross-sectional analysis. Psycho-oncology. May 2009;18(5):515-523.
  20. Hutchinson KC. Parental adjustment: An examination of caregivers of pediatric cancer survivors. online Thesis, DUKE UNIVERSITY; 2010.
  21. Erkan S, Kaplan Y. A study on the depression levels of mothers of leukemic children. Pak J Soc Sci. 2009 Sept;6(1):42-47.
  22. Perera H, Mudalige CDK, Karunaweera H, et al. Prevalence of depression in mothers of children suffering from psychiatric and physical disorders. J Sri Lanka Child Health. 2008 Jan;37(2):42-47.
  23. Sawyer M, Antoniou G, Toogood I, Rice M, Baghurst P. Childhood cancer: a 4-year prospective study of the psychological adjustment of children and parents. J Pediatr Hematol Oncol. May-Jun 2000;22(3):214-220.
  24. Brown RT, Madan-Swain A, Lambert R. Posttraumatic stress symptoms in adolescent survivors of childhood cancer and their mothers. J Trauma Stress. Aug 2003;16(4):309-318.
  25. Kazak AE, Alderfer M, Rourke MT, Simms S, Streisand R, Grossman JR. Posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) and posttraumatic stress symptoms (PTSS) in families of adolescent childhood cancer survivors. J Pediatr Psychol. Apr-May 2004;29(3):211-219.
  26. Kazak AE, Boeving CA, Alderfer MA, Hwang WT, Reilly A. Posttraumatic stress symptoms during treatment in parents of children with cancer. J Clin Oncol. Oct 20 2005;23(30):7405-7410.
  27. Alam A. Factors and Consequences of Nuclearization of Family at Hayatabad Phase-II, Peshawar. Sarhad J. Agric. 2008.
  28. Sahler OJ, Varni JW, Fairclough DL, et al. Problem-solving skills training for mothers of children with newly diagnosed cancer: a randomized trial. J Dev Behav Pediatr. Apr 2002;23(2):77-86.

Self-induced burn injury from thermal footbath in patients with diabetes neuropathy—a common mishap in Asian culture

Authors
Huai Heng Loh and Florence Tan
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2014;7(1):a702
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

We report three cases of diabetic patients with peripheral neuropathy who sustained severe burn injuries to the foot due to use of thermal footbath with the intention to “improve circulation” and “relieve numbness”. Use of thermal footbath is common among Asian diabetic patients with peripheral neuropathy. This has resulted in accidental burn injuries. Due to high susceptibility to secondary infection, delayed presentation further complicates and prolongs hospital stay. There is a need for greater public awareness. Education regarding avoidance and consequences of this highly preventable injury should be incorporated into standard diabetic foot care education in clinical practice.

Keywords: 
Thermal footbath, severe burn injuries, diabetic neuropathy

Introduction

Diabetic patients with peripheral neuropathy are predisposed to foot injury. In Asian countries, a common culture among patients with peripheral neuropathy is to immerse their feet in hot water baths, with a belief that it will “improve circulation” and hence “cure the numbness”. We hereby report three cases of severe burn injuries of the feet presented to our hospital over a span of six months due to the above belief.

Case Report

The first patient was a 53-year old Malay gentleman with poorly controlled diabetes mellitus for six years, complicated with peripheral neuropathy, diabetic nephropathy and right eye cataract (latest HbA1C 8.1%), treated with oral anti-diabetic agents. He had a habit of using hot footbaths for numbness of both feet. Two weeks prior to presentation, due to increased feeling of numbness, he immersed his right foot into a self-prepared tub of hot water with added salt, followed by application of traditional sea cucumber gel. That evening, he noticed blistering of his right foot. Despite advice for admission, he chose to do the dressing as an outpatient in a local clinic. He presented two weeks later due to a worsening wound. At presentation, 4% full thickness burn of his right foot was noted, complicated by secondary infection (Figure 1). He underwent wound debridement, and subsequent split skin grafting. He had a prolonged hospitalization of five weeks due to secondary pseudomonas wound infection requiring parenteral antibiotics.

Figure 1. Right lower limb upon presentation to our hospital

The second patient was a 26-year old Indian gentleman with type I diabetes mellitus for nine years, complicated with diabetic nephropathy and peripheral neuropathy. His wife usually prepared hot water footbaths for him to improve his feet circulation. He developed 5% full thickness burn when he immersed his right foot into a pail of boiling water, not knowing that his wife had not added cold water into the footbath. He presented himself after two days and was hospitalized for two weeks. He recovered after wound debridement and split skin grafting.

The third patient was a 17-year old Chinese lady with poorly controlled type I diabetes mellitus for eight years, complicated with diabetic nephropathy (latest HbA1C 10.0%). She used hot water steam therapy with an aim to cure her recent onset of left foot drop, but was unaware of the temperature of the water. She developed blisters on her left foot, but only presented herself two weeks later when she developed left foot gas gangrene.  She had a prolonged hospital stay of eight weeks with recurrent hospital acquired infections, including Methicillin-resistant Staphylcoccus aureus (MRSA). Despite multiple wound debridement, she required amputation of her left fifth toe (Figure 2).

Figure 2. Left lower limb post Ray amputation

Discussion

Peripheral neuropathy is a known complication of diabetes mellitus. More than 50% of patients who are over 60 years old have this complication.1, 2 Thermal injury to the feet in patients with neuropathy has been reported after walking barefoot on hot surfaces3 and after application of hot water bottles or heating pads during winter months.4, 5 The use of thermal footbath as a cause of burn injury is mostly due to patient-misuse or ignorance of correct usage.6, 7 In contrast, in Asian countries, a common culture among patients with peripheral neuropathy is to immerse their feet in self-prepared hot water without checking the water temperature,8 with a belief that it will “improve circulation” and hence “cure the numbness”. This practice has led to accidental burn injuries as described in our case reports.

There are a few reasons why patients with diabetic peripheral neuropathy end up with such a severe complication after the use of thermal footbath. Firstly, the temperature of the thermal bath may be underestimated. The time to develop full thickness burn reduces exponentially with just minimal increments in water temperature.9 Secondly, lack of pain despite the burn can prolong exposure to the heat source. In addition, concomitant peripheral vascular disease and endothelial function can limit vasodilatation to conduct heat away hence further aggravate the thermal insult.

Another important contributing factor of complicated wounds are the delays in seeking treatment as the result of lack of pain despite the burn injury. In a study done by Memmel et al on 1794 patients (of which 130 were diabetics) who presented with burn injuries, the majority of non-diabetic burn patients (63%) presented within 48 hours of injury, but only 40% of diabetic patients sought treatment within that time frame. Significantly more patients with diabetes presented after two weeks compared to those without diabetes. As burn injuries are highly susceptible to secondary infection, any delay in presentation further complicates and prolongs hospital stay.10,11 Not surprisingly, our two patients who presented two weeks after their burn injury had a prolonged and complicated hospital course compared to our second patient who presented soon after the burn injury. Increased susceptibility to infection and delayed wound healing from poor circulation contribute to prolonged recovery and poorer clinical outcomes in patients with diabetes mellitus, with some needing amputation as noted in our third patient.

As a healthcare provider we play a role in preventing this misfortune. Routine screening for the presence of peripheral neuropathy and vascular disease should be done during clinic visits to identify high-risk patients. Specific education regarding avoidance of thermal footbath and consequences of this highly preventable injury should be incorporated into standard diabetic foot care education. If patients choose to immerse their feet in hot water, temperature of the water should always be measured with a thermometer and immersion time should be limited. If a wound develops, they should present early to hospital for immediate treatment.

Conclusion

Thermal footbath for therapeutic purposes is commonly practiced in Asian culture. Our case reports highlight the serious consequences of this practice in diabetic patients with peripheral neuropathy. More public awareness and patient education is needed to prevent these injuries and to avoid the high cost of prolonged hospital stay and losses to the patient.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
HUAI HENG LOH, MRCP (UK), University Malaysia Sarawak, Kuching, Malaysia. FLORENCE TAN, MRCP (UK), Sarawak General Hospital, Kuching, Malaysia.
Corresponding Author Details: 
HUAI HENG LOH, University Malaysia Sarawak, Faculty of Medicine and Health Sciences, Lot 77 Section 22, KTLD Jalan Tun Ahmad Zaidi Adruce, 93150 Kuching Sarawak, Malaysia.
Corresponding Author Email: 
luohuaixin@gmail.com
References
References: 

1. Young MJ, Boulton JM, Macleod AF, et al. A multicentre study of the prevalence of diabetic peripheral neuropathy in the United Kingdom hospital clinic population. Diabetologia 1993; 36: 150-154

2. Mimi O, Teng CL, Chia YC. The prevalence of diabetic peripheral neuropathy in an outpatient setting. Med J Malaysia 2003; 58: 533-538

3. Gaztelu V, Gago Fornells M, Garcia Gonzales RF, et al. Hot sand burns on the sole of a patient with diabetes. J Wound Care 2002; 11: 170-171

4. Katcher ML, Shapiro MM. Lower extremity burns related to sensory loss in diabetes mellitus. J Fam Pract 1987; 24: 149-151

5. Jose RM, Vidyadharan R, Roy DK, et al. Hot water bottles and diabetic patients – a cautionary tale. Br J Gen Pract 2005; 55: 222-223

6. Dijkstra S, vd Bent MJ, vd Brand HJ, et al. Diabetic patients with foot burns. Diabetic Medicine 1997; 14: 1080-1083

7. Balakrishnan C, Rak TP, Meininger MS. Burns of the neuropathic foot following use of therapeutic footbaths. Burns 1995; 8: 622-623

8. Thng P, Lim RMC, Low BY. Thermal Burns in Diabetic Feet. Singapore Med J1999; 40(05): 362-364

9. Accurate Building Inspectors. New York: Ubell Enterprises, Inc; c2003-2013 [cited 2012 June 12] Hot Water Burn & Consumer Safety. Available from: www.accuratebuilding.com

10. Zachary LS, Heggers JP, Robson MC, et al. Burns of the feet. J Burn Care Rehabil1987; 8: 192-194

11. Memmel H, Kowal-Vern A, Latenser BA. Infection in Diabetic Burn Patients. Diabetes Care 2004; 27(1): 229-233

Evaluation of the effect of magnesium vs. midazolam as adjunct to epidural bupivacaine in patients undergoing total knee replacement

Authors
Mohamed A. Daabiss and Abir Kandil
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2013;6(2):a610
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Background and objectives: Effective pain management is an important component of intraoperative and postsurgical care; it can prevent pain related clinical complications and improve the patient quality of life. This prospective, randomized, double-blind study was designed to evaluate analgesic efficacy of adding magnesium and midazolam to epidural bupivacaine in patients undergoing total knee replacement.
Methods: 120 patients ASA I and II, undergoing total knee replacement surgery were enrolled to receive either bupivacaine 0.5 % or bupivacaine 0.5 % plus magnesium sulphate 50 mg as an initial bolus dose followed by a continuous infusion of 10 mg/h or bupivacaine 0.5 % plus midazolam 0.05 mg/kg as intraoperative epidural analgesia. Postoperatively, all patients were equipped with a patient-controlled epidural analgesia device. Heart rate, mean arterial pressure, oxygen saturation, respiratory rate, pain assessment using a visual analogue scale (VAS),sedation score, patients’ first analgesic requirement times and postoperative fentanyl consumption were recorded.
Results: The intraoperative VAS was significantly less in magnesium and midazolam groups. Whereas, in the first postoperative hour, VAS was significantly less in magnesium group. The postoperative rescue analgesia as well as the PCEA fentanyl consumption was significantly reduced in magnesium group.
Conclusion: Co-administration of epidural magnesium provides better intraoperative analgesia as well as analgesic-sparing effect on PCEA consumption without increasing the incidence of side-effects.

Keywords: 
Epidural analgesia, Magnesium, midazolam

Introduction

The effective relief of pain is of paramount importance to anyone treating patients undergoing surgery. Not only does effective pain relief mean a smoother postoperative course with earlier discharge from hospital, but it may also reduce the onset of chronic pain syndromes1. Regional anaesthesia is a safe, inexpensive technique, with the advantage of prolonged postoperative pain relief. Research continues concerning different techniques and drugs that could prolong the duration of regional anaesthesia and postoperative pain relief with minimal side effects1. Magnesium is the fourth most plentiful cation in the body. It has antinociceptive effects in animal and human models of pain 2,3. Previous studies had proved the efficacy of intrathecally administered magnesium in prolonging intrathecal opioid analgesia without increase in its side effectsThese effects have prompted the investigation of epidural magnesium as an adjuvant for postoperative analgesia4.

Midazolam, a water-soluble benzodiazepine, has proved epidural analgesic effect in patients with postoperative wound painSerum concentrations of midazolam after an epidural administration were smaller than those producing sedative effects in humans5.

The purpose of this study is to compare the analgesic efficacy of epidural magnesium to that of midazolam when administered with bupavacaine in patients undergoing total knee replacement.

Methods:

After obtaining the approval of the Hospital Research & Ethical Committee and patient’s informed consent, 120 ASA I and II patients of both sexes, aged 50-70 years undergoing total knee replacement surgery were enrolled in this randomised, double blinded placebo-controlled study. Those who had renal, hepatic impairment, cardiac disease, spine deformity, neuropathy, coagulopathy or receiving anticoagulants for any cause were excluded from the study.

Prior to surgery, the epidural technique as well as the visual analogue scale (VAS; 0: no pain; 10: worst pain) and the patient-controlled epidural analgesia device (PCEA) were explained to the patients.

The protocol was similar for all patients. Patients received no premedication. Heart rate (HR), mean arterial pressure (MAP) and oxygen saturation (SpO2) were measured. Intravenous access had been established and an infusion of crystalloid commenced.

Before the induction of anaesthesia, an epidural catheter was placed at the L3-L4 or L4-L5 intervertebral space under local anaesthesia with the use of loss of resistance technique, and correct position was confirmed by injection of lidocaine 2% (3ml) with epinephrine in concentration 1: 200 000. An epidural catheter was then inserted into the epidural space. The level to be blocked was up to TIn a double blind fashion and using a sealed envelope technique, patients were randomly allocated to one of three equal groups to receive via epidural catheter either 50 mg magnesium sulphate (MgSO4) in 10 ml as an initial bolus dose followed by infusion of 10 mg/h (diluted in 10 ml saline) during the surgery (Mg group) or 10 ml saline followed by infusion of saline 10 ml/h during the surgery (control group) or 0.05 mg/kg of midazolam in 10 ml saline (Midazolam group) followed by infusion of saline 10 ml/h during the surgery. All patients received epidural bupivacaine 0.5 % in a dose of 1ml/segment .

Sensory block was assessed bilaterally by using loss of temperature sensation with an ice cube. Motor block was evaluated using a modified Bromage scale 6 (0: no motor block, 1: inability to raise extended legs, 2: inability to flex knees, 3: inability to flex ankle joints). During the course of operation, epidural bupivacaine 0.5% was given, if required, to achieve a block above T10MAP, HR, SpO2 and respiratory rate (RR) were recorded before and after administration of the epidural medications and every 5 minutes till end of the surgery.

When surgery was complete, all patients received PCEA using a PCEA device (Infusomat® Space, B.Braun Space, Germany) containing fentanyl 2 µg/ml and bupivacaine 0.08% (0.8 mg/ml). The PCEA was programmed to administer a demand bolus dose of fentanyl 5 ml with no background infusion and lockout interval 20 min. The PCEA bolus volume was titrated according to analgesic effect or occurrence of side-effects. Patients’ first analgesic requirement times were recorded. The time from the completion of the surgery until the time to first use of rescue medication by PCEA was defined as the time to first requirement for postoperative epidural analgesia. A resting pain score of ≤ 3 was considered as a satisfactory pain relief. If patients had inadequate analgesia, supplementary rescue analgesia with intramuscular pethidine 50 mg was available. MAP, HR, SpO2, RR and pain assessment using VAS were recorded at 30 minutes, and then at 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, and 24 h in the postoperative period. Epidural fentanyl consumption was also recorded at the same time points. Patients were discharged to the ward when all hemodynamic variables were stable with completely resolved motor block, satisfactory pain relief, and absence of nausea and vomiting. Adverse events related with the epidural drugs (sedation, respiratory depression, nausea, vomiting, prolonged motor block) and epidural catheter were recorded throughout the 24 h study period. Sedation was assessed with a five-point Scale: 1: Alert/active, 2: Upset/wary, 3: Relaxed, 4: Drowsy, 5: Asleep. A blinded anaesthesiologist who was unaware of the drug given, performed all assessments.

The results were analyzed using SPSS version 17. The number of subjects enrolled was based on a power calculation of finding a 20% change in HR and MAP. The α-error was assumed to be 0.05 and the type II error was set at 0.20. Numerical data are presented as median and 95% CI. The groups were compared with analysis of variances (ANOVA). The VAS pain scores were analyzed by Mann-Whitney U test. Categorical data were compared using the Chi square test. P value of 0.05 was used as the level of significance.

Results:

The three groups were comparable in respect of age, weight, height, sex, ASA status and duration of surgery (Table 1). Patients in all groups were comparable regarding intra or postoperative MAP, HR (Figure 1,2), RR and SpO2 during the observation period with no case of hemodynamic or respiratory instability. No difference in the quality of sensory and motor block before and during the surgery was noted between groups, and none of the patients required supplemental analgesia during surgery.

  Control Mg Midazolam
of patients 40 40 40
Sex (female/male) 17/23 20/20 19/21
Age (yrs) 59.5 ± 6.1 61.1 ± 4.9 61.9 ± 3
ASA (I/II) 12/28 14/26 11/29
Weight (Kg) 69.7 ± 4.2 66.9 ± 6.7 70.1 ± 5.5
Height (cm) 165.9 ± 8.6 170.2 ± 4.5 167.2 ± 6.9
Duration of surgery (min) 144 ± 21 129 ± 30 130 ± 27

( median and 95% CI or number). No significant difference among groups

Table 1: Demographic data and duration of surgery.

Figure 1: Heart rate changes (HR) of study groups. Data are mean±SD.

Figure 2: Mean Arterial pressure changes (MAP) of study groups. Data are mean±SD.

The intraoperative VAS was significantly less in magnesium and midazolam groups compared to control group after 15 and 30 minutes (Figure 3). Whereas the postoperative VAS was significantly less in the magnesium group in the first postoperative hour compared to other groups (Figure 4).

Figure 3: The intra-operative Visual analogue score of study groups. Data are mean±SD.

Figure 4: The post-operative Visual analogue score of study groups. Data are mean±SD.

The time of request for postoperative analgesia was significantly delayed and the number of patients requesting postoperative analgesia was significantly reduced in magnesium group (Figure 5). Moreover, the pethidine rescue analgesia consumption and the total amount of postoperative fentanyl infusion were significantly reduced in magnesium group compared to other groups (Table 2) (Figure 5).

  Control Mg Midazolam P
Pethidine (mg) 92.38±10.91 52.56±9.67 70±9.23 0.014*
Total Fentanyl infusion (mcg)/24H 320.67±112.19 219.9±56.86 256.2±53.49 0.00*

Data are expressed as median and 95% CI. * Significant difference (P < 0.05).

Table 2: Pethidine rescue analgesia and total fentanyl infusion over 24 hours of study groups

Figure 5: The number of patients and time of requesting analgesia in the first 3 postoperative hours in the study groups. Data are numbers.

No significant differences were recorded regarding the incidence of sedation or any adverse effects between groups (Table 3).

  Control Mg Midazolam P
Sedation 0 0 2 0.068
Bradycardia 1 0 0 0.103
Nausea & Vomiting 3 1 2 0.571

Data are expressed as numbers. Significant difference (P < 0.05).

Table 3: Incidence of sedation, bradycardia and nausea & vomiting in the study groups

Discussion:

The efficacy of postoperative pain therapy is a major issue in the functional outcome of the surgery7. It was evident that epidural analgesia regardless the agent used provides better postoperative analgesia compared with parental analgesiaThe addition of adjuvants to local anaesthetics in epidural analgesia gained widespread popularity as it provides a significant analgesia which allows the reduction of the amount of local anaesthetic and opioid administration for postoperative pain and thus the incidence of side effects9.

Our study demonstrates a significant intraoperative improvement in VAS in magnesium and midazolam groups, while in the postoperative period magnesium group showed a significant reduction in the number of patients requesting early postoperative analgesia as well as total fentanyl consumption.

The antinociceptive effects of magnesium are primarily based on the regulation of calcium influx into the cell, as a calcium antagonism and antagonism of N-methyl-D-aspartate (NMDA) receptorTanmoy and colleagues10 evaluated the effect of adding MgSO4 as adjuvants to epidural Bupivacaine in lower abdominal surgery and reported reduction in time of onset and establishment of epidural block. Whereas, Arcioni and colleagues 11 proved that combined intrathecal and epidural MgSO4 supplementation reduce the postoperative analgesic requirements. Farouk et al12 found that the continuous epidural magnesium started before anesthesia provided preemptive analgesia, and analgesic sparing effect that improved postoperative analgesia. Also, Bilir and colleagues 4 showed that the time to first analgesia requirement was slightly longer with significant reduction in fentanyl consumption after starting epidural MgSO4 infusion postoperatively. Asokumar and colleagues13 found that addition of MgSO4 prolonged the median duration of analgesia after intrathecal drug administration.

On the other hand, Ko and colleagues14 found that peri-operative intravenous administration of magnesium sulfate 50 mg/kg does not reduce postoperative analgesic requirements which could be attributed to the finding that the perioperative intravenous administration of MgSO4 did not increase CSF magnesium concentration due to inability to cross blood brain barrier.

Nishiyama et al17,18,19 reported that epidural midazolam was useful for postoperative pain relief. It was suggested that epidurally administered midazolam exerts its analgesic effects through the ᵞ-aminobutyric acid receptors in the spinal cord, particularly in lamina II of the dorsal horn15 as well as through the opioid receptorsNishiyama et al20 showed that intrathecally administered midazolam and bupivacaine had synergistic analgesic effects on acute thermal- or inflammatory-induced pain, with decreased behavioral side effects. While, Kumar et al21 reported that single-shot caudal coadminstration of bupivacaine with midazolam 50 µg/kg was associated with extended duration of postoperative pain relief in lower abdominal surgery. Whereas, Jaiswal et al22 concluded that epidural midazolam can be useful and safe adjunct to bupivacaine used for epidural analgesia during labor.

In the present study, there were no significant hemodynamic changes between groups. This is in agreement with many authors who used epidural MgSO44,12,23 and midazolam 24 and did not report any hemodynamic or respiratory instability during the observation period.

This study did not record any neurological or epidural drugs related complications postoperatively. Our results are in accord with some of the trials that have previously examined the neurological complications of using epidural MgSO4,11,12,23. Moreover, Goodman and colleagues 25, found that inadvertent administration of larger doses MgSO4 (8.7 g and 9.6 g) through epidural catheter did not reveal any neurological side effects.

Regarding epidural midazolam, Nishiyama19 said that epidural administration of midazolam has a wide safety margin for neurotoxicity of the spinal cord due to the small dose used.

Our results did not reveal any significant difference regarding the sedation score. This is in agreement with Bilir et al4 and El-Kerdawy23 who did not report any case with drowsiness or respiratory depression when using epidural magnesium.

Whereas, De Beer et al26 and Nishiyama et al27 reported that a dose of 50 µg/kg midazolam appears to be the optimum dose for epidural administration, while many patients fell into complete sleep with no response to verbal command and respiratory depression when they used epidural midazolam 0.075 mg/Kg or 0.01 mg/KgMoreover, Nishiyama et al17,28 reported that when 50 µg/kg epidural midazolam was used, serum midazolam concentration was less than 200 ng/ml which was considered as the lower limit for sedation by intravenous administration.

In conclusion, co-administration of epidural magnesium provides better intraoperative analgesia as well as analgesic-sparing effect on PCEA consumption without increasing the incidence of side-effects compared to bupivacaine alone or with co-administration of epidural midazolam in patients undergoing total knee replacement. The results of the present investigation suggest that magnesium may be one of the useful adjuvants to epidural analgesia.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
MOHAMED A DAABISS, MD, Department of Anaesthesia, Riyadh Armed Forces Hospital, Saudi Arabia. ABIR KANDIL, MS, Department of Anaesthesia, Riyadh Armed Forces Hospital, Saudi Arabia.
Corresponding Author Details: 
DR MOHAMED A DAABISS, Department of Anaesthesia, Riyadh Armed Forces Hospital, Saudi Arabia.
Corresponding Author Email: 
madaabiss@yahoo.com
References
References: 

1.Sirvinskas E, Laurinaitis R. Use of magnesium sulfate in anesthesiology. Medicine 2002; 38: 147–50

2.Begon S, Pickering G, Eschalier A, Dubray C. Magnesium increases morphine analgesic effect in different experimental models of pain. Anesthesiol 2002; 96: 627–32.

3.Kroin JS, McCarthy RJ, Von Roenn N, Schwab B, Tuman KJ, Ivankovich AD. Magnesium sulfate potentiates morphine antinociception at the spinal level. Anesth Analg 2000; 90: 913–7.

4.Bilir A, Gulec S, Erkan A, Ozcelik A. Epidural magnesium reduces postoperative analgesic requirement. Br J Anaesth 2007; 98: 519-23.

5.Nishiyama T, Tamai H, Hanaoka K. Serum and Cerebrospinal Fluid Concentrations of Midazolam After Epidural Administration in Dogs. Anesth Analg 2003;96:159 –62.

6.Bromage PR. A comparison of the hydrochloride and carbon dioxide salts of lidocaine and prilocaine in epidural analgesia. Acta Anesthesiol Scand Supple 1965; 75: 193–200.

7.Shaved Y, Berlin B, Trade-in E, Boris M. The effects of postoperative pain management on immune response to surgery. Anesth Analg 2003; 97: 822-7.

8.Brian M, Spencer S, Liu R, Anne R, Cowan A, John A, et al. Efficacy of postoperative epidural analgesia, a meta analysis. JAMA 2003; 290(18): 2455-64.

9.Whalen BM, Roewer N, Kranke P. Use of local anaesthetics and adjuncts for spinal and epidural anaesthesia and analgesia at German and Austerian university. Anesthesiol 2010, 10:4.

10.Tanmoy G, Chandra G, Malik A, Singh D, Bhatia V. Evaluation of the effect of magnesium sulphate vs. Midazolam as adjunct to epidural bupivacaine. Indian J Anesth 2010;54:308-13.  

11.Arcioni R, Palmisani S, Tigano S, Santorsola C, Sauli V,  Romano S, et al. Combined intrathecal and epidural magnesium sulfate supplementation of spinal anesthesia to reduce postoperative analgesic requirements. Acta Anaesthesiol Scand 2007; 51:482-9.

12.Farouk S, Ibrahim S. Pre-incisional epidural magnesium provides pre-emptive and preventive analgesia in patients undergoing abdominal hysterectomy. Br J Anaesth 2008; 101: 694-9.

13.Asokumar B, McCarthy RJ, Kroin JS, Leon W, Perry p, Tuman KJ. Intrathecal Magnesium prolongs fentanyl analgesia. Anesth Analg 2002; 95: 661-6.

14.Ko SH, Lim HR, Kim DC, Han YJ, Choe H, Song HS. Magnesium sulfate does not reduce postoperative analgesic requirements. Anesthesiol 2001; 95(3): 640-6.

15.Edwards M, Serrao JM, Gent JP, et al. On the mechanism by which midazolam causes spinally mediated analgesia. Anesthesiol 1990; 73: 273-7.

16.Serrao JM, Goodchild CS, Gent JP. Reversal by naloxone of spinal antinociceptive effects of fentanyl, ketocyclazocine, and midazolam. Eur J Anaesthesiol 1991;8: 401– 6.

17.Nishiyama T, Odaka Y, Hirasaki A, seto K. Epidural midazolam for treatment of postoperative pain. Masui 1991;40(9):1353-8.

18.Nishiyama T, Matsukawa T, Hanaoka K. Continuous epidural administration of midazolam and bupivacaine for postoperative analgesia. Acta Anaesthesiol Scand 1999; 43 (5): 568–72. 

19.Nishiyama T. The post-operative analgesic action of midazolam following epidural administration. Eur J Anaesthesiol 1995; 12 : 369-74. 

20.Nishiyama T, Hanaoka K. Midazolam Can Potentiate the Analgesic Effects of Intrathecal Bupivacaine on Thermal- or Inflammatory-Induced Pain. Anesth Analg 2003;96:1386 –91.

21.Kumar P, Rudra A, Pan AK, Acharya A. Caudal Additives in Pediatrics: A Comparison Among Midazolam, Ketamine, and Neostigmine Coadministered with Bupivacaine. Anesth Analg 2005;101:69 –73.

22.Jaiswal S, Ranjan P, Tewari N, Agarwal NR, Mathur SK. Comparative Study Of Epidural Midazolam And Butorphanol As Adjuvant With Bupivacaine For Labor Analgesia: A Double Blind Study. Internet J Anesthesiol 2007;14(1).

23.El-Kerdawy H. Analgesic requirements for patients undergoing lower extremity orthopedic surgery, the effect of combined spinal and epidural magnesium. Middle East J Anesth 2008;19(5):1013-26.

24.Nishiyama T, Yokoyama T, Hanaoka K. Midazolam improves postoperative epidural analgesia with continuous infusion of local anaesthetics. Can J Anaesth 2008;45(6): 551-5. 

25.Goodman EJ, Haas AJ, Kantor GS. Inadvertent administration of magnesium sulphate through epidural catheter: report and analysis of a drug error. Obst Anesth Digest 2006; 4: 199-200.

26.De Beer DAH, Thomas ML. Caudal additives in children: solutions or problems? Br J Anaesth 2003;90:487–98.

27.Nishiyama T, Hirasaki A, Odaka Y, Konishi H, Seto K, Goto I. Epidural midazolam with saline, optimal dose for postoperative pain. Masui.1992;41(1):49-54.

28.Nishiyama T, Hanaoka K. Effect of diluents volume on post- operative analgesia and sedation produced by epidurally administered midazolam. Eur J Anaesthesiol 1998;15:275–9.

BJMP March 2013 Volume 6 Number 1

BJMP March 2013 Volume 6 Number 1

Full Issue Booklet   PDF

Research Articles

Evidence and recovery; improving outcomes in opiate substitution treatment
James Bell, Christine Healey, Fiona Kennedy, Mohammad Faizal and Aadil Jan Shah
Full Text PDF

Clinical Practice

Gastrointestinal bleeding in spinal injuries patient: Is prophylaxis essential?
Fahim Anwar, Ahmad Al-Khayer, Hoda El-Mahrouki and Muriell Purcell
Full Text PDF

HBsAg carriers with normal ALT levels: Healthy carriers or true patients?

Authors
Claudio Puoti
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2013;6(1):a609

It is well documented that many HBsAg-positive / HBeAg-negative patients show normal alanine aminotransferase (ALT) levels. However, two different scenarios have been proven to exist: inactive Hepatitis B Virus (HBV) carriers (previously defined as “healthy” HBV carriers) and patients with chronic hepatitis B (CHB) with transient virological and biochemical remission. These subsets of patients share HBsAg positivity and normal ALT levels; however, progression of disease, outcome, HBV DNA levels, severity of liver damage, requirement for liver biopsy and antiviral treatment significantly differ between the two patient populations.

Thus, among HBsAg-positive / HBeAg-negative subjects with normal liver biochemistry, it is important and sometimes difficult to distinguish the ‘true inactive HBV carriers’ from patients with ‘active CHB’ in whom phases of spontaneous remission have occurred. The former have a good prognosis with a low risk of complications, while the latter patient population have active liver disease with a high risk of progression to liver cirrhosis and/or hepatocellular carcinoma (HCC). Therefore, prolonged biochemical and virological follow-up are mandatory for diagnosis and decision to treat.

The term ‘chronic hepatitis B’ refers to a chronic necroinflammatory disease of the liver caused by persistent HBV infection 1. The term ‘necroinflammatory’ describes the presence of death of periportal hepatocytes (periportal necrosis) with or without disruption of the limiting plate by inflammatory cells, intralobular necrosis, portal or intralobular inflammation, and formation of bridges between vascular structures (the so-called bridging necrosis). Chronic hepatitis B can be subdivided into HbeAg positive and HBeAg-negative chronic hepatitis B 1,2. These two forms may have different natural histories and different response rates to antiviral treatment, although both may progress to more severe liver damage 3, such as, liver cirrhosis 4 or HCC 5.

The second subset is called the ‘inactive HBsAg carrier state’. It means a persistent HBV infection of the liver but without continual significant necroinflammatory disease. It is characterized by very low or undetectable serum HBV DNA levels and normal serum aminotransferases 1. It has been shown that histologically significant liver damage is rare in these patients, particularly when HBV DNA is lower than 2000 IU/ml, and thus a liver biopsy is not indicated in these subjects 4. Even among HBeAg-negative carriers with serum HBV DNA between 2000 and 20,000 IU/ml, histologically significant liver disease is also rare 6. Thus, these subjects should be followed up closely, but biopsy and treatment are not currently indicated.

As mentioned above, it is sometimes difficult to distinguish true inactive HBV carriers from patients with active HBeAg-negative CHB in whom phases of spontaneous remission may have occurred 1. The former patients have a good prognosis with a very low risk of complications, while the latter have active liver disease with a high risk of progression to advanced hepatic fibrosis, cirrhosis and subsequent complications such as decompensated cirrhosis and HCC 3-6. Thus, a minimum follow-up of 1 year with ALT levels every 3–4 months and periodical measurements of serum HBV DNA levels are required before classifying a patient as an inactive HBV carrier 1. ALT levels should remain consistently within the normal range, and HBV DNA should be below 2000 IU/ml 7. Thereafter, the inactive HBV carrier with undetectable or very low HBV DNA levels should be followed up with ALT determinations every 6 months after the first year and periodical measurement of HBV DNA levels 6 for the rest of their lifetime. This follow-up policy usually allows detection of fluctuations of activity in patients with true HBeAg-negative CHB 8.

It is important to underline that some inactive carriers may have HBV DNA levels greater than 2000 IU/ml (usually below 20,000 IU/ml), despite their persistently normal ALT levels 1,6,9. In these carriers the follow-up should be much more condensed, with ALT determinations every 3 months and HBV DNA measurements every 6–12 months for at least 3 years 1. After these 3 years, these patients should be followed up for life like all inactive chronic HBV carriers 6. After all, the inactive HBV carrier state confers a favourable long-term outcome with a very low risk of cirrhosis or HCC in the majority of patients 1,10,11. Patients with high baseline viremia levels have higher risk of subsequent reactivation. A liver biopsy should be recommended if ALT levels become abnormal and HBV DNA increases above 20,000 IU/ml. Non-invasive evaluation of liver fibrosis 12 may be useful, although these non-invasive tools, such as transient elastography, need further evaluation 6.

HBsAg clearance and seroconversion to anti-HBs antibody may occur spontaneously only in 1–3% of cases per year, usually after several years with persistently undetectable HBV DNA 7. On the other hand, progression to HBeAg-negative CHB may also occur 10.

Although the optimal definition of persistently normal ALT (PNALT) levels has not been established, the fluctuating nature of chronic HBV infection reasonably justifies serial ALT determinations. These should be done with a minimum of four to five tests 3–4 months apart within the first year of presentation, before determining whether an HBeAg-negative patient truly has PNALT. An initial follow-up of at least 1 year is supported by the finding of mild histological lesions in HBeAg-negative patients with true PNALT during the first year 6. The risk of developing abnormal ALT levels in HBeAg-negative patients with a normal baseline ALT have been reported to be higher during the first year (15–20%) and decline after 3 years of follow-up, therefore frequent monitoring during the first 1–3 years is critical 6,10.

Antiviral treatment of inactive HBsAg subjects is not indicated 1. Patients should be considered for treatment only when they have HBV DNA levels above 2000 IU/ml, serum ALT levels above the upper limit of normal and severity of liver damage assessed by liver biopsy showing moderate to severe active necroinflammation and/or at least moderate fibrosis 1,2.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
CLAUDIO PUOTI, MD, Chief, Dept. of Internal Medicine and Liver Unit, Marino General Hospital, Marino, Rome, Italy
Corresponding Author Details: 
CLAUDIO PUOTI, Chief, Dept. of Internal Medicine and Liver Unit, Marino General Hospital, Viale XXIV Maggio, 00047, Marino, Rome, Italy.
Corresponding Author Email: 
puoti@epatologia.org
References
References: 
  1. EASL Clinical Practice Guidelines: management of chronic hepatitis B virus infection. J Hepatol 2012;57:167-85.
  2. Lok ASF, McMahon BJ. Chronic hepatitis B: update 2009. Hepatology 2009; 50: 661-2.
  3. Fattovich G. Natural history and prognosis of hepatitis B. Semin Liver Dis 2003;23:47-58.
  4. McMahon BJ. The natural history of chronic hepatitis B virus infection. Semin Liver Dis 2004;24:17-21.
  5. Fattovich G, Stroffolini T, Zagni I, Donato F. Hepatocellular carcinoma in cirrhosis: incidence and risk factors. Gastroenterology 2004;127:S35-50.
  6. Papatheodoridis GV, Manolakopoulos S, Liaw Y-F, Lok A. Follow-up and indications for liver biopsy in HBeAg-negative chronic hepatitis B virus infection with persistently normal ALT: a systematic review. J Hepatol 2012;57:196-202.
  7. Martinot-Peignoux M, Boyer N, Colombat M, Akremi R, Pham B-N, Ollivier S, et al. Serum hepatitis B virus DNA levels and liver histology in inactive HBsAg carriers. J Hepatol 2002;36:543-8.
  8. Feld JJ, Ayers M, El-Ashry D, Mazzulli T, Tellier RD, Heathcote EJ. Hepatitis B virus DNA prediction rules for hepatitis B e antigen-negative chronic hepatitis B. Hepatology 2007;46:1057-70.
  9. Chen YC, Huang SF, Chu CM, Liang YF. Serial HBV DNA levels in patients with persistently normal transaminase over 10 years following spontaneous HBeAg seroconversion. J Viral Hepat 2012;19:138-46.
  10.  Papatheodoridis GV, Chrysanthos N, Hadziyannis E, Cholongitas E, Manesis EK. Longitudinal changes in serum HBV DNA levels and predictors of progression during the natural course of HBeAg-negative chronic hepatitis B virus infection. J Viral Hepat 2008;15:434-41.
  11.  Ikeda K, Arase Y, Saitoh S, Kobayashi M, Someya T, Hosaka T, et al. Long-term outcome of HBV carriers with negative HBe antigen and normal aminotransferase. Am J Med 2006;119:977-85.
  12.  Castera L, Bernard PH, Le BB, Foucher J, Trimoulet P, Merrouche W, et al. Transient elastography and biomarkers for liver fibrosis assessment and follow-up of inactive hepatitis B carriers. Aliment Pharmacol Ther 2011;33:455-65.

Irritable Bowel Syndrome for Primary Care Physicians

Authors
Ali Khanbhai and Daljit Singh Sura
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2013;6(1):a608

Introduction and Epidemiology

Irritable bowel syndrome (IBS) is a chronic and often debilitating condition with a complex aetiology1. It is the most common diagnosis made by gastroenterologists worldwide2. The incidence and prevalence of IBS vary depending on the diagnostic criteria used but it is estimated that the prevalence in the UK is 17% overall, with a prevalence of 11% among men and 23% among women3-4. IBS can have a significant negative impact on quality of life and social functioning, although it is not known to be associated with the development of serious disease or excess mortality. However, patients with IBS are more likely to undergo specific surgical operations such as hysterectomy and cholecystectomy. IBS further represents an economic burden on society due to the high consumption of healthcare resources and the non-productivity of IBS patients5. It appears that 33–90% of patients do not consult a physician, and that a proportion of patients who meet the IBS criteria are not diagnosed with IBS. The frequency of IBS symptoms peaks in the third and fourth decades, and there is a female predominance of about 2:1 in the 20s and 30s, although this discrepancy is less apparent in older patients6. The female predominance is less apparent in the general population, which suggests that women with IBS are more likely to seek healthcare for their symptoms7. IBS symptoms which persist beyond middle life continue to be reported by a substantial proportion of individuals in their seventh and eighth decades.

Pathogenesis

The pathogenesis of IBS appears to be multifactorial. The following factors play a central role in the pathogenesis: heritability and genetics, dietary and intestinal microbiota, low-grade inflammation and disturbances in the neuroendocrine system of the gut2.

IBS is known to aggregate in families and to affect multiple generations but not in a manner consistent with a major Mendelian effect. Relatives of an individual with IBS are two to three times as likely to have IBS8.

Psychological distress is not only a common co-morbidity in IBS patients, but also a factor which is likely to play a direct role in the pathogenesis4. Interestingly, parental modelling and the reinforcement of illness behaviour can also contribute to IBS. Having a mother with IBS has been shown to account for as much variance as having an identical set of genes as a co-twin who has IBS. This insinuates that the contribution of social learning to IBS is at least as great as the contribution of heredityFurthermore, the role of childhood events such as nasogastric tube placement, poor nutrition, abuse, and other stressors have been clearly associated with IBS8.

A substantial proportion of patients with IBS report onset of their symptoms after acute gastroenteritis9. Post-infectious (PI)-IBS has been reported after viral, bacterial, protozoa and nematode infections, with the incidence of PI-IBS varying between 7% and 31%. In this subset of IBS patients GI symptoms appear following gastroenteritis, with approximately 10% developing persistent symptomsRecent studies suggest that some individuals are genetically predisposed to developing PI-IBS, with some people demonstrating a specific cytokine response to infection4.

It is important to note that women appear to have more frequent and severe IBS symptoms during menses compared to other phases of the menstrual cycle and that female gender is a significant independent risk factor for the development of IBS7.

Diagnosis and Investigations

Adult patients who present to their general practitioner (GP) with lower gastrointestinal tract disorders account for one in 20 of all general practice consultations. The possibility of sinister conditions such as colorectal cancer or inflammatory bowel disease may create diagnostic uncertainty and reluctance for the doctor to attribute the symptoms to IBS. In the United Kingdom up to 29% of patients with IBS are referred to a specialist but the majority of these will return to their GP for long term management6.

Primary care differs from specialist care because the GP’s greater familiarity with the patient, and their previous consultations, enable presenting problems to be seen in context rather than in isolation. Furthermore, it involves the first contact for care of problems at a stage when they are likely to be poorly defined. Lastly, primary care is characterised by a biopsychosocial model of care that takes into account the context of the person’s problem. These characteristics are especially important when managing chronic disorders, such as IBS, where there is a high priority on continuity of care6.

There is currently no biochemical, histopathological or radiological diagnostic test for IBS. The diagnosis is based principally on symptom assessment. The Rome III criteria (Figure 1) is the most recent, updated and universal diagnostic criteria for IBS. However, although the Rome III criteria are widely used in clinical studies, it is not used by most cliniciansIn fact, most primary care physicians are not aware of diagnostic criteria for IBS and about one third of secondary care doctors do not use them in practice6.

IBS patients are grouped on the basis of the most predominant bowel symptom as diarrhoea- predominant, constipation-predominant, a mixture of both diarrhoea and constipation, and un-subtyped IBS in patients with an insufficient abnormality of stool consistency to meet the criteria for the other sub-groups. Approximately one third of patients have diarrhoea- predominant, one third have constipation-predominant, and the remainder have a mixture of both diarrhoea and constipation. The classification of IBS patients into sub-groups is useful for clinical practice, but it is common for IBS patients to switch from one subtype to another over time. More than 75% of IBS patients change to either of the other 2 subtypes at least once over a 1-year period2,10.

Figure 1 - Rome III diagnostic criteria* for IBS 6

Recurrent abdominal pain or discomfort** at least 3 days a month in the past 3 months, associated with two or more of the following:

  • Improvement with defecation

  • Onset associated with a change in frequency of stool

  • Onset associated with a change in form (appearance) of stool

* Criteria fulfilled for the past 3 months with symptom onset at least 6 months before diagnosis

** “discomfort” means an uncomfortable sensation not described as pain

According to the National Institute for Health and Clinical Excellence (NICE), healthcare professionals should consider assessment for IBS if a patient presents with any of the following symptoms for at least six months11:

  • abdominal pain/discomfort
  • bloating
  • or a change in bowel habit

NICE has also given the following guideline pertaining to “red flag” indicators. All people presenting with possible IBS symptoms should be asked if they have any of the following indicators. Referral to secondary care should be made if any are present11:

  • unintentional and unexplained weight loss
  • rectal bleeding
  • family history of bowel or ovarian cancer
  • change in bowel habit to looser and/or more frequent stools persisting for more than 6 weeks in a person aged over 60 years.

Furthermore, all patients presenting with IBS symptoms should be appropriately assessed and clinically examined for the following 'red flag' indicators. A referral should be made to secondary care if any are present11:

  • Anaemia
  • Abdominal masses
  • Rectal masses
  • Inflammatory markers for inflammatory bowel disease
  • Serum CA125 should be measured in women with symptoms that suggest ovarian cancer

In addition, NICE have stated that IBS should be considered only if the person has abdominal pain or discomfort that is either relieved by defecation or associated with altered bowel frequency or stool form. This should be accompanied by at least two of the following four symptoms11:

  • altered stool passage (straining, urgency, incomplete evacuation)
  • abdominal bloating (more common in women), distension, tension or hardness
  • symptoms made worse by eating
  • passage of mucus

Other features such as lethargy, nausea, backache and bladder symptoms are common in people with IBS, and may be used to support the diagnosis.

According to NICE, patients who meet the IBS diagnostic criteria should have the following tests to exclude other diagnoses (Figure 2):

Figure 2 11 - Tests to exclude other diagnoses

Full blood count (FBC)
Erythrocyte sedimentation rate (ESR) or plasma viscosity
C-reactive protein (CRP)
Antibody testing for coeliac disease (endomysial antibodies [EMA] or tissue transglutaminase [TTG])

The value of serological tests for coeliac disease (EMA or TTG antibodies) in patients with IBS diarrhoea-predominant depends on the population and is generally considered cost-effective if the incidence of coeliac disease is above 1%. It is therefore likely to be beneficial in the United Kingdom, where up to 3% of cases of IBS diarrhoea-predominant in primary care have coeliac disease6.

The following tests are not necessary to confirm diagnosis in people who meet the IBS diagnostic criteria11:

  • Ultrasound
  • Rigid/flexible sigmoidoscopy
  • Colonoscopy/barium enema
  • Thyroid function test
  • Faecal ova and parasite test
  • Faecal occult blood
  • Hydrogen breath test (for lactose intolerance and bacterial overgrowth)

It is important to note that IBS is associated with several other conditions. At least half of IBS patients can be described as depressed, anxious, or hypochondriacal. In addition, between 20% and 50% of IBS patients have fibromyalgia. Furthermore, IBS is common in several chronic pain disorders, being present in 51% of patients with chronic fatigue syndrome, in 64% with temporomandibular joint disorder, and in 50% with chronic pelvic pain. The lifetime rates of IBS in patients with these syndromes are even higher. Patients with such co-morbidities generally have more severe IBS. A careful history to identify such associated disorders is helpful in identifying patients who are likely to have severe IBS and associated psychiatric disorder6.

Management

The treatment of IBS is determined by the patient’s most troublesome symptoms. Although there is overlap in the therapies offered to the different IBS sub-groups, treatment decisions are primarily based on the frequency and severity of symptomsThe management discussed in this section is largely based on the NICE guidelines11.

Dietary and lifestyle advice

People with IBS should be given information about the importance of self-help in effectively managing their IBS. This should include information on general lifestyle, physical activity, diet and symptom-targeted medication. Healthcare professionals should assess the physical activity levels of people with IBS (ideally using the General Practice Physical Activity Questionnaire). People with low activity levels should be given advice to encourage them to increase their activity levels. Healthcare professionals should also encourage people with IBS to make the most of their available leisure time and to create time for relaxation11.

Figure 3 summarises the general advice that should be given to patients regarding their diet and nutrition. If diet continues to be considered a major factor in a person's symptoms and they are following general lifestyle/dietary advice, they should be referred to a dietician for further advice and treatment, including single food avoidance and exclusion diets. Such advice should only be given by a dietician11.

Probiotics are live microorganisms which when taken in sufficient quantities, confer a health benefitPeople with IBS who try probiotics should be advised to take the product for at least 4 weeks while monitoring the effect. Probiotics should be taken at the dose recommended by the manufacturer11.

Figure 3 - Diet and nutrition should be assessed and the following general advice given 11

Have regular meals and take time to eat
Avoid missing meals or leaving long gaps between eating
Drink at least eight cups of fluid per day, especially water or other non-caffeinated drinks, for example herbal teas
Restrict tea and coffee to three cups per day
Reduce intake of alcohol and fizzy drinks
It may be helpful to limit intake of high-fibre food (such as wholemeal or high-fibre flour and breads, cereals high in bran, and whole grains such as brown rice)
Reduce intake of 'resistant starch' (starch that resists digestion in the small intestine and reaches the colon intact), which is often found in processed or re-cooked foods
Limit fresh fruit to three portions per day (a portion should be approximately 80 g)
People with diarrhoea should avoid sorbitol, an artificial sweetener found in sugar-free sweets (including chewing gum) and drinks, and in some diabetic and slimming products.
People with wind and bloating may find it helpful to eat oats (such as oat-based breakfast cereal or porridge) and linseeds (up to one tablespoon per day).
Healthcare professionals should review the fibre intake of patients, adjusting (usually reducing) it while monitoring the effect on symptoms. People with IBS should be discouraged from eating insoluble fibre (for example, bran). If an increase in dietary fibre is advised, it should be soluble fibre such as ispaghula powder or foods high in soluble fibre (for example, oats)

Pharmacological therapy

Healthcare professionals should consider prescribing antispasmodics for patients. These should be taken as required, alongside dietary and lifestyle advice. Laxatives should be considered for the treatment of constipation, but patients should avoid taking lactulose. Patients should be advised how to adjust their doses of laxative or antimotility agent according to the clinical response. The dose should be titrated according to stool consistency, with the aim of achieving a soft, well-formed stool (corresponding to Bristol Stool Form Scale type 4). Loperamide should be the first choice of antimotility agent for diarrhoeaOne advantage of loperamide is its peripheral site of action with little penetration of the blood brain barrier and thus, little potential for CNS side effects or habituation4.

Psychotropics possess a variety of peripheral and central effects which make them attractive treatments for IBS. These effects include modulation of pain perception, mood stabilisation, treatment of associated psychiatric conditions, and possible direct effects on GI motility and secretionHealthcare professionals should consider tricyclic antidepressants (TCAs) as second-line treatment for patients if laxatives, loperamide or antispasmodics have not helped. Treatment should be started at a low dose (5–10 mg equivalent of amitriptyline), which should be taken once at night and reviewed regularly. The dose may be increased, but does not usually need to exceed 30 mg11.

Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) should be considered only if TCAs have been ineffective. The anticholinergic effects of TCAs and their ability to prolong intestinal transit times are the reasons they are particularly preferred over SSRIs in IBS diarrhoea-predominant. Furthermore, given the propensity of SSRIs to commonly cause GI adverse events of nausea, vomiting, and diarrhoea, indicate that TCAs may have more utility in IBS diarrhoea-predominant than SSRIs12. Healthcare professionals should take into account the possible side effects when prescribing TCAs or SSRIs. After prescribing either of these drugs for the first time at low doses, the patient should be followed up after 4 weeks and then at 6–12 monthly intervals11.

Psychological interventions

Anxiety and depression are common in IBS and patients report a correlation between stress and their symptoms, providing a rationale for psychological therapyReferral for psychological interventions (cognitive behavioural therapy, hypnotherapy and/or psychological therapy) should be considered for people with IBS who do not respond to pharmacological treatments after 12 months and who develop a continuing symptom profile (refractory IBS).11 Hypnotherapy reduces patient anxiety and improves symptom control in the majority of patients with refractory IBS. The benefits extend well beyond symptom control and include improvements in quality of life and reduction in emotional distress13. Data from general practice shows that hypnotherapy is effective during the first three months, although the effect is less marked after that6.

Prognosis of IBS depends on the length of the history, those with a long history being less likely to improveFollow-up should be agreed between the healthcare professional and the patient based on the response of the person's symptoms to interventions. The emergence of any 'red flag' symptoms during management and follow-up should prompt further investigation and/or referral to secondary care11.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
ALI KHANBHAI, MB ChB DRCOG, GP VTS ST2 Trainee, Queen's Hospital, Rom Valley Way, Romford, Essex, RM7 0AG, United Kingdom. DALJIT SINGH SURA, MBBS BSc DRCOG DFSRH MRCGP, General Practitioner, North Street Medical Care, Romford, RM1 4QJ, United Kingdom.
Corresponding Author Details: 
ALI KHANBHAI, GP VTS ST2 Trainee, Queen's Hospital, Rom Valley Way, Romford, Essex, RM7 0AG, United Kingdom.
Corresponding Author Email: 
ali.dh.kh@gmail.com
References
References: 
  1. DiBonaventura M, Prior M, Prieto P, et al. Burden of constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome (IBS-C) in France, Italy, and the United Kingdom. Dove Press. Clinical and Experimental Gastroenterology. Nov 2012
  2. El-Salhy M. Irritable bowel syndrome: Diagnosis and pathogenesis. World Journal of Gastroenterology 2012 October 7; 18(37): 5151-5163
  3. Ford AC. Irritable Bowel Syndrome. Clinical Evidence 2010;01:410
  4. Chey WD, Maneerattaporn M, Saad R. Pharmacologic and Complementary and Alternative Medicine Therapies for Irritable Bowel Syndrome. Gut and Liver 2011 September, Vol. 5, No. 3, 253-266
  5. Saito YA, Schoenfeld P. The epidemiology of irritable bowel syndrome in North America: a systematic review. American Journal of Gastroenterology 2002 Aug;97(8):1910-5
  6. Spiller R, Aziz Q, Creed F, et al. Guidelines on the irritable bowel syndrome: mechanisms and practical management. Gut 2007;56:1770–1798
  7. Adeyemo MA, Spiegel BMR, Chang L. Meta-analysis: do irritable bowel syndrome symptoms vary between men and women? Alimentary Pharmacology & Therapeutics 2010 September ; 32(6): 738–755
  8. Saito YA. The Role of Genetics in IBS. Gastroenterology Clinics of North America. March 2011;40(1): 45–67
  9. Farup PG, Sperber AD, Simr M. Irritable Bowel Syndrome. Gastroenterology Research and Practice. Volume 2012  (Article ID 612479)
  10. Drossman DA, Morris CB, Hu Y, et al. A prospective assessment of bowel habit in irritable bowel syndrome in women: defining an alternator. Gastroenterology 2005;128:580–589
  11. Irritable bowel syndrome in Adults. Diagnosis and management of irritable bowel syndrome in primary care. National Institute for Health and Clinical Excellence (NICE). February 2008
  12. Olden KW. Targeted therapies for diarrhea-predominant irritable bowel syndrome. Dove press. Clinical and experimental gastroenterology. May 2012
  13. Ford MJ, Dobbin A. Hypnosis and the management of patients with refractory IBS. Journal of the Royal College of Physicians 2006; 36:293–298 

Gastrointestinal bleeding in spinal injuries patient: Is prophylaxis essential?

Authors
Fahim Anwar, Ahmad Al-Khayer, Hoda El-Mahrouki and Muriell Purcell
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2013;6(1):a607
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Introduction: Acute gastrointestinal (GI) ulcerations and erosions are common in major trauma victims and in intensive care units. The reported incidence of gastrointestinal haemorrhage in acute spinal cord injuries is between 5 and 22%.
Aims: This study aims to review prophylactic management of  GI bleeding after spinal cord injury at the Queen Elizabeth National Spinal Injuries Unit, Scotland and to analyse the morbidity and mortality associated with GI bleeding.
Setting: Model spinal injury centre in Sctoland. A policy of stress ulcer prophylaxis is followed in all patients admitted to this centre.
Material and Methods: Retrospective review of case notes of patients with a clnincally significant GI bleed from January 2006 to May 2008.
Results: A total of 360 new injury patients were admitted. 19  (5.2%) had a clinically significant GI bleed during the study period. There were 2 females and 17 males with a mean age of 51.2 years.  Cervical spine injury was present in 12 cases 63.1%. Eight (42.1%) patients underwent endoscopic treatment and 3(15.7%) patients required a had laprotomy. One death (5.2%) was reported.
Conclusion: Gastrointestinal haemorrhage is potentially a serious complication in spinal cord injured patients. Appropriate prophylaxis, early diagnosis and prompt management may help avoiding a possible fatality.   

Keywords: 
Gastrointestinal, bleeding, spinal injuries.

Introduction

Acute gastrointestinal ulcerations and erosions (stress ulcers) are common in major trauma victims and in intensive care units. In fact, 75% of all critically ill admissions may have endoscopic evidence of gastroduodenal or upper gastrointestinal bleeding1. The bleeding could be in mutiple forms such as haematemesis,coffee ground aspirates, melaena, or haematochezia. Clinically significant haemorrhage causes hypotension and tachycardia and requires blood transfusion. Aggressive management is required in order to improve the outcomes of this potentially fatal complication. Prevention of stress ulcers helps reduce the morbidity and mortality of major bleeding2. Multiple causes may be responsible for gastrointestinal ulceration in patients with spinal cord injury1. Furthermore, steroids, thrombophylactic agents, anticoagulants and heavy cigarette smoking may act as predisposing factors to gastrointestinal bleed.

The aim of this study was to review our practice of stress ulcer prophylaxis after spinal cord injury and analyse morbidity and mortality associated with stress ulcer bleeding.

Patients and Methods

The Queen Elizabeth National Spinal Injuries Unit is the sole spinal cord injury centre in Scotland. It serves a population of 5.1 million and admits approximately 175 acute spinal injuries patients per year.

This study is retrospective. Only cases of life threatening or massive gastrointestinal haemorrhage were included. The period studied is between January 2006 and May 2008.

The department policy is to start all patients on Ranitidine 150 mg twice daily provided they are not on alternative medications before their admission, in which case the policy is to continue with the original pre admission medication.

Clinical notes of included patients were reviewed and information on patient’s demographics, cause and level of injury, past medical history, preadmission medications, clotting profile, prophylaxis, and management of bleeding were collected.

Results

A total of 360 patients were admitted. Out of them 19 (2 Female:17 Male) met the inclusion criteria as they suffered a life threatening GI bleed or major haemorrhage. The age range was 19 to 78 years with a mean age of 51.2 years. The majority of patients had a cervical spine injury (63%) followed by lumbar (21%) and thoracic (16%) spine injuries . Fall down stairs was the most common cause of injury occurring in 6 (31.5%) patients followed by road traffic accidents (26.3%) and fall from a height (21%). One patient suffered spinal injury whilst playing rugby and 1 patient suffered a cycling accident. The majority of cases (17 out 19) were admitted with acute injuries. However, 2 patients were admitted for complications of chronic injuries (one with a post surgical abscess and one with pressure sores). The various causes of spinal injuries are shown in table 1.

The American Spinal Injury Association (ASIA) impairment scales of all 19 patients are shown in Table 2. Associated injuries were encountered in 4 (21%) of patients. These associated injuries include sternum fracture, rib fractures, clavicle fracture, tendon injury and a calcaneum fracture. Significant past medical history was found in 14 (73.6%) patients whereas 5 (26.4%) did not have any previous medical illness. The list of all the significant past medical problems is shown in Table 3.

4 (21%) patients were already taking Omeprazole before admission, whereas 2 (10.5%) were taking Ranitidine and 1 (5.2%) patient was taking Lansoprazole.

7 out of 19 patients (36.8%) had either one or two episodes of significant coffee ground vomiting, 6 (31.5%) patients had an episode of haematemesis and 4 (21%) patients had combined coffee ground vomiting and haematemesis. Two (10.5%) patients had positive nasogastric aspirate for bleeding.

All 19 patients were started on intravenous Omeprazole and Sucralfate was added in 13 patients. Low molecular weight heparin, Ibuprofen and Aspirin was discontinued in all patients. Six (31.5%) patients were transfused 40 units of fresh frozen plasma and packed red cells (Figure 1). Eight patients (42.1%) underwent endoscopic treatment (Table 4) and 3 (15.7%) patients underwent laparotomy. There was one (5.2%) fatality reported.

Table 1:Causes of Spinal Cord Injury

Cause of Injury Number of Patients Percentage
Fall from stairs 6 31.5%
Road traffic accidents 5 26.3%
Fall from height 4 21%
Rugby injury 1 5.2%
Cycling accident 1 5.2%
Old injury admitted with skin problem 1 5.2%
Post surgical abscess 1 5.2%

Table 2:American Spinal Injury Association Impairment Scale

ASIA Impairment Scale Number of Patients Percentage
A= Complete: No motor or sensory function is preserved in the sacral segments S4-S5. 3 15.7%
B=Incomplete: Sensory but not motor function is preserved below the neurological level and includes the sacral segments S4-S5 1 5.2%
C=Incomplete: Motor function is preserved below the neurological level, and more than half of key muscles below the neurological level have a muscle grade less than 3 10 52.6%
D=Incomplete: Motor function is preserved below the neurological level, and at least half of key muscles below the neurological level have a muscle grade of 3 or more 2 10.5%
E=Normal: motor and sensory function are normal 3 15.7%

Table 3: Previous Risk Factors in Spinal Cord Injured Patients with Stress Ulcers

Adverse Factor Number of Patients with the Problem
Smoking 13 (68.4%)
Alcohol 5 (26.3%)
Reflux Oesophagitis 4 (21%)
Hypertension 3 (15.8%)
Diabetes Mellitus 3 (15.8%)
Hiatus Hernia 2 (10.5%)
Ischemic Heart Disease 2 (10.5%)
Asthma 1 (5.3%)
Duodenal Ulcers 1 (5.3%)
Anaemia 1 (5.3%)
Pyloric Stenosis 1 (5.3%)

Table 4:Endoscopic Findings, Procedures and Outcome

Number of Patients Endoscopic findings, Procedures and Outcome
2 Bleeding Duodenal Ulcer injected with adrenaline Bleeding stopped
1 Had Endoscopy twice and bleeding Duodenal Ulcer injected with adrenaline on both occasions Continuous bleeding Underwent Laparotomy and over Sewing of the ulcer
1 Endoscopic findings were Oesophagitis, Hiatus Hernia and superficial ulcerations No procedure performed Treated Conservatively
1 Bleeding Duodenal Ulcer injected with adrenaline Continuous bleeding Prepared for Laparotomy but could not survive
1 Bleeding Duodenal Ulcer injected with adrenaline Bleeding stopped Barrett’s oesophagus was found and biopsied but biopsy results were negative
2 Bleeding Duodenal Ulcer injected with adrenaline Continuous bleeding Laparotomy and over sewing

Figure 1: Packed Red Cells and Fresh frozen Plasma Transfusion Units Patients
 

Discussion

The development of “stress” ulceration in the upper GI tract has been part of critical care folklore for a long time. In 1823 Curling described a series of severe duodenal ulceration associated with burns3; in 1832 Cushing reported ulcer disease associated with surgery and trauma4In the early years of intensive care, a strong association between severity of illness and the incidence of GI bleeds was established. Patients who had major bleeds had a high mortality rate and, consequently, prophylaxis against this complication has become a central issue in ICU care.

Gastrointestinal haemorrhage in patients with spinal cord disease was not reported until 1933 when Polstorff described gastric ulceration in an epileptic patient with spontaneous hematomyelia5. El Marsi and colleagues in 1982 reported 5.5% incidence of gastrointestinal bleeding in acute spinal cord injury patients6. Lesions of the spinal cord including traumatic, viral and infectious have been described with gastrointestinal bleeding7. It has been found mainly associated with injury to the cervical spinal cord8.

Controversy still exists regarding the appropriate prophylaxis of stress ulcers in trauma patients. There have been numerous randomized, controlled trials and several meta-analyses evaluating the use of drug therapy for stress ulcer prophylaxis in trauma patients9. One meta-analysis concluded that Sucralfate is as effective as pH-altering medications in preventing stress ulcer bleeding10. There is currently no large study that proves the superiority of proton pump inhibitors over H2- receptor antagonists for stress ulcer prophylaxis 11, 12. A survey of all the Level I trauma centers in the United States by Barletta et al9 revealed that H2-receptor blockers were the preferred agents. It is important to mention that some studies have questioned the need for prophylaxis altogehter but these were mainly retrospective studies that primarily evaluated medical patients as compared to trauma patients13, 14, 15, 16. The reported incidence of gastrointestinal haemorrhage in the medical literature in acute spinal cord injuries is between 5 and 22% 6, 17,18. In our study 19 out of 360 patients (5.2%) suffered a major bleed from the gastrointestinal tract. This incidence is similar to lower percentage reported in the medical literature17, 18. The strict adherence to the department policy of early prophylaxis for all admitted patients could be the reason for this low percentage of significant bleeding.

It is interesting to note that despite the increasing use of steroids and anticoagulants in the last decade, the incidence of gastrointestinal bleeding in acute spinal cord injuries have remained the same. The possible reason for this could be the increased awareness of this condition by spinal cord injury specialists and the regular prophylaxis initiated in the early phases of the injury. Our unit aims to admit patients as soon as they are fit for transfer and approximately 50% of our patients are transferred within the 48 hours of their injury from the peripheral hospitals. The referring hospitals are advised to commence H2 receptor antagonist at the time of referral.

Increasing use of antacids, H2 receptor antagonists and proton pump inhibitors in primary care19 may also contribute to the reduction of the incidence of gastrointestinal bleeding in patients with spinal cord injuries. This assumption is supported by our study as 7 (36.8%) patients in our study were already on these medications prior to their spinal cord injury.

The aetiology of gastroduodenal bleeding in spinal cord injury is multifactorial including, synergetic effects of the stress of the accident along with added effects of concomitant surgery, sepsis, unopposed reduced vagal tone and mucosal ischemia20. Also prolonged mechanical ventilation and coagulopathy has been shown to be associated with increased risk of stress ulcers in spinal injuries21.Other identified risk factors include multiple injuries, acute renal failure and use of high dose steroids22. Croft23 in 1977 first described the dynamics of the surface epithelium in the stomach. He reported that various agents were responsible for the damage of the gastric mucosa; stress, steroids and uraemia were causing decrease in the production of the mucosal cells; and alcohol and aspirin were causing increase in the shed of the gastric mucosal cells. This serious complication usually develops during the first four weeks after the spinal cord injury20,24. However, the period of greatest risk for gastrointestinal haemorrhage is reported to be between the fourth and tenth day after the injury8Nuseilben also reported focal ischemia of the gastric mucosa as early as 24 hours following the acute spinal cord injuries25.

Spinal injuries seldom occur in isolation; in a study by Silver26 in 1985 a 15% incidence of associated injuries was reported. The incidence of associated injuries in our study was 21%.

In a study by Walters and Silver1 all patients that bled had a combination of at least 3 risk factors. In our study 73.6% of patients who developed gastroduodenal bleeding had significant history of risk factors with smoking (68.4%) and alcohol (26.3%) being the major contributors. The other risk factors in our study were reflux oesophagitis (21%), hypertension (15.8%), diabetes mellitus (15.8%), hiatus hernia (10.5%) and ischemic heart disease (10.5%). However, only 7 (36.8%) patients had a combination of three or more risk factors at the time of admission. The reason for this decreased incidence as compared to Walter and Silver1 is difficult to explain.

In this study the majority of patients with gastrointestinal bleeding had cervical cord injuries (63.1%) as compared to thoracic and lumbar spine injuries. Kewalramani20 also showed predominance of gastrointestinal bleeding in patients with cervical cord injuries. This favours the neurogenic hypothesis as a major cause of gastrointestinal bleeding following the spinal injury 20.

Finally, there is no consensus, in literature, over the discontinuation of stress ulcer prophylaxis. Some studies suggest the continuation of prophylaxis throughout the duration of the critical illness or intensive care unit stay27, 28, 29.

Conclusion:

Gastrointestinal haemorrhage is a serious complication in spinal cord injured patients. Appropriate prophylaxis, early diagnosis and prompt management may help to avoid a possible fatality. Patients with spinal cord injury especially with cervical cord injury are at a high risk of gastrointestinal bleeding at all times even during period of rehabilitation30, 31. All acute spinal cord injured patients and patients who are undergoing rehabilitation who become critically ill may benefit from receiving chemical prophylaxis for stress ulceration. The duration of treatment is ill defined but is maybe better to continue while risk factors are present. Prevention could be the cornerstone in the overall management of this problem.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
FAHIM ANWAR, MRCSEd, FEBPRM, Consultant in Rehabilitation Medicine, Addenbrooke’s Hospital, Cambridge, CB2 0QQ, UK. AHMAD AL-KHAYER, MRCS, FEBPRM, Consultant in Rehabilitation Medicine, Al-Ahli Hoospital, Doha, Qatar. HODA EL-MAHROUKI, Specialist Registrar, Southern General Hospital, Glasgow, G51 4TF, UK. MURIELL PURCELL, MRCP, Consultant in Spinal Injuries, Queen Elizabeth Spinal Injuries Unit, Southern General Hospital, Glasgow, G51 4TF, UK.
Corresponding Author Details: 
DR FAHIM ANWAR, MRCSEd, FEBPRM, Consultant in Rehabilitation Medicine, Addenbrooke’s Hospital, Hills Road, Box 248, Cambridge, CB2 0QQ, UK.
Corresponding Author Email: 
fanwar10@gmail.com
References
References: 
  1. Walters K, Silver JR. Gastrointestinal bleeding in patients with acute spinal injuries. Int. Rehabil.Med.1985; 8,44-47.
  2. Zuckerman GR, Shuman R. Therapeutic goals and treatment options for prevention of stress ulcer syndrome. Am J Med 1987; 18: 83(6A): 29-35.
  3. Curling TB. On acute ulceration of the duodenum in cases of burns. M Clin Tr London 1842; 25: 260-281.
  4. Cushing H. Peptic ulcers and the interbrain. Surg.Gynaecol.Obstet 1932; 1.
  5. Polstorff F. Uber eine seltene Verletzung in epileptischen Anfall mit , Ausgang, gleichzeitig Beitrag zur Entstehung des runden Magengeschwtirs. Psychiatr Neurol Wochenschr 35:566-570, 1933.
  6. Masri WE, Cochrane P, Silver JR. Gastrointestinal bleeding in patients with acute spinal injuries. Injury 1982 Sep; 14(2):162-7.
  7. Perret G, Solomon A: Gastrointestinal haemorrhage and cervical cord injuries. Proceedings of the 17th VA Spinal Cord Injury Conference,1969, pp 106-110.
  8. Leramo OB, Tator, CH, Hudson AR. Massive gastroduodenal haemorrhage and perforation in acute spinal cord injury. Surg Neurol 1982; 3: 186-190.
  9. Barletta JF, Erstad BL, Fortune JB. Stress ulcer prophylaxis in trauma patients. Critical Care 2002; 6 (6): 526-530.
  10. Cook DJ, Reeve BK, Guyatt GH, Heyland DK, Griffith LE, Buckingham L, Tryba M. Stress ulcer prophylaxis in critically ill patients. JAMA 1996; 275:308-314.
  11. Balaban DH, Duckworth CW, Peura DA. Nasogastric omeprazole: effects on gastric pH in critically Ill patients. Am J Gastroenterol1997;92:79-83.
  12. Mallow S, Rebuck JA, Osler T, et al. Do proton pump inhibitors increase the incidence of nosocomial pneumonia and related infectious complications when compared with histamine-2 receptor antagonists in critically ill trauma patients? Curr Surg 2004;61:452-458.
  13. Devlin JW, Ben-Menachem T, Ulep SK, et al. Stress ulcer prophylaxis in medical ICU patients: annual utilization in relation to the incidence of endoscopically proven stress ulceration. Ann Pharmacother 1998;32:869-874.
  14. Faisy C, Guerot E, Diehl JL, et al. Clinically significant gastrointestinal bleeding in critically ill patients with and without stress-ulcer prophylaxis. Intensive CareMed 2003;29:1306-1313.
  15. Zandstra DF, Stoutenbeek CP. The virtual absence of stress-ulceration related bleeding in ICU patients receiving prolonged mechanical ventilation without any prophylaxis. A prospective cohort study. Intensive Care Med 1994;20:335-340.
  16. Zeltsman D, Rowland M, Shanavas Z, et al. Is the incidence of hemorrhagic stress ulceration in surgical critically ill patients affected by modern antacid prophylaxis? Am Surg 1996;62:1010-1013.
  17. Guttmann L. Spinal cord injuries. Comprehensive management and research. Blackwell, Oxford 1973.
  18. Miller LS, Stass WE, Herbison GJ. Abdominal problems in patients with spinal cord lesions. Archives of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation 1975; 49: 348-358.
  19. Martin RM, Lim AG, Kerry SM, Hilton SR. Trends in H2-receptor antagonists and proton pump inhibitors in primary care. Aliment Pharmacol Ther 1998; 12(8): 797-805.
  20. Kewalramani LS. Neurogenic gastroduodenal ulceration and bleeding associated with spinal cord injuries. J Trauma 1979;19: 259-265.
  21. Priebc HJ, Skillman JJ, Bushness LS. et al.Antacid versus cirnetidine in preventing acute gastrointestinal bleeding – a randomized trial in 75 critically ill patients. N EnglJMed 1980; 302: 426.
  22. Stremple JF. Mori H. Lev R. The stress ulcer syndrome. Current Problems in Surgery 1913; 4: 1-64.
  23. Croft DN. Cell turnover and loss and the gastric mucosal barrier. American Journal of Digestive Diseases 1977; 22 (4): 383-386.
  24. Wilmot CB, Walsh JJ. Abdominal emergencies in acute spinal cord injuries. Proceedings of the 19th VA Spinal Cord Injury Conference 1973; 202-205.
  25. Nuseiben JM. Stress ulceration in spinal injuries. In: Vinken PJ, Bruyn GW: Handbook ofclinical neurology 1976; 26. Amer. Elsevier Publishing Co. Inc., New York, 351.
  26. Silver JR, Morris WR, Otfinowski JS. Associated injuries in patients with spinal injury. Injury 2004; 12(3): 219-224.
  27. Simms HH, DeMaria E, McDonald L, et al. Role of gastric colonization in the development of pneumonia in critically ill trauma patients: results of a prospective randomized trial. J Trauma 1991; 31:531-536; discussion 536-537.
  28. Martin LF, Booth FV, Reines HD, et al. Stress ulcers and organ failure in intubated patients in surgical intensive care units. Ann Surg 1992; 215:332-337.
  29. Prod'hom G, Leuenberger P, Koerfer J, et al. Nosocomial pneumonia in mechanically ventilated patients receiving antacid, ranitidine, or sucralfate as prophylaxis for stress ulcer. A randomized controlled trial. Ann Intern Med 1994; 120:653-662.
  30. Chamey KJ, Jules GL, Comarr AE: General surgery problems in patients with spinal cord injuries, Arch Surg 1975; 110:1083-1088.
  31. Tanaka M, Uchiyama M, Kitamo M: Gastroduodenal disease in chronic spinal cord injuries. Arch Surg 1979; 114:185-187.

Management of Painful Peripheral Diabetic Neuropathy

Authors
Namita Arora and G Niraj
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2013;6(1):a606
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 
Diabetes Mellitus is an endocrine disorder which causes metabolic disturbance producing a state of hyperglycaemia. Hyperglycaemia adversely affects cardiovascular, renal, nervous and visual systems. The importance of good glycaemic control in these patients has been emphasised in literature to reduce the end organ damage. Diabetes can cause autonomic and peripheral neuropathy. The autonomic neuropathy can affect the cardiovascular, genitourinary and gastrointestinal systems. Peripheral neuropathy can cause acute and chronic sensorimotor neuropathy, which can cause significant morbidity in these patients affecting their daily activities and quality of life. It can be challenging to treat them because the pain can be resistant to the medication and the effective medication can be associated with adverse effects which the patients may find difficult to tolerate. It is very important to increase the dose of the drugs to their highest effective dose (within the therapeutic range of that drug) for each patient with a balance of the side effects caused by that drug in that patient. These patients often need more than one drug to provide adequate pain relief. There are guidelines and recommendations available to help the clinicians to use appropriate combination of available treatment options.

Epidemiology:

The WHO estimated that 171 million people had diabetes in the year 2000 and predicted this number to increase to 366 million in the year 2030. Given the increasing prevalence of obesity it is likely that these figures provide an underestimate of future diabetes prevalence1. Peripheral diabetic neuropathy (PDN) may be present in 60 to 65% diabetic patients, with 11% patients of diabetic neuropathy complaining of pain. The management of this condition can be particularly challenging as these patients may not get good response to the medications used for the treatment and the medications used are associated with side effects which the patients may find difficult to tolerate.

Pathophysiology:

Pathophysiology of PDN is complex and incompletely understood. Both peripheral and central processes contribute to the chronic neuropathic pain in diabetes.  Peripherally at the molecular level due to hyperglycaemia, glycosylated end products are generated, which deposit around the nerve fibres causing demyelination, axonal degeneration and reduction in nerve conduction velocity. Deposition of glycosylated end products around the capillary basement membrane causes basement membrane thickening and capillary endothelial damage, which in association with a hypercoaguable state causes peripheral arterial disease. The peripheral arterial disease leads to neuronal ischemia which worsens nerve damage. There also occurs depletion of NADPH by activation of NADPH oxidase causing increased oxidative stress and generation of oxidative free radicals which aggravate the nerve damage. Calcium and sodium channel dysfunction, changes in receptor expression are the other peripheral processes which cause further neuronal tissue injury. The nerve damage can cause neuronal hyperexcitability. Neurotropic factors are required for nerve regeneration. In diabetes there occurs a low level of both nerve growth factors and insulin-like growth factors resulting in impaired neuronal regeneration. This can lead to peripheral hyperexcitability. Central sensitization is cause by increased excitability at the synapse, which recruits several sub-threshold inputs and amplifies noxious and non-noxious stimuli. Loss of inhibitory interneurons, growth of non-damaged touch fibres into the territory of damaged pain pathways, increased concentration of neurotransmitters and wind up caused by NMDA receptors are responsible for central sensitization at the level of dorsal horn in the spinal cord2.

Clinical Presentation:

Chronic sensorimotor distal polyneuropathy is the most common type of diabetic neuropathy. Acute sensorimotor neuropathy is rare and is usually associated with diabetic ketoacidosis and acute neuritis caused by hyperglycaemia. Autonomic neuropathy is common and often under reported. It can affect cardiovascular, gastrointestinal and genitourinary system. The other presentations can be cranial neuropathies, thoraco-abdominal neuropathies or peripheral mononeuropathies involving median, ulnar, radial, femoral, lateral cutaneous nerve of the thigh or common peritoneal nerve.

The patients usually complain of one or more of the following symptoms. They can have a chronic continuous or intermittent pain described as burning, aching, crushing, cramping or gnawing pain. The pain can be associated with numbness. They can have brief abnormal stimulus evoked pain like allodynia or hyperalgesia. Some patients also complain of brief lancinating pains described as electrical or lightening pains which can be spontaneous or evoked. The symptoms typically start in the toes and feet and ascend in the lower limb over years and are worse at night. Diabetic distal polyneuropathy is typically described in glove and stocking distribution but the upper limb involvement is rare. On examination there can be paradoxically reduced sensation to light touch and pin prick in the area of pain. Examination can also show features of allodynia (pain caused by a stimulus that does not normally cause pain), hyperalgesia (pain of abnormal severity in response to a stimulus that normally produces pain), hyperpathia (painful reaction to a repetitive stimulus associated with increased threshold to pain), dysaesthesia (unpleasant abnormal sensation as numbness, pins and needles or burning), paraesthesia (abnormal sensation which is not unpleasant) or evoke electric shock like pains. There can be features of peripheral autonomic neuropathy including vasomotor changes like colour changes of feet which can be red, pale or cyanotic and temperature changes like warm or cold feet. With autonomic neuropathy there can also occur trophic changes which includes dry skin, callouses in pressure areas and abnormal hair and nail growth and sudomotor changes involving swollen feet with increased or decreased sweating. Mechanical allodynia is the most common type of allodynia, but there can be thermal allodynia described as cold or warmth allodynia. Patient often describes cold allodynia as the pain getting worse in cold weather and warmth allodynia can make the patient keep the effected limb cool by using fan or ice bags. There can be reduced joint position sense, reduced vibration sense, reduced temperature sensation and reduced ankle jerks.

Diagnosis:

The diagnosis of PDN can be made by clinical tests using pinprick, temperature and vibration perception (using a 128-Hz tuning fork). The feet should be examined for ulcers, calluses and deformities. Combinations of more than one test have >87% sensitivity in detecting PDN. Other forms of neuropathy, including chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy, B12 deficiency, hypothyroidism and uraemia, occur more frequently in diabetes and should be ruled out. If required these patients should be referred to a neurologist for specialized examination and testing3.

Treatment Options:

US Food and Drug Administration has approved duloxetine in 2004 and pregabalin in 2005 for the treatment of painful DPN. Amitriptyline, nortriptyline and imipramine are not licenced for the treatment of neuropathic pain.

NICE clinical guidance on pharmacological management of neuropathic pain in adults in non-specialist settings as shown in Figure 1, recommends duloxetine as the first line treatment, which if contraindicated amitriptyline is suggested to be the first line. Second line treatment is amitriptyline or pregabalin. Pregabalin can be used alone or in combination with either amitriptyline or duloxetine, which if ineffective the patient should be referred to specialist pain services. While awaiting the referral tramadol can be started as the third line treatment. NICE also recommends that these patients should be reviewed to titrate the doses of the medication started, to assess the tolerability, adverse effects, pain reduction, improvement in daily activities, mood, quality of sleep and the overall improvement caused by the medication as reported by the patient4.

The Mayo clinic recommends5 the first tier of drugs for peripheral diabetic neuropathy are duloxetine, oxycodone CR, pregabalin and tricyclic antidepressants. The second tier of drugs iscarbamazepine, gabapentin, lamotrigine, tramadol and venlafaxine extended release. The topical agents suggested are capsaicin and lidocaine.

“Evidence Based guideline on treatment of Painful Diabetic Neuropathy”, was formulated by American Academy of Neurology; American Association of Neuromuscular and Electrodiagnostic Medicine; American Academy of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation. A  systematic review of the literature between time period 1960 to 2008 was carried out. The review included the articles which looked at the efficacy of a given treatment either pharmacological or non-pharmacological to reduce pain and improve physical function and quality of life (QOL) in patients with PDN. They subsequently recommended that Pregabalin is established as effective and should be offered for relief of PDN (Level A). Venlafaxine, duloxetine, amitriptyline, gabapentin, valproate, opioids (morphine sulfate, tramadol, and oxycodone controlled-release), and capsaicin are probably effective and should be considered for treatment of PDN (Level B). Other treatments have less robust evidence or the evidence is negative. Effective treatments for PDN are available, but many have side effects that limit their usefulness, and few studies have sufficient information on treatment effects on function and quality of life6.

Non-pharmacological techniques:

Letícia et al. following their literature review on therapies used for PDN concluded that for non-pharmacological techniques like acupuncture, reiki, photic stimulation, electromagnetic stimulation of neural electrical stimulation, laser therapy, there is a lack of consensus about their effectiveness and there is scarce knowledge about them. They suggested new researches, including treatments for a longer period of time, with dosimetry control, and representative samples are necessary to discover the actual importance of these therapies for pain relief7.Spinal Cord Stimulators have however been shown to be effective and safe in severe resistant cases8,9.

Pharmacological Therapies:

Pregabalin: Pregabalin is a gamma aminobutyric acid analogue which binds to α2δ subunit of calcium channels and modulates them. Its starting dose is 150 mg/day with a maximum dose of 600 mg/day. As 98% of the drug is excreted unchanged in the urine, its dose is reduced in patients with renal impairment (creatinine clearance below 60 ml/min)10. A Cochrane Database Systematic Review in 2009 showed that Pregabalin was effective at daily doses of 300 mg, 450 mg and 600 mg, but a daily dose of 150 mg was generally ineffective. The NNT for at least 50% pain relief for 600 mg daily pregabalin dose compared with placebo was 5.0 (4.0 to 6.6) for PDN11.

Duloxetine: Duloxetine reduces the reuptake of serotonin and noradrenaline at the level of spinal cord, thereby potentiating the descending inhibitory pain pathways to reduce pain. It is started at a dose of 30 mg/day and its dose can be increased to 120mg/day10. Sultan et al. in their systematic review found that pain relief achieved with daily dose of 60 mg Duloxetine was comparable with daily dose of 120 mg of Duloxetine. The number needed to treat (NNT) for at least 50% pain relief at 12 to 13 weeks with duloxetine 60 mg versus placebo was 5.8 as compared to NNT of 5.7 for daily dose of 120 mg of duloxetine. The side effects reported with Duloxetine were reduction in appetite, nausea, constipation and somnolence12. Systematic Reviews and cohort studies have shown that duloxetine provides overall savings in terms of better health outcomes and reduction in opioid use, in comparison to gabapentin and pregabalin, tricyclic antidepressants and venlafaxine, in pain caused by PDN13, 14.

Gabapetin: Gabapentin is structurally related to gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA) but acts by binding to the alpha2-delta subunit of voltage-gated calcium channels and thereby reducing the transmission of neuronal signals. Gabapentin bioavailability is non-linear and it tends to decrease with increasing dose. Gabapentin is not bound to plasma proteins and has a high volume of distribution. It is eliminated unchanged by the kidneys so in elderly patients and in patients with impaired renal function, its dose must be reduced. Gabapentin can be started froma daily dose of 300 to 900 mg and the dose can be increased to a maximum daily dose of 3600 mg over 3 weeks period10.  Gabapentin provides good pain relief in about one third of patients when taken for neuropathic pain. Adverse events are frequent, but most of them are tolerable15.

Tricyclic Antidepressants (TCA): Amitriptyline and nortriptyline are the commonly used TCA for PDN. They may be used if there is no benefit from pregabalin or gabapentin and duloxetine. They may be used alone or in combination with pregabalin or gabapentin. In small RCTs, amitriptyline has been found to relieve pain better than placebo in patients with diabetic neuropathy10. Amitriptyline is a tricyclic antidepressant with marked anticholinergic and sedative properties. It increases the synaptic concentration of noradrenaline and serotonin in the CNS by inhibiting their re-uptake by the pre-synaptic neuronal membrane. For neuropathic pain it is started at 10-25 mg orally once daily at bed time initially and increased according to response to a maximum of 150 mg/day.

 TCA should be used with caution in patients with a history of epilepsy, cardiovascular disorders, deranged liver function, prostatic hypertrophy, history of urinary retention, blood dyscrasias, narrow-angle glaucoma or increased intra-ocular pressure. It’s other side-effects are agitation, confusion and postural hypotension in elderly patients10. Amitriptyline is the most studied TCA for DPN and has been compared with placebo, imipramine, and desipramine. Amitriptyline, when compared with placebo, reduced pain to a significant degree. Pain relief was evident as early as the second week of therapy, with greater pain relief noted at higher doses (at a mean dose of 90 mg). A decrease in pain was not associated with improvement in mood. A systematic review of the TCAs, including fewer than 200 patients, found no difference in efficacy between the agents16. Nortriptyline is associated with fewer adverse events than amitriptyline and therefore it should be preferred in elderly patients.

Opioids: The use of opioids in chronic neuropathic pain has been a topic of debate because of uncertainty about their effectiveness, the concerns about addiction problems, the loss of efficacy with their long term use due to development of tolerance with their long term use and the development of hyperalgesia associated with their use. Cochrane review of twenty-three trials of opiates was carried out. The short-term studies showed equivocal evidence, while the intermediate-term studies showed significant efficacy of opioids over placebo, in reducing the intensity of neuropathic pain. Adverse events of opioids were reported to be common but were not life threatening. The authors recommended the need for further randomized controlled trials to establish long-term efficacy, safety (including addiction potential) and effects on quality of life17.  In RCT Tramadol/Acetaminophen combination was shown to be associated with significantly greater improvement than placebo (p < or = 0.05) in reducing pain intensity, sleep interference and several measures of quality of life and mood18.  In another RCT, controlled release (CR) oxycodone was compared with placebo, CR oxycodone resulted in significantly lower mean daily pain, steady pain, brief pain, skin pain, total pain and disability. In this study the number needed to treat to obtain one patient with at least 50% pain relief is 2.619. Gabapentin and morphine combination in randomised controlled trial showed that the combination of the two drugs provided better analgesia at lower doses of each drug than either of the drugs used as a single agent20.

Capsaicin: Capsaicin is the active component of chilli peppers. Capsaicin works by releasing the pro-inflammatory mediators like substance P from the peripheral sensory nerve endings and thereby causes its depletion from the peripheral nerve. Pharmacological preparations of Capsaicin are available as 0.025% cream, 0.075% cream and 8% capsaicin patches10.  Repeated application of a low dose (0.075%) cream, or a single application of a high dose (8%) patch has been shown to provide a degree of pain relief in some patients with painful neuropathy. Common side effect includes local skin irritation which causes burning and stinging. It is often mild and transient but sometimes severe and not tolerated by the patients leading to withdrawal from treatment. Capsaicin rarely causes systemic adverse effects. Capsaicin can be used either alone or in combination with other treatment to provide useful pain relief in individuals with neuropathic pain21.

5% Lidocaine medicated plasters: A recent systematic review showed that 5% Lidocaine medicated plaster causes pain relief comparable to pain relief caused by amitriptyline, capsaicin, gabapentin and pregabalin in treatment of painful diabetic peripheral neuropathy. Lidocaine plaster being a topical agent may be associated with lesser clinically significant adverse events than the side effects of systemic agents. The need for further studies has been recommended by the reviewer as limited number and size of studies were included in the systematic review 22.

Conclusion:

The American Academy of Neurology, Mayo Clinic and NICE have both developed guidelines for treatment of peripheral diabetic neuropathic pain. There are several peripheral and central pathological mechanisms leading to the development of this condition and no single drug is available to target all these pathological mechanisms. Therefore often a combination of drugs is required for their management. Despite using a combination of medicines, managing these cases can be challenging. At the same time there is limited evidence on combination therapy in diabetic neuropathy and much work is required in this area. While using opioids for this condition the controversies over the use of opioids in non-malignant pain should be kept in mind and the advantages and disadvantages of using them should be discussed with the patients. Opioids should only be started with patient’s consensus. The treatment should be modified from the guidelines on an individual basis to achieve the optimal pain relief.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
NAMITA ARORA, FFPMRCA, FRCA, MD Anaesthesiology, Specialist Trainee 7, Cambridge University Hospitals NHS Foundation Trust, UK. G NIRAJ, FFPMRCA, FRCA, MD, Consultant in Anaesthesia & Pain Medicine, University Hospitals of Leicester NHS Trust, Honorary Clinical Lecturer Department of Health Sciences, University of Leicester, UK.
Corresponding Author Details: 
NAMITA ARORA, Specialist Trainee 7, Cambridge University Hospitals NHS Foundation Trust, UK.
Corresponding Author Email: 
namitaarora@hotmail.co.uk
References
References: 
  1. Wild S, Roglic G, Green A et al. Global prevalence of Diabetes: Estimates for the year 2000 and projections for 2030. Diabetes Care 2004;27(5):1047-53.
  2. Tavakoli M, Mojaddidi M, Fadavi H et al. Pathophysiology and treatment of painful diabetic neuropathy. Curr Pain Headache Rep. 2008;12(3):192-7.
  3. Boulton A, Vinik A, Arezzo J et al. Diabetic neuropathies: a statement by the American Diabetes Association. Diabetes Care 2005;28(4):956-62.
  4. Tan T, Barry P, Reken S et al. Pharmacological management of neuropathic pain in non-specialist settings: summary of NICE guidance. BMJ. 2010;24;340:c1079.doi: 10.1136/bmj.c1079
  5. Argoff C, Backonja M, Belgrade M et al. Consensus Guidelines: treatment and planning options. Diabetic peripheral neuropathic pain. Mayo Clin Proc. 2006;81(4 Suppl):S12-25.
  6. Bril V, England J, Franklin G et al. Evidence-based guideline: Treatment of painful diabetic neuropathy:  report of the American Academy of Neurology, the American Association of Neuromuscular and Electrodiagnostic Medicine, and the American Academy of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation. PMR. 2011;3(4): 345-52,352.e1-21. doi: 10.1016/j.pmrj.2011.03.008.
  7. Franco L, Ferreira Souza L, Costa Pessoa A et al. Nonpharmacologic therapies in diabetic neuropathic pain: a review. Acta Paul Enferm 2011;24(2):284-8.
  8. Tesfaye S, Watt J, Benbow S et al. Electric spinal cord stimulation for painful diabetic peripheral neuropathy. Lancet. 1996;21-28;348(9043):1698-701.
  9. Daousi C, Benbow S, MacFarlane I et al. Electrical spinal cord stimulation in the long term treatment of chronic painful diabetic neuropathy. Diabet Med. 2005; 22(4):393-8.
  10. http://www.medicines.org.uk/emc/
  11. Moore R, Straube S, Wiffen P et al. Pregabalin for acute and chronic pain in adults. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2009;8;(3):CD007076. doi: 10.1002/14651858. CD007076.pub2
  12. Sultan A, Gaskell H, Derry S et al. Duloxetine for painful diabetic neuropathy and fibromyalgia pain: systematic review of randomised trials. BMC Neurol. 2008;1;8:29. doi: 10.1186/1471-2377-8-29.
  13. Carlos F, Ramírez-Gámez J, Dueñas H et al. Economic evaluation of duloxetine as a first-line treatment for painful diabetic peripheral neuropathy in Mexico. J Med Econ. 2012;15(2):233-44.
  14. Wu N, Chen S, Hallett L et al. Opioid utilization and health-care costs among patients with  diabetic peripheral  neuropathic pain treated with duloxetine vs. other therapies. Pain Pract. 2011;11(1):48-56.
  15. Moore R, Wiffen P,  Derry S et al. Gabapentin for chronic neuropathic pain and fibromyalgia in adults. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2011;16;(3):CD007938. doi:10.1002/14651858.CD007938.pub2
  16. McQuay H, Tramèr M, Nye B et al. A systematic review of antidepressants in neuropathic pain. Pain. 1996;68(2-3):217-27.
  17. Eisenberg E, McNicol E, Carr D. Opioids for neuropathic pain. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2006;19;(3):CD006146.
  18. Freeman R, Raskin P, Hewitt D et al. Randomized study of tramadol/acetaminophen versus placebo in painful diabetic neuropathy. Curr Med Res Opin. 2007;23(1):147-61.
  19. Watson C, Moulin D, Watt-Watson J et al. Controlled-release oxycodone relieves neuropathic pain: a randomized controlled trial in painful diabetic neuropathy. Pain. 2003;105(1-2):71-8.
  20. Gilron I, Bailey J, Tu D et al. Morphine, Gabapentin, or their Combination for Neuropathic Pain. N Engl J Med. 2005;31;352(13):1324-34.
  21. Derry S, Lloyd R, Moore R et al. Topical capsaicin for chronic neuropathic pain in adults. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2009;7;(4):CD007393. doi: 10.1002/14651858.CD007393.pub2.
  22. Wolff R, Bala M, Westwood M et al. 5% lidocaine medicated plaster in painful diabetic peripheral neuropathy (DPN): a systematic review. Swiss Med Wkly. 2010;29;140(21-22):297-306. doi: smw-12995.

Persistent genital arousal disorder in a male: a case report and analysis of the cause

Authors
Rajkumar Kamatchi and Andrew Ashley-Smith
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2013;6(1):a605

A 54-year-old male presented to the psychosexual clinic with symptoms suggestive of persistent genital arousal disorder of 2years duration. Physical examination and investigations ruled out any underlying urological or neurological causes. He was treated with Diazepam and Pregabalin and his symptoms reduced in intensity.

Introduction:

Persistent genital arousal disorder (PGAD), also known as persistent sexual arousal syndrome (PSAS) or restless genital syndrome (ReGS), is recently recognised as a sexual health problem in western countries although it is not been considered as a physical or psychiatric disorder by DSM IV or ICD 10. PGAD is associated with constant, spontaneous and intrusive feelings of genital arousal in the absence of conscious sexual thoughts or stimuli.

The working definition of PGAD1,2 is as follows:

1) Persistent physical arousal in the genital area

2) in the absence of conscious thoughts of sexual desire or interests

3) associated with spontaneous orgasm or feelings that orgasm is imminent and

4) the symptoms not diminished by orgasm.

It may be present throughout the person’s life (primary PGAD) or develop at any age (secondary PGAD). It is associated with varying degrees of distress in the patients. This new disorder has been reported in women by numerous clinicians in the last decade. However, so far, there is only one report of two males suffering with ReGS in the literature.3 We report a case of PGAD in a male and aim to analyse the cause.

Case Report

A 54-year-old male was referred to the psychosexual clinic by an urologist with 2 years history of constant feelings of physical arousal in the genital area as if he was about to ejaculate. These feelings were associated with pain which was relieved to an extent after ejaculation. These symptoms started suddenly for the first time when he was browsing the internet and accidentally ended up in pornographic websites. But later on, the symptoms were constant without any sexual stimuli and he got some relief from attaining climax.

He described that the physical arousal in the genital area increased in intensity to a point he had to ejaculate to have some relief. He felt this “as if wanting to have climax all the time”. Post- ejaculation, he felt anxious, tired and nauseated for sometime, during which the symptoms intensified again that he needed climax. Initially this cycle repeated every 2-3 days but later on the frequency increased to 2-3 times a day. He achieved climax both by masturbation and sexual intercourse. He felt these ejaculations were unpleasant and not enjoyable. He felt frenzied if he couldn’t ejaculate and the post orgasmic feelings were severe if he avoided orgasm for a day or two. He described regular ejaculations led to less severe “come downs” but left him constantly drained.

His medical history included vasectomy four years ago with minor complication of painful scrotum which subsided fully with pain killers. He also had few urinary tract infections (UTI) in the past which were treated with antibiotics. He was initially seen by urologist who carried out physical examination which was noted to be normal. Then investigations including CT- KUB, CT- Abdomen, Urogram, Transrectal Ultrasound of prostate and seminal vesicles, Flexible Cystoscopy were done and no abnormalities noted. He also had MRI- Brain which was normal. He had no symptoms of hyperactive bladder and no varicocele was noted.

When he was seen in the psychosexual clinic, he was noted to be very anxious and expressed guilty feelings around the incident of watching pornography which initiated the onset of symptoms. There were no depressive or psychotic symptoms. Prior to attending this clinic he was prescribed duloxetine 30mgs by the urologist, which he took only for few weeks. He stopped it as there was no symptom relief. He was started on diazepam and pregabalin. The dose was increased to 2mgs qds of diazepam and 50mgs qds of pregabalin. His symptoms diminished gradually and now he remains mildly symptomatic although feeling “more in control”. He was also referred to psychologist and had an assessment. As he was not psychologically minded and unable to engage in sessions, he stopped attending.

Discussion

The clinical features in this man were consistent with the definition of PGAD. He had physical arousal symptoms, which were not related to sexual desire or thoughts and was causing severe distress to him. The symptoms were relieved by ejaculation to a certain extent. He was treated with diazepam and pregabalin which reduced the intensity of the symptoms.

There is an emerging literature on the pathophysiology, possible aetiological factors and the management options of PGAD. There are various associations reported including psychological4,5 and organic6-9 pathologies with some convincing evidence.

In this case, he suffered few UTI and a minor complication of painful scrotum following vasectomy, few years before the onset of PGAD. However he had a full urological and neurological work-up recently which didn’t show any underlying organic cause for his current symptoms. He suffered no previous depressive or anxiety disorder. Hence his current symptoms may be induced by anxiety which is further worsened by the fact that he became focussed on the genital arousal and attaining climax to relieve the pain. When he was prescribed diazepam and pregabalin, his anxiety eased and his physical symptoms diminished in intensity. However the possibility of an organic cause cannot be ruled out completely as he previously suffered sensory neuropathic pain following vasectomy. Further pregabalin is useful for both generalised anxiety and neuropathic pain. Therefore we conclude that his symptoms may be a result of interaction between physical and psychological factors. This suggests that PGAD could be a psychosomatic condition, which was already proposed as a cause for PGAD in women by Goldmeier and Leiblum.4

Similar to the causes for PGAD, there is few treatment modalities reported in the literature. These include treatment of the underlying organic causes if any found, electro-convulsive therapy (ECT) if co-morbid with mood symptoms,10 transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulation (TENS),3 cognitive behavioural therapy11 and medications like varenicline.2 We used anti-anxiety medications (diazepam and pregabalin) and achieved adequate symptom relief. This also supports the idea that PGAD could be a psychosomatic condition related to the peripheral nerves of the genito-urinary system.

This case is reported to confirm that PGAD also occurs in males, which is quite different from priapism and it could be a psychosomatic condition. More research is needed into the pathophysiology of PGAD and its management.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
RAJKUMAR KAMATCHI, MBBS, DMH, MRCPsych, ST6- General Adult Psychiatry trainee & Honorary Associate Clinical Teacher, Warwick Medical School, The Caludon Centre, Coventry, UK. ANDREW ASHLEY-SMITH, FRCPsych (SA), MRCPsych, MMedSci, Consultant Psychiatrist & Honorary Associate Clinical Professor, Warwick Medical School, The Caludon Centre, Coventry, UK.
Corresponding Author Details: 
DR RAJKUMAR KAMATCHI, The Caludon Centre, Coventry, UK, CV2 2TE.
Corresponding Author Email: 
rajkumaranjali@yahoo.com
References
References: 
  1. Goldmeier D, Meau A, Hiller J, Crowley T. Persistent genital arousal disorder: A review of the literature and recommendations for management. Int J STD AIDS 2009; 20/6:373-77
  2. Korda JB, Pfaus JG, Goldstein I. Persistent genital arousal disorder: A case report in a woman with lifelong PGAD where serendipitous administrations of varenicline tartate resulted in symptomatic improvement. J Sex Med 2009; 6:1479-86
  3. Waldinger MD, Venema PL, van Gils APG, de Lint GJ, Schweitzer DH. Stronger evidence for small fiber sensory neuropathy in restless genital syndrome: two case reports in males. J Sex Med 2011; 8:325-30
  4. Goldmeier D, Leiblum S. Interaction of organic and psychological factors in PGAD in women. A report of six cases. Int J STD AIDS 2008; 19:488-90
  5. Leiblum S, Goldmeier D. PGAD in women: case reports of association with antidepressant usage and withdrawal. J Sex Marital Therapy 2008; 34:1150-9
  6. Leiblum S, Seehuus M, Goldmeier D, Brown C. Psychological, medical and pharmacological correlates of PGAD. J Sex Med 2007; 4:1358-66
  7. Thorne C, Stuckey B. Pelvic congestion syndrome presenting as persistent genital arousal: A case report. J Sex Med 2008; 5:504-8
  8. Battaglia C, Venturoli S. PGAD and trazodone. Morphometric and vascular modifications of the clitoris. A case report. J Sex Med 2009; 6:2896-900
  9. Waldinger MD, Venema PL, van Gils APG, Schweitzer DH. New insights into restless genital syndrome: static mechanical hyperthesia and neuropathy of the nervus dorsalis clitoridis. J Sex Med 2009; 6:2778-87
  10. Korda JB, Pfaus JG, Kellner CH, Goldstein I. PGAD: case report of long term symptomatic management with ECT. J Sex Med 2009; 6:2901-9
  11. Hiller J, Heskster B. Couple’s therapy with cognitive behavioural techniques for PSAS. Sexual and Relationship Therapy 2007; 22:91-96

Recent advances in the management of major obstetric haemorrhage

Authors
Rajashree Chavan and M Y Latoo
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2013;6(1):a604

Introduction

Major Obstetric haemorrhage (MOH) remains one of the leading causes of maternal mortality & morbidity worldwide. In the 2003-2005 report of the UK Confidential Enquiries into Maternal Deaths, haemorrhage was the third highest direct cause of maternal death (6.6 deaths/million maternities) with the rate similar to the previous triennium 1, 2. Postpartum haemorrhage (PPH) accounts for the majority of these deaths. This triennium, 2006-2008, unlike in previous reports there has been a change in the rankings of direct deaths by cause. Deaths from haemorrhage have dropped, to sixth place, following genital tract sepsis, preeclampsia, thromboembolism, amniotic fluid embolism and early pregnancy deaths 3. A well-defined multidisciplinary approach that aims to act quickly has probably been the key to successful management of MOH. In the developing world, several countries have maternal mortality rates in excess of 1000 women per 100,000 live births, and WHO statistics suggests that 25 % of maternal deaths are due to PPH, accounting for more than 100,000 maternal deaths per year 4.The blood loss may be notoriously difficult to assess in obstetric bleeds 5, 6. Bleeding may sometimes be concealed & presence of amniotic fluid makes accurate estimation challenging.

Definition

MOH is variably defined as blood loss from uterus or genital tract >1500 mls or a decrease in haemoglobin of >4 gm/dl or acute loss requiring transfusion of >4 units of blood. Blood loss may be:

1. Antepartum: Haemorrhage after 24th week gestation & before delivery; for example: placenta praevia, placental abruption, bleeding from vaginal or cervical lesions.

2. Postpartum: Haemorrhage after delivery

  • Primary PPH: Within 24 hours of delivery, which is >500 mls following vaginal delivery & > 1000mls following a caesarean section 7.
  • Secondary PPH: 24 hours to 6 weeks post-delivery; for example: Uterine atony, retained products of conception, genital tract trauma, uterine inversion, puerperal sepsis, uterine pathology such as fibroids 8.

PPH can be minor (500-1000 mls) or major (> 1000 mls). Major PPH could be divided to moderate (1000-2000 mls) or severe (>2000 mls).

Causes

Causes of PPH may be conveniently remembered using 4 T’s as a mnemonic:

  • Tone(Uterine atony)
  • Tissue (retained products)
  • Trauma( cervical & genital tract trauma during delivery)
  • Thrombosis (coagulation disorder)

Other Risk factors include:-Prolonged labour, multiple pregnancy, polyhydramnios, large baby, obesity, previous uterine atony & coagulopathy.

Prevention

The most significant intervention shown to reduce the incidence of PPH is the active management of the third stage of labour (see below).Other measures to prevent or reduce the impact of MOH include

  • Avoidance of prolonged labour
  • Minimal trauma during assisted vaginal delivery
  • Detection & treatment of anaemia during pregnancy
  • Identification of placenta praevia by antenatal ultrasound examination.
  • Where facilities exist, magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) may be a useful tool and assist in determining whether the placenta is accreta or percreta. Women with placenta accreta/percreta are at very high risk of major PPH. If placenta accreta or percreta is diagnosed antenatally, there should be consultant-led multidisciplinary planning for delivery 9.

Active management of the third stage

This represents a group of interventions including early clamping of the umbilical cord, controlled cord traction for placental delivery & prophylactic administration of uterotonic at delivery (e.g. oxytocin) 10. Active management of the third stage is associated with a lower incidence of PPH and need for blood transfusion 11. A longer acting oxytocin derivative, carbetocin, is licensed in the UK specifically for the indication of prevention of PPH in context of caesarean delivery. Randomised trials suggest that a single dose (100 mcg) of carbetocin is at least as effective as oxytocin by infusion 12, 13.

Management of MOH

Pregnant women are often young, healthy & have an increased blood volume of up to 20 % at term and therefore likely to compensate well to haemorrhage until the circulating blood volume is very low 14. MEOWS are a useful bedside tool for predicting morbidity. A validation study of the CEMACH recommended modified early obstetric warning system (MEOWS) in all obstetric inpatients to track maternal physiological parameters, and to aid early recognition and treatment of the acutely unwell parturient.  In addition, blood loss may sometimes be concealed and difficult to calculate. More commonly massive haemorrhage may be obvious; signs other than revealed haemorrhage include:

  • Tachycardia
  • Hypotension( BP may not drop until significant blood is lost)
  • Pallor
  • Oliguria
  • Cool peripheries
  • Lower abdominal pain

Management of anticipated MOH

On some occasions, cases at high risk of MOH can be predicted; e.g. caesarean section in a lady with a low lying placenta and previous uterine scar. These cases may be at a risk of placenta accreta and massive blood loss.

  • 2 large bore IV cannulae
  • Rapid infusion device or pressure bags in theatre
  • Blood warmer & warming blanket
  • Blood cross-matched & available
  • Consider preoperative invasive monitoring
  • Consider cell salvage if available (see below)
  • Consider interventional radiological procedures if available ( see below)

Management of unanticipated MOH

Management involves four components, all of which must be undertaken SIMULTANEOUSLY: communication, resuscitation, monitoring and investigation, arresting the bleeding 9, 15. Most maternity units in UK have CODE RED bleep system for alerting MOH.

Communication & teamwork:

Communication and teamwork are essential in cases of both anticipated & unanticipated maternal haemorrhage. This includes:

  • Call for help. Alert the midwife-in-charge, senior obstetrician & anaesthetist.
  • Alert Blood transfusion service & haematologist.
  • Alert portering service for transport of blood samples & collection of blood products
  • Check blood is available. In the UK 2-4 units of O-neg blood is kept on labour ward for emergency use.
  • Allocate roles to team members.
  • Ensure departmental guidelines exist for the management of MOH & regularly practice ‘fire drills’.
  • Alert one member of the team to record events, fluids, drugs and vital signs 9.
  • The use of standard form of words (such as ‘on going major obstetric haemorrhage’, ‘we need compatible blood now or group specific blood’) 9.

Goals of management:

  • Early identification of maternal bleed and institution of major haemorrhage drill
  • Rapid access to infusion of fluid in first instance with rapid availability & administration of blood.
  • Avoidance/limitation of complications of massive blood transfusion namely: acid/base disturbance, transfusion related acute lung injury (TRALI), hypocalcaemia, hyperkalaemia, hypothermia & thrombocytopenia.
  • Efficient team working & management decision making.

Resuscitation & immediate management:

  • ABC, 100% oxygen
  • 2 large bore cannulae & bloods for X-match
  • Fluid resuscitation; crystalloid/colloid 2000mls via rapid infuser or pressure bags e.g. Level 1 Rapid infuser ( can achieve >500mls/min warmed fluid flow)
  • Fluid therapy and blood product transfusion 9
  • Crystalloid Up to 2 litres Hartmann’s solution
  • Colloid up to 1–2 litres colloid until blood arrives
  • Blood Crossmatched
  • If crossmatched blood is still unavailable, give uncrossmatched group-specific blood OR give ‘O RhD negative’ blood
  • Fresh frozen plasma 4 units for every 6 units of red cells or prothrombin time/activated partial thromboplastin time > 1.5 x normal (12–15 ml/kg or total 1litres)
  • Platelets concentrates if platelet count < 50 x 109
  • Cryoprecipitate If fibrinogen < 1 g/l
  • Thromboelastography and rotational thromboelastometry coagulation tests: In most cases, medical and transfusion therapy is not based on the actual coagulation state because conventional laboratory test results are usually not available for 45 to 60 minutes. Thromboelastography and rotational thromboelastometry are point-of-care coagulation tests. A good correlation has been shown between thromboelastometric and conventional coagulation tests, and the use of these in massive bleeding in non-obstetric patients is widely practiced and it has been proven to be cost-effective.
  • A 2006 guideline from the British Committee for Standards in Haematology 1, 4summarizes the main therapeutic goals of management of massive blood loss is to maintain:
    • Haemoglobin > 8g/dl
    • Platelet count > 75 x 109/l
    • Prothrombin < 1.5 x mean control
    • activated prothrombin times < 1.5 x mean control
    • Fibrinogen > 1.0 g/l.
  • In addition, the Confidential Enquiry into Maternal and Child Health recommends that women with known risk factors for PPH should not be delivered in a hospital without a blood bank on site 1.
  • Transfer to theatre.
  • Non-surgical intervention for uterine atony.
  • Bimanual uterine compression (rubbing up the fundus) to stimulate contractions.
  • Ensure bladder is empty (Foley catheter, leave in place). ‘Rub up ‘the uterus
  • Syntocinon 5 units by slow intravenous injection (may have repeat dose).
  • Ergometrine 0.5 mg by slow iv/im injection (contraindicated in women with hypertension) 16.
  • Syntocinon infusion (40 units over 4 hours).
  • Carboprost 0.25 mg by intramuscular injection repeated at intervals of not less than 15 minutes to a maximum of 8 doses (contraindicated in women with asthma).
  • Direct intramyometrial injection of carboprost 0.5 mg im (Haemobate or Prostaglandin F2a) with responsibility of the administering clinician as it is not recommended for intramyometrial use. Can be repeated up to 5 doses (contraindicated in women with asthma, may cause bronchospasm, flushing & hypertension 17).
  • Misoprostol 1000 micrograms rectally.
  • If pharmacological measures fail to control the haemorrhage, initiate surgical haemostasis sooner than later.

Surgical treatment and other interventions

The most common cause of primary PPH is uterine atony. However, clinical examination must be undertaken to exclude other or additional causes:

  • Retained products (placenta, membranes, clots)
  • Vaginal/cervical lacerations or hematoma
  • Ruptured uterus
  • Broad ligament hematoma
  • Extra genital bleeding (for example, subcapsular liver rupture)
  • Uterine inversion.

Intrauterine balloon tamponade is an appropriate first line ‘surgical’ intervention for most women where uterine atony is the only or main cause of haemorrhage. If this fails to stop the bleeding, the following conservative surgical interventions may be attempted, depending on clinical circumstances and available expertise:                                                                               

  • Balloon tamponade (Bakri/Rusch balloon, Foley’s/condom catheter, Sengstaken-Blakemore tube 18-21
  • Haemostatic brace suturing (such as B-Lynch or modified compression sutures).
  • Bilateral ligation of uterine arteries.
  • Bilateral ligation of internal iliac (hypogastric) arteries.
  • Selective arterial embolisation or balloon occlusion radiologically.
  • Compression/ clamping aorta to buy time.
  • Uterine replacement if uterine inversion

It is recommended that a laminated diagram of the brace technique be kept in theatre. Resort to hysterectomy sooner rather than later (especially in cases of placenta accreta or uterine rupture). A second consultant clinician should be involved in the decision for hysterectomy.

Interventional Radiological techniques

Interventional techniques are gaining popularity if the facilities & expertise exist and are especially useful for the anticipated massive bleeds e.g. planned LSCS in a woman with anticipated placenta accrete. Though evidence of effectiveness is still limited, there are increasing case reports of its successful use. This suggests that prophylactic arterial catherisation (with a view to embolisation) could be considered where facilities permit until such time as further evidence becomes available 22-28.

  • Bilateral internal iliac artery balloons may be placed electively & inflated at C. section/ should bleed occur.
  • Selective pelvic artery (internal iliac arteries, anterior division of internal iliac or uterine artery) embolisation can be performed.
  • Complications appear rarely & include: haematoma, false aneurysms & lower limb ischemia.

Interventional radiology may be considered in cases of placenta praevia with accreta if intra-arterial balloons can be placed in the radiology department before the woman goes to theatre for caesarean section. Follow up studies of women who had undergone arterial embolisation for control of PPH suggest that the intervention does not impair subsequent menstruation and fertility 29, 30.

Intraoperative cell salvage in obstetrics (ICSO)

Cell salvage has now been used in numerous cases of obstetric bleeds and appear safe. Concerns relate to re-infusion of foetal cells which could theoretically cause haemolytic disease in future pregnancies and also the potential for amniotic fluid embolus. If cell salvage techniques are utilised, separate suction of amniotic fluid is recommended and a leukocyte depletion filter used during re-infusion of salvaged blood. Setting up cell salvage measures should not divert staff an attention from initial resuscitation.

Intraoperative cell salvage (the process whereby bloodshed during an operation is collected, filtered and washed to produce autologous red blood cells for transfusion to the patient) is commonly being used in cardiac, orthopaedic and vascular surgery with relative reduction of blood transfusion by 39% and absolute risk reduction by 23%, with cell salvage not appearing to impact adversely on clinical outcomes 31, 32. Although large prospective trials of cell salvage with auto transfusion in obstetrics are lacking, to date, no single serious complication leading to poor maternal outcome has been directly attributed to its use. Several bodies based on current evidence have endorsed cell salvage in obstetrics. Current evidence supports the use of cell salvage in obstetrics, which is likely to become increasingly commonplace, but more data are required concerning its clinical use 33. A National UK survey in 2007 showed that, in 2005–2006, 38% of all UK maternity units were using cell salvage and that 28% incorporated cell salvage into their massive haemorrhage guidelines 34. In particular, this survey showed that a lack of training was the main perceived barrier to its use: 48% of units specifically stated that their reason for not using cell salvage was lack of training and equipment, with fears about safety being expressed by only 10%. However, the potential difficulty is the effective removal of amniotic fluid and the degree of contamination with fetal red cells with potential maternal sensitization, intraoperative cell salvage may be a useful technique in women who refuse blood or blood products (Jehovah’s Witnesses guideline) 9 or those where massive blood loss is anticipated (placenta percreta or accreta). For women who are Rh-negative, to prevent sensitization, the standard dose of anti-D should be given and a Kleihauer test taken 1 hour after cell salvage has finished, to determine whether further anti-D is required 35.

Recombinant activated factor VII (rFVIIa)

Recombinant activated factor VII (rFVIIa) was developed for the treatment of haemophilia. Over the past decade, it has also been used to control bleeding in other circumstances. A 2007 review identified case reports of 65 women treated with rFVIIa for PPH 36.Although the case reports suggested that rFVIIa reduced bleeding, 30 of the 65 women underwent peripartum hysterectomy and particular caution is required in interpreting data from uncontrolled case reports. In the face of life-threatening PPH, and in consultation with a haematologist, rFVIIa may be used as an adjuvant to standard pharmacological and surgical treatments. A suggested dose is 90 micrograms/kg, which may be repeated in the absence of clinical response within 15–30 minutes 37. Although there is no clear evidence of thrombosis with the use of rFVIIa in obstetric practice, there have been case reports of thrombosis with the use in cardiac surgery 38-40. Women with PPH are particularly susceptible to defibrination (severe hypofibrinogenaemia) and this is particularly relevant to the most severe cases that will be considered for rFVIIa; rFVIIa will not work if there is no fibrinogen and effectiveness may also be suboptimal with severe thrombocytopenia (less than 20 x 109/l).Therefore, fibrinogen should be above 1g/l and platelets greater than 20 x 109/l before rFVIIa is given. If there is a suboptimal clinical response to rFVIIa, these should be checked and acted on (with cryoprecipitate, fibrinogen concentrate or platelet transfusion as appropriate) before a second dose is given 36-40.

Anaesthetic management 15:

  • GA with RSI is generally advocated if actively bleeding or coagulopathy.
  • Reduce dose of induction agent if severe on going bleeding.
  • Regional anaesthesia is relative contraindication but may be maintained if the patient has an epidural insitu & bleeding is controlled.
  • Alert Blood bank & haematologist.
  • Consider arterial line, central line and urinary catheter but only after definitive treatment has commenced. Their insertion must not delay resuscitation & fluid management.
  • Use fluid warmer & aim to keep the patient normothermic.
  • Regular monitoring of haemoglobin level and coagulation using near patient devices if available (e.g. Haemacue). FFP, platelets transfusion & cryoprecipitate may be necessary if coagulopathy develops. Liaise early with haematology department for optimal & timely product replacement.
  • Perioperative monitoring as per AAGBI guidelines.
  • Recording of parameters on a flow chart such as the modified obstetric early warning system charts.
  • Consider systemic haemostatic agents such as Aprotonin, Vit K, Tranexemic acid, Recombinant factor VII a (Novo seven R). Although evidence is conflicting, there is a consensus view that fibrinolytic inhibitors seldom, if ever, have a place in the management of obstetric haemorrhage 41, 42.
  • Postoperative management includes transfer to ITU/HDU.
  • Anticipate coagulopathy & treat clinically until coagulation results available.
  • It is also important that, once the bleeding is arrested and any coagulopathy is corrected, thromboprophylaxis is administered, as there is a high risk of thrombosis. Alternatively, pneumatic compression devices can be used, if thromboprophylaxis is contraindicated in cases of thrombocytopenia.

Conclusion

Globally, postpartum haemorrhage (PPH) is the leading cause of maternal morbidity and mortality. Major obstetric haemorrhage is managed by multidisciplinary approach. In the current treatment of severe PPH, first-line therapy includes transfusion of packed cells and fresh-frozen plasma in addition to uterotonic medical management and surgical interventions. In persistent PPH, tranexamic acid, fibrinogen, and coagulation factors are often administered. Secondary coagulopathy due to PPH or its treatment is often underestimated and therefore remains untreated, potentially causing progression to even more severe PPH. The most postnatal haemorrhage is due to uterine atony and can be temporarily controlled with firm bimanual pressure while waiting for definitive treatment.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
RAJASHREE CHAVAN, MBBS, MD, DA, FRCA; Cambridge University Hospital Foundation Trust, UK. M Y LATOO, FRCA(London) Consultant Anaesthetist, Bedford Hospital, UK.
Corresponding Author Details: 
DR RAJASHREE CHAVAN, Cambridge University Hospital Foundation Trust, UK.
Corresponding Author Email: 
vidula77@doctors.net.uk
References
References: 
  1. Confidential Enquiry into Maternal and Child Health. Why Mothers Die 2000–2002. Sixth Report on Confidential Enquiries into Maternal Deaths in the United Kingdom. London: RCOG Press; 2004 [www.cemach.org.uk/Publications/Saving-Mothers-Lives-Report-2000-2002.aspx].
  2. Confidential Enquiry into Maternal and Child Health. Saving Mothers Lives 2003–2005. Seventh Report on Confidential Enquiries into Maternal Deaths in the United Kingdom. London: CEMACH; 2006 [www.cemach.org.uk/getattachment/927cf18a-735a-47a0-9200-cdea103781c7/Saving-Mothers--Lives-2003-2005_full.aspx].
  3. Saving Mothers’ Lives, Reviewing maternal deaths to make motherhood safer: 2006–2008 Volume 118, supplement 1, March 2011, BJOG, Centre for maternal and child enquiries. The Eighth Report of Confidential Enquiries into Maternal Deaths in the UK.
  4. Emedicine.medscape Aug 2011
  5. Glover P. Blood losses at delivery: how accurate is your estimation? Aust J Midwifery 2003; 16:21–4.
  6. Toledo P, McCarthy RJ, Hewlett BJ, Fitzgerald PC, Wong CA.The accuracy of blood loss estimation after simulated vaginal delivery. Anesth Amalga 2007; 105:1736–40.
  7. Mousa HA, Alfirevic Z. Treatment for primary postpartum haemorrhage. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2007 ;(1):CD003249.DOI: 10.1002/14651858.CD003249.pub2.
  8. Alexander J, Thomas PW, Sanghera J.Treatments for secondary postpartum haemorrhage. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2002 ;( 1):CD002867.DOI: 10.1002/14651858.CD002867.
  9. Prevention and management of postpartum haemorrhage, RCOG Green-top Guideline No. 52, March 2011
  10. Prendiville WJP, Elbourne D, McDonald SJ. Active versus expected management in the third stage of labour. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2000 ;(3):CD000007.
  11. Cotter AM, Ness A, Tolosa JE. Prophylactic oxytocin for the third stage of labour. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2001 ;(4):CD001808.
  12. Boucher M, Horbay GL, Griffin P, Deschamps Y, Desjardins C, Shutz M, et al. Double-blind, randomized comparison of the effect of carbetocin and oxytocin on intraoperative blood loss and urine tone of patients undergoing caesarean sections. J Perinatol 1998; 18:202–7.
  13. Dansereau J, JoshiAK, Helewa ME, DoranTA, Lange IR, Luther ER, et al. Double-blind comparison of carbetocin versus oxytocin in prevention of uterine atony after caesarean section. Am J Obstet Gynecol 1999; 180:670–6.
  14. de GrootAN.Prevention of postpartum haemorrhage.BaillieresClin Obstet Gynaecol 1995; 9:619–31.
  15. Anaesthesiology Clin 2008 march 26(1) 53-66
  16. McDonald SJ, Abbott JM, Higgins SP. Prophylactic ergometrineoxytocin versus oxytocin for the third stage of labour. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2004 ;(1):CD000201.
  17. Gulmezoglu AM, Forna F, Villar J, Hofmeyr GJ. Prostaglandins for prevention of postpartum haemorrhage. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2007 ;(3):CD000494.
  18. Ikechebelu JI, Obi RA, Joe-Ikechebelu NN. The control of postpartum haemorrhage with intrauterine Foley catheter. J Obstet Gynecol 2005; 25:70–2.
  19. Bakri YN, Amri A, Abdul Jabbar F. Tamponade-balloon for obstetrical bleeding. Int J Gynaecol Obstet 2001; 74:139–42.
  20. Chan C, Razvi K, Tham KF, Arulkumaran S. The use of a Sengstaken–Blakemore tube to control postpartum haemorrhage. Int J Obstet Gynecol 1997; 58:251–2.
  21. Condous GS, Arulkumaran S, Symonds I, Chapman R, Sinha A, Razvi K. The ‘tamponade test’ in the management of massive postpartum haemorrhage. Obstet Gynecol 2003; 101:767–72.
  22. Levine AB, Kuhlman K, Bonn J. Placenta accreta: comparison of cases managed with and without pelvic artery balloon catheters. J Matern Fetal Med 1999; 8:173–6.
  23. Alvarez M, Lockwood CJ, Ghidini A, Dottino P, Mitty HA, Berkowitz RL. Prophylactic and emergent arterial catheterization for selective embolization in obstetric Hemorrhage.Am J Perinatol 1992; 9:441–4.
  24. Mitty HA, Sterling KM, Alvarez M, Gendler R. Obstetric haemorrhage: prophylactic and emergency arterial catheterization and embolotherapy.Radiology 1993; 188:183–7.
  25. Dubois J, Garel L, Grignon A, Lemay M, Leduc L. Placenta percreta: balloon occlusion and embolization of the internal iliac arteries to reduce intraoperative blood losses. Am J Obstet Gynecol 1997; 176:723–6.
  26. Hansch E, Chitkara U, McAlpine J, El-Sayed Y, Dake MD, Razavi MK. Pelvic arterial embolization for control of obstetric haemorrhage: a five-year experience. Am J Obstet Gynecol 1999; 180:1454–60.
  27. Ojala K, Perala J, Kariniemi J, Ranta P, Raudaskoski T, Tekay A. Arterial embolization and prophylactic catheterization for the treatment for severe obstetric hemorrhage.Acta Obstet Gynecol Scand 2005; 84:1075–80.
  28. Bodner LJ, Nosher JL, Gribbin C, Siegel RL, Beale S, Scorza W. Balloon-assisted occlusion of the internal iliac arteries in patients with placenta accreta/percreta. Cardiovasc Intervent Radiol 2006; 29:354–61.
  29. Salomon LJ, deTayrac R,Castaigne-Meary V,Audibert F,Musset D, Ciorascu R, et al. Fertility and pregnancy outcome following pelvic arterial embolization for severe post-partum haemorrhage. A cohort study. Hum Reprod 2003; 18:849–52.
  30. Descargues G,Mauger Tinlot F,Douvrin F, Clavier E, Lemoine JP, Marpeau L. Menses, fertility and pregnancy after arterial embolization for the control of postpartum haemorrhage. Hum Reprod 2004; 19:339–43.
  31. Carless PA, Henry DA, Moxey AJ, O’Connell DL, Brown T, Fergusson DA. Cell salvage for minimising perioperative allogeneic blood transfusion. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2006; CD001888.
  32. Catling SJ, Williams S, Fielding AM. Cell salvage in obstetrics: an evaluation of the ability of cell salvage combined with leucocyte depletion filtration to remove amniotic fluid from operative blood loss at caesarean section. Int J Obstet Anesth 1999; 8:79–84.
  33. Allam J, Cox M, Yentis SM.Cell salvage in obstetrics. Int J Obstet Anesth 2008; 17:37–45.
  34. Teig M, Harkness M, Catling S, ClarkeV.Survey of cell salvage use in obstetrics in the UK. Poster presentation OAA meeting Sheffield June 2007. Int J Obstet Anesth 2007;16 Suppl 1:30.
  35. National Institute of Clinical Excellence. Intraoperative Blood Cell Salvage in Obstetrics. Intervention Procedure Guidance 144. London: NICE; 2005 [www.nice.org.uk/Guidance/IPG144].
  36. Franchini M, Lippi G, Franchi M. The use of recombinant activated factor VII in obstetric and gynaecological haemorrhage.BJOG 2007; 114:8–15.
  37. Sobieszczyk S, Breborowicz GH.Management recommendations for postpartum haemorrhage. Arch Perinat Med 2004; 10:1–4.
  38. Birchall J, Stanworth S, Duffy M, Doree C, Hyde C. Evidence for the use of recombinant factor VIIa in the prevention and treatment of bleeding in patients without haemophilia.Transfus Med Rev 2008; 22:177–87.
  39. Haynes J, Laffan M, Plaat F. Use of recombinant activated factor VII in massive obstetric haemorrhage. Int J Obstet Anesth 2007; 16:40–9.
  40. Franchini M, Franchi M, Bergamini V, Salvagno GL, Montagnana M, Lippi G.A critical review on the use of recombinant factor VIIa in life-threatening obstetric postpartumhemorrhage. Semin Thromb Hemost 2008; 34:104–12.
  41. Stainsby D, MacLennan S, Thomas D, Isaac J, Hamilton PJ. Guidelines on the management of massive blood loss. Br J Haematol 2006; 135:634–41.
  42. Walker ID, Walker JJ, Colvin BT, Letsky EA, Rivers R, Stevens R. Investigation and management of haemorrhagic disorders in pregnancy. J Clin Pathol 1994; 47:100–8.

Often overlooked neuropsychiatric syndromes in Parkinson’s disease

Authors
Javed Latoo, Minal Mistry, and Francis J Dunne
Article Citation and PDF Link
BJMP 2013;6(1):a603
Abstract / Summary
Abstract: 

Parkinson’s disease (PD) is a subcortical disorder that eventually spreads to the cortex. There is a wide variation in the global incidence and prevalence of PD. The disease usually presents in patients over the age of 65, although 5% of cases are under the age of 40 at the time of diagnosis. PD has a high prevalence of psychiatric co-morbidity. In this article, written with general neurologists and psychiatrists  in mind,  the main features and pathology of PD will be briefly outlined followed by a review of the epidemiology, aetiology, clinical features, and treatment of other often overlooked neuropsychiatric syndromes associated with PD. Close liaison between neurologists and psychiatrists is recommended in order to optimize treatment.

Introduction

The global epidemiology of PD varies widely which could be partly accounted for by differences in survival rates.1 One review paper examined the epidemiology of PD in Austria, the Czech Republic, France, Germany, Italy, The Netherlands, Portugal, Spain, Sweden and United Kingdom. It revealed that the prevalence rates range from 65.6 per 100,000 to 12,500 per 100,000 and annual incidence estimates ranged from 5 per 100,000 to 346 per 100,000.2 The wide variation in incidence and prevalence rates of PD across Europe could be due to environmental and genetic factors. Differences in methodologies for case ascertainment, diagnostic criteria, or age distributions of the study populations, could also account for the wide variations.2

Described by James Parkinson in 1817, PD is the second most common neurodegenerative disorder next to Alzheimer’s dementia. Depletion of dopaminergic neurones in the substantia nigra is the main pathology found in PD. Symptoms usually appear when dopamine levels are reduced by 50-80%.3 Noradrenergic, cholinergic and serotonergic pathways are also affected. Clinically PD is characterised by rigidity, tremor (cogwheel, lead pipe, and resting), akinesia, bradykinesia (poverty and slowness of movement), and postural instability (leading to frequent falls).4 These symptoms may also be accompanied by a range of non-motor symptoms other than well-known neuropsychiatric syndromes of depression, psychosis, and cognitive impairment.

In essence, a syndrome is a combination of signs and symptoms related to an underlying pathological process. PD may present with neuropsychiatric syndromes of depression, psychosis (usually affective in origin) and cognitive impairment.5 These syndromes are not under discussion here as readers are likely to be familiar with them. However, PD may also present with other neuropsychiatric syndromes and for the purpose of this article we have classified them into: 1) Anxiety disorders, 2) Apathy, 3) Involuntary emotional expression disorder, 4) Sleep disorders, and 5) Impulse control disorders.

Drugs used to treat PD themselves are associated with neuropsychiatric side effects. For example, dopamine agonists are well-known to cause sleep disturbance, dizziness (usually due to postural hypotension), hallucinations, hypersexuality, and compulsive gambling. Anticholinergics may cause confusion, hallucinations and impaired memory. Surgery also may cause adverse effects including depression, confusion and cognitive impairment.6 Table 1 illustrates the groups of drugs used in PD.

Table 1. Drugs used in Parkinson’s Disease
Group Drug
Dopamine receptor agonists Apomorphine, pramipexole, ropinirole, rotigotine
N-Methyl-D-aspartate (NMDA) receptor antagonist Amantadine hydrochloride
Levodopa Co-benedopa (levodopa/benzeraside), co-careldopa (levodopa/carbidopa)
Monoamine oxidase B inhibitors (MAO-B) Rasagiline, selegiline hydrochloride
Catechol-O-methyltransferase (COMT) inhibitors Entacapone, tolcapone
Antimuscarinic drugs Benztropine mesylate, orphenadrine, procyclidine, trihexyphenidyl

Overlooked neuropsychiatric syndromes in Parkinson’s disease

The prevalence of overlooked neuropsychiatric syndromes found in PD, summarised in Table 2, is generally less common than PD syndromes of depression (up to 50%),psychosis (up to 60%) and dementia (ultimately develops in 80%).7, 8, 9

Table 2. Overlooked neuropsychiatric syndromes found in Parkinson’s Disease.
Neuropsychiatric syndrome Prevalence
Anxiety disorders Up to 40%
Apathy 16-42%
Involuntary emotional expression disorder Up to 16.8%
Sleep disorders 60-98%
Impulse control disorders Up to 13.6%

Anxiety Disorders

Epidemiology

There is a wide range in the reporting of the prevalence of anxiety in patients with PD. Anxiety is significantly more prevalent in PD sufferers compared with age and sex matched non-sufferers. Prevalence is quite high with estimates indicating that up to 40% of PD patients suffer significant anxiety.10 However, clinicians’ recognition and awareness of anxiety in PD need to be raised because it is likely to be under-diagnosed and untreated.11, 12 Consequently the prevalence of anxiety may be even higher. Severity of anxiety is not correlated with severity of parkinsonian symptoms, duration of levodopa use, or current dose of levodopa.

Aetiology and risk factors

Anxiety is an understandable psychological response to the physical symptoms, to the neurochemical changes of the disease itself, or as a side effect of the various medications used to treat the condition.10 Sleep disturbances and cognitive impairment have been proposed as possible aetiological factors for anxiety in PD.11, 12 Depression in PD may manifest in two clinical phenotypes, one ‘anxious-depressed’ and the other ‘depressed’. However, a further large proportion of patients can have relatively isolated anxiety.13

Anxiety frequently precedes the development of motor symptoms, suggesting specific neurobiological processes are involved, not merely social and psychological reactions in learning to adapt to PD.14

Patients with postural instability and gait dysfunction have a higher incidence of anxiety compared with tremor-dominant patients. Younger-onset PD patients are also more likely to experience anxiety. The pathogenesis of anxiety involves noradrenergic, serotonin and dopamine neurotransmitters. GABAergic pathways may also be involved.14 Right hemisphere disturbances have also been implicated, particularly with panic disorder.Symptom variation in PD may be due to medication, as well as motor fluctuations.11 One study revealed that although the dose of levodopa was not associated with anxiety, the experience of dyskinesia or on-off fluctuations increased the risk of anxiety.12, 14, 15

Presentation and diagnosis

The commonest disorders found in PD are generalised anxiety, panic disorder, and social phobia. Anxiety contributes to the complexity of PD and lowers quality of life. 14, 15 The degree of comorbidity between anxiety and depression in PD patients is in excess of that found in patients without PD. While anxiety is significantly associated with depression, some patients show anxiety without depression.10

The main features of anxiety are inappropriate feelings of apprehension as well as mood, cognitive, and somatic changes. Some symptoms may be common to PD, such as autonomic symptoms, fatigue, muscle tension, insomnia and attention problems. Psychologically, anxiety in PD is understandable because being diagnosed with a chronic disease with no known cure and an inexorable course, would be difficult for anyone to contemplate. Motor signs and changes in appearance could explain social anxiety. However, the frequency of anxiety in PD seems to be higher than in other chronic diseases and unrelated to the severity of motor signs. Even in social phobia the phobic symptoms do not correlate with disease severity and are not restricted to performance situations. Furthermore, anxiety can precede motor signs by several years, suggesting that the neurobiological substrate of PD is responsible for anxiety at least in part.

Treatment

Treatment comprises the use of selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) such as sertraline, fluoxetine and citalopram as well as other newer antidepressants - serotonin and noradrenaline reuptake inhibitor (SNRIs) for example, venlafaxine, cognitive behavioural therapy (CBT), exercise, the occasional use of atypical neuroleptics, and benzodiazepines.14 However, benzodiazepines have a tendency to cause sedation, unsteadiness of gait, and even confusion. Antidepressants are useful because they treat both anxiety and depression that often overlap: depression coexists with anxiety in 14% of cases.15 Low dose tricyclic antidepressants with minimal anticholinergic effects may be useful in those patients who do not respond to benzodiazepines.

Apathy

Epidemiology

Apathy, a state of lethargic indifference and loss of motivation, and fatigue are prominent non-motor symptom in PD with a prevalence of between 16-42%.16, 17 Fatigue is a sense of tiredness or exhaustion, due to mental or physical causes. Apathy and fatigue are important because they have significant repercussions for the quality of life in PD.18, 19 Apathy can exist without depression but, by definition, patients themselves do not complain of apathy, though are found to be unmotivated to engage in activities. Apathy and fatigue are often difficult to distinguish from low mood and daytime sleepiness, both of which are common to depression.

A four-year prospective longitudinal study of 79 patients found that 13.9% of those with PD had persistent apathy and 49.4% had developed apathy at follow up. The study showed apathy to be a frequent and persistent behavioural feature in PD with a high incidence and prevalence over time, and associated with neurotransmitter deficits.20

Aetiology and risk factors

The dorsolateral, medial and orbital frontal cortices, as well as subcortical structures such as the basal ganglia, thalamus and internal capsule are implicated in the pathogenesis of apathy.The independent risk factors for apathy are dementia at baseline, a more rapid decline in speech, and axial impairment (e.g. poor ability to turn in bed) during follow up.20, 21 A more recent study showed that male gender, higher depressive scores, and severe motor symptoms, were significantly associated with apathy, but not with greater cognitive impairment.22 It has been observed that deep brain stimulation (DBS) may contribute to the development of apathy23 but other studies show conflicting results.24

Presentation and diagnosis

There is a higher incidence of depression and dementia in PD patients with apathy.Therefore differential diagnosis between apathy and cognitive deficits and depression is essential because the therapeutic approaches are different.19, 20 It is equally important to differentiate between apathy and depression that are different clinical entitiesalthough both may coexist.The crucial difference is that people with apathy lack serious self-reproach or feelings of guilt. 21, 25 The Lille Apathy Rating Scale (LARS), administered as a structured interview, can be a useful tool to distinguish them both26 though further research is needed to differentiate the neurological and neurochemical basis for depression and apathy.

Treatment

Treatment options for apathy are limited. The use of methylphenidate, a stimulant drug related to amphetamine, has been suggested but evidence is scarce and side effects may outweigh its clinical benefit.27 Methylphenidate has been described as effective for both apathy and fatigue28 but more studies are necessary. Antidepressants are not effective, can cause unnecessary side effects and can even aggravate apathy, demonstrating that these syndromes are really independent.29 The association between cognition and apathy, along with the potential benefit of cholinesterase inhibitors on both cognition and apathy, suggests that cholinergic mechanisms take part in the pathophysiology of apathy.30, 31 ’Off-time’ refers to periods of the day when the medication is not working well, causing worsening symptoms of fatigue and apathy. ‘Wearing-off’ episodes may occur predictably and gradually, or they may emerge suddenly and unexpectedly. Wearing-off periods may be improved with appropriate changes in the medication regimen. This would mean optimizing dopaminergic agents or using a long-acting levodopa or a catechol-O-methyltransferase (COMT) inhibitor. Wearing off may be also better controlled by shortening the time between medication doses. In a study of 23 PD patients in both the 'on' and 'off' states compared to 28 controls, L-dopa had a positive effect on motivation suggesting striatofrontal loops are involved.32

Involuntary emotional expression disorder

Epidemiology

Involuntary emotional expression disorder (IEED) has been found to occur in 16.8% of PD patients, and in 15.3% if comorbid depressive disorder was excluded.33 However, other studies suggest that the symptoms of IEED are present in up 15% of PD patients but the actual IEED disorder occurs in half of these cases.34 This implies that IEED symptoms occur in PD but the condition of IEED is not present although this may depend on the criteria used for the diagnosis. If IEED does develop in PD it is particularly common in the later stages of PD and is likely to be distinct from depressive disorderwhich remains an important differential diagnosis.33, 35

Aetiology and risk factors

IEED can occur in neurological conditions such as stroke, traumatic brain injury, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, multiple sclerosis, seizure disorders, multiple system atrophy, corticobasal degeneration, and Alzheimer’s disease.35 Injury to the neurological pathways that control the expression of emotion have been implicated in its pathogenesis. Emotional expression involves various pathways within the frontal lobe, limbic system, brainstem and cerebellum, with disruption of regulatory and inhibitory mechanisms in this network implicated.36, 37

Presentation and diagnosis

IEED is described as sudden episodes of laughing or crying that may be spontaneous or disproportionate to the triggering stimuli.The emotional outbursts of IEED may involve laughter, crying or anger. The episodes all share common features in that they are involuntary, uncontrollable, and excessive, not sustained, and usually last from seconds to minutes. Outbursts are often stereotyped though single individuals may have episodes of both laughing and crying.IEED is also known as pseudobulbar affect, pathological laughter and crying, emotional lability, emotionalism, and emotional dysregulation.Despite the various terms used to describe the disorder, IEED is often missed and even sometimes mistaken for depression.33, 35 Symptoms of IEED are important because they are associated with an impairment of social and occupational functioning.38 It is hypothesized that neurological disease and injuries affect the excitatory action of glutamate, leading to excessive glutaminergic signalling and increased electrical activity in neurons. As glutamate is the primary excitatory neurotransmitter of the central nervous system, stabilizing or reducing glutaminergic activity could prove useful in the treatment of IEED.39

Treatment

Medication options include the use of SSRIs, tricyclic antidepressants (TCAs) for example, amitriptyline, and less frequently dopaminergic agents.A combination of dextromethorphan and quinidine has also been suggested. 35 38

Sleep disorders

Epidemiology

Sleep disorders have been known to affect 60-98% of patients with PD.40

Aetiology and risk factors

The aetiology of sleep disorders includes PD itself or other comorbid conditions such as depression, and cognitive impairment.41 Nocturnal pain from rigidity or dystonia, restless legs syndrome, and autonomic disturbance leading to nocturnal frequency and urgency, also contribute to insomnia. Degeneration of sleep regulatory centres in the brainstem and thalamocortical pathways, side effects of drugs, motor impairment, and incontinence may affect sleep. Sleep disorders may precede the onset of motor symptoms. Rapid Eye Movement (REM) sleep behaviour disorder (RBD), which occurs in almost a third of PD patients,is often associated with cognitive impairment and hallucinations. This disorder is directly related to the degenerative process of the pedunculopontine nucleus, the locus subceruleus and the retrorubral nucleus. A sudden onset of the disorder is almost always due to the introduction or the withdrawal of drugs, especially antidepressants. Curiously, parkinsonism can disappear during the RBD.42

Sleep fragmentation is the earliest and most common sleep disorder in PD, and gradually worsens as the disease progresses. Vivid dreaming, nightmares and night terrors are common and occur in up to 30% of patients using levodopa for long periods. Dream content is probably altered in PD and many patients vocalize during sleep. Vocalization may vary from incomprehensible sounds to detailed conversations, laughing, cursing or screaming. Excessive daytime sleepiness and 'sleep attacks' affect half of patients with PD and may precede disease onset. The causes are a combination of the disease process, the consequence of other sleep disorders and medication. A sudden onset of sleep during the day is a phenomenon in PD which resembles narcolepsy, and it is commonly associated with dopaminergic drugs. PD patients may be more prone to restless legs syndrome, periodic limb movements and obstructive sleep apnoea.

Sleep disorders in PD are seldom diagnosed and treated. Although an accurate diagnosis of a particular sleep disorder depends on polysomnography, sometimes the diagnosis can be based on clinical observation. Treatment is based on the correct diagnosis and underlying cause of the sleep disorder. Often it is difficult to decide whether excessive daytime sleepiness is cause or consequence of insomnia.43

Presentation and diagnosis

Sleep disorders may manifest as insomnia, excessive daytime sleepiness and sleepwalking.44, 45 Sudden attacks of sleepiness are known to occur during stimulating activities such as walking, eating, and even driving a car. These sudden sleep episodes can be associated with medication such as dopamine agonists and levodopa.46

RBD is characterised by the loss of the normal atonia during dreaming. In other words, patients act out their dreams as manifested by crying out, kicking or thrashing about during their sleep. RBD can predate the development of motor symptoms by several years and a longitudinal study of a cohort of 26 patients found an association between RBD and the later development of PD. 47

Treatment

Management involves the review of medication that may be contributing to the sleep disorder. Treatment of comorbid conditions such as depression and cognitive impairment is essential.

Sleep hygiene is the initial and basic measure applied to all patients. For instance, stimulating patients during the day can decrease the excessive naps and improve sleep at night, thus improving daytime sleepiness. Additional techniques include going to bed only when sleepy, exposure to natural and bright light during day, reduction of light and noise exposure at night as much as possible, and maintenance of a regular schedule.

Long-acting dopaminergic drugs might improve insomnia caused by worsening of motor symptoms at night. Clonazepam, a benzodiazepine, is efficacious and well tolerated by the majority of patients afflicted by RBD and should be considered as initial treatment.48 Antidepressants with a sedative effect might be helpful in cases of insomnia with comorbid depression or anxiety. Quetiapine, an antipsychotic which has sedative properties as a side effect, may be a safe and effective treatment for insomnia in PD because it has no untoward effects on motor function.49 Small clinical trials with Modafinil for excessive daytime sleepiness had controversial results. An additional remark concerning treatment of sleep disorder in PD is that sleep may provide a short-term benefit on motor symptoms.28, 43

Impulse control disorders

Epidemiology

A large multi-centre investigation (the DOMINION study) of 3,090 patients with PD revealed that impulse control disorder (ICD) was identified in 13.6% of PD patients; specifically, pathological gambling in 5%, compulsive sexual behaviour in 3.5%, compulsive buying in 5.7% and binge-eating disorder in 4.3%.50 The prevalence of ICD rises to 14% for patients taking dopamine agonists, compared with 0.7% for patients taking levodopa alone.51 It is not clear whether these ICD symptoms reflect a primary pathology of PD or whether dopaminergic medication is interacting with an underlying predisposition or vulnerability.52 Possible neurobiological explanation centres around dopamine-receptor binding profiles. Dopamine D2 and D1 receptors, abundant in the dorsal striatum, may mediate the motor effects of dopamine replacement therapies, whereas D3 receptors are abundant in the ventral striatum, a brain region associated with addictive behaviour and substance misuse disorders. Second generation non-ergot dopamine agonists (e.g. pramipexole and ropinirole) demonstrate relative selectivity for D3 receptors compared with D2 and D1 receptors.50

Aetiology and risk factors

Addiction to dopaminergic medication used in the treatment of PD may explain behaviours such as drug-seeking, gambling, and hypersexuality. The risk of pathological gambling increases if dopamine agonists are used in those with younger age of onset, higher novelty seeking traits, and a personal and family history of alcohol misuse.53

Presentation and diagnosis

In addition to the above PD patients with ICD may present with compulsive shopping, compulsive eating, and compulsive medication use, all of which can have potentially devastating psychosocial consequences because they are often hidden. Complex stereotyped repetitive behaviours (punding) may also be present.54Punding behaviour is stereotyped and purposeless and includes hoarding, shuffling papers, sorting labels, assembling and disassembling objects, to name a few.

Treatment

Stopping dopaminergic medication should be considered in the first instance. Further treatment options are limited but one double-blind crossover study demonstrated the use of amantadine in abolishing or reducing pathological gambling.55 In addition, one case report suggested the antipsychotic quetiapine to be effective in treating pathological gambling.56 Whether other treatments, such as DBS, are effective for these compulsive repetitive behaviours, remains to be seen.

Management of overlooked neuropsychiatric syndromes in PD

Because of the significant disability and impact on quality of life caused by overlooked neuropsychiatric symptoms in PD, it is important for neurologists and psychiatrists to recognise them and develop their clinical skills in order to be aware of their significance. Early detection is crucial. We have shown there is a limited range of treatment strategies available to guide the clinician in treatment choices. Because neuropsychiatric diagnoses in PD are different in phenomenology it is important to remember that treatment with 'psychiatric' drugs will often be insufficient and therefore more consideration should be given to 'antiparkinsonian' medications because the underlying pathology of PD is causing the various syndromes mentioned.

Table 3 provides an overview of the medical treatment of overlooked neuropsychiatric syndromes in PD, although it should be noted that overall very few studies document the effectiveness of the solutions proposed and more controlled studies are needed. Nonetheless, the reader should find the following useful.

Table 3. Summary of the medical treatment of overlooked neuropsychiatric syndromes in Parkinson’s Disease.
Psychiatric syndrome Treatment
Anxiety - Antidepressants - sertraline, citalopram, fluoxetine, venlafaxine- Others - antipsychotics, benzodiazepines
- Cognitive Behavioural Therapy
- Exercise
Apathy (diminished motivation) - Cholinesterase inhibitors
- Dopamine agonists
- Possible use of methylphenidate
Involuntary emotional expressive disorder - Antidepressants
- Dopaminergic agents.
- Possible combination of dextromethorphan and quinidine
Sleep disorders - Benzodiazepine - clonazepam
- Antipsychotic (sedating) – quetiapine
- Sleep hygiene
Impulse control disorders - Possible use of amantadine or quetiapine in pathological gambling
- Further research required

Conclusion and implications

The management of PD is often complicated because of the diverse factors underlying its aetiology. Dopaminergic, serotonergic, noradrenergic and cholinergic pathways are involved.57 Clinicians are generally competent in recognising the more common disorders such as depression, psychosis and cognitive impairment associated with PD though there is a tendency to focus too much on these at the expense of other nonmotor symptoms. Anxiety, apathy, involuntary emotional expression disorder, sleep disorders, and impulse control disorders cause significant disability and impact heavily on patients and carers.

Before introducing treatment for psychiatric complications it is essential to exclude causes such as antiparkinson’s medication, DBS (implicated in apathy), and underlying medical conditions. Once excluded or treated, subsequent management includes psychotropic pharmacotherapy but there are limited options. With no specific drug designed to treat the overlooked conditions, a wide range of medications (e.g. antidepressants, antipsychotics, benzodiazepines, dopaminergic agents, and psychostimulants) are available to manage the symptoms.

Neurologists and psychiatrists need to work together to manage these syndromes and they must be innovative in setting up joint research ventures into developing treatment options. Simple questionnaires may alert physicians when presenting symptoms are abstruse because many of the nonmotor symptoms predate the motor symptoms58 (the presymptomatic phase of stages 1-2 of Braak's classification system).59 60 For example, anosmia, constipation and other autonomic symptoms are not considered neuropsychiatric syndromes per se, but are some of the nonmotor problems associated with PD and may give clues that PD is developing.

Despite research highlighting the presence of these disorders in PD, they generally go unrecognised by clinicians, being less common, and therefore psychiatrists in old age and adult psychiatry as well as general neurologists may lack skills to recognise them. Besides, there are no clear treatment guidelines on how to manage the conditions.

Acknowledgements / Conflicts / Author Details
Competing Interests: 
None declared
Details of Authors: 
JAVED LATOO, Consultant Psychiatrist, 5 Boroughs Partnership NHS Foundation Trust, Hollins Lane, Warrington WA2 8WA, UK. MINAL MISTRY, Consultant Psychiatrist, Southern Health NHS Foundation Trust, Hampshire, UK. FRANCIS J DUNNE, Consultant Psychiatrist and Honorary Senior Lecturer, North East London Foundation Trust (NELFT) United Kingdom, & University College London.
Corresponding Author Details: 
JAVED LATOO, Consultant Psychiatrist, 5 Boroughs Partnership NHS Foundation Trust, Hollins Lane, Warrington WA2 8WA, UK.
Corresponding Author Email: 
javedlatoo@gmail.com
References
References: 
  1. Muangpaisan W, Mathews A, Hori H, et al. A systematic review of the worldwide prevalence and incidence of Parkinson's disease. J Med Assoc Thai 2011; 94(6):749-755.
  2. von Campenhausen S, Bornschein B, Wick R et al. Prevalence and incidence of Parkinson's disease in Europe. Eur Neuropsychopharmacol 2005; 15(4):473-490.
  3. Mitchel AJ. Neuropsychiatry and behavioural neurology explained. London: Saunders. 2004: 148-149.
  4. Lees AJ, Hardy J, and Revesz T. Parkinson's disease. Lancet 2009; 373(9680):2055-2066.
  5. Jankovic J. Parkinson’s disease: clincal features and diagnosis. J Neurol Neurosurg Psychiatry 2008; 79 (4):368-376.
  6. Burn DJ and Troster AI.  Neuropsychiatric complications of medical and surgical therapies for Parkinson's disease. J Geriatr Psychiatry Neurol 2004; 17:172-180.
  7. McDonald WM, Richard IH, and Mahlon RD. Prevalence, aetiology and treatment of depression in Parkinson’s disease. Biol Psychiat 2003; 54:363-375.
  8. Forsaa EB, Larsen JP, Wentzel-Larsen T et al. A 12-year population-based study of psychosis in Parkinson Disease. Arch Neurol 2010; 67:996-1001.
  9. Aarsland D, Andersen K, Larsen JP et al. The rate of cognitive decline in Parkinson disease. Arch Neurol 2004; 61:1906-1911.
  10. Walsh K and Bennett G. Parkinson’s disease and anxiety. Postgrad Med J 2001; 77:89-93. 
  11. Pontone GM, Williams JR, Anderson KE et al. Prevalence of anxiety disorders and subtypes in patients with Parkinson’s disease. Mov Disord 2009; 24:1333-1338. 
  12. Chigas MHN, Tumas V, Loureiro SR et al. Does the association between anxiety and Parkinson’s disease really exist? A literature review. Curr Psychiatry Rev 2009; 5:29-36.
  13. Brown RG, Landau S, Hindle JV et al. Depression and anxiety related subtypes in Parkinson's disease. J Neurol Neurosurg Psychiatry 2011; 82:803-809.
  14. Richard IH. Anxiety disorders in Parkinson’s disease. Adv Neurol 2005; 96:42-55.
  15. Dissanayaka NNW, Sellbach A, Matheson S et al. Anxiety disorders in Parkinson’s disease: prevalence and risk factors. Mov Disord 2010; 25:838-845.
  16. K Dujardin, Sockeel P, Devos D et al. Characteristics of apathy in Parkinson’s disease, Mov Disord 2007; 22:778-784.
  17. Pedersen KF, Larsen JP, Alves G et al. Prevalence and clinical correlates of apathy in Parkinson’s disease: a community-based study. Parkinsonism Relat Disorder 2009; 15 (4): 295-9.
  18. Bottini BA, Etcheverry JL, Persi GG et al. Apathy in Parkinson’s disease. Impairment in quality of life. Medicinia 2009; 69:253-258.
  19. Garcia-Ramos R, Villanueva C, del Val  J et al., Apathy in Parkinson’s disease, Neurologia 2010; 25:40-50.
  20. Pedersen KF, Alves G, Aarsland D et al. Occurrence and risk factors for apathy in Parkinson disease: a 4-year prospective longitudinal study. J Neurol Neurosurg Psychiatry 2009; 80:1279-1282.
  21. Mimura M. Depression and apathy in Parkinson’s disease. Brain Nerve 2007; 59:935-942.
  22. Pedersen KF, Alves G, Bronnick K et al. Apathy in drug-naïve patients with incident Parkinson’s disease: the Norwegian Park West study. J Neurol 2010; 257:217-223.
  23. Drapier D, Drapier S, Sauleau P et al. Does the subthalamic nucleus stimulation induce apathy in Parkinson’s disease. J Neurol 2006; 253:1083-1091.
  24. Czernecki V, Pillon B, Houeto JL et al. Does the bilateral stimulation of the subthalamic nucleus aggravate apathy in Parkinson’s disease. J Neurol Neurosurg Psychiatry 2005; 76:775-779. 
  25. Oguru M, Tachibana H, Toda K et al. Apathy and depression in Parkinson’s disease. J Geriatric Psychiatry Neurol 2010; 23:35-41.
  26. Sockeel P, Dujardin K, Devos D et al. The Lille apathy rating scale (LARS), a new instrument for detecting and quantifying apathy: validation in Parkinson’s disease. J Neurol Neurosurg Psychiatry 2006; 77(5):579-584.
  27. Chattterjee A and Fahn S. Methylphenidate treats apathy in Parkinson’s Disease. J Neuropsychiatry Clin Neurosci 2002; 14:461-462.
  28. Kummer A and Teixiera AL. Neuropsychiatry of Parkinson's disease. Arch Neuropsychiatr 2009; 67:930-939.
  29. Mendonca DA, Menezes K, Jog MS. Methylphenidate improves fatigue scores in Parkinson disease: a randomized controlled trial. Mov Disord 2007; 22:2070-2076. 
  30. Guimaraes HC, Levy R, Teixeira AL et al. Neurobiology of apathy in Alzheimer's disease. Arch Neuropsychiatr 2008; 66:436-443
  31. Dujardin K, Sockeel P, Devos D, et al. Characteristics of apathy in Parkinson's disease. Mov Disord 2007; 22:778-784.        
  32. Czernecki V, Pillon B, Houeto JL et al. Motivation, reward, and Parkinson’s disease: Influence of dopatherapy. Neuropsychologia 2002; 40:2257-2267.
  33. Petracca GM, Jorge RE, Ación L et al. Frequency and correlates of involuntary emotional expression disorder. J Neuropsychiatry Clin Neurosci 2009 ; 21:406-412.
  34. Phuong L, Garg S, Duda JE et al. Involuntary emotional expression disorder (IEED) in Parkinson’s disease. Parkinsonism Relat Disord 2009; 15:511-515.
  35. Sartori HCS, Barros T, and Tarvares A, Involuntary emotional expression disorder. Revisita de Psiquiatria Clinica 2008; 35:20-25.
  36. Presecki P and Mimica N. Involuntary emotional expression disorder - new/old disease in psychiatry and neurology. Psychiatria Danubina 2007; 19:184-188.
  37. Rabins PV, and Arciniegas DB. Pathophysiology of involuntary emotional expression disorder. CNS Spectr 2007; 12:17-22.
  38. Brooks BR. Involuntary emotional expression disorder: treating the untreated, CNS Spectr. 2007; vol. 12, supplement 5, pp. 23-27.
  39. Johnson KA, Conn PJ, Niswender CM. Glutamate receptors as therapeutic targets for Parkinson's disease. CNS Neurol Disord Drug Targets 2009; 8:475-491.
  40. Adler CH and Thorpy MJ. Sleep issues in Parkinson’s disease. Neurology 2005; 64:12-20.
  41. Ferreri F, Agbokou C, and Gauthier S. Recognition and management of neuropsychiatric complications in Parkinson’s disease. CMAJ 2006; 175:1545-1552.
  42. Dhawan V, Healy DG, Pal S, et al. Sleep-related problems of Parkinson's disease. Age Ageing 2006; 35:220-228.
  43. Bonnet AM, Jutras MF, Czernecki V et al. Nonmotor symptoms in Parkinson's disease in 2012: relevant clinical aspects. Published online 2012 July 25. doi:  10.1155/2012/198316
  44. Gjerstad MD, Alves G, Wentzel-Larsen T et al. Excessive daytime sleepiness in Parkinson’s disease: is it the drugs or the disease? Neurology 2006; 67:853-858.
  45. Poryazova R, Waldvogel D, and Bassetti CL. Sleepwalking in patients with Parkinson’s disease, Arch Neurol 2007; 64(10):1524-1527.
  46. Arnulf I. Excessive daytime sleepiness in parkinsonism. Sleep Med Rev 2005; 9:185-200.
  47. Postuma RB, Gagnon JF, Rompre S et al. Severity of REM atonia loss in idiopathic REM sleep behaviour disorder predicts Parkinson disease. Neurology 2010; 74:239-244.
  48. Gagnon JF, Postuma RB, Montplaisir J. Update on the pharmacology of REM sleep behaviour disorder. Neurology 2006; 67:742-747.
  49. Juri C, Chana P, Tapia J et al. Quetiapine for insomnia in Parkinson disease: results from an open-label trial. Clin Neuropharmacol 2005; 28:185-187.
  50. Weintraub D, Koester J, Potenza MN et al. Impulse control disorders in Parkinson disease: A cross-sectional study of 3,090 patients. Arch Neurol 2010; 67(5):589-595.
  51. Voon V, Hassan K, Zurowski M et al. Prospective prevalence of pathological gambling and medication association in Parkinson disease. Neurology 2006; 66:1750-1752.
  52. Voon V and Fox SH. Medication-related impulse control and repetitive behaviours in Parkinson’s disease. Arch Neurol 2007; 64:1089-1096.
  53. Voon V, Thomsen T, Miyasaki JM et al. Factors associated with dopaminergic drug-related pathological gambling in Parkinson’s disease. Arch Neurol 2007; 64:212-216.
  54. Merims D, Giladi N. Dopamine dysregulation syndrome, addiction and behavioural changes in Parkinson’s disease. Parkinsonism Relat Disord 2008; 14:273-280.
  55. Thomas A, Bonanni L, Gambi F. Pathological gambling in Parkinson disease is reduced by amantadine. Ann Neurol 2010; 68:400-404.
  56. Sevincok L, Akoglu A, Akyol A. Quetiapine in a case with Parkinson disease and pathological gambling. J Clin Psychopharmacol 2007; 27: 107-108.
  57. Bohnen NI and Albin RL. Cholinergic denervation occurs early in Parkinson disease.  Neurology 2009; 73: 256-257.
  58. Chaudhuri KR, Martinez-Martin, Schapira AHV et al. An international multicentre pilot study of the first comprehensive self-completed non motor symptoms questionnaire for Parkinson's disease: The NMSQuest study. Mov Disord 2006; 21: 916-923.
  59. Braak H. Stages in the development of Parkinson's disease-related pathology. Cell Tissue Res 2004; 318:121-134.
  60. Poewe W. Non-motor symptoms in Parkinson's disease. Eur J Neurol 2008; 15:14-20.  

share
Syndicate content